8DG61688EAAATQZZA - V1 - Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32 16 (PSS-32 PSS-16) Release 5.1.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (1830 PSS-32/PSS-16) | Release 5.1.0
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide
8DG-61688-EAAA-TQZZA
Issue 1 | August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that this information product was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited Warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to ““How to order” (p. xl)” in the section titled ““About this document”.”
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Contents
About this document

Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv
xxxv
Reason for reissue .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxv

xxxv
Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

xxxv
How to use this document ................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

xxxv
Safety information .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxv

xxxv
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A ........................................................................... xxxvi
Packaging collection and recovery requirements ...................................................................................................... xxxvi
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product and batteries ........................................................................................... xxxvi
Conventions used ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvii

xxxvii
Related information ........................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

xxxviii
Document support ........................................................................................................................................................................ xl

xl
Technical support .......................................................................................................................................................................... xl

xl
How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................... xl

xl
How to comment ........................................................................................................................................................................... xl

xl
Part I: Safety information
1 Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
General notes on safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-4
Basic safety aspects .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
8DG-61688-EAAA-TQZZA R5.1 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specific safety areas
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1-11
Potential sources of danger ................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

1-12
Laser safety ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

1-13
Laser product classification ................................................................................................................................................ 1-18

1-18
Equipment grounding ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

1-23
Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24

1-24
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29

1-29
Transportation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30

1-30
Storage ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-33

1-33
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-37

1-37
Taking into operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-43

1-43
Operation and maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 1-47

1-47
Taking out of operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-58

1-58
Event of failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-61

1-61
Part II: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation
2 Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Installation options/requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2

2-2
Subrack and Flex shelf installation in an EIA bay frame ........................................................................................... 2-4
2-4
SFD,................................................................................................................................................................................................
fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an EIA bay frame with or without flex shelf 2-22 2-22
Subrack and flex shelf Installation in an ANSI bay frame ...................................................................................... 2-31
2-31
SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an ANSI bay frame with or without flex
shelf ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-50
2-50
Subrack and equipment installation in an ETSI rack ................................................................................................ 2-63

2-63
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Use pursuant to applicable agreements 8DG-61688-EAAA-TQZZA R5.1
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Subrack grounding ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-2
Subrack ID setting .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-7
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 fan tray and air filter Installation and replacement .......................................... 3-10
3-10
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 user panel connections ............................................................................................... 3-15

3-15
Connecting power cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-30

3-30
Verify battery A/B power assignments ........................................................................................................................... 3-50

3-50
Cable installations for SFD40 and SFD40B ................................................................................................................. 3-52

3-52
Power connections for SFD40/SFD40B ........................................................................................................................ 3-57

3-57
4 Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
General Circuit Pack Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-2
Precautions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4-3
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation ............................................................................................................................. 4-4

4-4
Optical amplifier installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-13

4-13
DCM installation .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-21

4-21
Inventory cable installation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-28

4-28
Subrack to subrack cable installation .............................................................................................................................. 4-32

4-32
Electrical SFP applications ................................................................................................................................................. 4-36

4-36
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections ....................................................................................... 4-38

4-38
Intra-NE fiber connections .................................................................................................................................................. 4-40

4-40
Part III: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 physical and power installation
5 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
Installation options/requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack installation in an EIA bay frame ........................................................................................................................ 5-4
5-4
Subrack installation in an ANSI bay frame ................................................................................................................... 5-10

5-10
Subrack installation in an ETSI rack ............................................................................................................................... 5-16

5-16
Additional hardware installation (SFD, DCM, fiber storage tray etc.) ............................................................... 5-22
5-22
6 Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
Subrack grounding ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3

6-3
Subrack ID setting .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6-6
Fan tray and air filter Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 6-9

6-9
User panel installation and connections ......................................................................................................................... 6-15

6-15
Connecting power cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-28

6-28
Verify battery A/B assignments ......................................................................................................................................... 6-50

6-50
7 Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
General Circuit Pack Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2
Precautions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3

7-3
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation ............................................................................................................................. 7-4

7-4
Optical amplifier installation .............................................................................................................................................. 7-11

7-11
DCM installation .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-19

7-19
Inventory cable Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 7-20

7-20
Electrical SFP applications ................................................................................................................................................. 7-23

7-23
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections ....................................................................................... 7-25

7-25
Intra-NE fiber connections .................................................................................................................................................. 7-27

7-27
Part IV: Stand-alone installation testing
8 Stand-alone node set-up
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify installation and seat packs ........................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8-2
Connect to the NE and prepare the NE for software installation ............................................................................ 8-5
8-5
Connect to the NE for CLI access .................................................................................................................................... 8-11

8-11
Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software ......................................................... 8-13
8-13
Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................................ 8-24

8-24
Set the loopback IP address ................................................................................................................................................ 8-26

8-26
Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................................... 8-30

8-30
Complete connection of inventory cables ..................................................................................................................... 8-34

8-34
Insert duplicate equipment controller ............................................................................................................................. 8-40

8-40
Add peer subracks .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8-41
Set the network element date and time ........................................................................................................................... 8-42

8-42
Configure MTU size on OSC interface .......................................................................................................................... 8-46

8-46
Disable ES port monitoring ................................................................................................................................................ 8-49

8-49
Update firmware on all circuit packs .............................................................................................................................. 8-52

8-52
Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................................... 8-55

8-55
Example configuration of FTP server ............................................................................................................................. 8-58

8-58
9 Stand-alone installation testing
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
Verify shelf and circuit pack discovery ............................................................................................................................. 9-2

9-2
Verify system provisioning .................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

9-5
Equipment controller protection switching ..................................................................................................................... 9-8

9-8
Local and span tests ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9-12
Connect outside plant fiber ................................................................................................................................................. 9-22

9-22
Part V: System turn-up and testing
10 Connecting adjacent network elements
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network commissioning background ............................................................................................................................. 10-2
10-2
Preconditioning procedure .................................................................................................................................................. 10-6

10-6
Establish connection to the network ................................................................................................................................ 10-8

10-8
Provision the system ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-17

10-17
Execute the commission greenfield system wizard ................................................................................................. 10-27

10-27
Commissioning steps required for system with external Raman amplifier modules .................................. 10-39
10-39
Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system ..................................................................... 10-49

10-49
Commission a FOADM system ...................................................................................................................................... 10-57

10-57
Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system ................................................. 10-77

10-77
Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines ............................................................................................... 10-98

10-98
Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services ................................................................................. 10-110

10-110
Disconnect PC from the Network ................................................................................................................................ 10-115

10-115
Understanding the loss report ....................................................................................................................................... 10-117

10-117
Generate and review system loss report .................................................................................................................... 10-125

10-125
Troubleshooting failed adjustments ............................................................................................................................ 10-133

10-133
11 Circuit connections
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-1
System behavior during service turn-up ........................................................................................................................ 11-2

11-2
Provision new wavelength service ................................................................................................................................... 11-7

11-7
Perform power adjustments .............................................................................................................................................. 11-20

11-20
Delete wavelength service ................................................................................................................................................ 11-35

11-35
Provision 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 for transport over the 1696 ROADM ............................................................ 11-40
11-40
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element ..................................................... 11-49

11-49
12 Performance verification testing and data retrieval
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12-1
Perform database backups ................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Network topology changes
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13-1
Addition of a network element to an existing network ............................................................................................ 13-2

13-2
Removing a network element from an existing network ......................................................................................... 13-6

13-6
Extending a linear network segment ............................................................................................................................. 13-10

13-10
Adding degree(s) to an existing network element ................................................................................................... 13-15

13-15
Adding a subrack to an existing network element ................................................................................................... 13-22

13-22
A Fiber cleaning
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Materials and tools .................................................................................................................................................................. A-3

A-3
Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................................. A-5

A-5
Inspecting optical connectors .............................................................................................................................................. A-9

A-9
Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................................................ A-13

A-13
B Tightening torque
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-1
Nominal tightening torques .................................................................................................................................................. B-2

B-2
C Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network upgrade procedure
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... C-1

C-1
Identification of need for upgrade ...................................................................................................................................... C-3

C-3
Phase I: Generate new commissioning files from EPT .............................................................................................. C-6

C-6
Phase II: Physical installation of WTOCM packs ........................................................................................................ C-9

C-9
Phase III: Setting of ILA WT decoder usage type ..................................................................................................... C-16

C-16
Phase IV: Disable automatic tilt adjustments in network ........................................................................................ C-19

C-19
Phase V: Setting of OADM lines WT decoder usage type ..................................................................................... C-22

C-22
Phase VI: Provisioning of SCOT attributes ................................................................................................................. C-27

C-27
Phase VII: Enabling of automatic tilt adjustment by SCOT .................................................................................. C-30

C-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
Issue 1 August 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase VIII: Review ............................................................................................................................................................... C-35
C-35
Upgrade of ILA nodes to WTOCM ................................................................................................................................ C-36

C-36
Switch of ILA to WTOCM monitoring ......................................................................................................................... C-43

C-43
Advanced topics ..................................................................................................................................................................... C-44

C-44
D Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender applications
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... D-1

D-1
Integration of Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS .......................................... D-2
D-2
E Optical modules replacement
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... E-1

E-1
Special tools ............................................................................................................................................................................... E-2

E-2
XFP adapter insertion/extraction ........................................................................................................................................ E-3

E-3
XFP module insertion ............................................................................................................................................................. E-5

E-5
XFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................................................... E-6

E-6
Replacing LC-type LBOs ...................................................................................................................................................... E-7

E-7
SFP module insertion .............................................................................................................................................................. E-8

E-8
SFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................................................... E-9

E-9
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of tables
1 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ................................................................. xxxviii
1-1 FDA/CDRH laser classifications ....................................................................................................................... 1-19
1-2 OFCS hazard levels ................................................................................................................................................ 1-19

1-19
1-3 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market) .................................................... 1-31
1-4 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market) ................................................................. 1-32
1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-34
1-6 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market) .............................................................................. 1-36
1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 1-54
1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 1-55
2-1 SFD40/40B mounting brackets .......................................................................................................................... 2-27
3-1 Ground lug selection ................................................................................................................................................ 3-3

3-3
3-2 Subrack ID settings ................................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3-8
3-3 Rack lamp connector pin-out .............................................................................................................................. 3-17
3-4 Rack alarm connector pin-out ............................................................................................................................ 3-20
3-5 Housekeeping connector pin-outs ..................................................................................................................... 3-22
3-6 DB9 craft cable pinout .......................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3-7 PC com port settings for craft use ..................................................................................................................... 3-29
3-8 Power cable selection guide ................................................................................................................................ 3-30
3-9 Power cable color code ......................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3-10 Branch circuit size for 1 subrack per rack ...................................................................................................... 3-37
3-11 Branch circuit size for 2 subracks per rack .................................................................................................... 3-37
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
Issue 1 August 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 Branch circuit size for 3 subracks per rack .................................................................................................... 3-37
3-13 Continuity check ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-46

3-46
3-14 Voltage check ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-47

3-47
3-15 SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable RJ45 connection ................................................................................ 3-53
3-16 SFD40/SFD40B alarm cable to HK cable connections ............................................................................ 3-53
3-17 Power cable pin designations and color code ............................................................................................... 3-57
3-18 SFD40/SFD40B power cable continuity check ........................................................................................... 3-57
3-19 SFD40SFD40B power cable voltage check .................................................................................................. 3-58
4-1 Inventory cable connector pin-out .................................................................................................................... 4-28
4-2 LAN connector pin-out ......................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4-3 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements ....................................................................................................... 4-40
4-4 Fiber capacities ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-45

4-45
6-1 Ground lug selection ................................................................................................................................................ 6-3

6-3
6-2 Subrack ID settings ................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6-7
6-3 Rack lamp connector pin-out .............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6-4 Rack alarm connector pin-out ............................................................................................................................ 6-19
6-5 Housekeeping connector pin-outs ..................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-6 PC com port settings for craft use ..................................................................................................................... 6-27
6-7 Customer provided power cable selection guide ......................................................................................... 6-28
6-8 Power cable color code ......................................................................................................................................... 6-30
6-9 Continuity check ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-43

6-43
6-10 Voltage check ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-44

6-44
7-1 Inventory cable connector pin-out .................................................................................................................... 7-20
7-2 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements ....................................................................................................... 7-27
7-3 Fiber capacities ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-31

7-31
10-1 Loss report terms and definitions ................................................................................................................. 10-119
10-2 Loss value field terms and definitions ........................................................................................................ 10-120
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-3 Notes field terms and definitions .................................................................................................................. 10-121
10-4 Loss report highlighting ................................................................................................................................... 10-123
10-5 Minimum EPT parameters for network element .................................................................................... 10-125
10-6 Loss report fields ................................................................................................................................................ 10-131

10-131
10-7 Loss report error messages ............................................................................................................................. 10-133
A-1 Measurement regions for single fiber connectors ...................................................................................... A-10
A-2 Visual requirements for PC polished connectors, single mode fiber, RL ≥ 45 dB ......................... A-11
A-3 Visual requirements for PC polished connectors, multimode fibers ................................................... A-11
B-1 Nominal tightening torques ................................................................................................................................... B-2
B-2 Nominal tightening torques when using washers ......................................................................................... B-2
E-1 Special tools ................................................................................................................................................................ E-2

E-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
Issue 1 August 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
1-1 Warning symbols defined for safety instructions: ......................................................................................... 1-5
1-2 Laser warning label (1830 PSS-36/PSS-64) ................................................................................................. 1-13
1-3 Laser warning label (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32) ................................................................................................. 1-15
1-4 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack .......................................................... 1-26
1-5 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack .......................................................... 1-27
1-6 ESD bonding point at the ETSI One Rack .................................................................................................... 1-27
1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-35
1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 1-55
1-9 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 1-56
2-1 Air flow diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2-3
2-2 Flex shelf bracket installation ............................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-3 Flex shelf cover installation ................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-4 Upper fiber/cable cover installation .................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-5 Upper cover mounting bracket ............................................................................................................................. 2-7
2-6 Middle fiber guide and power cable installation ............................................................................................ 2-8
2-7 Middle fiber guide mounting ................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2-8 Lower fiber guide installation ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
2-9 Front cover hinge pin installation ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
2-10 Air deflector installation ....................................................................................................................................... 2-12

2-12
2-11 EIA subrack mounting bracket position .......................................................................................................... 2-13
2-12 EIA subrack mounting bracket position detail ............................................................................................. 2-14
2-13 Subrack installed in EIA bay frame .................................................................................................................. 2-15
2-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle mounted in a 19-inch (EIA) rack ..................... 2-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-15 Aligns screws with keyhole slots ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
2-16 Align slots in cover with hinge pins ................................................................................................................. 2-18
2-17 Latch alignment ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-19

2-19
2-18 Cover extension kit parts ...................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2-19 Correct extension block orientation ................................................................................................................. 2-20
2-20 Hinge pin extension block installation ............................................................................................................ 2-21
2-21 SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting ....................................................................................... 2-22
2-22 FST mounting bracket installation .................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-23 Attenuation drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 2-24

2-24
2-24 Components installed in flex shelf .................................................................................................................... 2-25
2-25 EIA bracket installation on SFD44/SFD44B ................................................................................................ 2-26
2-26 SFD44 installed in EIA bay ................................................................................................................................. 2-26
2-27 EIA bracket for SFD40/SFD40B ....................................................................................................................... 2-27
2-28 Correct holes for EIA bracket installation ...................................................................................................... 2-28
2-29 Install screws from inside the DCM shelf. ..................................................................................................... 2-28
2-30 DCM shelf installed in bay .................................................................................................................................. 2-29
2-31 Punch down block brackets for EIA bay ........................................................................................................ 2-30
2-32 Punch down assembly in EIA bay .................................................................................................................... 2-30
2-33 Flex shelf adapter bracket .................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2-34 Flex shelf bracket installed .................................................................................................................................. 2-32
2-35 Upper fiber/cable cover installation ................................................................................................................. 2-33
2-36 Upper cover mounting bracket ........................................................................................................................... 2-34
2-37 Middle fiber guide and power cable installation ......................................................................................... 2-35
2-38 Cable routing example .......................................................................................................................................... 2-36

2-36
2-39 Middle fiber guide mounting .............................................................................................................................. 2-37
2-41 Front cover hinge pin installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 Air deflector installation ....................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-40
2-43 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position ...................................................................................................... 2-41
2-44 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position detail .......................................................................................... 2-42
2-45 Subrack installed in ANSI bay frame .............................................................................................................. 2-43
2-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle - ANSI ........................................................................ 2-44
2-47 Aligns screws with keyhole slots ...................................................................................................................... 2-45
2-49 Latch alignment ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-47

2-47
2-53 SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting ....................................................................................... 2-50
2-54 SFD44 or SFD44B installed in flex shelf ....................................................................................................... 2-51
2-55 FST mounting bracket installation .................................................................................................................... 2-52

2-53
2-57 FST installed in flex shelf .................................................................................................................................... 2-53
2-58 Bracket installation on DCM for ANSI Flex shelf ...................................................................................... 2-54
2-59 DCM shelf in ANSI bay frame with Flex shelf ............................................................................................ 2-55
2-60 ANSI bracket installation on SFD44/SFD44B ............................................................................................. 2-56
2-61 SFD44 installed in ANSI bay ............................................................................................................................. 2-57
2-62 ANSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B ................................................................................................................... 2-58
2-63 ANSI DCM bracket installation ........................................................................................................................ 2-59
2-64 Install screws from inside the DCM shelf. ..................................................................................................... 2-60
2-65 DCM shelf installed in ANSI bay ..................................................................................................................... 2-60
2-66 DCM shelf cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-61

2-61
2-67 Punch down block brackets for ANSI bay ..................................................................................................... 2-62
2-68 Punch down assembly in ANSI bay ................................................................................................................. 2-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-69 Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal ........................................................................................... 2-63
2-71 Clip in middle fiber guide .................................................................................................................................... 2-64
2-72 Middle fiber guides and power cables ............................................................................................................. 2-66
2-73 ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide installation ......................................................................... 2-67
2-74 ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide installation detail ............................................................ 2-68
2-75 Upper cover mounting bracket ........................................................................................................................... 2-69
2-76 Lower cover hinge .................................................................................................................................................. 2-70

2-70
2-80 ETSI power cable routing .................................................................................................................................... 2-73
2-81 Subrack mounted in an ETSI rack .................................................................................................................... 2-74
2-82 ETSI air baffle installation ................................................................................................................................... 2-75

2-75
2-83 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle - ETSI ........................................................................ 2-76
2-84 DCM shelf screw locations ................................................................................................................................. 2-77
2-85 Screw installed in top hole ................................................................................................................................... 2-78
2-86 Cover bracket installed .......................................................................................................................................... 2-79

2-79
2-87 Install cover ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-80

2-80
2-88 DCM shelf assembly without cover kit in ETSI rack ................................................................................ 2-81
2-89 FST bracket mounting for ETSI application ................................................................................................. 2-82

2-82
2-91 Fiber Storage Tray mounted in ETSI rack ..................................................................................................... 2-83
2-92 SFD44 or SFD44B bracket mounting for ETSI rack ................................................................................. 2-84
2-93 SFD44 shelf installed in ETSI rack .................................................................................................................. 2-85
2-94 DCM shelf, FST, and SFD44/SFD44B mounted in ETSI rack .............................................................. 2-85
2-95 ETSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B .................................................................................................................... 2-86
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-96 Punch down block brackets for ETSI rack .................................................................................................... 2-88
2-97 Punch down assembly in ETSI rack ................................................................................................................. 2-88
3-1 Subrack ground attachment point ........................................................................................................................ 3-4
3-3 Subrack ID module rotating switches ................................................................................................................ 3-7
3-4 Subrack ID connector location ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-5 Fan tray installation ................................................................................................................................................ 3-10

3-10
3-6 Air filter retainer screw ......................................................................................................................................... 3-11

3-11
3-7 Air filter dropped into view ................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3-8 Air filter installation ............................................................................................................................................... 3-13

3-13
3-9 Lock air filter in place ........................................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-14
3-10 user panel installed into subrack ........................................................................................................................ 3-15
3-11 user panel connectors detail ................................................................................................................................ 3-16
3-12 Punch down block step 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-17 user panel cable routing ........................................................................................................................................ 3-27
3-18 Mark cables for insulation stripping ................................................................................................................ 3-32
3-19 Cables being inserted into H Tap ....................................................................................................................... 3-33
3-20 Crimp H tap ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-33

3-33
3-21 Properly crimped H tap ......................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-22 Protective cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-34

3-34
3-23 Secure protective cover ......................................................................................................................................... 3-35

3-35
3-24 Example of H tap in an overhead rack ............................................................................................................ 3-35
3-25 Strip cable insulation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-39

3-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xix
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 Setting crimper ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3-39
3-27 Crimp lug onto wire ............................................................................................................................................... 3-40

3-40
3-28 Crimper closed on wire ......................................................................................................................................... 3-40
3-29 Finished crimp .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-41

3-41
3-30 Power cable terminations ..................................................................................................................................... 3-41
3-31 Example of double lug connections on a PDU ............................................................................................ 3-43
3-32 PDU installed in ETSI rack ................................................................................................................................. 3-43
3-33 PDU installed in an ANSI bay ............................................................................................................................ 3-44
3-34 PDU installed in an EIA rack .............................................................................................................................. 3-44
3-35 PDU optional slider kit reference photos ....................................................................................................... 3-45
3-36 Power cable pin identification ............................................................................................................................ 3-46
3-37 Power filter locations ............................................................................................................................................. 3-48

3-48
3-38 SFD40/SFD40B ground attachment point ..................................................................................................... 3-52
3-39 SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable punch down block connections .................................................... 3-55
3-40 SFD40/40B cable interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 3-60
4-1 Subrack with EC and PFDC .................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4-2 Example of shelf report ........................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4-3 Half slot adapter ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-6

4-6
4-4 Half slot adapter tool ................................................................................................................................................ 4-7

4-7
4-5 Open upper latch ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-8

4-8
4-6 Insert tool into subrack ............................................................................................................................................ 4-9
4-7 Secure half slot adapter with Phillips screwdriver ...................................................................................... 4-10
4-8 Half slot adapter with rubber plug installed. ................................................................................................. 4-11
4-9 Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA ................................................................................................. 4-15
4-10 Amplifier and OSC connections in TOADM ............................................................................................... 4-15
4-11 Amplifier and Raman Pump Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-16
4-12 Proper LD and amplifier handling .................................................................................................................... 4-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-13 Parking cap removal ............................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4-18
4-14 SFP insertion ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-19

4-19
4-15 Fiber installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-20

4-20
4-16 DCM shelf cover removal .................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4-17 DCM shelf cover bracket removal .................................................................................................................... 4-23
4-18 DCM installed .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-24

4-24
4-19 DCM cover removal ............................................................................................................................................... 4-25

4-25
4-20 DCM cover bracket removal ............................................................................................................................... 4-26
4-21 Install DCM cover bracket ................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4-22 Y inventory cable adapter .................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4-23 Internal connection diagram of Y adapter ...................................................................................................... 4-29
4-24 Upper cable/fiber channel cover ........................................................................................................................ 4-30
4-25 EC circuit pack ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-33

4-33
4-26 Location of EC packs in subrack ....................................................................................................................... 4-34
4-27 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 electrical SFP .................................................................................................. 4-36
4-28 LAN cable bend radius ......................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-29 Angled LC fiber boot ............................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4-30 Straight LC fiber boot ............................................................................................................................................ 4-42

4-42
4-31 Inline LC attenuator ............................................................................................................................................... 4-43

4-43
4-32 Step one of "pretzel" method .............................................................................................................................. 4-46
4-33 Step 2 of "pretzel" method ................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4-37 Fiber storage tray fiber routing .......................................................................................................................... 4-48
4-38 Fibers secured in flex shelf .................................................................................................................................. 4-49
4-39 Upper horizontal fiber tray .................................................................................................................................. 4-51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxi
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-40 Lower horizontal fiber tray .................................................................................................................................. 4-51
4-41 Example of installation report ............................................................................................................................ 4-54
4-42 SVAC client and line ports .................................................................................................................................. 4-55
5-1 Airflow diagram ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-2
5-2 EIA subrack mounting bracket position ............................................................................................................ 5-5
5-3 Cover brackets installed for EIA applications ................................................................................................. 5-6
5-4 Subrack installed in EIA bay frame .................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-5 Align slots in cover with hinge pins ................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-6 Latch alignment .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-8
5-7 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an EIA rack ......................................... 5-9
5-8 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position ...................................................................................................... 5-11
5-9 Cover brackets installed for EIA applications .............................................................................................. 5-12
5-10 Subrack installed in ANSI bay frame .............................................................................................................. 5-13
5-12 Latch alignment ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-14

5-14
5-13 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an ANSI rack ................................... 5-15
5-14 Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal ........................................................................................... 5-16
5-15 ETSI subrack mounting bracket position ....................................................................................................... 5-17
5-16 Cover brackets installed for ETSI applications ............................................................................................ 5-18
5-17 Subrack installed in ETSI bay frame ............................................................................................................... 5-19
5-19 Latch alignment ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-20

5-20
5-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an ETSI rack .................................... 5-21
6-2 Subrack ID rotating switches ................................................................................................................................ 6-7
6-3 Fan tray slots ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

6-9
6-4 Correct fan tray alignment ................................................................................................................................... 6-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-5 Fan tray fully seated into subrack ..................................................................................................................... 6-10
6-6 Air filter cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-11

6-11
6-7 Filter installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

6-12
6-8 Filter fully installed ................................................................................................................................................ 6-13

6-13
6-9 Air filter removal ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-14

6-14
6-10 user panel installed into subrack ........................................................................................................................ 6-15
6-11 User panel connectors detail ............................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-15 Punch down block Step 4 ..................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-16 Punch down block Step 5 ..................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-17 Power cable locations ............................................................................................................................................ 6-30

6-30
6-18 Mark cables for insulation stripping ................................................................................................................ 6-31
6-19 Cables being inserted into H Tap ....................................................................................................................... 6-31
6-20 Crimp H tap ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-32

6-32
6-21 Properly crimped H tap ......................................................................................................................................... 6-32
6-22 Protective cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-33

6-33
6-23 Secure protective cover ......................................................................................................................................... 6-33

6-33
6-24 Example of H tap in an overhead rack ............................................................................................................ 6-34
6-25 Strip cable insulation ............................................................................................................................................. 6-36

6-36
6-26 Setting crimper ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-37

6-37
6-27 Crimp lug onto wire ............................................................................................................................................... 6-38

6-38
6-28 Finished crimp .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-39

6-39
6-29 Power cable terminations ..................................................................................................................................... 6-39
6-30 Typical PDU wiring configuration ................................................................................................................... 6-40
6-31 PDU installed in ETSI rack ................................................................................................................................. 6-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxiii
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-32 PDU installed in an ANSI rack .......................................................................................................................... 6-41
6-33 PDU installed in an EIA rack .............................................................................................................................. 6-41
6-34 PDU optional slider kit reference photos ....................................................................................................... 6-42
6-35 Power cable pin identification ............................................................................................................................ 6-43
6-36 Power filter locations ............................................................................................................................................. 6-45

6-45
6-37 Pre-forming power cables — ANSI ................................................................................................................. 6-46
6-38 Pre-forming power cables — ETSI .................................................................................................................. 6-47
6-39 Cables plugged into power filters ..................................................................................................................... 6-48
7-1 Subrack with EC and PFDC installed ................................................................................................................ 7-4
7-2 Example of shelf report ........................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-3 Half slot adapter ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-5

7-5
7-4 Half slot adapter tool ................................................................................................................................................ 7-6

7-6
7-5 Open upper latch ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-7

7-7
7-6 Insert half slot adapter tool into subrack ........................................................................................................... 7-8
7-7 Secure half slot adapter with Phillips screwdriver ........................................................................................ 7-8
7-8 Half slot adapter with rubber plug installed ..................................................................................................... 7-9
7-9 Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA ................................................................................................. 7-12
7-10 Amplifier and OSC connections in TOADM ............................................................................................... 7-13
7-11 Amplifier and Raman Pump Connections ..................................................................................................... 7-13
7-12 Proper LD and Amplifier handling ................................................................................................................... 7-14
7-13 Parking cap removal ............................................................................................................................................... 7-15

7-15
7-14 SFP insertion ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-16

7-16
7-15 Fiber installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-17

7-17
7-16 Y inventory cable adapter .................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7-17 Internal connection diagram of Y adapter ...................................................................................................... 7-21
7-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 electrical SFP .................................................................................................. 7-23
7-19 LAN cable bend radius ......................................................................................................................................... 7-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-20 Angled LC fiber boot ............................................................................................................................................. 7-29
7-21 Straight LC fiber boot ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29

7-29
7-22 Step one of "pretzel" method .............................................................................................................................. 7-32
7-27 Fiber storage tray fiber routing .......................................................................................................................... 7-35
7-28 Fibers secured in flex shelf .................................................................................................................................. 7-36
7-29 Examples of fiber routing on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 ................................................................. 7-39
7-30 SVAC client and line ports .................................................................................................................................. 7-40
7-31 Example of installation report ............................................................................................................................ 7-41
8-1 Voltage monitor ports on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power filter ...................................................... 8-3
8-2 Voltage monitor ports on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 power filter ...................................................... 8-3
8-3 PC command window .............................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8-4 Login screen ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8-7
8-5 WebUI uninitialized database warning .............................................................................................................. 8-8
8-6 WebUI system properties ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8-7 Windows firewall settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8-8 PC command window ........................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8-9 WebUI FTP server settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8-10 WebUI software upgrade ...................................................................................................................................... 8-17
8-11 WebUI loopback address ...................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8-12 WebUI loopback change warning ..................................................................................................................... 8-28
8-13 WebUI OAMP port provisioning ...................................................................................................................... 8-31
8-14 WebUI create IP route window .......................................................................................................................... 8-32
8-15 WebUI system view equipment tree ................................................................................................................. 8-35

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxv
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-16 WebUI create shelf window ................................................................................................................................ 8-36
8-17 WebUI date/time menu ......................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8-43
8-18 WebUI date/time provisioning ........................................................................................................................... 8-44
8-19 WebUI OSC port provisioning ........................................................................................................................... 8-47
8-20 WebUI ES port provisioning ............................................................................................................................... 8-50
8-21 WebUI reboot window .......................................................................................................................................... 8-53
8-22 WebUI system properties ..................................................................................................................................... 8-56
8-23 FileZilla connect to server window .................................................................................................................. 8-58
8-24 FileZilla server window ........................................................................................................................................ 8-59

8-59
8-25 FileZilla groups menu ........................................................................................................................................... 8-60

8-60
8-26 FileZilla groups window ....................................................................................................................................... 8-61
8-27 FileZilla add group window ................................................................................................................................ 8-62
8-28 FileZilla groups shared folders window ......................................................................................................... 8-63
8-29 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 8-64
8-30 FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 8-65

8-65
8-31 FileZilla users window .......................................................................................................................................... 8-66

8-66
8-32 FileZilla add user window ................................................................................................................................... 8-67
8-33 FileZilla users shared folders window ............................................................................................................. 8-68
8-34 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 8-69
9-1 WebUI EC protection switch settings ................................................................................................................ 9-9
9-2 WebUI EC protection switch warning ............................................................................................................. 9-10
9-3 Example of loop fiber at starting site ............................................................................................................... 9-14
9-4 Examples of A to Z power and Z to A power ................................................................................................ 9-16
9-5 Example of loop at ILA ........................................................................................................................................ 9-18
9-6 OSC PM report ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24

9-24
10-1 Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems ...................................................................... 10-4
10-2 1354 RM-PhM login screen .............................................................................................................................. 10-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-3 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window ...................................................................................................... 10-11
10-4 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window ...................................................................................................... 10-11
10-5 1354 RM-PhM topology view screen ........................................................................................................... 10-12
10-6 1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings ........................................................................................................ 10-13
10-7 1354 RM-PhM create network element ....................................................................................................... 10-14
10-8 1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NE's ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10-9 CPB login window ............................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10-10 CPB main window ............................................................................................................................................... 10-19

10-19
10-11 CPB provision system wizard overview ...................................................................................................... 10-20
10-12 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options ..................................................................................... 10-21
10-13 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file ....................................... 10-22
10-14 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list .................................................................................................. 10-23
10-15 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages ........................................................................................ 10-24
10-16 Examples of WTOCM use ................................................................................................................................ 10-25
10-17 1354 RM-PhM Node inventory window ..................................................................................................... 10-28
10-18 1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting ............................................................................. 10-29
10-19 CPB commission greenfield system overview .......................................................................................... 10-30
10-20 CPB commission greenfield system commissioning mode .................................................................. 10-31
10-21 CPB commission greenfield system TL1 autonomous messaging option ....................................... 10-32
10-22 CPB commission greenfield system power provisioning options ...................................................... 10-33
10-23 CPB commission greenfield system planning tool output file selection .......................................... 10-34
10-24 CPB system commissioning stages progress .............................................................................................. 10-35
10-25 CPB system commissioning finish page ...................................................................................................... 10-36
10-26 CPB sample loss report ...................................................................................................................................... 10-37
10-27 1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting ............................................................................. 10-40
10-28 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion .............................................................. 10-41
10-29 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services .............................................................................................................. 10-42

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxvii
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-30 1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button .................................................................................................................. 10-42
10-31 1354 RM-PhM power adjust ............................................................................................................................ 10-43
10-32 Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans ......................................................................................... 10-44
10-33 1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete ......................................................................................................... 10-46
10-34 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning .................................................................................... 10-47
10-35 Adjustments required on linear system ........................................................................................................ 10-50
10-40 1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message ...................................................................................... 10-54
10-41 1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete ......................................................................................................... 10-55
10-42 Commissioning service for a FOADM system .......................................................................................... 10-58
10-48 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment ................................................................................................................ 10-64
10-50 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .............................................................................................................. 10-67
10-51 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu ................................................................................................................ 10-68
10-52 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window ............................................................................................... 10-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-57 Mixed TOADM/FOADM ring system ......................................................................................................... 10-77
10-58 Commissioning service for a mixed TOADM/FOADM system ......................................................... 10-79
10-73 Commissioning service for a FOADM system .......................................................................................... 10-99
10-74 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power .................................................................................... 10-101
10-75 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power ............................................................................................................ 10-102
10-76 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list .................................................................................................... 10-103
10-77 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment ...................................................................................................... 10-105
10-79 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power ..................................................................................... 10-111
10-80 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power ............................................................................................................ 10-112
10-82 1354 RM-PhM sample loss report ............................................................................................................... 10-118
10-83 CPB Create system loss report overview .................................................................................................. 10-126
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxix
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-84 CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file ...................................................................... 10-127
10-85 CPB Create system loss report stages progress window ..................................................................... 10-128
10-86 CPB Create system loss report last page ................................................................................................... 10-129
10-87 CPB sample loss report .................................................................................................................................... 10-130
11-1 Network example .................................................................................................................................................... 11-2

11-2
11-2 Service turn-up example ....................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11-3 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu ......................................................................................................... 11-7
11-4 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window .................................................................................................... 11-8
11-5 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button ...................................................................................... 11-9
11-6 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window .......................................................................................................... 11-10
11-7 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu .......................................................................................................... 11-11
11-8 1354 RM-PhM assign client port .................................................................................................................... 11-12
11-9 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu .............................................................................................. 11-13
11-10 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu ............................................................................... 11-14
11-11 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1 ............................................................................... 11-15
11-16 1354 RM-PhM power management service ................................................................................................ 11-21
11-20 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection ........................................................................................ 11-25
11-21 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers ................................................................................................................. 11-26
11-22 1354 RM-PhM set power gain ......................................................................................................................... 11-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-25 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection ........................................................................................ 11-31
11-27 1354 RM-PhM set power gain ......................................................................................................................... 11-33
11-29 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning ..................................................................................... 11-35
11-30 1354 RM-PhM delete button ............................................................................................................................ 11-36
11-31 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning ..................................................................................... 11-36
11-32 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu ...................................................................................................... 11-37
11-33 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window ............................................................................................... 11-38
11-34 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button .............................................................................. 11-38
11-35 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning .......................................................................... 11-39
11-39 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel ............................................................................................................... 11-44
11-40 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power ........................................................................ 11-45
11-42 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window ................................................................................................. 11-47
11-43 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connection ........................................................................................... 11-48
11-47 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel ............................................................................................................... 11-53
11-48 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power ........................................................................ 11-54
11-50 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection .......................................................................... 11-56

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxi
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-51 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning ...................................................................................... 11-57
11-52 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window ....................................................................................... 11-57
12-1 1354 RM-PhM settings menu ............................................................................................................................. 12-2
12-2 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window ................................................................................................................ 12-3
12-3 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu ...................................................................................................................... 12-4
12-4 1354 RM-PhM NE backup .................................................................................................................................. 12-5
12-5 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu ........................................................................................................ 12-6
12-6 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon ........................................................................................................................ 12-6
13-1 Extending a linear network segment ............................................................................................................. 13-10
13-2 Affected segment and commissioning service for linear extension ................................................... 13-11
13-3 Merging system by adding 2 degrees to a 1 degree TOADM .............................................................. 13-15
13-4 Merging systems by adding 1 degree to a 2 degree TOADM .............................................................. 13-16
13-5 Merging systems by adding 2 degrees to a 2 degree TOADM ............................................................ 13-16
13-6 Merging systems by extending a linear system to form a chord ......................................................... 13-17
13-7 Extending a linear segment to merge with another linear segment .................................................... 13-17
13-8 Extending a linear system to form a ring ..................................................................................................... 13-18
13-9 WebUI software upgrade ................................................................................................................................... 13-24
13-10 WebUI system view equipment tree .............................................................................................................. 13-26
13-11 WebUI create shelf window .............................................................................................................................. 13-28
A-1 Cleaning the ferrule endface ................................................................................................................................. A-6
A-2 CLEPTOP cleaner .................................................................................................................................................... A-7

A-7
A-3 Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning ......................................................................................................... A-10
C-1 Network operating within the WT limits ......................................................................................................... C-3
C-2 Network failing WT limits check ........................................................................................................................ C-4
C-3 Error message indicating WTOCM is required ............................................................................................. C-5
C-4 Changing an optical domain to WTOCM equipped ..................................................................................... C-7
C-5 Re-generating commissioning files after adding WTOCM to optical domain ................................... C-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-6 Fiber cabling connections between MON ports of bidirectional LDs and WTOCM pack ......... C-10
C-7 Selection of options in CPB to provision during WTOCM provisioning step ................................. C-11
C-8 Configuration of wavelength tracker .............................................................................................................. C-17
C-9 Disabling SCOT automatic tilt adjustments ................................................................................................. C-20
C-10 Example network for WTOCM upgrade procedure .................................................................................. C-22
C-11 Switch of first optical lines to WTOCM usage ........................................................................................... C-24
C-12 All lines of network switched to WTOCM ................................................................................................... C-25
C-13 Required selections from provisioning options for optical parameters update ................................ C-28
C-14 Enablement of automatic tilt adjustment for a line .................................................................................... C-31
C-15 Sequence to follow when enabling auto tilt adjustment within an OMS ........................................... C-32
C-16 Example of enabling auto tilt adjustment for a network .......................................................................... C-33
C-17 ILA WTOCM upgrade for bidirectional LD types ..................................................................................... C-37
C-18 ILA WTOCM upgrade for unidirectional LD types .................................................................................. C-38
D-1 Power commissioning ............................................................................................................................................. D-2

D-2
D-2 Port power management ........................................................................................................................................ D-3
E-1 Extracting clamp for LC and XFP ..................................................................................................................... E-2
E-2 SFP module removal tool ...................................................................................................................................... E-2
E-3 XFP adapter extraction reference ........................................................................................................................ E-4
E-4 XFP bail reference .................................................................................................................................................... E-5

E-5
E-5 XFP module extraction reference ........................................................................................................................ E-6
E-6 LBO replacement ...................................................................................................................................................... E-7

E-7
E-7 SFP module insert reference ................................................................................................................................. E-8
E-8 Unlocking a MSA latch (type 1) SFP .............................................................................................................. E-10
E-9 Unlocking a MSA latch (type 2) SFP .............................................................................................................. E-10
E-10 Unlocking a bail latch (type 1) SFP ................................................................................................................. E-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxiii
Issue 1 August 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-13 SFP module removal tool insertion .................................................................................................................. E-13
E-14 SFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................................... E-14
E-15 SFP module extracted ........................................................................................................................................... E-14

E-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This manual provides instructions for installation, turn-up and testing of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). This manual is not a service manual.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User
Provisioning Guide, for any activities involving circuit provisioning, or the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide, for trouble analysis and regular maintenance.
Reason for reissue

This is the first issue.
Intended audience
This installation manual portion of this document is for personnel who will install
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment. The System Turn-up and Test (also
called Integration) is for personnel who will integrate the NEs into a complete network.
This manual is intended ONLY for use in a central office environment in Network
Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) installations and for installation and testing
performed prior to turnover to central office personnel.
How to use this document

This manual is divided into six parts each containing several chapters. The first part
explains the installation sequence at a high level. It is useful to the trained installer or job
planner. The other parts provide instructional steps for personnel needing additional detail
or background information. The chapters in each part are numbered in the order which
they are to be performed.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxv
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at the user's expense.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established. For more information
regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific
jurisdictions, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Environment, Health and Safety organization.
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product and batteries

Electronic products and batteries bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shall
be collected and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable
European Union and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of
unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product and
batteries, such as heavy metals, the environment and human health may be negatively
impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid bar
under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market
after 13 August 2005.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For batteries put on the market in the European Union, a chemical symbol Hg
(mercury), Cd (cadmium), or Pb (lead), or a combination of those symbols, beneath
the cross-out wheeled bin indicates that the battery contains the corresponding heavy
metals.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products
displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of a product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent account manager. Visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback) web page, or contact Alcatel-Lucent
Takeback Support (takeback@alcatel-lucent.com). For technical information on product
treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information (http://www.alcatel-lucent.
com/product_recycling) web page.
Conventions used
The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
Appearance Description
Italicized text • File and directory names
• Emphasized information
• Titles of publications
• A value that the user supplies
Graphical user interface text or • Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface or
key name in a hardware label
• The name of a key on the keyboard
input text Command names and text that the user types or selects
as input to a system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxvii
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Appearance Description
output text Text that a system displays or prints
Related information
Table 1 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Document title Document code
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Safety Guide 8DG-61688-AAAA-TQZZA

Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the relevant information
and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury. Furthermore, the Safety
Guide is useful to prevent material damage to the equipment. The Safety Guide
must be read by the responsible technical personnel before performing relevant
work on the system. The valid version of the document must always be kept close
to the equipment.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide 8DG-61688-BAAA-TQZZA
Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives
planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical
specifications.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide 8DG-61688-CAAA-TQZZA
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual
demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative
tasks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide 8DG-61688-DAAA-TQZZA
Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it
provides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and
component replacement.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 8DG-61688-FAAA-TQZZA
1830 PSS-36)
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 8DG-61688-GAAA-TQZZA
1830 PSS-64)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 8DG-61688-EAAA-TQZZA
1830 PSS-16 and PSS-32)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS CLI Command Guide 8DG-61688-HAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide 8DG-61688-JAAA-TQZZA
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for the EPT.
The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and
commissioning tasks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (continued)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS OCS TL1 Command Guide 8DG-61688-LAAA-TQZZA

Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Photonics TL1 Command Guide 8DG-61688-KAAA-TQZZA

Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMRE Command Line Interface Guide 8DG-61688-MAAA-TQZZA
Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the GMPLS
Routing Engine (GMRE) and describes the CLI attributes and commands.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide 8DG-61688-NAAA-TQZZA

Contains information about the GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE) of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS; it provides a high-level functional overview of the
GMRE and describes the steps to plan and set up a GMRE-controlled network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Quick Reference Guide 8DG-61688-PAAA-TQZZA
Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS a streamlined, easy-to-use navigation
aid to facilitate the use of the system.
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide 3AL-61688-TAAA-TQZZA
Provides information for accessing the 1354 RM-PhM and using it to configure
and manage the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DCN Planning and Engineering Guide (Photonic 8DG-61688-QAAA-TQZZA
applications)
Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication
Network (DCN) for photonic applications, that is for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 systems (WDM).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DCN Planning and Engineering Guide (Switching 8DG-61688-RAAA-TQZZA
applications)
Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication
Network (DCN) for switching applications, that is for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 systems (OCS).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Key Management Tool (KMT) Administrative Guide 8DG-61191-VAAA-TQZZA
Provides information about the steps that an administrator needs to take in order to
set up network sites and elements, and to assign priorities and privileges.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Key Management Tool (KMT) Installation Guide 8DG-61191-WAAA-TQZZA
Provides detailed step-by-step description of how to install the Key Management
Tool including prerequisite SW download and installation.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Key Management Tool (KMT) User Guide 8DG-61191-XAAA-TQZZA
Provides information about how a user can use the KMT to assign keys, rotate the
keys, and access security logs and alarms.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Commissioning and Power Balancing Tool User Guide 8DG-61688-UAAA-TQZZA
Provides instructions for use and descriptions of the features of the Commissioning
and Power Balancing (CPB) Tool.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxix
Issue 1 August 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (continued)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Electronic Documentation Library 8DG-61688-SAAA

Contains all documents related to in electronic formats.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Software Release Description This document is delivered with the NE software.
These documents can be downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Site (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com) or through your Local Customer
Support.
Document support
For support in using this or any other Alcatel-Lucent document, contact Alcatel-Lucent at
one of the following telephone numbers:
• 1-888-582-3688 (for all United States)
• 1-317-377-8618 (for all other countries)
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support) for contact information.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com).
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Part I: Safety information
Overview
Purpose
This part provides safety information.
Contents
Chapter 1, Safety 1-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary I-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety information Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
1 Safety
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter on safety provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the
relevant information and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury.
Furthermore, this chapter may be useful to prevent material damage to the equipment.
The present chapter on safety must be read by the responsible technical personnel before
carrying out relevant work on the system. The valid version of this document must always
be kept close to the equipment.
Contents
General notes on safety 1-3

Structure of safety statements 1-4
Basic safety aspects 1-7
Specific safety areas 1-11
Potential sources of danger 1-12
Laser safety 1-13
Laser product classification 1-18
Equipment grounding 1-23
Electrostatic discharge 1-24
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases 1-29
Transportation 1-30
Storage 1-33
Installation 1-37
Taking into operation 1-43
Operation and maintenance 1-47
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking out of operation 1-58

Event of failure 1-61
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides general information on the structure of safety instructions and
summarizes general safety requirements.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-4

Basic safety aspects 1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
Warning symbols
Figure 1-1 Warning symbols defined for safety instructions:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 g_sfg_0001
Legend
1 General warning of danger 13 Noxious substance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Electric shock 14 Explosion hazard
3 Hazard of laser radiation 15 Falling object hazard

4 Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) 16 Risk of suffocation
5 Electromagnetic radiation 17 Pinch hazard

6 Flammable material / Risk of fire 18 Lifting hazard, heavy object
7 Service disruption hazard 19 Inhalation hazard

8 Laceration hazard 20 Slip hazard
9 Corrosive substance 21 Trip hazard

10 Hazard caused by batteries 22 Hazard of falling
11 Hot surface 23 Arc-flash hazard
12 Heavy overhead load 24 Equipment damage hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Basic safety aspects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Basic safety aspects

Purpose
This topic covers basic safety aspects relating to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) with which you must be familiar prior to installing or using the
product.
General safety requirements

To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment, ensure that you read,
understand, and follow the following general safety requirements prior to installing or
using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
• Ensure that transport, storage, installation and operation of the system are conducted
only under specified permissible conditions. See the accompanying documentation
and information on the system.
• Ensure that installation, configuration, and disassembly of the system are conducted
only by suitably qualified personnel and with reference to the appropriate
documentation. Due to the complexity of the system, personnel require special
training.
• Identify potential hazards prior to starting the installation.
• Ensure that the system is operated only by trained and authorized users. The user must
operate the system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety and the
parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems, additional
training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel
must be completed and documented.
• Follow all instructions marked on the product, including both general instructions and
the stated methods for avoiding hazards.
• Do not operate the system unless all appropriate safety measures, precautions, and
instructions have been taken or followed. Any faults and errors that might affect
safety must be reported immediately by the user to appropriate personnel responsible
for safety.
• Operate the system only under the environmental conditions and with the connections
described in the documentation.
• Modifications to any part of the system, including software, should be conducted only
by trained and qualified personnel and only in a manner as authorized by
Alcatel-Lucent. Alcatel-Lucent disclaims liability for any damages arising from
unauthorized modifications, and unauthorized modifications may lead to a voiding of
any and all warranties.
• Ensure that only components that are recommended by the manufacturer and are
listed in the procurement documents are used.
• Avoid use of non-system software. The use or installation of non-system software can
adversely affect the normal functioning of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Use tested and virus-free data carriers (memory sticks, DVDs, CDs, …) only.
• Ensure that any work that has any impact on safety facilities, the clearance of faults,
and the maintenance of equipment are carried out only by trained and qualified
personnel and in conjunction with the appropriate documentation. Use only approved
measuring and test equipment.
• Ensure that calibrations, special tests after repairs, and regular safety checks are
conducted, documented, and archived.
• Use only specified chemicals or materials.
• Consult material safety data sheets (MSDSs) or the equivalent information when
working with hazardous chemicals.
Summary of important safety instructions

Observe the following safety instructions, which are of particular importance for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems:
• The equipment is to be installed only in Restricted Access Areas in business and
customer premises for applications in accordance with Articles 110-18, 110-26 and
110-27 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPANo.70, IEC 60950-1, IEC
60825-2, EN 60950-1 and EN 60825-2. Other installations exempt from the
enforcement of the National Electrical Code may be engineered according to the
accepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems contain optical circuit packs that can emit laser
radiation assessed as IEC Hazard Level 1M.
Therefore, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems must be installed in restricted locations,
according to IEC 60825-2 and EN 60825-2, where there is no ready access to the
general public, but only to authorized persons who have received adequate training in
laser safety.
• This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label.
• This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part
of the building installation.
• This equipment is intended to be provided with an appropriate branch circuit
protection on both the A and B –48/–60 V DC input feeds as follows:
– 40 A (max.). for the 1830 PSS-16 system
– 80 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-32 system
– 3 × 50 A (max. for the 1830 PSS-36 system
– 3 × 100 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-64 system
• Disconnect up to six (6) power supply connections when removing power from the
system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guides which
are available for PSS-16/32, PSS-36, and PSS-64.
• During installation and handling (for example transport), heavy equipment like racks
or pre-installed subracks must be secured to avoid tipping over.
• For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Installation and System Turn-Up Guides which are available for PSS-16/32, PSS-36,
and PSS-64.
• Install only equipment identified in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and
System Turn-Up Guides for PSS-16/32, PSS-36, and PSS-64 provided with this
product. Use of other equipment may result in improper connection of circuitry
leading to fire or injury to persons.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Installation and
service should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers
or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect
re-assembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.
If the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 system is operated with only one Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical
connectors on the backplane carrying a voltage of –48 V DC can be touched. This can
cause electric shocks. Always use both Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface
Cards (PSF3T8) and Fan Units (FAN3T8) to ensure safe operation.
• Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect the product
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
• Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or
electrical shock.
• Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.
• Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Personal protective equipment
Protection against hazardous laser radiation

In DWDM systems which use Raman amplifiers hazard
levels in excess of 1M are very likely to occur, and the
use of appropriate protective glasses is strongly
recommended.
Protection against acoustic noise

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems are designed for the
operation in unattended offices. However, in lab
environments, where multiple systems are operated in
parallel, based on national regulations hearing protection
may be necessary.
To protect yourself against acoustic noise, wear hearing
protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The aspects of “laser safety” and “handling of components sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD)” are of vital importance for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment.
Therefore, the key safety instructions for these subjects are summarized in the following.
Contents
Potential sources of danger 1-12

Laser safety 1-13
Laser product classification 1-18
Equipment grounding 1-23
Electrostatic discharge 1-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Potential sources of danger
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Potential sources of danger

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment fulfils all national and international safety
requirements in the countries where the product is sold. The system is provided with a
high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of development experience
and continuous stringent quality checks in our company.
The equipment is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some potential sources of
danger that cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these arise during the:
• opening of housings or equipment covers
• manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from
the power supply
• transportation of subracks and racks
• disconnection of optical or electrical connections.
through the following:
• contact with live parts
• contact with laser light
• contact with hot surfaces
• contact with sharp edges
• acoustic noise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety
System design
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system complies with the regulations FDA/CDRH 21 CFR
1040.10 and 1040.11 issued by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH)
of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) as a Class I laser product and with the
IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1 standards as a Class 1 Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser
product.
The system has been designed to help ensure that the operating personnel are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures
specified in the FDA/CDRH regulations and the international standards IEC 60825-Part 1
and 2 respectively are met.
The following laser warning label (not to scale) is part of the multilabel that is affixed on
the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 or 1830 PSS-64 subrack.
Figure 1-2 Laser warning label (1830 PSS-36/PSS-64)
The following laser warning labels (not to scale) are part of the multilabel that is affixed
on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 or 1830 PSS-32 subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-3 Laser warning label (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32) (1 of 3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: 1830 PSS-16 shelf label shown. Safety information on shelf labels for 1830
PSS-16 and PSS-32 is identical, only the list of supported power supplies is different.
Potential sources of danger

Beware of the following potential sources of danger which will remain despite all safety
measures taken:
• Laser radiation can cause damage to the skin and eyes.
• Laser radiation from optical transmission systems is in a wavelength range that is
invisible to the human eye.
Laser classes
The maximum output power of laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.
The international standards IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1, respectively, as well as the
FDA/CDRH regulations define the maximum output power of laser radiation for each
laser class in accordance with the wavelength.
The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission or the reflected
laser emission to cause injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety instructions
During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is
considered unenclosed.
When working at an unenclosed system, observe the following instructions to avoid
exposing yourself and others to risk:
• Only authorized, trained personnel must be permitted to do service, maintenance, and
restoration. All unauthorized personnel must be excluded from the immediate area of
the optical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and service.
• Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment into operation
or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the optical port units, and
follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
• Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope, because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits
significantly increases the risk of eye damage.
• Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is still switched on.
• Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
• If you are not sure that the optical source is switched off, check to ensure that the
optical switch is switched off by measuring the output power with an optical power
meter.
Laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Devices that are designated as having hazard level 1M laser radiation, can cause damage
to eyes.
Do not view directly with non-attenuating optical instruments.
WARNING
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 MDIO connections are not protected and may defeat the
Automatic (Optical) Power Reduction (APR) when a fault occurs in the power filter or
associated circuitry, and when repairs are being made to the power filter module on
which the MDIO connector is located.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Laser product classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser product classification

Standards compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product complies with the applicable IEC standards and the
Food and Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) regulations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product conforms to Class 1
Laser Product according to IEC standards and FDA/CDRH regulations.
FDA/CDRH regulations
Laser products are classified in accordance with the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 and
1040. The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission to cause
injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
In the United States, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength range (greater
than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes. Please refer to “FDA/CDRH
laser classification” (p. 1-18):
• Class I
• Class IIIb
• Class IV
Laser classification is dependent upon operating wavelength, output power and fiber
mode field diameter (core diameter).
IEC requirements
The International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) establishes standards for the
electrical and electronic industries. The IEC 60825-Part 1 and 2 have been established for
the worldwide safety of laser products.
According to the IEC classification, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength
range (greater than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes. Refer to “OFCS
hazard levels” (p. 1-19):
• Class 1
• Class 1M
• Class 3R
• Class 3B
• Class 4
FDA/CDRH laser classification

Laser classification is dependent upon the following: operating wavelength, output power,
fiber core/mode field diameter, and time base. Other parameters may be required for
non-fibered laser products, such as beam divergence/diameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table cites the FDA/CDRH classification of typical Alcatel-Lucent laser
products at the designated wavelengths that terminate into a single-mode 8.8 μm mode
field diameter fiber. Different mode field diameters and multimode fibers will yield
different optical power levels.
Table 1-1 FDA/CDRH laser classifications
Laser class Wavelength Max. output power of laser radiation

I 1310 nm 1.53 mW +1.85 dBm
1550 nm 8.52 mW +9.3 dBm
IIIb 1310 nm 500 mW +27 dBm
1550 nm 500 mW +27 dBm
IV 1310 nm > 500 mW > +27 dBm
1550 nm > 500 mW > +27 dBm
Explanatory note: In the United States, lasers and laser systems are assigned to one of the
following classes: Roman numerals I, IIa, II, IIIa, IIIb, and IV. Classes I, IIIb and IV
apply to lasers of all wavelengths. Classes IIa, II and IIIa apply only to those lasers
operating within the visible wavelength range (400-700 nm). Alcatel-Lucent laser
products typically operate in the infrared wavelength range (greater than 700 nm) and,
therefore, are primarily in the Class I or Class IIIb classifications.
OFCS hazard levels

The maximum mean power for each hazard level for the most important wavelengths and
optical fiber types used in optical fiber communications (OFCS) (see“Hazard level
assignment” (p. 1-20)) is presented in the following table from IEC 60825-2 standard. For
an OFCS, the hazard level from IEC 60825-2 is closely related to the laser classification
procedure in IEC 60825-1.
Table 1-2 OFCS hazard levels
Wavelength and Hazard level

fiber type
1 1M 2 2M 3R 3B
633 nm (MM) 0,39 mW 3,9 mW 1 mW 10 mW See “Terms and 500 mW

Definitions” 3.9 in
(-4,1 dBm) (+5,9 dBm) (0 dBm) (+ 10 dBm) (+27 dBm)
the Standard
780 nm (MM) 0,57 mW 5,6 mW - - 500 mW

(-2,5 dBm) (+7,5 dBm) (+27 dBm)
850 nm (MM) 0,78 mW 7,8 mW - - 500 mW

(-1,1 dBm) (+8,9 dBm) (+27 dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-2 OFCS hazard levels (continued)
Wavelength and Hazard level

fiber type
1 1M 2 2M 3R 3B
980 nm (MM) 1,42 mW 14,1 mW - - 500 mW

(+1,53 dBm) (+11,5 dBm) (+27 dBm)
980 nm (SM) 1,42 mW 2,66 mW - - 7,26 mW 500 mW

(+1,53 dBm) (+4,2 dBm) (+8,6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1310 nm (MM) 15,6 mW 156 mW - - 500 mW

(+12 dBm) (+21,9 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1310 nm (SM) 15,6 mW 42,8 mW - - 80 mW 500 mW

(+12 dBm) (+16,3 dBm) (+19 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1400 nm ... 1600 10 mW 384 mW - - 500 mW

nm (MM) (+10 dBm) (+25,8 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1420 nm (SM) 10 mW 115 mW - - 500 mW
(+10 dBm) (+20,6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1550 nm (SM) 10 mW 136 mW - 500 mW
(+10 dBm) (+21,3 dBm) (+27 dBm)
Notes:
1. Class 3R only exists if the maximum power is within five times the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) of
Class 1. Please refer to the IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2.0 (2007) and IEC 60825-2 Ed. 3.1 (2007) standards for
detailed information.
2. The fibre parameters used are the most conservative case. Listed figures for the λ = 1310 and 1550 nm are
calculated for a fibre 11 microns mode field diameter (MFD) and those for λ = 980 nm are for 7 microns
MFD.
3. Many systems operating at 1550 nm with the use of erbium doped fibre amplifiers (EDFAs) pumped by 1480
nm or 980 nm lasers use transmission fibres with smaller MFDs. For example, 1550 nm dispersion shifted
fibre cables have upper limit values of MFD of 9,1 microns.
Hazard level assignment

“Hazard level” refers to the potential hazard from laser emission at any location in an
end-to-end optical fiber communication system that may be accessible during service or
in the event of a failure. The assignment of hazard level uses the AELs for the classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hazard levels for optical transmission equipment are assigned in either of the following
two ways:
• The actual output power from the connector or the fiber cut.
• If automatic power reduction is used, the output power at the connector or fiber cut at
one second after automatic power reduction takes place, provided that maximum
output and restart conditions are met.
Classification of optical telecommunication equipment

Optical telecommunication equipment is generally classified as IEC Class 1 or
FDA/CDRH Class I, because under normal operating conditions the transmitter ports
terminate on optical fiber connectors. These are covered by a front panel to ensure
protection against emissions from any energized, unterminated transmitter.
The circuit packs themselves, however, may be IEC Class 1 or 1M or FDA/CDRH Class I
or Class IIIb. The laser class is used to determine the assignment of the hazard level.
According to IEC 60825-1 Edition 2.0 (2007) standard, Class 1 laser products are safe
under reasonably foreseeable conditions, and according to the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR
1040 standard, Class I levels of laser radiation are not considered to be hazardous.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS circuit pack classification

Classification for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS circuit packs are IEC Class 1M and
FDA/CDRH Class IIIB for the following circuit packs:
• ALPHG
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• CWR8
• CWR8B
• CWR8-88
• WR8-88A
• WR8-88AF
• WR2-88
• AM2325A
• ALPFGT
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
• MESH4
• RA2P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Based on the above laser class the circuit packs listed above, individual packs are affixed
with a small “Hazard Level 1M” label shown in the following illustration. Additional
laser safety warnings are listed on product shelf labeling, see Figure 1-2, “Laser warning
label (1830 PSS-36/PSS-64)” (p. 1-13) and Figure 1-3, “Laser warning label (1830
PSS-16/PSS-32)” (p. 1-15).
All other 1830 PSS WDM circuit packs are IEC Class 1 and FDA/CDRH Class I and,
therefore are assigned a hazard level 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Equipment grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment grounding
Importance of proper grounding
An essential aspect for both personal safety and equipment integrity is proper grounding.
To avoid differences of potential, a common ground (GRD) is used for all system part
including peripheral equipment, such as a craft terminal for example.
For safety reasons, each touchable metallic part is connected to GRD by design.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for more
detailed information regarding grounding.
CAUTION
Electric-shock hazard
If the system is not installed in MESH-BN grounding environment but in a star grounding
scheme, all electrical cables such as LAN or timing cables can carry dangerous electrical
current on their shielding.
Take extreme care when plugging or unplugging electrical cables in installations with
star grounding. Never touch grounded parts of the system with one hand when plugging
or unplugging electrical cables with the other hand.
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is designed to permit the connection of the grounded
conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment.
1. This equipment must be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
2. This equipment must be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also the
point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere.
3. The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment.
4. There must be no switching or disconnection devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic discharge
Introduction
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, can destroy
semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no
longer assured.
Industry experience has shown that all semiconductor components can be damaged by
static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The electrostatic
discharge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks. The
electrostatic charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact
with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials
are measured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause
damage can occur anywhere.
The barred-hand symbol

Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostatic
discharge are identified by warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD instructions
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can permanently destroy semiconductor components.
Observe the following ESD instructions to avoid damage to electrostatic-sensitive
components:
• Assume that all solid-state components and assemblies are sensitive to ESD.
• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.
• Touch the circuit packs at the edges or the insertion and removal facilities only.
• Touch the SFP or XFP modules at the edges only.
• Ensure that the rack is grounded.
• Wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap (connected to the rack ESD bonding point,
for example).
• Work in an ESD safe work area or workstation. An ESD safe work area should be
equipped with a grounded ESD wrist strap and a grounded ESD mat or ESD
dissipative work surface.
A grounded ESD mat or work surface must have a ground cord with one end attached
to the mat or surface and the other end connected to a ground point (the rack ESD
bonding point, for example). Do not work with ESD sensitive devices unless the area
is properly equipped.
• Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESD bonding point.
• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packaging. Circuit
packs and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably
protected against build-up of charge.
• Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.
Electric shock
DANGER
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-5 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
Figure 1-6 ESD bonding point at the ETSI One Rack
Legend:
2 ETSI One Rack bottom frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A ESD bonding point
Note: For working on ANSI installation (SNBF rack) use the ESD bonding point at
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
To enable rapid orientation, safety instructions are given on the following pages, which
are assigned to various stages in the life cycle of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment
(“deployment phases”).
Deployment phases
The instructions are arranged according to the following deployment phases:
• “Transportation” (p. 1-30)
• “Storage” (p. 1-33)
• “Installation” (p. 1-37)
• “Taking into operation” (p. 1-43)
• “Operation and maintenance” (p. 1-47)
• “Taking out of operation” (p. 1-58)
• “Event of failure” (p. 1-61)
Contents
Transportation 1-30
Storage 1-33
Installation 1-37
Taking into operation 1-43
Operation and maintenance 1-47
Taking out of operation 1-58
Event of failure 1-61
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Transportation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transportation
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subracks weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack
can still weigh more than 30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
Damage to system components under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage system components and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during transportation; please see “Environmental
conditions for transportation” (p. 1-31).
Environmental conditions for transportation

ETSI market
For the transportation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard
EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3 “Public transportation” are met. This class applies to
transportation where no special precautions have been taken. The conditions covered
include transportation in unventilated enclosures and in non-weather-protected conditions
with restrictions on the general open-air climates, excluding cold climates.
For quick reference, Table 1-3, “Temperature and humidity levels for transportation
(ETSI market)” (p. 1-31) shows the most important climatic values specified in the
requirement.
Table 1-3 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –40°C (–40°F)

High air temperature in unventilated enclosures 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature in ventilated enclosures or outdoor 40°C (104°F)
air
Relative humidity not combined with rapid temperature 95% at 45°C (113°F)
changes
Relative humidity combined with rapid temperature 95% at –40°C to 30°C (–40 to 86°F)
changes air/air
Absolute humidity combined with rapid temperature 60 g/m3 at 70°C to 15°C (158 to 58°F)
changes air/air
ANSI market
For the transportation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-65 [107]: Category A containers (<100 kg), packaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-66 [108]: Category B containers (>100 kg), shock/drop criteria
• R4-67 [109]: Unpackaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-83 [124]: Transportation vibration, no physical damage
For quick reference, Table 1-4, “Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI
market)” (p. 1-32) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-4 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)
Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5

minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes
Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
changes
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours

Robustness against mechanical shocks (fully equipped Permissible drop height for packaged equipment: 100
rack or subrack) mm (3.9 in)
Permissible drop height for unpackaged equipment: 2.5
mm (1 in)
Vibration levels which can typically be expected during

transportation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Storage
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Circuit packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible. Always observe the ESD instructions (see “Electrostatic
discharge” (p. 1-24)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during storage; please see “Environmental conditions for
storage” (p. 1-34).
Environmental conditions for storage

ETSI market
For the storage phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN 300 019-1-1,
class 1.2 “Weather-protected, not temperature-controlled storage locations” are met. This
class applies to weather-protected storage having neither temperature nor humidity
control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, that means, it may be
only partly weather-protected.
For quick reference, Table 1-5, “Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI
market)” (p. 1-34) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-7, “Temperature and humidity levels for
storage (ETSI market)” (p. 1-35).
Table 1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –25°C (–13°F)
High air temperature 55°C (131°F)
Low relative humidity 10%
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
(continued)
Conditions Limits
High relative humidity 100%
Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
Figure 1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
o o
F C
194 90
176 80
158 70
140 60
122 50
104 40
86 30 29
68 20
50 10 4
32 0
14 –10
–4 –20 3
0.5
–22 –30
–40 –40
–58 –50
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0281
Legend:
1 Air temperature
2 Relative air humidity [%]
3 Absolute air humidity [g/m3]

4 Conditions for storage
ANSI market
For the storage phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE
are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For quick reference, Table 1-6, “Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)”
(p. 1-36) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-6 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)
Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5

minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes

Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
changes
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation
Risk of electric shock
WARNING
Risk of short circuits when power is supplied to the High Power Connection, Fuse &
Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) during the installation of subrack power cables. Contact with
energized parts can cause serious personal injury.
Before connecting any subrack power cables be sure that all circuit breakers that are
located in the HPCFAP are in the OFF position.
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser warning labels
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
Acoustic noise
WARNING
Acoustic noise hazard
The operation of more than one system could cause noise levels in working environments
(for example system test floors) that are harmful to human beings.
The infrastructure of such facilities needs to take care for the protection of work force in
that environment. National laws and regulations for safe working places need to be taken
into account.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Hold circuit packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities. Always
observe the ESD instructions (see “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-24)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condensation
NOTICE
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is –5°C (+23°F); see the section “Climatic conditions for stationary
operation” (p. 1-53).
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overcurrent protecting device
NOTICE
If the wrong type of circuit breaker is used with this equipment, the equipment may be
severely damaged due to overcurrent.
Always ensure that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack is installed in combination
with a Power Distribution Unit - ETSI or Power Distribution Unit - ANSI (PDU1C,
PDU2C), respectively. The circuitbreakers used in the PDU1C/PDU2C allow a maxium
current of 50 A.
Never install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack in combination with a High Power
Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP). The circuitbreakers used in the HPCFAP
allow a maxium current of 100 A.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of fire due to overheating
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that
• All the required fan units are installed (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: one, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64:
two)
• The individual fans are not obstructed
• That all of the following aids for cooling air flow are installed as needed for their
respective subracks:
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 air deflector (left
side the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 air deflector
(above the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack bottom
plate
(beneath the subrack)
• All empty slots are covered with blank front plates
• The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in
the case of BT/BTC removal)
• The dust filter is not clogged
• That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of
the dust filter is correct, such that the dust filter carrier
prevents the dust filter from being sucked into the fan
unit (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and
System Turn-Up Guide).
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of –3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connections over short distances for test purposes.
Receiver sensitivities
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
“Technical Specifications” chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Taking into operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking into operation

Invisible laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
“Laser safety” (p. 1-13)).
Acoustic noise
WARNING
into account.
Power wiring
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to incorrect power wiring
Incorrect power wiring can cause equipment damage.
All power wires must be properly connected before powering up the system by switching
on the circuit breakers. For details see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Arcing
WARNING
Power Interface: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply
plug
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Before removing or connecting the power supply lugs at the
Power Interface, ensure that the line circuit breakers on the PDU1C/PDU2C are in the
“OFF” position.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Before removing the power supply cable at a Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8), ensure that all associated circuit breakers
that are located in the external High Power Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
are in the “OFF” position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: If the system is operated with only one Power Interface
Card (PFC), electrical connectors on the backplane carrying a voltage of –48 V DC can
be touched. This can cause electric shocks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: If the system is operated with only one Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors
on the backplane carrying a voltage of –48 V DC can be touched. This can cause electric
shocks.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32: Two PFDC DC Power Filters of the appropriate
capacity, or one filter when the other power filter slot is covered by an ECBNK Power
Filter Blank.
Filter Blank.
Supply voltage
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to a supply voltage of incorrect polarity or
too high
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment operates at a nominal voltage of –48 V or –60 V. The
permissible voltage range is –40.5 V to –72 V. A supply voltage outside this specification
or of incorrect polarity can lead to permanent damage of system components.
Ensure that the supply voltage has the correct range and polarity before connecting the
voltage. Ensure also the correct polarity (sequence) of both power feeders.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fusing
NOTICE
Fire hazard
If the system is not secured by appropriate circuit breakers, a short-circuit can cause
severe damage to the system, for example a fire in the network element.
Protect all supply lines with line circuit breakers matched to the load of the subrack
equipment. Note the relevant guide values in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide.
Condensation
NOTICE
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is –5°C (+23°F); see the section “Climatic conditions for stationary
operation” (p. 1-53).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Operation and maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation and maintenance

WARNING
Laser hazard
Arcing
WARNING
plug
“OFF” position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: If the system is operated with only one Power Interface
Card (PFC), electrical connectors on the backplane carrying a voltage of –48 V DC can
be touched. This can cause electric shocks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: If the system is operated with only one Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors
on the backplane carrying a voltage of –48 V DC can be touched. This can cause electric
shocks.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
Filter Blank.
Filter Blank.
Laser warning labels
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Acoustic noise
WARNING
into account.
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of fire due to overheating
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that
• All the required fan units are installed (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: one, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64:
two)
• The individual fans are not obstructed
• That all of the following aids for cooling air flow are installed as needed for their
respective subracks:
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 air deflector (left
side the subrack)
(above the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack bottom
plate
(beneath the subrack)
• All empty slots are covered with blank front plates
• The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in
the case of BT/BTC removal)
• The dust filter is not clogged
• That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of
the dust filter is correct, such that the dust filter carrier
prevents the dust filter from being sucked into the fan
unit (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and
System Turn-Up Guide).
Risk of system shut-down during maintenance activities
NOTICE
System shut-down when switching off all power supply feeders
Bringing the circuit breakers of all power supply feeders in the OFF position leads to a
shut-down of the complete system.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: When carrying out maintenance work at one of the two
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) A or B, switch off only those
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
circuit breakers that are directly associated to the corresponding PSF3T8. For each
PSF3T8 there are three power supply feeders, and each power supply feeder has an
associated circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are located in the High Power
Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP).
Risk of equipment damage during maintenance activities
NOTICE
Equipment can be damaged during in-service replacement of components
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: During in-service replacement of system components above
the Fan Unit, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other objects may fall into the Fan
Unit.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: During in-service replacement of the upper Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) A, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other
objects may fall into the upper fan tray (Fan Unit A).
Take utmost care to prevent nuts or cable ends from falling into the system.
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of –3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
connections over short distances for test purposes.
Receiver sensitivities
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
“Technical Specifications” chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Short-circuit
NOTICE
Destruction of circuit packs in the event of a short-circuit
A short-circuit in the network element can cause destruction of electronic components
and thus malfunctioning of the complete system.
You must therefore not handle objects such as a screwdriver in the circuit pack area of the
subrack.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Always use the special extraction tool for the insertion and
the removal of bus termination cards.
Climatic conditions
NOTICE
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the “Climatic conditions for stationary operation” (p. 1-53) are complied
with during operation.
Climatic conditions for stationary operation

The cold start temperature of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is –5°C (+23°F).
ETSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN
300 019-1-3E, class 3.1 “Temperature-controlled location with exceptional conditions”
are met. This class applies to a permanently temperature-controlled enclosed location.
Humidity is usually not controlled.
For quick reference, Table 1-7, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI
market)” (p. 1-54) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-8, “Temperature and humidity levels for
operation (ETSI market)” (p. 1-55).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Rack level (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64) Subrack level (Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-36)
Minimum air temperature Normal operating: Normal operating:

5°C (41°F) 5°C (41°F)
Short term (extended): Short term (extended):
–5°C (28°F) –5°C (28°F)
Maximum air temperature Normal operating: Normal operating:

40°C (104°F) 45°C (113°F)
Short term (extended): Short term (extended):
50°C (122°F) 55°C (131°F)
Low relative humidity 5%
High relative humidity 90%
Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
Figure 1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
o o
F C
140 60
122 50
6 5
104 40
86 30
25
20
68 20 4
50 10
32 0 6
14 –10
1.5 3
1.0
–4 –20
–22 –30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1
2
g-pipg-0282
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1 Air temperature

4 Values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%
5 Normal operating conditions: values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
6 Exceptional climatic limits
ANSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-6 [72]: Ambient temperature and humidity limits as shown in Table 1-8,
“Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 1-55) and Figure
1-9, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 1-56)
• R4-8 [74], R4-9 [136], R4-10 [75]: Requirements for altitude
• R4-68 [110], R4-69 [111], R4-70 [112], R4-72 [114], R4-75 [117], R4-81 [122],
R4-82 [123]: Requirements for dynamic shock, vibration, and earthquake. The chassis
resistance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is compliant with zone 4 earthquake and office
vibrations.
Table 1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Rack level (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64) Subrack level (Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-36)
Ambient1 temperature Range Range

• Operating (up to 1800 m) • 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) • 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F)
• Short-term2 • –5°C to 50°C (23°F to 122°F) • –5°C to 55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Rate of temperature change 30 K/h (54°F/min)

1
Ambient relative humidity Range
• Operating • 5% to 85%
• Short-term • 5% to 90%, but not to exceed 0.024 kg water/kg of dry air
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. “Ambient” refers to conditions at a location 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor and 400 mm (15.8 in) in front of
the equipment.
2. “Short-term” refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in
1 year. This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but no more than 15 occurrences during that
1-year period. The long-term operating temperature range is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) on rack level and
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 1113°F) on shelf level (see “Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI”
(p. 1-56)). It is given for the purposes of reliability assessment.
Figure 1-9 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
o o
F C
158 70
140 60
5
122 50
104 40
86 30 24
68 20 4
50 10
3
32 0
14 –10
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0280
Legend:
1 Air temperature
4 Normal operating conditions
5 Short-term conditions
Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI

The following describes the Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI
• Telcordia frame-level (subrack is more than 36” [=914.4 mm] in height)
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a 12" or 14” deep
SNBF (ANSI rack) with one installed subrack (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64),
including subrack covers.
• Telcordia shelf-level (subrack is less than or equal to 36” [=914.4 mm] in height)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted
into an open rack.
• ETSI rack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a 300 mm ETSI rack with
one installed subrack (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64), including optional rack doors
and side-panels.
• ETSI subrack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted
into an open rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Taking out of operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking out of operation

WARNING
Laser hazard
Arcing
WARNING
plug
“OFF” position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
Disposal
The equipment in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system series must be disposed of at the
end of its lifetime. Please contact us in this case and we will arrange for proper and
environment-friendly disposal of your equipment (most parts of the system can be
recycled).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Event of failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event of failure
Hazard levels
In the event of failure, the hazard levels given in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product
Information and Planning Guide apply. The hazard levels define the potential optical
hazard at any accessible location within an optical fiber telecommunication system. See
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide.
WARNING
Laser hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Safety Event of failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Part II: Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 physical and
power installation
Overview
Purpose
This part of the Installation Guide includes the chapters to physically install and power
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS-32) (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)
NE. These chapters are written assuming working knowledge of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 and its operations.
Required tools
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is a subrack product, designed to fit in ANSI, EIA or ETSI
bay frames. The following list of tools is recommended, but may not be applicable for all
installations, nor is it necessarily complete for all installations. Special tools may be
required for some sites and/or situations.
Description Part Number Comments

Assorted screwdrivers Flat blade and phillips.
Must include flat blade
jewelers style for setting
subrack ID
Torx drivers Must include T8, T20,and
T25
Metric wrenches and/or sockets
SAE wrenches and/or sockets
ESD wrist strap
TBM5 crimping tool or TBM5S R-5584 R5584B R4875 Hand hydraulic Battery
crimping tool or TBM6 crimping hydraulic Alternate
tool crimper
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary II-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Assortment of dies for Correct dies will depend
TBM5/TBM5S/TBM6 upon customer provided
power cables
Wire Stripper 407578756 (R-5962) Non-Insulated Insulated
R-5875 R-2761 Power Knife
Punchdown tool Comcode 107900995 Z-IDC Wire Insertion Tool
Heat gun For heat shrink tubing
Special tools
Some special tools may be required to install and maintain the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32. The following special tools are available. See “Special tools” (p. ii).
Description Part number Comments

Screwdriver (long #2 1AD 00861 0003 For half-slot adapter mounting
Phillips) (about 13" or 330 mm long)
SFP module removal tool 3AL81728AA Included with each subrack
Extraction tool 8DG59614AA For removing XFP modules and
disconnecting LC fibers. included
with each subrack.
Half-slot adapter tool 8DG07796AA For installation and alignment of
half slot adapters.
Test equipment

Multimeter Protek D981(ITE #6930 or For measuring 40-60 V DC and
Fluke 189 (ITE #6379A) ground continuity.
or equivalent
Optical power meter with ITE #7116 Noyes -Model For optical power measurements
appropriate connectors with LC adapter. or
ITE#71992D2
Acterna/WG with LC
connector, or equivalent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber cleaning and inspection tools
There are numerous optical fiber scopes listed in “Fiber cleaning and inspection tools”
(p. iii) It it not necessary to have all of them on hand, it is only necessary to be able to
clean and inspect LC male and female connectors.
Description Commercial part Installation order number

number or comcode
Fiber cleaning kit TK-0621 Kit includes the Each item can be ordered separately
following
ITE #6408A D6 Case
ITE #7051 Coupler, Fiber
(ST-ST)
ITE #7093 Coupling
Duplex SC
ITE #7125 Coupler
LC-LC fiber
ITE #7134 Luminex Stick
Port cleaner 1.25 mm
ITE #7135 Luminex Stick
Port cleaner 2.5 mm
33713500
ITE #7136 Wipes, Alcohol
33713600
ITE #7137 CLETOP
cleaning cassette Type B.
33713700
ITE #7137A D1 CLETOP
cleaning cassette refills.
3371370
ITE #7177 Optical fiber
Microscope, Westover
R-6033 Cloth, Lumionex.
23603300
Fiber Microscope ITE #7177
Westover Video Fiber TE #7187
Scope
Westover Video Fiber ITE #7187A
Scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary II-3
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description Commercial part Installation order number

number or comcode
Noyes Video Fiber Scope 408356830 (ITE #7146) 41714600
(VFS-1)
1.25-mm Adapter for 408356848 (ITE 33714601 Used to inspect circuit
VFS-1 #7146D1) pack faceplate fiber ports
LC Adapter for VFS-1 408356889 (ITE 33714604
#7146D4)
Noyes OFS 300-200X 408463636 (ITE #7129) 33712900
Optical Fiber Scope
(used to inspect fiber)
1.25-mm Adapter for 408197069 (ITE 33712902
Noyes OFS #7129D2)
Contents
Chapter 2, Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) 2-1

Chapter 3, Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent 3-1
1830 PSS-32)
Chapter 4, Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 4-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
2 2quipment installation
E
(Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the information to install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS-32) subrack, flex shelf and miscellaneously mounted equipment into an
existing bay frame or rack.
Instructions for the miscellaneously mounted equipment and Flex Shelf are suitable for
use with other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS shelf types and are not repeated in other
chapters.
If subrack is to be installed in an enclosed cabinet, ensure that cabinet design does not
impede airflow or direct exhaust air from one subrack to the intake of another. Subracks
should not be installed back to back or directly against a wall, due to cooling air exhaust
flow requirements. See: Figure 2-1, “Air flow diagrams” (p. 2-3).
Contents
Installation options/requirements 2-2

Subrack and Flex shelf installation in an EIA bay frame 2-4
SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an EIA bay frame with or 2-22
without flex shelf
Subrack and flex shelf Installation in an ANSI bay frame 2-31
SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an ANSI bay frame with 2-50
or without flex shelf
Subrack and equipment installation in an ETSI rack 2-63
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Installation options/requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation options/requirements
Bay frame/rack options
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks, flex shelves, and miscellaneous equipment
must be mounted into a bay frame or rack. The equipment is compatible with an ANSI
(23") bay frame, an ETSI rack (ETS 300119-3 Standards) or an EIA (19") bay frame. It is
assumed that the bay frame or rack has already been installed properly, including
earthquake mounting and grounding.
The placement of the subracks, flex shelves, and miscellaneous equipment will vary with
different site-specific needs and system configurations. The figures in this installation
manual are examples of how the subracks flex shelves, and miscellaneous equipment can
be mounted. Please consult site-specific documentation or EPT installation diagrams and
reports for exact placement of subracks flex shelves, and miscellaneous equipment; and
auxiliary equipment such as Raman or EDFA boosters (which are not covered in this
document).
Cooling considerations
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks may only be installed back to back in the same bay
or rack if there is a minimum of 8 inches between the rear surfaces of the subracks.
Otherwise, doing so will impede airflow and prevent adequate system cooling.
When installing more than one subrack in a bay or rack, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
subracks should be installed in bays or racks from the bottom to the top, if possible.
Minimize gaps between Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks by nesting them together
to prevent hot exhaust air from the lower subrack being drawn into the upper subrack. If
an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack is installed directly above another Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subrack, leave the baffle off of the lower subrack and install the two
subracks with as little gap as possible between them (nest them). The bottom of the upper
subrack acts as a baffle for the lower subrack.
When possible, remove the air baffle from the upper Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack
to improve airflow, but ensure there is at least 60 mm of space between the top of the
upper subrack and any equipment (except another Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack)
above it. For EIA and ANSI applications, there must be a minimum gap of 4” behind the
equipment if it is being installed against a wall.
In addition, if two bays are mounted back to back, there must be a minimum space of 8”
between the backs of the two rear facing shelves to ensure proper cooling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Installation options/requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 Air flow diagrams
Fastener torque values

Please refer Appendix B, “Tightening torque” to determine proper torque values for the
fasteners used with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32. All fasteners must be tightened to the
values specified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Subrack and Flex shelf installation in an EIA bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack and Flex shelf installation in an EIA bay frame

Flex shelf installation in an EIA bay frame
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install Flex shelf brackets using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side as shown in
Figure 2-2, “Flex shelf bracket installation” (p. 2-4).
Figure 2-2 Flex shelf bracket installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install left side and right side (they are marked "L" and "R") Flex shelf cover brackets
using four M4x8 pan head (cheese head) screws (1AD008860021), installed from the
inside of the uprights, per side. See Figure 2-3, “Flex shelf cover installation” (p. 2-5).
Figure 2-3 Flex shelf cover installation
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack installation in an EIA bay frame
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The upper fiber/cable tray cover is pre-installed on the shelf. See: Figure 2-4, “Upper
fiber/cable cover installation” (p. 2-6)
Figure 2-4 Upper fiber/cable cover installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install the upper cover mounting brackets (upper fiber guides) as shown using three (3)
M2.5x5 pan head (cheese head) screws (1AD013170042) per side as shown in Figure 2-5,
“Upper cover mounting bracket” (p. 2-7). It is recommended that the upper fiber guides
be installed before installing the shelf onto the rack. If the shelf is being installed in a
cabinet with a door, the upper cover mounting brackets are not required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Use the three holes at the rear of the upper fiber guide. See Figure 2-5, “Upper
cover mounting bracket” (p. 2-7).
Figure 2-5 Upper cover mounting bracket
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install left and right middle fiber guides onto subrack using four M5x8 pan head (cheese
head) screws (1AD013170044) per side. See Figure 2-7, “Middle fiber guide mounting”
(p. 2-9).
Note: Power cables that are run from above the bay need to be routed through the
middle fiber guides. It's often easier to pre-install the power cables, prior to mounting
the subrack in the bay frame. To pre-install power cables, loosely install only the top
M5x8 (1AD013170044) mounting screw into the fiber guide and subrack to allow the
fiber guide to swing out to allow easy power cable installation. See Figure 2-6,
“Middle fiber guide and power cable installation” (p. 2-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If power cables are run from the bottom of the bay, install middle fiber guides
after the subrack is mounted in the bay frame.
Figure 2-6 Middle fiber guide and power cable installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-7 Middle fiber guide mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install left and right lower fiber guides, part number 8DG59652AAAA, using two M4x8
pan head (cheese head) screws (1AD008860021) per side. See Figure 2-8, “Lower fiber
guide installation” (p. 2-10).
Figure 2-8 Lower fiber guide installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Install left and right front cover hinge pins with two M3x8 flat head screws
(1AD009040005) per side. See Figure 2-9, “Front cover hinge pin installation” (p. 2-11).
Figure 2-9 Front cover hinge pin installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If using an air deflector (baffle), mount it to the top of the subrack.. See Figure 2-11,
“EIA subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 2-13). Make sure all four (4) pins in the
subrack fully engage all four (4) slots in air deflector. See Figure 2-10, “Air deflector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
installation” (p. 2-12). Gentle downward pressure is required to compress the gasket on
the air deflector enough to engage the slots and pins. Secure air deflector with two
captured screws on the front of air deflector.
Figure 2-10 Air deflector installation
Note: Do not use air deflector when "nesting" subracks. See “Cooling considerations”
(p. 2-2) for a description of "nesting".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Install the reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets with the short side out. See Figure
2-11, “EIA subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 2-13) and Figure 2-12, “EIA subrack
mounting bracket position detail” (p. 2-14). The brackets are marked for left and right use
and are not interchangeable. Use four M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per side,
installed from the inside of the uprights.
Figure 2-11 EIA subrack mounting bracket position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-12 EIA subrack mounting bracket position detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Install two12-24 screws (1AD139920001) in each EIA bay upright (total of four screws)
leaving 22 open screw holes between them. These screw will align with the upper and
lower keyhole slots in the subrack mounting brackets. Leave approximately 1/4" (7mm)
of threads exposed on each screw.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Install subrack into bay frame by locating the keyhole slots in the subrack mounting
brackets onto the screws installed into each bay upright. Tighten all four screws. Install
two more 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) through the subrack mounting brackets into
each EIA bay upright (for a total of eight mounting screws) and tighten them. See Figure
2-13, “Subrack installed in EIA bay frame” (p. 2-15).
Figure 2-13 Subrack installed in EIA bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle mounted in a 19-inch
(EIA) rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack cover installation
Use Step 1 to install cover extension 8DG59535AAAA, if used, otherwise skip to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach 1U cover extension to main subrack cover. Align 4 screws in 1U cover with 4
keyhole slots in main cover. Tighten screws with Phillips screwdriver. See Figure 2-15,
“Aligns screws with keyhole slots” (p. 2-17).
Note: Do not use 1U cover extension when "nesting" subracks. See “Cooling
considerations” (p. 2-2) for a description of "nesting".
Figure 2-15 Aligns screws with keyhole slots
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install subrack covers by aligning slots in cover with hinge pins [see Figure 2-16, “Align
slots in cover with hinge pins” (p. 2-18)] and by aligning and fully installing the cover
latches in the upper fiber guides at the top of the shelf, See Figure 2-17, “Latch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alignment” (p. 2-19). Using a coin or a flat blade screwdriver, rotate latches clockwise
until they "click" to lock cover in place. To unlock latches for cover removal, rotate them
counter-clockwise.
Figure 2-16 Align slots in cover with hinge pins
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-17 Latch alignment
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extended subrack cover installation
Note: Use of the extended subrack cover kit will violate a 12" footprint.
The cover extension kit contains 2 extended upper fiber guides, 4 new hinge pin
screws, and 2 hinge pin extension blocks as shown in Figure 2-18, “Cover extension
kit parts” (p. 2-20).
Some applications require the use of extended cover mounting hardware. This hardware
expands the volume between the circuit pack faceplates and the shelf cover by 30mm,
allowing for the use of non-compliant fiber connector boots and faceplate attenuators.
Use the following instructions to install the cover extender kit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the extended upper fibers guides using Step 2.
Figure 2-18 Cover extension kit parts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The extension blocks are relieved on one side to fit over protrusions on the subrack. They
can only be installed one way. See Figure 2-19, “Correct extension block orientation”
(p. 2-20)
Figure 2-19 Correct extension block orientation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install hinge pins and hinge pin extension blocks using two M3x40 screws
(1AD037150001) per side. Hinge pins should face in. See Figure 2-20, “Hinge pin
extension block installation” (p. 2-21)
Figure 2-20 Hinge pin extension block installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an EIA
bay frame with or without flex shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an EIA

SFD44 or SFD44B installation in a flex shelf
Use the following instructions to install kit 8DG59603AAAA:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the EIA/ANSI brackets (8DG59509AAAA) on both sides of the SFD44 or SFD
44B using four M4x8 flathead screws (1AD009040009) per side. See Figure 2-21,
“SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting” (p. 2-22).
Figure 2-21 SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount the SFD44 or SFD44B to the flex shelf using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001)
per side. See Figure 2-24, “Components installed in flex shelf” (p. 2-25).
Note: The SFD44 or SFD 44B may be mounted in the upper (shown), middle or
lower position within the flex shelf depending on the configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber storage tray (FST) installation in a flex shelf
Use the following instructions to install kit 1AD151930001
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the EIA/ANSI mounting brackets to both sides of the fiber storage tray using the
supplied hardware.
Note: The fiber storage tray has several installation options for the mounting bracket
orientation and position. Install brackets precisely as shown in Figure 2-22, “FST
mounting bracket installation” (p. 2-23).
The FST is delivered with detailed instructions for mounting brackets, consult these
instructions if needed.
Figure 2-22 FST mounting bracket installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount the FST to the flex shelf using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side. See
Figure 2-24, “Components installed in flex shelf” (p. 2-25).
Note: The FST may be mounted in the upper, middle (shown) or lower position
within the flex shelf depending on the configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Some applications may call for an attenuation drawer. It is installed in the same
manner as an FST. See Figure 2-23, “Attenuation drawer” (p. 2-24).
Figure 2-23 Attenuation drawer
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Single DCM shelf installation in an EIA flex shelf
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Mount the DCM shelf to the flex shelf using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side.
See Figure 2-24, “Components installed in flex shelf” (p. 2-25).
Figure 2-24 Components installed in flex shelf
Note: Single DCM shelf may be mounted in the upper, middle, or lower (shown)
position within the flex shelf depending on the configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SFD44 and SFD44B miscellaneous mounting (without Flex shelf)

SFD44 and SFD44B shelves may be installed in an EIA bay without using a flex shelf.
Location of these shelves is determined by the site-specific documentation. Use the
following instructions to install kit 8DG59603AAAA with additional kit
8DG60130AAAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach EIA brackets to SFD shelf as shown in Figure 2-25, “EIA bracket installation on
SFD44/SFD44B” (p. 2-26) Use four M4x8 flat head screws (1AD009040009) per
bracket.
Figure 2-25 EIA bracket installation on SFD44/SFD44B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount SFD in bay using four 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) and install cover. See
Figure 2-26, “SFD44 installed in EIA bay” (p. 2-26)
Figure 2-26 SFD44 installed in EIA bay
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40 and SFD40B miscellaneous mounting
SFD40 and SFD40B shelves may be installed directly in an EIA bay. Location of these
shelves is determined by the site-specific documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach EIA brackets [see Figure 2-27, “EIA bracket for SFD40/SFD40B” (p. 2-27)] to
each side of the SFD. Use three flat head screws (1AD009820010) per bracket.
Figure 2-27 EIA bracket for SFD40/SFD40B
Table 2-1 SFD40/40B mounting brackets
EIA/ANSI 8DG17585AA** MPP-ADAPTER-19 INCH

8DG17585AC** MPP-ADAPTER-23 INCH
ETSI 8DG17585AB** MPP-ADAPTER-21 INCH
8DG17585AA** MPP-ADAPTER-19 INCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount SFD in bay using four 12-24 screws (1AD139920001).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DCM shelf miscellaneous mounting

DCM shelves may be installed in an EIA bay without using a flex shelf. Location of these
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach mounting ears to the DCM shelf using two M5x8 pan head (cheese head) screws
(1AD013170044) per side. Use the fourth pairs of holes (from the front) on the sides of
the DCM shelf as shown in Figure 2-28, “Correct holes for EIA bracket installation”
(p. 2-28). Screws are installed from the inside of the DCM shelf as shown in Figure 2-29,
“Install screws from inside the DCM shelf.” (p. 2-28)
Figure 2-28 Correct holes for EIA bracket installation
Figure 2-29 Install screws from inside the DCM shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount DCM shelf in bay four 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) and install cover. See
Figure 2-30, “DCM shelf installed in bay” (p. 2-29)
Figure 2-30 DCM shelf installed in bay
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Punch down block installation
Some applications require the use of a punch down block to connect miscellaneous
equipment (such as the Raman shelf or EDFA booster) to the housekeeping port on the
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 user panel. The punch down block assembly can be installed
anywhere within the reach of the housekeeping cable and the cables for the miscellaneous
equipment. Install the punch down block assembly using the following procedure. Pin
designations for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 housekeeping cable and procedures for
connecting wires to the punch down block can be found in Chapter 3, “Cable, fan tray, air
filter and user panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Assemble short side of reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets to punch down block
subrack using three M3x5 screws (1AD047710001) per side. See Figure 2-31, “Punch
down block brackets for EIA bay” (p. 2-30)
Figure 2-31 Punch down block brackets for EIA bay
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount punch down block assembly into bay using four 12-24 screws (1AD139920001).
See Figure 2-32, “Punch down assembly in EIA bay” (p. 2-30)
Figure 2-32 Punch down assembly in EIA bay
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Subrack and flex shelf Installation in an ANSI bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack and flex shelf Installation in an ANSI bay frame

Install the subrack and flex shelf on the narrow faces of the ANSI frame, as shown in
Figure 2-33, “Flex shelf adapter bracket” (p. 2-31).
Flex shelf installation in an ANSI bay frame

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the (2U) flex shelf adapter brackets (left & right parts are the same) using two
12-24 screws (1AD139920001) on each side. as shown in Figure 2-33, “Flex shelf
adapter bracket” (p. 2-31).
Note: If DCM shelf will be installed, do not install lower (2U) flex shelf adapter
brackets.
Figure 2-33 Flex shelf adapter bracket
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install left side and right side (they are marked "L" and "R") upper flex shelf brackets
using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side. If lower flex shelf brackets (see
above) are installed, the upper brackets should be installed directly above the lower
brackets. See Figure 2-34, “Flex shelf bracket installed” (p. 2-32).
Figure 2-34 Flex shelf bracket installed
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack installation in an ANSI bay frame
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The upper fiber/cable tray cover is pre-installed on the shelf. See Figure 2-35, “Upper
fiber/cable cover installation” (p. 2-33).
Figure 2-35 Upper fiber/cable cover installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install the upper cover mounting brackets (upper fiber guides) as shown using 3 M2.5x5
pan head (cheese head) screws (1AD013170042) per side as shown in Figure 2-36,
“Upper cover mounting bracket” (p. 2-34).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Use the three holes at the rear of the upper fiber guide. See Figure 2-36, “Upper
cover mounting bracket” (p. 2-34).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install left and right middle fiber guides onto subrack using four M5x8 pan head (cheese
head) screws (1AD013170044). See Figure 2-39, “Middle fiber guide mounting”
(p. 2-37).
Note: Power cables need to be routed through the middle fiber guides. It's often easier
to pre-install the power cables, prior to mounting the subrack in the bay frame. To
pre-install power cables, loosely install only the top M5x8 mounting screw into the
fiber guide and subrack to allow the fiber guide to swing out to allow easy power
cable installation. See Figure 2-37, “Middle fiber guide and power cable installation”
(p. 2-35).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When completely assembled and installed, cables should be routed behind the middle
fiber guides as shown in Figure 2-38, “Cable routing example” (p. 2-36).
Figure 2-37 Middle fiber guide and power cable installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-38 Cable routing example
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-39 Middle fiber guide mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Install left and right front cover hinge pins with two M3x8 screws (1AD009040005) per
side. See Figure 2-41, “Front cover hinge pin installation” (p. 2-39).
Figure 2-41 Front cover hinge pin installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If using an air deflector (baffle), mount it to the top of the subrack. See Figure 2-43,
“ANSI subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 2-41). Make sure all 4 pins in the subrack
fully engage all 4 slots in air deflector. See Figure 2-42, “Air deflector installation”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-40). Gentle downward pressure is required to compress the gasket on the air
deflector enough to engage the slots and pins. Secure air deflector with two captured
screws.
Figure 2-42 Air deflector installation
Note: Do not use air deflector when "nesting" subracks. See “Cooling considerations”
(p. 2-2) for a description of "nesting".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Install the reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets with the long side out. See Figure
2-43, “ANSI subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 2-41) and Figure 2-44, “ANSI
subrack mounting bracket position detail” (p. 2-42). The brackets are marked for left and
right use and are not interchangeable. Use four M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013)
per side.
Figure 2-43 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-44 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Install two12-24 screws (1AD139920001) in each ANSI bay upright (total of four screws)
leaving 20 open screw holes between them. These screws will align with the upper and
lower keyholes in subrack mounting brackets. Leave approximately 1/4" (7mm) of
threads exposed on each screw.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Install subrack into bay frame by locating the upper and lower keyhole slots in the
subrack mounting brackets onto the screws installed into each bay upright. Tighten all
four screws. Install two more 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) through the remaining holes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
in the subrack mounting brackets and into each ANSI bay upright (for a total of eight
mounting screws) and tighten them. See Figure 2-45, “Subrack installed in ANSI bay
frame” (p. 2-43).
Figure 2-45 Subrack installed in ANSI bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle - ANSI
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use Step 1 to install cover extension 8DG59535AAAA, if used, otherwise skip to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach 1U cover extension to main subrack cover. Align four screws in 1U cover with
four keyhole slots in main cover. Tighten screws with Phillips screwdriver. See Figure
2-15, “Aligns screws with keyhole slots” (p. 2-17).
Note: Do not use 1U cover extension when "nesting" subracks. See “Cooling
considerations” (p. 2-2) for a description of "nesting".
Figure 2-47 Aligns screws with keyhole slots
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
latches in the upper fiber guides at the top of the shelf. See Figure 2-17, “Latch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following instructions to install the cover extender kit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Use of the extended subrack cover kit will violate a 12" footprint.
Install the extended upper fibers guides using Step 2.
Note: The cover extension kit contains 2 extended upper fiber guides, 4 new hinge pin
screws, and 2 hinge pin extension blocks as shown in Figure 2-50, “Cover extension
kit parts” (p. 2-48).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-48)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(1AD037150001) per side. Hinge pins should face in.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
latches in the upper fiber guides at the top of the shelf. Using a coin or a flat blade
screwdriver, rotate latches clockwise until they "click" to lock cover in place. To unlock
latches for cover removal, rotate them counter-clockwise.
Refer to Figure 2-49, “Latch alignment” (p. 2-47).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an
ANSI bay frame with or without flex shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD, fiber storage tray, and DCM shelf installation in an ANSI

SDF44 Installation in a flex shelf
Use the following instructions to install kit 8DG59603AAAA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the EIA/ANSI brackets (8DG59509AAAA) on both sides of the SFD44 or

SFD44B using four M4x8 flat head screws (1AD009040009) per side. See Figure 2-53,
“SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting” (p. 2-50).
Note: Use the screw holes closest to the front of the SFD44 or SFD44B.
Figure 2-53 SFD44 or SFD44B EIA/ANSI bracket mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount the SFD44 or SFD44B to the flex shelf using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001)
per side. See Figure 2-54, “SFD44 or SFD44B installed in flex shelf” (p. 2-51).
Figure 2-54 SFD44 or SFD44B installed in flex shelf
Note: The SFD44 or SFD44B may be mounted in the upper (shown), middle, or
lower position within the flex shelf, depending on the configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Fiber storage tray (FST) installation in a flex shelf

Use the following instructions to install kit 1AD151930001
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the EIA/ANSI mounting brackets to both sides of the fiber storage tray using the
supplied hardware.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Fiber Storage Tray has several installation options for the mounting bracket
mounting bracket installation” (p. 2-52).
The FST is delivered with detailed instructions for mounting brackets. Consult these
instructions if necessary.
Figure 2-55 FST mounting bracket installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount the FST to the flex shelf using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side. See
Figure 2-57, “FST installed in flex shelf” (p. 2-53).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-57 FST installed in flex shelf
Note: The FST may be mounted in the upper, middle (shown), or lower position
within the flex shelf depending on the configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf installation in an ANSI flex shelf
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach mounting brackets to DCM shelf using two M5x5 pan head screws
(1AD008860058) per side as shown in Figure 2-58, “Bracket installation on DCM for
ANSI Flex shelf” (p. 2-54)
Figure 2-58 Bracket installation on DCM for ANSI Flex shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount the DCM shelf directly to the ANSI bay using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001)
per side. See Figure 2-59, “DCM shelf in ANSI bay frame with Flex shelf” (p. 2-55).
Figure 2-59 DCM shelf in ANSI bay frame with Flex shelf
Note: The DCM shelf can only be installed in the bottom 1/3 of the ANSI flex shelf
and requires the removal of the Flex shelf adapter bracket. See Figure 2-33, “Flex
shelf adapter bracket” (p. 2-31).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
SFD miscellaneous mounting (without Flex shelf)

SFD44 and SFD44B shelves may be installed in an ANSI bay without using a flex shelf.
Location of these shelves is determined by the site-specific documentation. Use the
following instructions to install kit 8DG59603AAAA and additional kit
8DG60130ABAA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach ANSI brackets to SFD shelf as shown in Figure 2-60, “ANSI bracket installation
on SFD44/SFD44B” (p. 2-56) Use four M4x8 flat head screws (1AD009040009) per
bracket, installed in the first two rows of holes.
Figure 2-60 ANSI bracket installation on SFD44/SFD44B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount SFD in bay using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side, and install cover.
See Figure 2-61, “SFD44 installed in ANSI bay” (p. 2-57)
Note: The bay mounting hole spacing in the ANSI brackets allows for adjustment up
and down in 1/2" increments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-61 SFD44 installed in ANSI bay
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40 and SFD40B miscellaneous mounting
SFD40 and SFD40B shelves may be installed directly in an ANSI bay. Location of these
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach ANSI brackets [see Figure 2-62, “ANSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B” (p. 2-58)] to
Figure 2-62 ANSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount SFD in bay using four 12-24 screws (1AD139920001).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DCM shelf miscellaneous mounting

DCM shelves may be installed in an ANSI bay without using a flex shelf. Location of
these shelves is determined by the site-specific documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach mounting brackets (8DG60866AAAA) to the DCM shelf using four M5x5 pan
head (cheese head) screws (1AD013170044) per side, as shown in Figure 2-63, “ANSI
DCM bracket installation” (p. 2-59). Screws are installed from the inside of the DCM
shelf as shown in Figure 2-64, “Install screws from inside the DCM shelf.” (p. 2-60)
Figure 2-63 ANSI DCM bracket installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-64 Install screws from inside the DCM shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount DCM shelf in bay using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side. See Figure
2-65, “DCM shelf installed in ANSI bay” (p. 2-60)
Note: The bay mounting hole spacing in the ANSI brackets allows for adjustment up
and down in 1/2" increments.
Figure 2-65 DCM shelf installed in ANSI bay
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install DCM shelf cover.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When installing DCMs, the DCM shelf cover and the cover bracket(s) will need
to be removed.
See: “DCM installation” (p. 4-21).
Figure 2-66 DCM shelf cover
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Punch down block installation
designations for the1830 PSS 32 housekeeping cable and procedures for connecting wires
to the punch down block can be found in Chapter 3, “Cable, fan tray, air filter and user
panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Assemble long side of reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets to punch down block
subrack using three M3 x5 screws (1AD047710001) per side. See Figure 2-67, “Punch
down block brackets for ANSI bay” (p. 2-62)
Figure 2-67 Punch down block brackets for ANSI bay
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount punch down block assembly into bay using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001)
per side,. See Figure 2-68, “Punch down assembly in ANSI bay” (p. 2-62)
Figure 2-68 Punch down assembly in ANSI bay
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Subrack and equipment installation in an ETSI rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack and equipment installation in an ETSI rack

ETSI rack preparation
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 utilizes the full depth of a standard ETSI rack. Some
ETSI racks may require preparation prior to the installation of Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subracks. The Alcatel-Lucent Optinex ETSI rack, in particular, has an
optional rear horizontal cable tie down bar that cannot be installed (or may need to be
removed) if the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack is to be installed in the upper
position. Back-to-back installation in a 600mm deep ETSI rack is not supported. See
Figure 2-69, “Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal” (p. 2-63).
Figure 2-69 Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack installation in an ETSI rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the three (3) plastic clips (if equipped) from each middle fiber guide. See Figure
2-71, “Clip in middle fiber guide” (p. 2-64)
Figure 2-71 Clip in middle fiber guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install the ETSI mounting brackets (left & right parts are the same) and middle fiber
guides (left & right parts are the same) on each side of the subrack unit. The fiber guides
and mounting brackets are attached to the subrack with the same screws. Use four (4)
M5x12 panhead (cheese head) screws (1AD008860019) to mount the brackets and guides
to the subrack. See Figure 2-73, “ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide
installation” (p. 2-67) and Figure 2-74, “ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide
installation detail” (p. 2-68).
Note: It is recommended that the power cables be installed now as they can be
difficult to install once the shelf is mounted in a rack. The A power cable
(8DG59729AAAB) is installed on the left, and the B power cable (8DG59729ABAB)
is installed on the right. To install cables, loosely install only the top M5x12 screw in
each mounting bracket/middle fiber guide assembly so that the assembly can be
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
swung forward. Install the power cable, swing the assembly back to vertical, install
the remaining M5x12 screws and tighten them securely. See Figure 2-72, “Middle
fiber guides and power cables” (p. 2-66).
Figure 2-72 Middle fiber guides and power cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-73 ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Use the mounting holes at the front edge of the shelf in ETSI applications.
Figure 2-74 ETSI rack mounting bracket and fiber guide installation detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install upper fiber/cable cover as shown in Figure 2-78, “Correct extension block
orientation” (p. 2-72) but do not install the screw shown in the figure yet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If an ETSI cover kit (8DG60129AAAA) will be used, install the mounting brackets and
hinge pins at this time (see Step 8). If the cover is to be installed with a cover extension
kit, skip to Step 1. If not using shelf cover, skip to Step 5.
Note: If the ETSI cabinet has doors, do not use the ETSI cover kit. The ETSI cover
kit will interfere with the ETSI cabinet doors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Install the upper cover mounting brackets as shown using three (3) M2.5x5 pan head
(cheese head) screws (1AD013170042) per side as shown in Figure 2-75, “Upper cover
mounting bracket” (p. 2-69).
Note: Use the three holes at the front of the upper fiber guide. See Figure 2-75,
“Upper cover mounting bracket” (p. 2-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If an ETSI cover kit will be used, the upper cover mounting brackets must be installed at
this time as shown using three (3) M2.5X5 pan head (cheese head) screws
(1AD013170042) per side as shown in Figure 2-75, “Upper cover mounting bracket”
(p. 2-69). They cannot be installed once the shelf is mounted in the bay.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Install the lower cover hinge as shown using two (2) M3x8 screws (1AD009040005) per
side as shown in Figure 2-76, “Lower cover hinge” (p. 2-70).
Figure 2-76 Lower cover hinge
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following instructions to install the cover extender kit. If the extended subrack
cover kit will not be used, skip to Step 5
Note: The use of any subrack covers will prevent the use of ETSI cabinet doors
(covers are needed only of ETSI cabinet has no doors).
The ETSI cover extension kit contains 2 extended upper fiber guides, four new hinge pin
screws and two hinge pin extension blocks as shown in Figure 2-18, “Cover extension kit
parts” (p. 2-20). The kit also includes a 1U extension (8DG59535AAAA) to extend the
height of the front cover. Use Step 1 to install cover extension 8DG59535AAAA, if used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the extended upper fibers guides using Step 6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-20)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(1AD037150001) per side. Hinge pins should face in. See Figure 2-20, “Hinge pin
extension block installation” (p. 2-21)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Route power cables and secure them out of the way. Power cables should be routed from
the front of the subrack, through the space provided in the ETSI rack mounting bracket,
and then either up or down the side of the subrack, depending on site power feed
locations. See Figure 2-80, “ETSI power cable routing” (p. 2-73).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If power cables are run to the overhead, loosely secure power cable to middle fiber guide
assembly at the top, using slot provided.
Note: Leave adequate slack in cable to allow attachment of power cable to power
filter, and to allow excess cable slack to slide behind fiber guide, once cable is
attached.
Figure 2-80 ETSI power cable routing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Install the subrack into the frame, using four M6 x12 screws (1AD009150001) per side.
See Figure 2-81, “Subrack mounted in an ETSI rack” (p. 2-74).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: This is a recommended subrack location. The subrack can be mounted
anywhere in the ETSI rack, but it is necessary to leave 60mm of space above the top
of the fan unit for proper exhaust of cooling air.
Figure 2-81 Subrack mounted in an ETSI rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If subrack is not nested with another PSS32 subrack above it, and there is a desire to force
the cooling air exhaust to rear of the ETSI rack, install air deflector above subrack. See
Step 9 below. If forcing hot air to the rear of the rack is not necessary, ensure there is at
least 60 mm of space above the fan unit and the equipment above it and do not install the
air deflector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Install air baffle directly on top of fan tray as shown in Figure 2-82, “ETSI air baffle
installation” (p. 2-75). Secure with two M6 x12 screws (1AD009150001) and two
washers (1AD000870136) per side.
Note: Ensure that the longer of the two flanges is on top. See Figure 2-82, “ETSI air
baffle installation” (p. 2-75)
Figure 2-82 ETSI air baffle installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-83 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack with baffle - ETSI
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf installation in an ETSI rack with shelf cover option
Use this procedure only if the shelf (Kit 8DG59417ABAA) will be equipped with a shelf
cover (Kit 8DG60131ACAA). Do not use the cover kit if the ETSI bay already has a
door. If the shelf will not have a cover, refer to “DCM shelf installation in an ETSI rack
without shelf cover kit” (p. 2-81).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install DCM shelf into ETSI rack using two M6 x12 screws (1AD009150001) per side,
through either pair of the larger, un-threaded holes. See: Figure 2-84, “DCM shelf screw
locations” (p. 2-77).
Note: The rack mounting hole spacing in the ETSI brackets allows for adjustment up
and down in 12.5mm increments.
Figure 2-84 DCM shelf screw locations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Loosely install one M5x5 pan head (cheese head) screw (1AD008860058) in top hole of
ETSI mounting bracket. See: Figure 2-85, “Screw installed in top hole” (p. 2-78)
Figure 2-85 Screw installed in top hole
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hang cover mounting bracket from top screw and install bottom M5x5 pan head (cheese
head) screw (1AD008860058). See: Figure 2-86, “Cover bracket installed” (p. 2-79).
Tighten both screws. Repeat process for other bracket.
Figure 2-86 Cover bracket installed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install DCM shelf cover and secure by turning screws clockwise until they click. See:
Figure 2-87, “Install cover” (p. 2-80).
Note: When installing DCMs, the DCM shelf cover and the cover bracket(s) will need
to be removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See: “DCM installation” (p. 4-21).
Figure 2-87 Install cover
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf installation in an ETSI rack without shelf cover kit
Use the following instructions to install kit 8DG59417ABAA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Mount the DCM shelf assembly in ETSI rack using two M6 x12 screws (1AD009150001)
per side, as shown in Figure 2-88, “DCM shelf assembly without cover kit in ETSI rack”
(p. 2-81).
Figure 2-88 DCM shelf assembly without cover kit in ETSI rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber storage tray (FST) mounting in an ETSI rack
Use the following instructions to install kit 1AD151930001.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Mount left and right FST brackets on FST using supplied hardware.
Note: The Fiber Storage Tray has several installation options for the mounting bracket
bracket mounting for ETSI application” (p. 2-82).
The FST is delivered with detailed instructions for mounting brackets. Consult these
instructions if necessary.
Figure 2-89 FST bracket mounting for ETSI application
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount FST into ETSI rack with two M6x12 screws (1AD009150001) per side. See
Figure 2-91, “Fiber Storage Tray mounted in ETSI rack” (p. 2-83).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-91 Fiber Storage Tray mounted in ETSI rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD44 or SFD44B mounting in an ETSI rack
Use the following instructions to install kit 8DG60130ABAA and kit 8DG60130ACAA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If using a cover (kit 8DG60130ACAA) Install the ETSI SFD brackets

(8DG60095AAAA) on to the sides of the SFD44 or SFD44B using four (4) M4x8 flat
head screws (1AD009040009) per side. Use the second on third pairs of holes (from the
front) on each side. Do not use the cover kit if the ETSI bay already has a door. See
Figure 2-92, “SFD44 or SFD44B bracket mounting for ETSI rack” (p. 2-84).
Figure 2-92 SFD44 or SFD44B bracket mounting for ETSI rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If not using a cover kit, Install the ETSI SFD brackets (8DG59510AAAA) on to the sides
of the SFD44 or SFD44B using four M4x8 flat head screws (1AD009040009) per side.
Use the second on third pairs of holes (from the front) on each side. These brackets mount
in a similar fashion as those pictured in Figure 2-92, “SFD44 or SFD44B bracket
mounting for ETSI rack” (p. 2-84)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Mount SFD44 or SFD44B in ETSI rack using two M6x12 screws (1AD009150001) per
side. See Figure 2-94, “DCM shelf, FST, and SFD44/SFD44B mounted in ETSI rack”
(p. 2-85).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The bay mounting hole spacing in the ETSI brackets allows for adjustment up
and down in 12.5mm increments.
Figure 2-93 SFD44 shelf installed in ETSI rack
Figure 2-94 DCM shelf, FST, and SFD44/SFD44B mounted in ETSI rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40 and SFD40B mounting
SFD40 and SFD40B shelves may be installed in an ETSI rack. Location of these shelves
is determined by the site-specific documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Attach ETSI brackets [see Figure 2-95, “ETSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B” (p. 2-86)] to
Figure 2-95 ETSI bracket for SFD40/SFD40B

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount SFD in rack using four M6x12 screws (1AD009150001).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Installing multiple subracks in an ETSI rack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 It is possible to install up to three Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks and a PDU in

one standard ETSI rack if all three subracks are "nested" and there are no other shelves
such as DCM, SFD, or FST installed. A more typical installation would be two
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks, DCM, SFD, and FST shelves; and a PDU in one
ETSI rack.
Note: See “Cooling considerations” (p. 2-2) for a description of "nesting".
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI punch down block installation

designations for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 housekeeping cable and procedures for
connecting wires to the punch down block can be found in Chapter 3, “Cable, fan tray, air
filter and user panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Assemble ETSI mounting brackets to punch down block subrack using three M3x5
screws (1AD047710001) per side. See Figure 2-96, “Punch down block brackets for
ETSI rack” (p. 2-88).
Figure 2-96 Punch down block brackets for ETSI rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount punch down block assembly into rack using four M6x12 screws
(1AD009150001). See Figure 2-97, “Punch down assembly in ETSI rack” (p. 2-88).
Figure 2-97 Punch down assembly in ETSI rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
3 3 able, fan tray, air filter
C
and user panel installation
(Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32)
Overview
Purpose
This chapter covers the general requirements and methods to install and terminate
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 cables (including power and ground), as well as installation
of the fan tray, air filter and user panel.

values specified.
Contents
Subrack grounding 3-2

Subrack ID setting 3-7
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 fan tray and air filter Installation and replacement 3-10
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 user panel connections 3-15
Connecting power cables 3-30
Verify battery A/B power assignments 3-50
Cable installations for SFD40 and SFD40B 3-52
Power connections for SFD40/SFD40B 3-57
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Subrack grounding
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack grounding
NOTICE
The intra-building ports of the equipment are suitable only for connection to shielded
intra-building cabling that is grounded at both ends.
The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to
intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 5) and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not
sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring
ANSI and EIA subrack grounding

Each subrack provides threaded holes for subrack to bay frame grounding. Ground wire
and lugs are not included with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and must be provided by
customer. Ground wire must be 6 AWG copper (13.3mm2 cross section) at a minimum.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or
Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. For IBN applications GR-295-CORE
requirements apply. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is to be installed in Network
Telecommunication Facilities and or locations where the National Electrical Code (NEC)
applies.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Bay frame must be grounded and if subrack ground is to be connected to the bay frame, it
must be properly prepared by removing all paint and non-conductive coatings, exposing
bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean and coated with
anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect one end of customer provided 6 AWG copper ground cable to bay frame using
only thread-forming subrack mounting screws and customer provided lug. See Table 3-1,
“Ground lug selection” (p. 3-3) to determine the correct lug for the application.
Table 3-1 Ground lug selection
ANSI subrack EIA subrack

Use lug supplied with installation kit Use lug supplied with installation kit (1AB051530072),
(1AB051530050), Burndy part Burndy part number: YA6CL2TC1445, or equivalent 6
number: YA6CL2TC14E145, or AWG, two hole lug with 5/8" (16mm) spacing.
equivalent 6 AWG, two hole lug
with 1" (25mm) spacing..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect other end of ground cable to ground point provided on the subrack. See Figure
3-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 3-4) Use lug supplied with installation kit
(1AB051530072), Burndy part number: YA6CL2TC1445, or equivalent 6 AWG, two hole
lug with 5/8" (16mm) spacing. and qty. 2, M5x8 screws (1AD008860022 which is also
included in the installation kit) for mounting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Measure resistance between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack case (bare metal)
and the building ground (CBN or IBN). Resistance should be less than 1 ohm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-1 Subrack ground attachment point
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI subrack grounding
Each subrack provides threaded holes for subrack to rack grounding. Ground wire is not
included with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 ETSI installation kits, and must be provided
by customer. Ground wire must be 6 AWG copper (13.3mm2 cross section) at a minimum.
applies.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: A two hole lug with 5/8" hole spacing (1AB051530072) and two M5 screws
(1AD008860022), for subrack grounding, and a two hole lug with 1" hole spacing
(1AB051530050) and two M6 screws (1AD009150001) for rack/cabinet ground
connection, are provided with the ETSI installation kit: 8DG59604ACxx.
Rack must be properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive
coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean
and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect one end of customer provided ground cable to rack using provided two hole lug
with 1" hole spacing, or customer provided lug. Secure with provided M6 screws or
customer provided screws. The provided lug will align with two holes in the ETSI rack
rails
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 3-4) Use lug supplied with installation kit
(1AB051530072), Burndy part number: YA6CL2TC1445, or equivalent 6 AWG, two hole
lug with 5/8" (16mm) spacing. and qty. 2, M5x8 screws (1AD008860022 which is also
included in the installation kit) for mounting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Subrack ground attachment point
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Subrack ID setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack ID setting
Purpose
This section describes the method to provide a unique identity for each subrack.
Important! The subrack ID must be set properly on peer subracks before the peer
subrack is connected to any other subrack. Connecting subracks with duplicate IDs
may cause database corruption.
Subrack ID
The subrack ID module is a device with two rotary switches. It is installed above the fan
unit and slightly to the left of center. See Figure 3-4, “Subrack ID connector location”
(p. 3-8). The switch settings must be unique for each subrack in a network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove user panel or user panel blank to access Subrack ID.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set switches using Table 3-2, “Subrack ID settings” (p. 3-8).
Figure 3-3 Subrack ID module rotating switches
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Subrack ID connector location
Table 3-2 Subrack ID settings
Subrack Left rotary switch Right rotary switch

Master subrack 8 1
Subrack #2 0 2
Subrack #3 0 3
Subrack #4 0 4
Subrack #5 0 5
Subrack #6 0 6
Subrack #7 0 7
Subrack #8 0 8
Subrack #9 0 9
Subrack #10 0 A
Subrack #11 0 B
Subrack #12 0 C
Subrack #13 0 D
Subrack #14 0 E
Subrack #15 0 F
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2 Subrack ID settings (continued)
Subrack Left rotary switch Right rotary switch

Subrack #16 1 0
Subrack #17 1 1
Subrack #18 1 2
Subrack #19 1 3
Subrack #20 1 4
Subrack #21 1 5
Subrack #22 1 6
Subrack #23 1 7
Subrack #24 1 8
Note: Set position FF on rotating switches for "Not installed Subrack identification."
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 fan tray and air filter
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) Installation and replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 fan tray and air filter Installation

and replacement
Purpose
This section provides instructions for installation and replacement of the fan tray and air
filter. If the fan and air filter are already installed, there is no need to do this procedure.
Fan tray Installation and removal

Note: If replacing the fan tray in a powered system, it is imperative that the new fan is
installed within 120 seconds of the old fan being removed. Some 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 circuit packs will overheat rapidly without constant air flow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure no cables or fibers are blocking access to fan tray cavity which is located just
below user panel. See Figure 3-10, “user panel installed into subrack” (p. 3-15)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Grasp fan tray by handles and gently slide fan tray into cavity. See Figure 3-5, “Fan tray
installation” (p. 3-10)
Figure 3-5 Fan tray installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Secure fan tray with captured two screws attached to the ends of the fan tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fan tray removal is the reverse of the installation procedure. Replace air filter prior to
replacing fan tray, if possible. See “Air filter removal and replacement” (p. 3-11)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Air filter removal and replacement
Air filter should be replaced every three months or sooner, as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure no fibers or cables block access to air filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fully loosen air filter retainer screw located near the bottom center of the subrack. See
Figure 3-6, “Air filter retainer screw” (p. 3-11)
Note: Air filter retainer screw is quite long and will take many turns to fully loosen.
Figure 3-6 Air filter retainer screw
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Pull air filter retainer straight back to release air filter. Front edge of air filter will drop
into view in the cavity just below the retainer. See Figure 3-7, “Air filter dropped into
view” (p. 3-12)
Figure 3-7 Air filter dropped into view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Grasp the air filter removal tabs [see Figure 3-7, “Air filter dropped into view” (p. 3-12)]
and pull the air filter straight back to remove it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For air filter installation instructions, see “Air filter installation” (p. 3-12)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Air filter installation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Fully loosen air filter retainer screw located near the bottom center of the subrack. See
Figure 3-6, “Air filter retainer screw” (p. 3-11)
Note: Air filter retainer screw is quite long and will take many turns to fully loosen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Pull air filter retainer straight back
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Slide air filter into air filter cavity with removal tabs oriented toward the front of the
subrack and coarse mesh facing up. See Figure 3-8, “Air filter installation” (p. 3-13)
Figure 3-8 Air filter installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Push front edge of air filter straight up and slide air filter retainer back to lock air filter in
place. See Figure 3-9, “Lock air filter in place” (p. 3-14)
Figure 3-9 Lock air filter in place
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Tighten air filter retainer screw. See Figure 3-6, “Air filter retainer screw” (p. 3-11)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 user panel connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 user panel connections

Purpose
This section provides instructions for cabling to the connectors of the user panel on the
top of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack.
Some applications do not allow or require the use of all user panel connectors and cables.
Make connections only if required by site-specific documentation.
user panel installation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully seat user panel into top of subrack, if not already equipped. See Figure 3-10,
“user panel installed into subrack” (p. 3-15).
Note: User panel may prove to be challenging to seat properly. There is one guide rail
for the printed circuit board (PCB) on the ceiling of the user panel slot. Ensure PCB
engages this guide rail before attempting to seat user panel. User panel should gently
seat into connector on backplane. If resistance is encountered while attempting to seat
user panel, stop and try again.
Note: Peer subracks will not have a user panel and will come equipped with a blank
instead.
Figure 3-10 user panel installed into subrack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Secure user panel in place with two captured screws provided on each end of user panel
face plate.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Figure 3-11 user panel connectors detail
ANSI/EIA rack lamp connections

There are 5 different length cables available for rack lamp connection in ANSI and EIA
applications. All are pre-terminated for ease of installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the rack lamp cable installation information on the customer order including the
cable routing paths from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 to the specified terminations on
the local office interface equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack lamp cables to the rack lamp jack on the user panel. See Figure 3-11,
“user panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the right or as determined by the
location of the connection points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the terminated end of the rack lamp cable to the customer-provided equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Secure the cable and manage slack in the customer specified manner or to the tie bar on
the side of the bay frame.
Note: All cables need to be positioned so they don't protrude and interfere with the
shelf covers or bay doors.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI rack lamp connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For ETSI applications, the ETSI installation kit (8DG59719AA**) includes the 9-pin
connector cable assembly (8DG90079AAAA). It must be cut to length and terminated
with the RJ45 connector included in the ETSI installation kit. Use Table 3-3, “Rack lamp
connector pin-out” (p. 3-17) to terminate ETSI rack lamp cable.
Table 3-3 Rack lamp connector pin-out
RJ45 D-Sub
Pair Pin# Pin# Wire Color Description
Pair #1 1 1 White/Blue not used
2 7 Blue/White RL_CH incoming call
Pair #2 3 6 White/Orange not used
4 2 Orange/White not used
Pair #3 5 3 White/Green RL_ATTD Attended alarm lamp
6 5 Green/White RL_NURG Not urgent alarm lamp
Pair #4 7 9 White/Brown RL_REF Common reference
8 4 Brown/White RL_URG Urgent alarm lamp
Shield Case Case Braid Ground
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack lamp cables to the rack lamp jack on the user panel. See Figure 3-11,
“user panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the right or as determined by the
location of the connection points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the side of the rack.
shelf covers or rack doors.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ANSI/EIA rack alarm connections

Note: There are 5 different length cables available for rack alarm connection. All are
pre-terminated for ease of installation.
Rack alarm outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external negative
voltage.
• Max. guaranteed current with closed condition: 50 mA
• Voltage drops vs. ground with closed condition: -2 V to 0V
• Max. allowed voltage with open condition: -72 V
The rack alarm connector is a female DB15. When events described in the "description"
heading in Table 3-4, “Rack alarm connector pin-out” (p. 3-20) occur, the pin associated
with said event is connected via a relay closure to the reference pin, #15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the rack alarm cable installation information on the customer order including the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack alarm cable to the Alarm jack on the user panel. See Figure 3-11, “user
panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the left or as determined by the location
of the connection points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the terminated end of the rack alarm cable to the customer-provided equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI rack alarm connections

The rack alarm connector is a female DB15. When events described in the "description"
heading in Table 3-4, “Rack alarm connector pin-out” (p. 3-20) occur, the pin associated
with said event is connected via a relay closure to the reference pin, #15.For ETSI
applications, the rack alarm (RA) connection is provided via a cable that has a DB15 on
one end and is unterminated on the other. For these cable connections, the ETSI
installation kit (8DG59719AA**) includes the 15-pin connector and shell. A spool of 8
pair shielded cable, 1AC014910008, must be provided by the installer to build the cable
assembly at the job site. Use Table 3-4, “Rack alarm connector pin-out” (p. 3-20) to
terminate ETSI rack alarm cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the rack alarm cable to the Alarm jack on the user panel. See Figure 3-11, “user
panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the left or as determined by the location
of the connection points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the terminated end of the rack alarm cable to the customer-provided equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rack alarm connector pin-out
Rack alarm outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external negative
voltage.
Table 3-4 Rack alarm connector pin-out
#Pin Signals Wire color Description

1 RA_ANDBATT Orange/White Fault or loss of both station batteries
2 RA_ORBATT White/Orange Fault or loss of one station battery
3 RA_URG Green/White Audible critical alarm (detection of
urgent alarm) Source: EC pack
4 White/Green
5 RA_ANC Brown/White Fault or loss of both
equipment-internal service power
supplies
6 White/Brown
7 RA_NURG White/Slate Audible major alarm (detection of
non-urgent alarm) Source: EC pack
8 Slate/White
9 RA_ORC Blue/Red Fault or loss of one
equipment-internal service power
supply
10 Red/Blue
11 RA_INT Red/Orange Audible minor alarm (detection of
internal alarm) Source: EC pack
12 Orange/Red
13 RA_IND Green/Red Not activated by software
14 Red/Green
15 RA_REF Blue/White Voltage reference of remote alarms
Case GND Electrical ground - Case
ANSI/EIA housekeeping connections

Note: There are five different length cables available for housekeeping connection.
All are pre-terminated for ease of installation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Housekeeping outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external
negative voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the housekeeping cable installation information on the customer order including
the cable routing paths from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 to the specified terminations
on the local office interface equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the housekeeping cable to the housekeeping jack on the user panel. See Figure
3-11, “user panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the left or as determined by
the location of the connection points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the terminated end of the housekeeping cable to the customer-provided

equipment.
Note: The customer provided equipment must terminate the housekeeping cable with
dry contacts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI housekeeping connections

For ETSI applications, the housekeeping (HK) connection is provided via a cable that has
a DB25 on one end and is unterminated on the other. For these cable connections, the
ETSI installation kit (8DG59719AA**) includes the 25-pin connector and shell. A spool
of, 13 pair shielded cable, 1AC014910013 must be provided by the installer to build the
cable assembly at the job site. Use Table 3-5, “Housekeeping connector pin-outs”
(p. 3-22) to terminate ETSI housekeeping Cable end.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the housekeeping cable to the housekeeping jack on the user panel. See Figure
3-11, “user panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16). Route cable to the left or as determined by
the location of the connection points.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the terminated end of the housekeeping cable to the customer-provided

equipment.
dry contacts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Housekeeping connector pin-outs

Housekeeping outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external negative
voltage.
Table 3-5 Housekeeping connector pin-outs

1 White/Blue
2 HK_OUTN_1 Blue/White # 1 Output; N wire
3 HK_OUTP_1 White/Orange # 1 Output; P wire
4 Orange/White
5 HK_OUTN_2 White/Green # 2 Output; N wire
6 HK_OUTP_2 Green/White # 2 Output; P wire
7 White/Brown
8 HK_OUTN_3 Brown/White # 3 Output; N wire
9 HK_OUTP_3 White/Slate # 3 Output; P wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-5 Housekeeping connector pin-outs (continued)

10 Slate/White
11 HK_OUTN_4 Red/Blue # 4 Output; N wire
12 HK_OUTP_4 Blue/Red # 4 Output; P wire
13 Black/Green
14 Red/Orange
15 HK_IN1 Orange/Red # 1 Input
16 HK_IN2 Red/Green # 2 Input
17 HK_IN3 Green/Red # 3 Input
18 HK_IN4 Red/Brown # 4 Input
19 HK_IN5 Brown/Red # 5 Input
20 HK_IN6 Red/Slate # 6 Input
21 HK_IN7 Slate/Red # 7 Input
22 HK_IN8 Black/Blue # 8 Input
23 Blue/Black
24 HK_REF Black/Orange Voltage reference of input
housekeeping
25 Orange/Black
case GND Electrical ground - Case
Punch down block connections

equipment (such as the Raman shelf or EDFA booster) to the housekeeping port. Use the
following procedures to connect and dress wires on the punch down block. For
instructions on the installation of the punch down block assembly, see Chapter 2,
“Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Route wires to the punch down block and insert them into the wire management slots
provided on the top and bottom of punch down block. Allow at least 13mm of extra wire
to protrude beyond the white face of the punch down block. See Figure 3-12, “Punch
down block step 1” (p. 3-24)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: 25mm or more of excess wire makes it easier to hold on to the wire when
trimming and is highly recommended.
Figure 3-12 Punch down block step 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Bend excess wire 90 degrees over the face of the punch down block and insert the wire
into the desired slot. See Figure 3-13, “Punch down block step 2” (p. 3-24)
Note: Before continuing to the next step, ensure that the excess wire pieces produced
by the punch down tool will be captured and will not fall into any equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Place punch down tool over wire on front of punch down block and gently press tool
against punch down block until tool clicks. See Figure 3-14, “Punch down block step 3”
(p. 3-25). The punch down tool will seat the wire into the block and trim excess wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
automatically. On some punch down tools, automatic wire trimming is an option. If wire
is not trimmed automatically, manually trim the wire. See punch down tool instructions if
use is unclear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that wire is in correct position, and is fully seated and trimmed in punch down
block. Verify that excess wire is accounted for. See Figure 3-15, “Punch down block step
4” (p. 3-25)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Dress wire in any of the included clips and in a manner approved by the customer. One
option can be seen in Figure 3-16, “Punch down block step 5” (p. 3-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining wires. Connected pairs of terminals in the
punch down block are arranged vertically.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VOIP, E1, E2 and OAMP cable installation.

If connecting a PC directly to the OAMP, VOIP, E1 or E2 port, and the port speed and
duplex are set to AUTO, a straight-through or crossover cable may be used. If the port
speed or duplex is set to anything other than AUTO it is necessary to use a cross-over
cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the VOIP, E1, E2 and OAMP cables (if equipped) to the corresponding jacks on
the user panel. See Figure 3-17, “user panel cable routing” (p. 3-27). Cables may exit
down over the cable guide pictured, and into the vertical cable space in front of the power
cable to isolate them from the fiber guide or directly sideways out to the left side of the
bay frame or rack, and then up or down as needed (typical).
Figure 3-17 user panel cable routing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the far ends of the, VOIP, E1, E2, and OAMP cables (if equipped) to the
customer-provided equipment. Consult site documents for specific connection
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Secure the cables and manage slack in the customer specified manner to the tie bar on the
left or right side of the bay frame or rack; or to tie locations on the subrack.
shelf covers.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Craft cable installation

There are two craft cable connectors on the user panel, See: Figure 3-11, “user panel
connectors detail” (p. 3-16). The USB port used a standard USB type A B cable and is the
recommended Craft connection method. The other connector requires a DB9 cable. The
pinouts for the DB9 connector are detailed in Table 3-6, “DB9 craft cable pinout”
(p. 3-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If a craft cable is to be permanently installed, connect it to the appropriate connector on

the user panel. See Figure 3-11, “user panel connectors detail” (p. 3-16),
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Route the cable in the same manner as the VOIP or OAMP cable. See Figure 3-17, “user
panel cable routing” (p. 3-27).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Secure the cable and manage slack in the customer specified manner to the tie bar on the
left or right side of the bay frame or rack; or to tie locations on the subrack.
shelf covers.
Table 3-6 DB9 craft cable pinout
Pin Signal Function

1 DCD Not used
2 TXD Transmit data output
3 RXD Receive data input
4 DTR Not used
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DCR Not used
7 CTS Not used
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-6 DB9 craft cable pinout (continued)
Pin Signal Function

8 RTS Not used
9 no connection not used
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PC Com Port Setting for craft cable Use

The following table is provided for reference.
Table 3-7 PC com port settings for craft use
USB
Com Port Parameter connection 9 Pin Serial Port Connection
Bits Per Second 38400 38400
Data Bits 8 8
Parity Odd None
Stop Bits 1 1
Flow Control None None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Connecting power cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connecting power cables

Description
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is powered by -48V to -60V direct current (DC). Power
filters and breakers are located in lower left and right slots on each subrack. DC-to-DC on
board power converters convert power on individual circuit packs.
Important! Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power filters have 5 conductors. Two are for
battery, two are for return and one is for ground. Once connected to a power filter, the
two battery conductors (black and blue) or the two return conductors (red and brown)
are always at the same potential. If one of the pair is connected to power, the other is
also energized. For this reason, the battery cable pairs for each power filter must be
connected to only one circuit breaker.
Power distribution
The choice of the power cable cross section depends on the DC branch circuit upstream
protection provided and the voltage drop allowed on the cable. A site-specific evaluation
has to be made (distance between power source and equipment, routing of cables, voltage
drop, etc.) prior to installing the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 product.
Note: The input DC power installation for the connection of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 product must be in accordance with local regulation rules and
requirements.
The overcurrent protection rating for the DC branch circuit used to supply power to the
equipment should be rated at least 125% of the PFDC electrical rating. Depending on the
product's configuration the electrical rating varies. Refer to the table below for the
product electrical ratings and recommended branch circuit protection size.
Note: If multiple subracks are to be connected to the same branch circuit, add up the
sum of the electrical ratings of each subrack and multiply the sum of all the subrack
current draw by 1.25 to determine branch circuit size.
Table 3-8 Power cable selection guide
When equipped with Recommended branch

Electrical Rating
power filter: circuit size
PFDC20 Two (2) lines, each rated -48 to -60 25 Amp
VDC, 18Amp
VDC, 27 Amp
VDC, 45 Amp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-8 Power cable selection guide (continued)

Electrical Rating
VDC, 56 Amp
VDC, 63 Amp
Battery return connection mode

In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, the battery return conductor is an Isolated DC return
(DC-I), however ETSI applications may be equipped to use the battery return as a ground.
Connector prep and cabling

Note: Ensure Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack is properly grounded prior to
starting any power cable work. See “ANSI and EIA subrack grounding” (p. 3-2)
DANGER
Always isolate upstream power from customer provided power cables prior to connecting
subrack power cables.Use local lockout/tagout or equivalent procedures to ensure power
cannot be turned on while working on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power cables
Connection without the use of PDU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use power cables that came with the subrack. Included with each ANSI or EIA subrack is
a red cable (A Power) and a blue cable (B Power). Each cable should have been placed in
position on the subrack during installation of subrack into bay frame. See Chapter 2,
Note: Power cables that are provided with an ETSI kit do not have red and blue
sheaths, both cables are have the same outside sheath color. The A power cable will
only connect to the left power filter and the B power cable will only connect to the
right power filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Route power cables either up to the overhead rack or down to the subfloor, depending on
customer requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ground the power cables in one of two ways:

• Connect Yellow/Green wire in each power cable to the bay using crimped-on lug as in
“ANSI and EIA subrack grounding” (p. 3-2) or “ETSI subrack grounding” (p. 3-5).
• Connect Yellow/Green ground wire in each power cable to building ground directly
using a gutter tap (H tap). See below for gutter tap instructions.
Note: It may be necessary to strip a substantial amount of the outer sheath from the
power cables to provide the correct ground cable length if the ground attachment
point is not near the power attachment point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gutter tap (H tap) the power cables into the BDFB cables as designated by the customer
order. Use Table 3-9, “Power cable color code” (p. 3-36) to determine the proper
connections.
Note: All power cables and connectors provided by the customer for the connection
of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power cables to the customer power cables must
be selected in accordance with local regulation rules and requirements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Place power cables next to H Tap and mark for insulation stripping. Expose enough
conductor to allow 100% filling of the H tap wire holes.
Figure 3-18 Mark cables for insulation stripping
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert cables into H tap until insulation is against H tap. Ensure exposed conductors are
long enough to fill holes in H tap. Do not allow any insulation into H tap.
Figure 3-19 Cables being inserted into H Tap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Crimp H tap. Ensure H tap is evenly crimped along its entire length. It may be necessary
to crimp the H tap more than once.
Figure 3-20 Crimp H tap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 Properly crimped H tap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Install protective cover on H tap and secure with wax string, zip tie or customer specified
method.
Figure 3-22 Protective cover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23 Secure protective cover
Figure 3-24 Example of H tap in an overhead rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power filters have 5 conductors. Two are for
battery, two are for return and one is for ground. Once connected to a power filter, the
two battery conductors (black and blue) or the two return conductors (red and brown)
are always at the same potential. If one of the pair is connected to power, the other is
also energized. For this reason, the battery cable pairs for each power filter must be
connected to only one circuit breaker.
Note: Red and brown wires should connect to the same RTN. Black and blue wires
should connect to the same Batt-.
Both A power and B power cables use the same color code. See Table 3-9, “Power cable
color code” (p. 3-36) for individual wires.
Table 3-9 Power cable color code
Signal Cable Color Connector Pin

RTN Batt + Red 1
RTN Batt + Brown 2
GND Yellow/Green 3
Batt- Black 4
Batt- Blue 5
Power connection with PDU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Alcatel-Lucent offers optional Power Distribution Units (PDU) for use with ANSI, EIA or
ETSI racks.
The ANSI (1AD139370001) & EIA (P/N PWUEF-7X19ERN, supplier ADC) bay frames
will only support up to 2 subracks and one PDU in one frame.
ETSI (3AL37952AB, 3AN44816AA, & 3AL35063AA) racks can support up to 3
subracks, nested, and one PDU in one rack.
Note: "Nested" means that each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack is installed as
close as possible to its neighbor subrack in the same bay or rack. When nesting, the
air deflector is not installed in any Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 with a Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subrack above it because the bottom of the upper subrack acts as the air
deflector for the subrack below.
The following section provides instructions for cable termination for use with a PDU and
a brief overview of the PDU options. For complete PDU installation and use, please
consult the documentation provided with the PDU.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Branch circuit requirements
Wire size is dependent on customer voltage drop requirements and distance between
battery and PDU.
Table 3-10 Branch circuit size for 1 subrack per rack

Electrical Rating
VDC, 18Amp
VDC, 27 Amp
VDC, 45Amp
VDC, 56Amp
VDC, 63Amp
Table 3-11 Branch circuit size for 2 subracks per rack

Electrical Rating
VDC, 18Amp
PFDC30 Two (2) lines, each rated -48 to -60 70Amp
VDC, 27 Amp
VDC, 45Amp
VDC, 56Amp
VDC, 63Amp
Table 3-12 Branch circuit size for 3 subracks per rack

Electrical Rating
VDC, 18Amp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-12 Branch circuit size for 3 subracks per rack (continued)

Electrical Rating
VDC, 27 Amp
PFDC50 Two (2) lines, each rated -48 to -60 180Amp
VDC, 45Amp
VDC, 56Amp
VDC, 63Amp
Terminating power cables for PDU use

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 DANGER
Always isolate upstream power from customer-provided power cables prior to connecting
cannot be turned on while installing the Alcatel-Lucent PDU.
Optional Content added above. Please modify as needed.
Use the power cables that came with the subrack. Included with each subrack is a an "A"
power cable for the left power filter and a "B" power cable for the right power filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Terminate the supplied power cables with 5/8" spaced Burndy lugs (1AB051530101) and
heat shrink tubing supplied with the installation kit as shown in Figure 3-30, “Power
cable terminations” (p. 3-41).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Strip the cable insulation to the proper length using the lug as a guide.
Figure 3-25 Strip cable insulation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Set the crimper to the proper wire/lug size. See Figure 3-26, “Setting crimper” (p. 3-39).
Figure 3-26 Setting crimper
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Insert the lug into the crimper and squeeze the crimper handles until they are bottomed
out. See Figure 3-27, “Crimp lug onto wire” (p. 3-40) and Figure 3-28, “Crimper closed
on wire” (p. 3-40).
Figure 3-27 Crimp lug onto wire
Figure 3-28 Crimper closed on wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The finished crimp should look like the figure below.
Figure 3-29 Finished crimp
Figure 3-30 Power cable terminations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Connect power cables to PDU using documentation provided with PDU and Table 3-9,
“Power cable color code” (p. 3-36)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! On the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power cables, the red & brown
(return) cables must be mounted on the same buss bar (double lugged).
The black & blue (-48V) cables must be mounted on the same buss bar (double
lugged).
For an example of double lug connections on a PDU see: Figure 3-31, “Example of
double lug connections on a PDU” (p. 3-43)
Under no circumstances should the black & blue wires be connected to separate
circuit breakers!
Figure 3-31 Example of double lug connections on a PDU (1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-31 Example of double lug connections on a PDU (2 of 2)
Examples of PDUs in different applications

Note: The photos of PDUs are for reference only and do not necessarily depict PDU
options applicable to any specific installation or subrack type.
Figure 3-32 PDU installed in ETSI rack
Leave a minimum gap of 50mm between the top of the PDU and inside of the ETSI rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-33 PDU installed in an ANSI bay
Figure 3-34 PDU installed in an EIA rack
PDU slider kit

The PDU may be installed in an ETSI rack using an optional slider kit. The slider kit
attaches to the PDU and allows it to be slid out of the cabinet to allow easier access to the
cabling. See Figure 3-35, “PDU optional slider kit reference photos” (p. 3-45) Use the
detailed instructions included in the slider kit for installation.
Note: The PDU slider kit is only for use in ETSI racks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-35 PDU optional slider kit reference photos
Note: If using the optional slider kit, ensure there is adequate slack in all power and
ground cables so that the PDU can be pulled out to the fully extended slide position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Continuity testing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Test continuity of both A and B power cables at connector ends using Table 3-13,
“Continuity check” (p. 3-46) and Figure 3-36, “Power cable pin identification” (p. 3-46).
Note: The power cable connector pin placements in cable A and cable B are a mirror
image of each other, relative to the direction the cable exits the connector. Be certain
you are executing the continuity test on the correct pins. For ETSI applications, both
A and B power cables have the same exterior sheath color. The A cable is labeled
8DG59729AAAB and the B cable is labeled 8DG59729ABAB.
The simplest way to determine pin numbers on all cable types is to look for the extra
space between pins 4 and 5. See Figure 3-36, “Power cable pin identification”
(p. 3-46).
Figure 3-36 Power cable pin identification
Table 3-13 Continuity check
Expected
Test point 1 Test Point 2
measurement
Pin 1 Pin 2 <1 Ohm
Pin 1 Pin 3 <1 Ohm
Pin 4 Pin 5 <1 Ohm
Pin 5 Pin 1 Open circuit
Subrack frame Pin 3 <1 Ohm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-13 Continuity check (continued)
Expected
Test point 1 Test Point 2
measurement
Subrack frame Bay/rack ground <1 Ohm
Note: Do not turn on power until all continuity tests have passed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Input voltage testing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure power cables are not connected to power filters and that the power cable
connector pins are not in contact with any person or any conductive material
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn on power A at BDFB or PDU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Test voltage of the A power cable at connector end using Table 3-14, “Voltage check”
(p. 3-47) and Figure 3-36, “Power cable pin identification” (p. 3-46).
Note: The power cable connector pin placements in cable A and cable B are a mirror
image of each other, relative to the direction the cable exits the connector. Be certain
you are executing the voltage test on the correct pins. For ETSI applications, both A
and B power cables have the same exterior sheath color. The simplest way to
determine pin numbers on all cable types is to look for the extra space between pins 4
and 5. See Figure 3-36, “Power cable pin identification” (p. 3-46).
Table 3-14 Voltage check
Test point 1 (- lead of Expected

Test Point 2 (+ lead of DVM)
DVM) measurement
Pin 1 Pin 2 0 volts
Pin 1 Pin 3 0 volts
Pin 4 Pin 5 0 volts
Pin 5 Pin 1 -48 to -60 volts DC
Subrack frame Pin 3 0 volts
Subrack frame Bay/rack ground 0 volts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn off A power at BDFB or PDU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for B power cable.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Power filter installation and cable connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Secure the cables in the customer specified manner (cable ties, string, etc.) to the tie bar
on the left or right side of the bay frame or rack; or to tie locations on the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install PFDC power filters into lower far left and lower far right slots in subrack. See
Figure 3-37, “Power filter locations” (p. 3-48).
Figure 3-37 Power filter locations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Plug the power cables into the power filters and secure them with captive screws. Gently
insert the cable connector into the PFDC. Avoid any significant side to side rocking
motion during insertion, as the PFDC connector contains a ceramic filter that can be
damaged. Alternate tightening of each jack screw so the connectors stay as parallel as
possible.
Note: The torque for the cable connector jack screws should be no greater than 4.5
in-lb (50 Ncm). This is lower than the torque values listed for this size fastener in
Appendix B, “Tightening torque”.
Note: Each power cable connector has a device that prevents power filter removal
without first removing the power connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn power on at BDFB or PDU.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Verify battery A/B power assignments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify battery A/B power assignments

Verifying feed A
The steps below verify that feed A is working and connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disconnect the B power feed by turning off the breaker or removing the fuse for the B
power feed at the BDFB or PDU.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the A side power filter should remain
illuminated.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the B side power filter should be
extinguished.
Note: It takes approximately 10 seconds for the appropriate power failure LED to turn
on after power is shut off.
Note: If the PWR A OUTPUT LED is not lit and the B LED is lit, the A and B power
feeders to the subrack are swapped. Correct the error and re-test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reconnect the B power feed by turning the breaker on or replacing the fuse for the B
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verifying feed B
The steps below verify that feed B is working and connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disconnect the A power feed by turning off the breaker or removing the fuse for the A
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the B side power filter should remain
illuminated.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the A side power filter should be extinguished.
Note: If the LEDs on the B side are not lit and the A side LEDs are lit, the A and B
power feeds are swapped. Correct the error and re-test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Reconnect the A power feed by turning the breaker on or replacing the fuse for the A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Verify battery A/B power assignments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set the switches on the B power filters to OFF.

Note: At this point both A and B power should be left OFF.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Cable installations for SFD40 and SFD40B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cable installations for SFD40 and SFD40B

The SFD40 and SFD40B require their own power supply and ground connections.
Additionally, the SFD40 and SFD40B require connections to the housekeeping connector
(through a punch down block) to enable alarm reporting to the main subrack. Inventory
cables are covered in chapter 4.
SFD40/SFD40B ground connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect ground wire to SFD40/SFD40B ground attachment point.
Figure 3-38 SFD40/SFD40B ground attachment point
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect other end of ground wire to bay frame or rack.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HK (alarm) cable installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, construct HK cable with RJ45 connector on one end using CAT5 cable and
the pinouts given in Table 3-15, “SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable RJ45 connection”
(p. 3-53). Alternatively, use a pre-made cable such as 8DG60494AAAA. Ensure that
cable is long enough to reach the main shelf housekeeping (HK) cable punch down block.
Table 3-15 SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable RJ45 connection
Signal Wire color RJ45 pin

LOS alarm Orange/White 6
Temperature alarm Brown/White 8
Reference (ground) Blue/White 5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Plug RJ45 connector into SFD40/SFD40B HK port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable to the main shelf housekeeping (HK) cable
with a punch down block. Use HKIN_1 and HKIN_2 connections (see Table 3-16,
“SFD40/SFD40B alarm cable to HK cable connections” (p. 3-53)). If more than one
SFD40/SFD40B is being connected, use the remaining HKIN_x connections for up to 3
additional SFD40/SFD40Bs.
Cables for the 4 possible SFDs are called 'RJ45A' through 'RJ45D'.
Figure 3-39, “SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable punch down block connections”
(p. 3-55) is provided as a visual guide for the connections.
Note: All blue/white wires in the SFD (HK) alarm cables must terminate to
HK_REF_GND, pin 24 black/orange wire on HK cable.
Table 3-16 SFD40/SFD40B alarm cable to HK cable connections
SFD alarm pin and

HK signal HK pin and color SFD alarm signal
wire color
HKIN_1 15 orange/red SFD 1 LOS 6 orange/white
RJ45A
HKIN_2 16 red/green SFD 1 Temp 8 brown white RJ45A
HKIN_3 17 green red SFD 2 LOS 6 orange/white
RJ45B
HKIN_4 18 red/brown SFD 2 Temp 8 brown/white RJ45B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-16 SFD40/SFD40B alarm cable to HK cable connections (continued)
SFD alarm pin and

HK signal HK pin and color SFD alarm signal
wire color
HKIN_5 19 brown/red SFD 3 LOS 6 orange/white
RJ45C
HKIN_6 20 red/slate SFD 3 Temp 8 brown white RJ45C
HKIN_7 21 slate/red SFD 4 LOS 6 orange/white
RJ45D
HKIN_8 22 black/blue SFD 4 Temp 8 brown/white RJ45D
HK_REF_GND 24 black/orange Reference (ground) 5 blue/white (all SFD
alarm cables)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-39 SFD40/SFD40B HK (alarm) cable punch down block connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation Power connections for SFD40/SFD40B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power connections for SFD40/SFD40B

Power cable connections at power supply
Refer to “Connecting power cables” (p. 3-30) for detailed instructions for connecting the
SFD40/SFD40B A and B power cables to local power supply.
This equipment is intended to be provided with appropriate 1A (Max) branch circuit
protection on both the A and B -48/-60 V dc input feeds.
Table 3-17 Power cable pin designations and color code

RTN Batt + Red 1
GND Yellow/Green 2
Batt- Blue 3
Power cable continuity check

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
“SFD40/SFD40B power cable continuity check” (p. 3-57).
Table 3-18 SFD40/SFD40B power cable continuity check
Test point 1 Test Point 2 Expected measurement

Pin 1 Pin 2 <1 Ohm
Subrack frame Bay/rack ground <1 Ohm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Input voltage testing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure power cables are not connected to SFD and that the power cable connector pins
are not in contact with any person or anything metallic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn on power A at BDFB or PDU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Test voltage of both A and B power cables at connector ends using Table 3-19,
“SFD40SFD40B power cable voltage check” (p. 3-58).
Table 3-19 SFD40SFD40B power cable voltage check
Test point 1 (- lead of Test Point 2 (+ lead of

Expected measurement
DVM) DVM)
Pin 1 Pin 2 0 volts
Subrack frame Bay/rack ground 0 volts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn off A power at BDFB or PDU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for B power cable.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Power cable connections at SFD40/SFD40B

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure power is shut off at power supply (BDFB or PDU)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect A power cable to A power connector on SFD40/SFD40B.

Note: A power connector is the top connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect B power cable to B power connector on SFD40/SFD40B

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn on power at BDFB or PDU
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verification of A and B power assignments
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Requirement: The A power LED on the SFD40/SFD40B shall remain illuminated.
Requirement: The B power LED on the SFD40/SFD40B should be extinguished.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Requirement: The B power LED on the SFD40/SFD40B shall remain illuminated.
Requirement: The A power LED on the SFD40/SFD40B should be extinguished.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-40 SFD40/40B cable interfaces
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40/40B inventory cable installation
Insert the RJ11 connector of the inventory cable into the INV1 of one SFD40/40B, and
install the other end of the inventory cable onto ITLB or Y-ADAPTER or LD according
to different topology applications. The INV2 is for daisy-chain of another SFD40/40B.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
4 4 ircuit pack and fiber
C
installation for
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides guidelines necessary to install all the ordered circuit packs, DCMS
and fibers into the appropriate positions. There are no fixed transmission circuit pack
shelf and slot conventions with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32. It is absolutely necessary to
consult the customer work order, rack face drawings, and fiber tables (information listed
is typically found in the EPT installation report), created for each network element, to
complete this work.
Contents
General Circuit Pack Guidelines 4-2

Precautions 4-3
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation 4-4
Optical amplifier installation 4-13
DCM installation 4-21
Inventory cable installation 4-28
Subrack to subrack cable installation 4-32
Electrical SFP applications 4-36
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections 4-38
Intra-NE fiber connections 4-40
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent General Circuit Pack Guidelines
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General Circuit Pack Guidelines

Airflow considerations
Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Install and seat circuit
pack blanks into any unused slots, including slots for PFDCs and ECs. Blanks are
required in all empty slots to ensure proper airflow in the sub rack.
If circuit packs are being added to a powered shelf, do not remove circuit pack blanks
until circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be installed in
place of blanks (inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place) within five
minutes of blank removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the sub rack.
If circuit packs are being replaced in a powered shelf, do not remove old circuit packs
until new circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be installed
(inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place) within five minutes of old pack
removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the sub rack.
impede airflow or direct exhaust air from one subrack to the intake of another.
Circuit pack booting consideration

Always allow circuit packs to boot fully before unseating them (unless they fail to boot).
Some circuit packs may take 5 minutes or more to boot fully. A solid green LED on the
faceplate will indicate that the circuit pack has completed the boot cycle.
When a circuit pack is inserted into an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16, the system will
automatically determine if a FPGA software upgrade is required. If an FPGA software
upgrade is required, the system will automatically initiate the upgrade on the circuit pack.
If the circuit pack is removed before the upgrade is completed, it will result in the
pack becoming inoperable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Precautions
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Precautions
ESD
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Many of these circuit packs are sensitive to ESD. Always use an ESD wrist strap when
handling circuit packs.
Handling
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Care should be used while handling Circuit Packs to prevent damage to the internal
fibers on the circuit packs or causing them to come loose.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Non-amplifier circuit pack installation
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation

Common circuit pack placement
There are only four circuit packs that are installed in fixed locations, per subrack. Two
Element Controller (EC) circuit packs and two Power Filter (PFDC) circuit packs. All
other circuit packs, DCMs, ITLB and SFD44/SFD44B devices must be placed per the
customer order, work order, or rack face drawing. PFDC circuit packs were installed in
the last chapter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the A and B subrack power is turned off at both the A and B power filters in all
subracks in the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install, but do not seat, all EC circuit packs as shown below. See Figure 4-1, “Subrack
with EC and PFDC” (p. 4-5).
Note: The ECs and other circuit packs will be seated later during commissioning. The
order in which the circuit packs are seated is critical. Ensure no packs except the
PFDCs are seated now.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install equipment controller blank (8DG59420AA) in any unused EC or PFDC slot.
Figure 4-1 Subrack with EC and PFDC
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Half slot adapter installation
The customer network information report/shelf report [see Figure 4-2, “Example of shelf
report” (p. 4-6)] will show where circuit packs need to be installed. Some circuit packs
are half height and half slot adapters [see Figure 4-3, “Half slot adapter” (p. 4-6)] are
necessary to install these circuit packs. Install all the adapters first, before installing any
other flexible circuit packs. Use the half slot adapter tool, part number 8DG07796AA [see
Figure 4-4, “Half slot adapter tool” (p. 4-7)] to ensure proper alignment of half slot
adapters. Half Slot adapters may be installed on a live system, It is not necessary to turn
power off when installing a half slot adapter when using the half slot adapter tool, part
number 8DG07796AA [see Figure 4-4, “Half slot adapter tool” (p. 4-7)].
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-2 Example of shelf report
Figure 4-3 Half slot adapter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-4 Half slot adapter tool
Consult rack face drawing for the site to determine where half slot adapters need to be
placed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Swing upper latch open on half slot adapter tool and lock in place with hinge screw. See
Figure 4-5, “Open upper latch” (p. 4-8).
Figure 4-5 Open upper latch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert half slot tool into subrack as shown in Figure 4-6, “Insert tool into subrack”
(p. 4-9).
Figure 4-6 Insert tool into subrack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Slide half slot adapter into tool and secure with 13" (or longer) #2 Phillips screwdriver
(special tool number 1AD 00861 0003) as shown in Figure 4-7, “Secure half slot adapter
with Phillips screwdriver” (p. 4-10).
Figure 4-7 Secure half slot adapter with Phillips screwdriver
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove half slot adapter tool, leaving half slot adapter in place.
Note: For an example of half slot adapters installed in a subrack, See Figure 4-1,
“Subrack with EC and PFDC” (p. 4-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Fully seat rubber plug in screwdriver hole on front of half slot adapter to ensure proper
airflow management in sub rack. See Figure 4-8, “Half slot adapter with rubber plug
installed.” (p. 4-11)
Figure 4-8 Half slot adapter with rubber plug installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until all required adapters are installed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Non-optical amplifier transmission circuit pack installation

The customer network information/shelf report [see Figure 4-2, “Example of shelf report”
(p. 4-6)] will show where transmission circuit packs need to be installed. Transmission
circuit pack slot designations are flexible and order dependent. Any transmission pack can
be physically installed in any slot, but it is imperative that the customer network
information/shelf report (site documentation) is followed precisely. Transmission circuit
packs include (but are not limited to) the following circuit pack acronyms: OPSA, CWR8,
CWR8-88, SFD5x, SVAC, 4DPA4, 43STX4, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 11STAR1, and
WTOCM. For full descriptions of all available circuit packs, see Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 5.1 Product Information and Planning Guide.Optical
Amplifiers require special considerations that are detailed here: “Optical amplifier
installation” (p. 4-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the A and B subrack power is turned off at both the A and B power filters of all
subracks in the NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install, but do not seat, transmission circuit packs using customer order and rack face
diagrams.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install and seat SFPs and XFPs in appropriate circuit pack ports using customer order and
rack face diagrams. Ensure XFP and SFPs are properly oriented. If the XFPs or SFPs do
not seat fully with minimal force, rotate them 180 degrees and try again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install and seat circuit pack blanks into any unused slots, including slots for PFDCs and
ECs. Blanks are required in all empty slots to ensure proper airflow in the sub rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Optical amplifier installation
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical amplifier installation

Background
Optical amplifiers are available in three distinct variations: Line Drivers, Amplifiers and
Raman Pumps.
Optical Amplifier types include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following:
• ALPHG — Low Power High Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• AHPHG — High Power High Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• AHPLG — High Power Low Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• A2325A—Amplifier, 23db power, variable gain, C-band, with mid-stage access
• ALPFGT— Low Power Fixed Gain Amplifier Total Power, with mid-stage access
• AM2125A— High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier, with mid-stage
access
• RA2P— Long Haul - 2 pump Raman module, no mid-stage access
• AM2017B — High power (+20dBm), low gain optical amplifier, no mid-stage access
• AM2325B —Amplifier, 23db power, variable gain C-band amplifier without
mid-stage access, no mid-stage access.
Raman Pumps
Raman Pumps connect only between the line ingress point and the outside plant fiber and
pump counter to the incoming DWDM channels. Raman Pump Circuit packs do not have
OSC ports.
Note: For optimum Raman Pump performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end
fiber point losses due to connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers
ensure the following general guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
• Maximum of 0.5 dB office loss (from NE to OSP fiber).
• Maximum losses due to splices within 10 km (depending on total span loss) of the
R-NE should be < 0.5 dB.
• ORL from any single point reflection should be greater than 33 dB.
• Total ORL from the OSP fiber (as measured at the NE using OTDR trace) should be:
greater than 26 dB for NZ-DSF fibers and greater than 29 dB for SSMF fibers.
Higher office losses and lower quality fiber can be supported with reduced reach. The
exact reach reduction is dependent on the magnitude of the deviation from the
optimum target and can be modeled in the Alcatel-Lucent Engineering Planning Tool.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Drivers
Line Drivers connect to both outside plant fibers (the "line", which may include a Raman
Pump on the ingress side) for a degree. Line Drivers are equipped with an internal OSC
SFP port and fusion-spliced OSC fiber pigtails. All OSC fibering on a Line Driver is done
within the circuit pack and is described in detail here: “Line Driver (LD) preparation”
(p. 4-17).
Amplifiers
Amplifiers connect to only one outside plant fiber per degree (possibly with a Raman
Pump in-line). Amplifiers are equipped with a faceplate OSC SFP port and OSC fiber
connectors that require external fiber connections and allow OSC fibers to connect from
one Amplifier to another. Examples of OSC connections to amplifiers can be found here:
“Examples of Optical Amplifier applications and connections” (p. 4-14).
Examples of Optical Amplifier applications and connections

Provided below are some examples of commonly used Amplifier and Raman Pump
configurations. For more examples, including Line Driver applications, please consult the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 5.1 Product Information and
Planning Guide.
Note: The examples below are provided solely for general reference. Fiber
connections must be made using the fiber table provided by EPT for each network
element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-9 Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA
Figure 4-10 Amplifier and OSC connections in TOADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-11 Amplifier and Raman Pump Connections
Line driver and amplifier precautions

Damage to internal fibers and circuit pack components may occur if optical amplifier
circuit packs are improperly handled during installation and maintenance activities,
including the equipage or replacement of an OSC SFP.
Optical fibers and fiber connectors are positioned and routed near the faceplate and may
not be fully visible. Caution must be used when handling the packs to prevent undue
pressure applied to fibers and components, which may cause damage.
Line Driver modules should always be handled on the edges of the circuit pack. It is
recommended to only handle these modules in one of the following manners:
• Handle the LD module by the faceplate.
• Handle the LD module by the edge of the printed circuit board.
• A combination of the above recommendations is acceptable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-12 Proper LD and amplifier handling
Line Driver (LD) preparation

Line Driver (LD) circuit packs are equipped with an internal SFP receptacle for the
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) SFP module. Ingress LD packs require an OSC SFP
module. Consult site documentation to determine the correct SFP module to install, if
required.
Note: Egress LDs do not require an OSC SFP. Do not install an SFP in an Egress LD.
Do not install or replace an OSC SPF with the LD circuit pack installed in a rack. The
SFP installation or replacement should be done with the circuit pack on an ESD safe work
table.
Note: Amplifier circuit packs can also be equipped with OSC SFPs, but they are
installed in the faceplate and can be installed and removed with the circuit pack
installed in subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove parking cap from LD leaving both fibers still inserted in parking cap. See Figure
4-13, “Parking cap removal” (p. 4-18).
Figure 4-13 Parking cap removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert SFP into LD as shown in Figure 4-14, “SFP insertion” (p. 4-19).
Figure 4-14 SFP insertion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove one fiber from parking cap, remove protective cap from fiber, clean and inspect
fiber, and insert fiber into SFP as shown in Figure 4-15, “Fiber installation” (p. 4-20).
Repeat for second fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Fibers must be installed exactly as shown. They cannot be interchanged. The
fiber labels and SFP slot labels (not shown) must match.
Figure 4-15 Fiber installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 LD is now prepared for use. Repeat Steps 1-3 for any other LDs that require OSC SFPs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent DCM installation
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM installation
Purpose
DCMs installation procedures vary depending on the bay type, DCM shelf cover use and
if using an ANSI bay, the DCM shelf mounting option.
DCM installation in an ANSI bay

DCM shelves in ANSI bays can be miscellaneously mounted or mounted in a Flex shelf.
DCM installation with a Flex shelf
Insert DCMs directly in DCM shelf slots per the site-specific documentation and secure
the DCMs with the captured screws. If DCM placement is not pre-determined, DCMs
connected to LDs in the left half of the subrack are typically installed on the left side of
the DCM shelf, and DCMs connected to LDs in the right half of the subrack are typically
installed on the right side of the DCM shelf.
DCM installation without a Flex shelf or DCM shelf cover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM installation without a Flex shelf and with a DCM shelf cover
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Turn DCM shelf cover screws counter clockwise and remove cover from DCM shelf as
shown in Figure 4-16, “DCM shelf cover removal” (p. 4-22)
Figure 4-16 DCM shelf cover removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Loosen M5x5 DCM shelf cover bracket screws and remove cover brackets. See: Figure
4-17, “DCM shelf cover bracket removal” (p. 4-23).
Figure 4-17 DCM shelf cover bracket removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert DCMs directly in DCM shelf slots per the site-specific documentation and secure
installed on the right side of the DCM shelf.See Figure 4-18, “DCM installed” (p. 4-24).
Figure 4-18 DCM installed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-install DCM cover brackets and tighten all cover bracket screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Re-install DCM cover and secure by turning anchor screws clockwise until they click.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DCM installation in an EIA bay

the DCMs with the captured screws. If DCM placement is not pre-determined, DCMs are
typically installed from top to bottom, relative to LDs from left to right.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM installation in an ETSI rack
DCM installation without DCM shelf cover
DCM installation with DCM shelf cover
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Turn DCM shelf cover screws counter-clockwise and remove cover from DCM shelf as
shown in Figure 4-19, “DCM cover removal” (p. 4-25)
Figure 4-19 DCM cover removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Loosen top screw and removing bottom screw on DCM cover mounting brackets. See
Figure 4-20, “DCM cover bracket removal” (p. 4-26). Lift DCM cover mounting bracket
off top screw and set aside.
Figure 4-20 DCM cover bracket removal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert DCMs directly in DCM shelf slots per the site-specific documentation and secure
Re-install DCM shelf cover brackets using the following steps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Hang DCM cover mounting bracket on top screw then install bottom screw. See: Figure
4-21, “Install DCM cover bracket” (p. 4-27). Repeat for other bracket and tighten all
bracket mounting screws.
Figure 4-21 Install DCM cover bracket
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Re-install DCM cover and secure by turning anchor screws clockwise until they click.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Inventory cable installation
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inventory cable installation

Purpose
Each optical amplifier in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 network element may
be equipped with an external dispersion compensation module connected with a pair of
fibers in between gain stages of the optical amplifier pack. Each colorless wavelength
router-8 channel (CWR8 or CWR8-88) circuit pack may be connected to a SFD44 or
SDF44B Mux/Demux with a pair of fibers. SFD44 and SFD44B must be connected to an
ITLB. For inventory and management purposes, the DCMs, ITLBs and SFD44/SFD44Bs
need to be electrically connected to their respective LDs and CWR8/CWR8-88s via
inventory cables. Additionally, SFD40 and SFD40B shelves also require inventory cable
connections. This section describes how to install the inventory cables.
ANSI/EIA inventory connections

There are 3 cables of various lengths available for inventory connections. All are
ETSI inventory connections

For ETSI applications, the inventory connection is provided via a cable with an RJ11
connector on each end. For these cable connections, the ETSI installation kit
(8DG59719AA**) includes the RJ11 connectors. A spool of cable, 1AC043850003 (two
pair shielded Cat5 cable), must be provided by the installer to build the cable assembly at
the job site. See Table 4-1, “Inventory cable connector pin-out” (p. 4-28)
Table 4-1 Inventory cable connector pin-out
Pair Pin# Wire Color Description

Pair #1 2 White/Blue
3 Blue/White Data
Pair #2 4 White/Orange Gnd
5 Orange/White
Shield Case Braid Shield
Y inventory cable adapter

TheY inventory cable adapter can be used to double the capacity of a circuit pack (such as
CWR8-88) inventory port. The Y adapter can be considered part of the inventory cable,
for cable management purposes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-22 Y inventory cable adapter
Figure 4-23 Internal connection diagram of Y adapter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Unscrew upper cable/fiber channel cover, pull it straight out until it stops, tilt it up and
rest it on the fan unit handles. See Figure 4-24, “Upper cable/fiber channel cover”
(p. 4-30).
Figure 4-24 Upper cable/fiber channel cover
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect one end of Inventory cable to port at top of OA (AHPHG or ALPHG) or

CWR8/CWR8-88 circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Route Inventory cable up through slot above OA/CWR8/CWR8-88 circuit pack and left if
OA/CWR8 is inserted in the left half of the subrack, or right if OA/CWR8/CWR8-88 is
inserted in the right half of subrack. CWR8/CWR8-88 and OA circuit packs are full
height so the Inventory cables attached to them must always be routed up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Inventory cables should be run in horizontal cable/fiber channel, inside of the cable
management clips provided. Cables should drop into vertical space provided in front of
power cables and be secured within cable management clips provided.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Inventory cables only go into the cable management clips in the vertical space
provided. The cable management clips in the horizontal channel are for fiber only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Route inventory cable down to respective DCM, ITLB or SFD, leaving adequate slack to
plug connector into DCM, ITLB, or SFD, but do not plug cable in.
Important! Do not insert inventory cable connector into DCM, ITLB or SFD at this
time. Connection must be made after system software is installed. Proper inventory
cable connection is detailed in Part IV: “Stand-alone installation testing”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for other inventory cables.

Note: Some SFD44s may have two inventory ports. If only one cable will be
connected, always use port INV1. Port INV2 is reserved for connection between an
SFD44 and an SFD44B.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Secure the Inventory cables and manage excess slack in the customer specified manner, to
the tie bar on the left or right side of the bay frame, or to tie locations on the subrack or
bay frame.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Subrack to subrack cable installation
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack to subrack cable installation

Adding additional subracks to master subrack
It is possible to connect multiple subracks to one master subrack to have one network
element with many subracks associated with it. LAN ports on the EC circuit packs are
provided for this purpose.
ANSI/EIA LAN connections

There are 8 cables of various lengths available for LAN connections. All are
ETSI LAN connections

For ETSI applications, the LAN connection is provided via a cable with an RJ45
Connector on each end. For these cable connections, the ETSI installation kit
(8DG59719AA**) includes the RJ45 connectors. A spool of cable, 1AC016760003, four
pair shielded Cat5 cable, must be provided by the installer to build the cable assembly at
the job site. See Table 4-2, “LAN connector pin-out” (p. 4-32).
Table 4-2 LAN connector pin-out

5 Blue/White
Pair #2 3 White/Orange RXP (in)
6 Orange/White RXN (in)
Pair #3 1 White/Green TXP (out)
2 Green/White TXN (out)
Pair #4 7 White/Brown
8 Brown/White
Shield Case Braid GND
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the customer order, determine which subrack will be the master subrack, and which
will be the peer subracks and their order.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect a shielded LAN cable to the lower ES port [see Figure 4-25, “EC circuit pack”
(p. 4-33)] on the LEFT EC circuit pack of the master subrack [see Figure 4-26, “Location
of EC packs in subrack” (p. 4-34)].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the other end of the shielded LAN cable from Step 2 to the upper ES port on the
LEFT EC circuit pack of subrack 2.
Figure 4-25 EC circuit pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-26 Location of EC packs in subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If additional subracks are added, continue to use the same "daisy chain" method of
connection from LEFT EC of the last subrack to LEFT EC of the next subrack as detailed
in Steps 2 and 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect a shielded LAN cable to the upper ES port on the LEFT EC circuit pack of the
master subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Connect the other end of the shielded LAN cable from Step 7 to the lower ES port on the
LEFT EC circuit pack of the last subrack.
Note: This step will complete the LAN cable "ring" which provides two paths for data
from any subrack to any other subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
bay frame.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Electrical SFP applications
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrical SFP applications

Desription
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 system allows the use of electrical SFPs. Electrical
SFPs protrude beyond the faceplate and thus require an extended cover be used for these
applications. A typical Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 electrical SFP is shown below. For
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 applications, see Chapter 7, “Circuit pack and fiber
installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16”.
Figure 4-27 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 electrical SFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an electrical SFP is required on the faceplate of a circuit pack, the cover extension kit
will be required in order to provide additional space required by the electrical SFP.
• For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 ANSI and EIA applications, the kit needed is:
8DG60129AC** EXTENDED ANSI COVER KIT - PSS32
• For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 ETSI applications, the kit needed is:
8DG60129AB** EXTENDED ETSI COVER KIT - PSS32
For additional information, see the extended cover installation instructions in Chapter 2,
Minimum LAN cable bend radius and maximum boot height

To avoid damaging the LAN cable shielding, the bend radius should be no smaller than 1
inch as shown in Figure 4-28, “LAN cable bend radius” (p. 4-37).
In addition, the overall maximum boot height should not exceed 50 mm to avoid
interference with the cover.
Figure 4-28 LAN cable bend radius
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections

Fiber precautions
Note: Fiber is constructed of glass and should be treated with care. It should not be
pulled or stretched. This could cause damage to the fiber or the fiber connector.
Note: Fiber should not be bent in a diameter of less than 3 inches (76 mm).
Note: For maximum protection against signal degradation resulting from fiber
bending, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all jumpers between 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16
and the outside plant fiber be constructed using Depressed Clad Fiber.
Note: Not all 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 subracks require outside plant and/or customer
equipment fiber connections.
Raman gain considerations

For some long-span applications, Raman pumping is required. Raman pumping of outside
plant fiber has some special recommendations described below.
For optimum performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end fiber point losses due to
connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers ensure the following general
guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
• ORL (optical return loss) from any single point reflection should be greater than 33
dB.
Exceptions to the above recommendations will result in reduced reach or capacity.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Arrange to, and obtain, access to the areas that contain both the subrack and the Optical
Distribution Frame (ODF) that connects to the outside plant fiber.
Note: Advance arrangements may have to be made to obtain access to other vendor
co-locate areas.
Contact ____________________________________
Phone/Pager ________________________________
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify path between subrack and ODF as specified on customer order.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify connector types on both ends of the fiber match what is expected at the subrack
and ODF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify through visual approximation that the length of fiber is sufficient.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Pre-label both ends of the fiber(s) with information as specified on the customer order.
Note: Do not remove protective caps on fiber.
Note: Labeling information should always be present on fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove applicable floor tiles or fiber duct covers to facilitate running fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Run fiber between the ODF and the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Do not connect fiber to ODF unless directed to do so by the customer. If directed to

connect fiber to ODF, observe fiber cleaning procedures as specified in Appendix A.
Note: Do not connect fiber to the NE circuit packs. This will be done in a later
chapter.
Note: Any excess fiber should be managed at the ODF, or in the customer specified
manner. See “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules” (p. 4-45)for details on
proper fiber management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace fiber duct covers and/or floor tiles as applicable.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
DCM attenuator removal for in-line applications

DCMS may be installed in-line with the outside plant fiber. DCMs may be equipped with
attenuators that are used to ensure uniform DCM loss regardless of DCM type. These
attenuators need to be removed for in-line applications.
Note: Do not remove attenuators on DCMs used in between amplifier stages.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Intra-NE fiber connections
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intra-NE fiber connections

This section provides general rules and guidelines for selecting fibers for use, routing
fibers and managing fibers.
Table 4-3 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements
Fiber Multimode 50/125 µm and

Singlemode (PC)
parameter 62.5/125 µm
Rack type ANSI/EIA ETSI ANSI/EIA ETSI
LC strain relief 45 degree Straight short 45 degree Straight short
boot angled. Must boot. 35 mm angled. Must boot. 35 mm
rotate 360 maximum from rotate 360 maximum from
degrees without tip of fiber to degrees without tip of fiber to
damaging fiber. back edge of damaging fiber. back edge of
53.1mm max. boot. 53.1mm max. boot.
from fiber tip to from fiber tip to
back edge of back edge of
boot. boot.
Jacket color Blue Yellow Orange: 50/125 µm
Orange or gray: 62.5/125 µm
LC connector Blue Beige
color
Jacket outside 1.6-2.0 mm 1.6-2.0 mm
diameter
Insertion loss: 0.25 dB 0.5 dB
Max. per mated
connection
Return loss: 55 dB 20 dB
Min. per mated
connection
Cable retention 10 lbs/44.5 N 10 lbs/44.5 N
axial pull, Min.
Temp. stability <0.3 dB <0.3 dB
(-40c to 75 C)
Insertion loss
change
Long term bend 60 mm or less 60 mm or less
diameter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements (continued)

Singlemode (PC)
Bending induced 0.1 dB max. at 1625 nm and 100 1 dB max. at 1310 nm and 2 turns at
loss at specific turns at 60 mm diameter 30 mm diameter
bend diameter
Mating <0.2 dB <0.2 dB
durability for
500 reconnects -
max. insertion
loss change
Telecordia Compliant Compliant Not applicable
GR-326-CORE, except where except where
Issue 3 for Type parameters in parameters in
1 Media this table exceed this table exceed
GR-326 GR-326
requirements requirements.
May not pass
side load tests
Fiber connectors
In general, the type of fiber jumper used with 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 will depend on the
type of rack (bay or cabinet) the equipment is installed in. Fiber jumpers used with ETSI
racks need to have a short, straight fiber boot [see Figure 4-30, “Straight LC fiber boot”
(p. 4-42)] to eliminate any interference between the fiber jumpers and the ETSI cabinet
door. Fiber jumpers used with ANSI or EIA racks need to have angled fiber boots [see
Figure 4-29, “Angled LC fiber boot” (p. 4-42)]. It is important that the right fiber jumpers
be ordered based on the type of rack being used. Y optical fiber jumpers are the exception
to this, as the same Y fiber jumpers are used in all rack applications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-29 Angled LC fiber boot
Figure 4-30 Straight LC fiber boot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inline attenuators
Figure 4-31 Inline LC attenuator
If an inline attenuator is required on the faceplate of a circuit pack, the cover extension kit
will be required in order to clear the additional space required by the attenuator.
8DG60129AC** EXTENDED ANSI COVER KIT - PSS32
8DG60129AB** EXTENDED ETSI COVER KIT - PSS32
8DG61196AA** KIT-PSS-16 EXT. COVER BRACKETS
8DG60268AA** ETSI COVER KIT - PSS16 and 8DG61196AA** KIT-PSS-16
EXT. COVER BRACKETS
“Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)”and Chapter 5, “Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation”.
Duplex fibers
Most of the duplex optical connections within a bay can be made with the same 3.5 meter
duplex singlemode fiber jumper. This 3.5 meter jumper is long enough to make all
connections within a subrack or between two subracks in the same rack. If a multi-bay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
network element is being installed, the lengths of some fiber jumpers will need to be
customer engineered. Fiber slack in these jumpers should be managed in the fiber storage
tray. See “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules” (p. 4-45).
In some situations, a 3.5 meter duplex multimode fiber jumper (50µm) is used when
looping the signal from the client side of one 11Star1 OT circuit pack to the client side of
another 11Star1 OT circuit pack (for regeneration). Fiber slack in these jumpers should be
managed in the fiber storage tray. See “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules”
(p. 4-45).
Longer fibers of 7 meters, 10 meters, and 15 meters are available for connections outside
of a single bay or rack.
DCM bypass fiber

In situations where an LD circuit pack will not be connected to a DCM, the DCM IN and
DCM OUT ports on the LD faceplate need to be connected with a simplex fiber jumper
and an attenuator. The length of this jumper is 15.5 centimeters.

DCMS may be installed in between stages on optical amplifiers (typical) or, in some
applications, in-line with the outside plant fiber. DCMs may be equipped with attenuators
that are used to ensure uniform DCM loss regardless of DCM type. These attenuators
need to be removed for in-line applications.
Y fiber jumpers
Y optical fiber jumpers are used where 1+1 optical protection switching is implemented
with two OT circuit packs. The leg of the Y connects to the client signal and the two arms
of the Y connect to two different OT circuit packs. Y jumpers with arms of equal length
for applications where OT circuit packs are in adjacent subrack slots (side by side). Y
jumpers with unequal length arms are used in applications where one half-height OT
circuit pack is directly above another half-height OT circuit pack. In this application the
longer arm attaches to the upper OT circuit pack and the shorter arm attaches to the lower
OT circuit pack.
Y fiber jumpers are available in singlemode, multimode 50µm, and multimode 62.5µm
versions.
The splitter portion of the Y fiber jumper and any slack from the jumper should be stored
in the fiber storage tray (if equipped) located immediately below the subrack containing
the 2 OT circuit packs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attenuators for short-span applications
In some short span applications, optical attenuators need to be installed between the OT
circuit packs and the SFDs. The installation report will only show a connection from the
OT to SFD, but the BOM (bill of materials) will include the attenuators needed, and the
attenuator drawer.
If an attenuator is required, route the attenuator fibers from the OT to the appropriate SFD
through the attenuator drawer. Use the attenuator drawer to manage the attenuator and
associated fiber slack. Repeat for all required attenuators.
Fiber capacity, routing and management rules
Table 4-4 Fiber capacities
Location Capacity
Lower horizontal plastic guide 32 fibers per slot
Upper horizontal plastic guide 32 fibers per slot
OR
14 fibers and 2 RJ45/LAN cables per slot
Lower horizontal tray 416 fibers (208 fibers per side)
Upper horizontal tray 96 fibers and 16 RJ45/LAN cables
(48 fibers and 8 RJ45/LAN cables per side)
OR
32 RJ45/LAN cables and 0 fibers (with plastic clips
removed)
(16 RJ45/LAN cables and 0 fibers per side (with plastic
clips removed)
Fiber capacity numbers assume the use of simplex mini-cord (2.0 mm max. diameter). One
duplex mini-cord fiber is size-equivalent to 2 simplex mini-cord fibers.
Fiber storage tray (FST) usage rules

This section details the features and proper use of the fiber storage trays.
All slack fiber is typically managed in the fiber storage trays. However, some customers
may use other means of fiber management. Use the customer prescribed method if fiber
storage trays are not installed.
• Fibers should be loosely routed through the fiber storage tray slack management
mechanism.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Figure 4-37, “Fiber storage tray fiber routing” (p. 4-48). When properly used, the
fiber storage tray automatically manages the slack necessary to open and close the
tray.
• Fibers should be loosely wrapped around partitions within the fiber storage tray.
How to install fiber into fiber storage tray

Excess fiber must be carefully stored in the fiber storage tray. The easiest way to do this is
to use the "pretzel" method shown below.
Figure 4-32 Step one of "pretzel" method
Figure 4-33 Step 2 of "pretzel" method
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Repeat Steps 1-4 until all slack is gone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-37 Fiber storage tray fiber routing
• Fibers should be loosely secured to the Flex Shelf at the fiber tray entry/exit points
with hook and loop straps. See Figure 4-38, “Fibers secured in flex shelf” (p. 4-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-38 Fibers secured in flex shelf
Fiber inspection and cleaning

Refer to Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning” for the correct fiber cleaning procedures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber precautions
NOTICE
Fiber is constructed of glass and should be treated with care. It should not be pulled or
stretched. This could cause damage to the fiber or the fiber connector.
NOTICE
Fiber should not be bent in a diameter of less than 3 inches (76 mm).
Procedure
Fiber routes should be as direct as possible, using the fiber management ducts, slots and
trays provided.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Fibers connected to half-height circuit packs in the upper half of the subrack
should route up to the upper horizontal fiber tray [see Figure 4-39, “Upper horizontal
fiber tray” (p. 4-51)] and fibers connected to half-height circuit packs in the lower half
of the subrack should route down to the lower horizontal fiber tray. See Figure 4-40,
“Lower horizontal fiber tray” (p. 4-51).
Fibers connected to full-height circuit packs with connectors that angle down should
always be routed down.
In general, fibers connecting to circuit packs in the left half of the subrack route to the
left upon entering a horizontal fiber tray and fibers connected to circuit packs in the
right half of the subrack route to the right upon entering a horizontal fiber tray.
Installing and fibering full height circuit packs with a high density of faceplate
connections requires advanced planning. Most of these faceplate connections are not
angled but come straight out. In order for the shelf to handle the maximum number of
such packs the location of the packs, the order they are fibered/cabled, and the routing
paths of the fibers/cables becomes very important.
An example of a high density circuit pack is the11DPE12E - Each of these circuit
packs can have 32 fibers and 1 RJ45 cable connected to its faceplate. Because of the
large number of connections the following procedure is recommended. This routing
will permit installation of (16) 11DPE12E circuit packs in a shelf without exceeding
the 416 fiber capacity of the lower horizontal fiber tray.
Install circuit packs and route fiber and copper cables starting at the center of the shelf
and work towards the side of the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In some cases fiber will be routed both up and down.
Copper cables should always be routed up.
If there will be a large number of copper cables in the upper horizontal tray, the plastic
clips in the tray can be removed for additional copper cable space. Note that removing
these clips means that, if fibers are also placed here, there is no longer segregation
between copper cables and fibers. This situation should be avoided if possible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Route the RJ45 cable up and position it outside of the upper horizontal tray fiber clips.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Route the fibers from the top 16 slots up, and position them outside of the upper
horizontal tray cable clips.
Figure 4-39 Upper horizontal fiber tray
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Route the fibers from the bottom 16 connectors down into the lower horizontal fiber tray.
Figure 4-40 Lower horizontal fiber tray
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Rotate angled fiber boots to smoothly route fibers from connectors to fiber management
slots.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Use plastic fiber clips to secure fibers in upper horizontal tray and isolate the fibers from
the Inventory cables that share the same trays.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If there will be a large number of copper cables in the upper horizontal tray, the plastic
clips in the tray can be removed for additional copper cable space. Note that removing
these clips means that, if fibers are also placed here, there is no longer segregation
between copper cables and fibers. This situation should be avoided if possible
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Do not route fiber within vertical fiber guide, Fiber must be routed on the outside of the
guide, the inside is reserved for cables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Fibers connected to the left half of the SFD44 must exit the flex shelf to the left. Fibers
connected to the right half of the SFD44 must exit the flex shelf to the right.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Fibers connected to the SFD44 should be secured to the Flex Shelf with hook and loop
straps. See Figure 4-38, “Fibers secured in flex shelf” (p. 4-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Fibers connected to DCMs in the left half of the flex shelf, must exit the flex shelf to the
left. Fibers connected to DCMs in the right half of the flex shelf must exit the flex shelf to
the right.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If the fiber connection is to and from circuit packs within the same subrack, use the fiber
storage tray for that subrack to manage slack. See “Fiber capacity, routing and
management rules” (p. 4-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 If the fiber connection is between subracks, use the most convenient fiber storage tray
from either subrack, with the following exception: If the fiber connection is from the top
of the upper subrack to the bottom of the lower subrack (a connection that needs the most
fiber), the slack will need to be stored in the upper subrack fiber tray (the fiber storage
tray in between subracks) rather than the fiber tray below the lower subrack. See “Fiber
capacity, routing and management rules” (p. 4-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 The splitter combiner on each Y cable should be carefully placed in the front section of
the fiber storage tray of the subrack the cable is used within. See “Fiber capacity, routing
and management rules” (p. 4-45).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Steps
Note: An installation report specific to the network element must be provided. The
installation report is produced by EPT when the network design is created. This work
cannot be done without NE-specific fiber connection information.
Note: There are only three types of fibers provided with an NE, duplex LC to LC
fibers, and LC to LC Y fibers.
The steps below provide instructions for installation of intra-NE fibers. Read the steps in
their entirety before fiber installation. Inspection and cleaning of all fiber jumpers is
mandatory. Detailed instruction on fiber inspection and cleaning is provided in Appendix
A, “Fiber cleaning”. Inspection and cleaning of circuit pack, including XFP and SFP
connectors is also required for all circuit pack prior to making the final fiber connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that no optical circuit packs are seated or powered.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Starting with first fiber connection in the installation report [see Figure 4-41, “Example of
installation report” (p. 4-54)], locate proper fiber jumper from the fibers provided for the
NE.
Figure 4-41 Example of installation report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove dust caps from the connectors at one end of the fiber jumper. INSPECT fiber
ends and CLEAN if required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the installation report, locate circuit pack connection and install one end of fiber
jumper into appropriate fiber management slot provided for the circuit pack slot (directly
above or below the circuit pack). Remove protective caps from circuit pack ports. Using a
video fiber scope INSPECT the connectors and CLEAN if required, then complete fiber
connections to the circuit pack.
Note: Treat DCMs like circuit packs and use the fiber management slots and ducts
provided in the Flex Shelf, per “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules”
(p. 4-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Route the fiber to the correct destination per the installation report and “Fiber capacity,
routing and management rules” (p. 4-45)] and repeat Steps 3 and 4 for other end of fiber
jumper.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all remaining fiber connections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Note: SVAC circuit packs have Client and Line ports reversed compared to other OT
type circuit packs. See Figure 4-42, “SVAC client and line ports” (p. 4-55).
Figure 4-42 SVAC client and line ports
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Part III: Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 physical and
power installation
Overview
Purpose
This part of the Installation Guide includes the chapters to physically install and power a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 NE. These chapters are written assuming working
knowledge of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and its operations.
Required tools
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 is a subrack product, designed to fit in ANSI, EIA or ETSI
bay frames. The following list of tools is recommended, but may not be applicable for all
installations, nor is it necessarily complete for all installations. Special tools may be
required for some sites and/or situations.

Assorted screwdrivers Flat blade and phillips. Must
include flat blade jewelers style
for setting subrack ID
Torx drivers Must include T8, T20,and T25
Metric wrenches and/or sockets
SAE wrenches and/or sockets
ESD wrist strap
TBM5 crimping tool R-5584 Hand hydraulic
or TBM5S crimping tool R5584B Battery hydraulic
or TBM6 crimping tool R4875 Alternate crimper
Assortment of dies for Correct dies will depend upon
TBM5/TBM5S/TBM6 customer provided power
cables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary III-1
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wire Stripper 407578756 (R-5962) Non-Insulated
R-5875 Insulated
R-2761 Power Knife
Heat gun For heat shrink tubing
Special tools
Some special tools may be required to install and maintain the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16. The following special tools are available. See “Special tools” (p. ii).

Screwdriver (long #2 Phillips) 1AD 00861 0003 For half-slot adapter mounting
(about 13" or 330 mm long)
SFP module removal tool 3AL81728AA Included with each subrack
Extraction tool 8DG59614AA For removing XFP modules and
disconnecting LC fibers. included
with each subrack.
Half-slot adapter tool 8DG07796AA For installation and alignment of
half slot adapters.
Test equipment

Multimeter Protek D981(ITE #6930 or Fluke For measuring 40-60 V DC and
189 (ITE #6379A) or equivalent ground continuity.
Optical power ITE #7116 Noyes -Model with LC For optical power measurements
meter with adapter.
appropriate or ITE#71992D2 Acterna/WG with
connectors LC connector, or equivalent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
III-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber cleaning and inspection tools
There are numerous optical fiber scopes listed in “Fiber cleaning and inspection tools”
(p. iii) It it not necessary to have all of them on hand, it is only necessary to be able to
clean and inspect LC male and female connectors.
Description Commercial part number or Installation order number

comcode
Fiber cleaning TK-0621 Kit includes the following Each item can be ordered separately
kit ITE #6408A D6 Case
ITE #7051 Coupler, Fiber (ST-ST)
ITE #7093 Coupling Duplex SC
ITE #7125 Coupler LC-LC fiber
ITE #7134 Luminex Stick Port
cleaner 1.25 mm
ITE #7135 Luminex Stick Port
cleaner 2.5 mm 33713500
ITE #7136 Wipes, Alcohol
33713600
ITE #7137 CLETOP cleaning
cassette Type B. 33713700
ITE #7137A D1 CLETOP cleaning
cassette refills. 3371370
ITE #7177 Optical fiber Microscope,
Westover
R-6033 Cloth, Lumionex. 23603300
Fiber ITE #7177
Microscope
Westover Video TE #7187
Fiber Scope
Westover Video ITE #7187A
Fiber Scope
Noyes Video 408356830 (ITE #7146) 41714600
Fiber Scope
(VFS-1)
1.25-mm 408356848 (ITE #7146D1) 33714601 Used to inspect circuit
Adapter for pack faceplate fiber ports
VFS-1
LC Adapter for 408356889 (ITE #7146D4) 33714604
VFS-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary III-3
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description Commercial part number or Installation order number

comcode
Noyes OFS 408463636 (ITE #7129) 33712900
300-200X
Optical Fiber
Scope (used to
inspect fiber)
1.25-mm 408197069 (ITE #7129D2) 33712902
Adapter for
Noyes OFS
Contents
Chapter 5, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation 5-1

Chapter 6, Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Alcatel-Lucent 6-1
1830 PSS-16
Chapter 7, Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 7-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
III-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
5 5 lcatel-Lucent
A
1830 PSS-16 subrack
physical installation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the information to install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS-16) (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16)subrack and flex shelf into an existing bay
frame or rack.
Note: Airflow considerations
impede airflow or direct exhaust air from one subrack to the intake of another. To
understand the airflow through Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, see: Figure 5-1,
“Airflow diagram” (p. 5-2).
Contents
Installation options/requirements 5-2

Subrack installation in an EIA bay frame 5-4
Subrack installation in an ANSI bay frame 5-10
Subrack installation in an ETSI rack 5-16
Additional hardware installation (SFD, DCM, fiber storage tray etc.) 5-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Installation options/requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation options/requirements
Bay frame options
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subracks must be mounted into a customer installed bay
frame or rack. The equipment is compatible with an ANSI (23") bay frame, an ETSI rack
(ETS 300119-3 Standards) or an EIA (19") bay frame. It is assumed that the customer has
installed the bay frame or rack properly, including earthquake mounting and grounding.
The placement of the subracks will vary with different customer needs and system
configurations. The figures in this installation manual are examples of how the subracks
can be mounted. Please consult customer documentation or EPT installation diagrams and
reports for exact placement of subracks, and auxiliary equipment such as Flex shelves,
Raman boosters, or EDFA boosters.
Figure 5-1 Airflow diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Installation options/requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
values specified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Subrack installation in an EIA bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets with the short side out. See Figure
5-2, “EIA subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 5-5). The brackets are interchangeable,
left and right. Use three M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per side, as shown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The heat baffle is not installed on the subrack when used in an EIA bay.
Figure 5-2 EIA subrack mounting bracket position
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install the left and right lower front cover brackets and left and right upper front cover
brackets onto the subrack as shown in Figure 5-3, “Cover brackets installed for EIA
applications” (p. 5-6) Use two M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per bracket. Use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the first and third holes in each bracket. If the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 is being
installed in a cabinet with a door, do not install the upper and lower cover brackets, as
they may interfere with the cabinet door.
Figure 5-3 Cover brackets installed for EIA applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Loosely install two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) in each EIA bay upright (total of four
screws) in customer specified location, leaving 7 open screw holes between each pair, on
each side. Leave approximately 1/4" (7mm) of threads exposed on each screw.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
brackets onto the screws installed into each bay upright. Tighten all four screws. See
Figure 5-4, “Subrack installed in EIA bay frame” (p. 5-7).
Figure 5-4 Subrack installed in EIA bay frame
Note: Subrack is shown with user panel and fan tray installed. See Chapter 6, “Cable,
fan, filter, and user panel installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” for detailed
user panel and fan instructions.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
latches in the upper cover brackets at the top of the shelf, See Figure 5-6, “Latch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alignment” (p. 5-8). Using a coin or a flat blade screwdriver, rotate latches clockwise until
they "click" to lock cover in place. To unlock latches for cover removal, rotate them
counter-clockwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-7 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an EIA rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Subrack installation in an ANSI bay frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the reversible EIA/ANSI mounting brackets with the long side out. See Figure 5-8,
“ANSI subrack mounting bracket position” (p. 5-11). The brackets are interchangeable,
left and right. Use three M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per side, as shown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install the left side baffle as shown in Figure 5-8, “ANSI subrack mounting bracket
position” (p. 5-11). Use three M5x8 pan head (cheese head) screws (1AD013170044).
Figure 5-8 ANSI subrack mounting bracket position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install the left and right lower front cover brackets and left and right upper front cover
brackets onto the subrack as shown in Figure 5-9, “Cover brackets installed for EIA
applications” (p. 5-12) Use two M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per bracket.
Figure 5-9 Cover brackets installed for EIA applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Loosely install two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) in each ANSI bay upright (total of
four screws) in customer specified location, leaving 6 open screw holes between each
pair, on each side. Leave approximately 1/4" (7mm) of threads exposed on each screw.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
brackets onto the screws installed into each bay upright. Tighten all four screws. See
Figure 5-10, “Subrack installed in ANSI bay frame” (p. 5-13).
Figure 5-10 Subrack installed in ANSI bay frame
Note: Subrack is shown with User Panel and Fan Tray installed. See Chapter 6,
“Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” for
detailed user panel and fan instructions.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-13 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an ANSI
rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Subrack installation in an ETSI rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ETSI bay frame preparation
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 utilizes the full depth of a standard ETSI rack,
therefore, some ETSI rack may require preparation prior to the installation of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subracks. The Alcatel-Lucent Optinex ETSI rack, in
particular, has an optional rear horizontal cable tie down bar that cannot be installed (or
may need to be removed) if the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack is to be installed in
the upper position. See Figure 5-14, “Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal”
(p. 5-16).
Figure 5-14 Optinex ETSI rack cable tie down bar removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the ETSI mounting brackets with the long side out. See Figure 5-2, “EIA subrack
mounting bracket position” (p. 5-5). The brackets are interchangeable, left and right. Use
three M5x8 flat head screws (1AD009040013) per side, as shown.
Figure 5-15 ETSI subrack mounting bracket position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary (see Note below), install the left and right lower front cover brackets, and left
and right upper front cover brackets onto the subrack as shown in Figure 5-16, “Cover
brackets installed for ETSI applications” (p. 5-18) Use two M5x8 flat head screws
(1AD009040013) per bracket.
Note: If the subrack is installed in an ETSI rack with a door, there is no need for a
subrack cover, therefore, cover brackets are not required.
Figure 5-16 Cover brackets installed for ETSI applications
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Loosely install two M6x12 screws (1AD009150001)in each ETSI rack upright (total of
four screws) in customer specified location, leaving 5 open screw holes between each
pair, on each side. Leave approximately 1/4" (7mm) of threads exposed on each screw.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install subrack into rack by locating the keyhole slots in the subrack mounting brackets
onto the screws installed into each bay upright. Tighten all four screws. See Figure 5-17,
“Subrack installed in ETSI bay frame” (p. 5-19).
Figure 5-17 Subrack installed in ETSI bay frame
Note: Subrack is shown with User Panel and Fan Tray installed. See Chapter 6,
“Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” for
detailed user panel and fan instructions.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Note: If the subrack is installed in an ETSI rack with a door, there is no need for a
subrack cover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
counter-clockwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack with baffle mounted in an ETSI
rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation Additional hardware installation (SFD, DCM, fiber storage
tray etc.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional hardware installation (SFD, DCM, fiber storage tray

etc.)
General
For installation of connected equipment outside of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
subrack, such as Flex Shelves, DCM shelves, fiber storage trays, SFDs, attenuator
drawers, please refer to Chapter 2, “Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32)” and select the section applicable to the type of bay in use.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
6 6 able, fan, filter, and user
C
panel installation for
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16
Overview
Purpose
This chapter covers the general requirements and methods to install and terminate
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 cables (including power and ground), as well as instructions
for installing the air filter, fan and user panel.
Important! The intra-building ports of the equipment are suitable only for connection
to shielded intra-building cabling that is grounded at both ends.
The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection
to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 5) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The
addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

values specified.
Contents
Subrack grounding 6-3

Subrack ID setting 6-6
Fan tray and air filter Installation 6-9
User panel installation and connections 6-15
Connecting power cables 6-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify battery A/B assignments 6-50
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Subrack grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack grounding
ANSI and EAI subrack grounding
Each subrack provides threaded holes for subrack to bay frame grounding. Ground wire
and lugs are not included with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and must be provided by
customer. Ground wire must be 6 AWG copper (13.3mm2 cross section) at a minimum.
applies.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Bay frame must be grounded and if subrack ground is to be connected to the bay frame, it
must be properly prepared by removing all paint and non-conductive coatings, exposing
bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean and coated with
anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect one end of customer provided 6 AWG copper ground cable to bay frame using
only thread-forming subrack mounting screws and customer provided lug. See Table 6-1,
“Ground lug selection” (p. 6-3) to determine the correct lug for the application.
Table 6-1 Ground lug selection
ANSI subrack EIA subrack

Use lug supplied with installation kit Use lug supplied with installation kit
(1AB051530050), Burndy part number: (1AB051530072), Burndy part number:
YA6CL2TC14E145, or equivalent 6 AWG, YA6CL2TC1445, or equivalent 6 AWG, two
two hole lug with 1" (25mm) spacing. hole lug with 5/8" (16mm) spacing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect other end of ground cable to ground point provided on the front lower right of
the subrack. See Figure 6-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 6-4). Use lug
supplied with installation kit (1AB051530072), Burndy part number: YA6CL2TC1445, or
equivalent 6 AWG, two hole lug with 5/8" (16mm) spacing. and qty. 2, M5x8 screws
(1AD008860022 which is also included in the installation kit) for mounting.
Note that for best cable routing, this lug can be positioned vertically or horizontally as
shown in Figure 6-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 6-4).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 Subrack ground attachment point (1 of 2)
Figure 6-1 Subrack ground attachment point (2 of 2)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI subrack grounding
Note: A two hole lug with 5/8" hole spacing (1AB051530072) and two M5 screws
((1AD008860022), for subrack grounding, and a two hole lug with 1" hole spacing
(1AB051530050) and two M6 screws (1AD009150001) for rack/cabinet ground
connection, are provided with the ETSI installation kit.
Each subrack provides threaded holes for subrack to rack grounding. Ground wire is not
included with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 ETSI installation kits, and must be provided
by customer. Ground wire must be 6 AWG copper (13.3mm2 cross section) at a minimum.
applies.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Rack must be properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive
coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean
and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect one end of customer provided ground cable to rack using provided two hole lug
with 1" hole spacing, or customer provided lug. Secure with provided M6 screws or
customer provided screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 6-4) Use an Burndy part number:
YA6CL2TC1445 6 AWG lug, or equivalent with 5/8" (16mm) spacing and qty. 2, M5x8
screws for mounting.
Note that for best cable routing, this lug can be positioned vertically or horizontally as
shown in Figure 6-1, “Subrack ground attachment point” (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Subrack ID setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subrack ID setting
Purpose
This section describes the method to provide a unique identity for each subrack.
NOTICE
Caution
The subrack ID must be set properly on peer subracks before the peer subrack is
connected to any other subrack. Connecting subracks with duplicate IDs may cause
database corruption.
Subrack ID
The subrack ID switches are located on the fan tray. See Figure 3-4, “Subrack ID
connector location” (p. 3-8). The switch settings must be unique for each subrack in a
network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the fan tray and turn it over to access Subrack ID switches. See the figure below:
Figure 6-2 Subrack ID rotating switches (1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Subrack ID rotating switches (2 of 2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the switches using the table below.
Table 6-2 Subrack ID settings
Subrack CM1 rotary switch CM2 rotary switch

Master subrack 1 8
Subrack #2 2 0
Subrack #3 3 0
Subrack #4 4 0
Subrack #5 5 0
Subrack #6 6 0
Subrack #7 7 0
Subrack #8 8 0
Subrack #9 9 0
Subrack #10 A 0
Subrack #11 B 0
Subrack #12 C 0
Subrack #13 D 0
Subrack #14 E 0
Subrack #15 F 0
Subrack #16 0 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-2 Subrack ID settings (continued)
Subrack CM1 rotary switch CM2 rotary switch

Subrack #17 1 1
Subrack #18 2 1
Subrack #19 3 1
Subrack #20 4 1
Subrack #21 5 1
Subrack #22 6 1
Subrack #23 7 1
Subrack #24 8 1
Note: Set position FF on the rotating switches for "Not installed Subrack
identification."
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Reinstall the fan tray.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Fan tray and air filter Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan tray and air filter Installation

Purpose
This section provides instructions for correct installation or replacement of the fan tray
and air filter. If the fan tray and air filter are already installed, there is no need to do this
procedure.
Fan tray Installation and replacement

Note: If replacing the fan tray in a powered system, it is imperative that the new fan is
installed within 60 seconds of the old fan being removed. Some Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 circuit packs will overheat rapidly without constant air flow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Familiarize yourself with the location of fan tray slots in the bottom of the subrack. See
Figure 6-3, “Fan tray slots” (p. 6-9).
Note: The following figures may show outdated cables and hardware. They should be
used only as a guide for fan installation and/or replacement.
Figure 6-3 Fan tray slots
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure there are no cables or fibers hindering the installation of the fan tray.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Grasp fan tray by the front handles with the aluminum shield facing up as shown in
Figure 6-4, “Correct fan tray alignment” (p. 6-10).
Figure 6-4 Correct fan tray alignment
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure edges of the fan tray circuit board align with the fan tray Slots in the subrack and
gently slide the fan tray into the subrack until it fully seats. See Figure 6-5, “Fan tray fully
seated into subrack” (p. 6-10)
Figure 6-5 Fan tray fully seated into subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Secure fan tray with captured screws at each end of fan tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Removal is the reverse of installation. Replace air filter prior to replacing fan tray, if
possible. See “Air filter replacement” (p. 6-13).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Air filter Installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove air filter cover on right side of subrack. See Figure 6-6, “Air filter cover”
(p. 6-11).
Figure 6-6 Air filter cover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Air filter is installed in a vertical orientation on the right side of subrack. The removal tab
should point to the right and the coarse mesh should face left. See Figure 6-7, “Filter
Figure 6-7 Filter installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Gently push air filter into cavity until it snaps to the left as shown in Figure 6-8, “Filter
fully installed” (p. 6-13).
Figure 6-8 Filter fully installed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install air filter cover. Secure with two captured screws as shown in Figure 6-6, “Air filter
cover” (p. 6-11).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Air filter replacement

Air filter should be replaced every 3 months or sooner, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove subrack cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove air filter cover on right side of subrack. See Figure 6-6, “Air filter cover”
(p. 6-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Grasp removal tab and tug gently to the right to dislodge front edge of air filter. See
Figure 6-9, “Air filter removal” (p. 6-14).
Figure 6-9 Air filter removal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Pull air filter straight back to remove.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To install air filter, see “Air filter Installation” (p. 6-11).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for User panel installation and connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User panel installation and connections

Purpose
This section provides instructions for installation of the user panel and cabling to the
connectors of the user panel on the top of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack.
User panel installation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully seat user panel into top circuit pack slot of subrack. See Figure 6-10, “user
panel installed into subrack” (p. 6-15).
Note: Peer subracks will not have a user panel and will need to be equipped with a
blank instead.
Figure 6-10 user panel installed into subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Secure user panel in place with two captured screws provided on each end of user panel
face plate.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Figure 6-11 User panel connectors detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ANSI/EIA rack lamp connections
There are five different length cables available for rack lamp connection in ANSI and EIA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack lamp cables to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel.
See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). rack lamp cables should exit
left to the left vertical of the bay frame and should be routed along the bay frame in a
customer specified manner.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the left side of the bay frame.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI rack lamp connections

For ETSI applications, the ETSI installation kit (8DG59719AA**) includes the 9-pin
connector cable assembly (8DG90079AAAA). It must be cut to length and terminated
with the RJ45 connector included in the ETSI installation kit. Use Table 6-3, “Rack lamp
connector pin-out” (p. 6-17) to terminate ETSI rack lamp cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack lamp cable to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel. See
Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). rack lamp cable should exit left to
the left vertical of the rack and should be routed along the rack in a customer specified
manner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the unterminated end of the rack lamp cable to the customer-provided equipment
Table 6-3, “Rack lamp connector pin-out” (p. 6-17) shows the connections for the
unterminated cable ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Secure the cables and manage slack in the customer specified manner or to the tie bar on
the left side of the rack.
Table 6-3 Rack lamp connector pin-out
D-
RJ45
Pair Sub Wire Color Description
Pin#
Pin#
Pair 1 1 White/Blue not used
#1 2 7 Blue/White RL_CH incoming call
Pair 3 6 White/Orange not used
#2 4 2 Orange/White not used
Pair 5 3 White/Green RL_ATTD Attended alarm lamp
#3 6 5 Green/White RL_NURG Not urgent alarm lamp
Pair 7 9 White/Brown RL_REF Common reference
#4 8 4 Brown/White RL_URG Urgent alarm lamp
Shield Case Case Braid Ground
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ANSI/EIA rack alarm connections

There are 5 different length cables available for rack alarm connection in ANSI and EIA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Rack alarm outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external
negative voltage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the rack alarm cable installation information on the customer order including the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack alarm cables to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel.
See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). rack alarm cables should exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI rack alarm connections

For ETSI applications, the rack alarm (RA) connection is provided via a cable with a
DB15 on one end and is unterminated on the other. For these cable connections, the ETSI
installation kit (8DG59719AA**) includes the 15-pin connector and shell. A spool of 8
assembly at the job site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Rack alarm outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external
negative voltage.
Verify the rack alarm cable installation information on the customer order including the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the rack alarm cables to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel.
See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). rack alarm cable should exit
left to the left vertical of the rack and should be routed along the rack in a customer
specified manner.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the unterminated ends of the rack alarm cable to the customer-provided
equipment Table 6-4, “Rack alarm connector pin-out” (p. 6-19) shows the connections for
the unterminated cable ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the left side of the rack.
Table 6-4 Rack alarm connector pin-out

1 RA_ANDBATT Orange/White Fault or loss of both station batteries
2 RA_ORBATT White/Orange Fault or loss of one station battery
3 RA_URG Green/White Audible critical alarm (detection of urgent
alarm) Source: EC pack
4 White/Green
5 RA_ANC Brown/White Fault or loss of both equipment-internal
service power supplies
6 White/Brown
7 RA_NURG White/Slate Audible major alarm (detection of non-urgent
8 Slate/White
9 RA_ORC Blue/Red Fault or loss of one equipment-internal service
power supply
10 Red/Blue
11 RA_INT Red/Orange Audible minor alarm (detection of internal
12 Orange/Red
13 RA_IND Green/Red Not activated by software
14 Red/Green
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-4 Rack alarm connector pin-out (continued)

15 RA_REF Blue/White Voltage reference of remote alarms
Case GND Electrical ground - Case
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ANSI/EIA housekeeping connections

There are five different length cables available for housekeeping connection in ANSI and
EIA applications. All are pre-terminated for ease of installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Housekeeping outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external

negative voltage.
Verify the housekeeping cable installation information on the customer order including
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the housekeeping cable to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel.
See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). housekeeping cable should exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the terminated ends of the housekeeping cable to the customer-provided

equipment.
dry contacts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ETSI housekeeping connections

For ETSI applications, the housekeeping (HK) connection is provided via a cable with a
DB15 on one end and is unterminated on the other. For these cable connections, the ETSI
installation kit (8DG59719ABAA) includes the 15-pin connector and shell. A spool of 8
assembly at the job site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Housekeeping outputs are electronic relay contacts to be connected to external

negative voltage.
Verify the housekeeping cable installation information on the customer order including
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the housekeeping cable to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel.
See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). housekeeping cable should exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the unterminated ends of the housekeeping cable to the customer-provided

equipment. Table 6-5, “Housekeeping connector pin-outs” (p. 6-22) shows the
connections for the unterminated housekeeping cable ends.
dry contacts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-5 Housekeeping connector pin-outs

1 HK_OUTN_1 White/Orange Output Pair 1
2 HK_OUTP_1 Orange/White
3 HK_OUTN_2 White/Green Output Pair 2
4 HK_OUTP_2 Green/White
5 HK_OUTN_3 White/Brown Output Pair 3
6 HK_OUTP_3 Brown/White
7 HK_OUTN_4 White/Slate Output Pair 4
8 HK_OUTP_4 Slate/White
9 HK_IN1 Red/Blue # 1 Input
10 HK_IN2 Blue/Red # 2 Input
11 HK_IN3 Red/Orange # 3 Input
12 HK_IN4 Orange/Red # 4 Input
13 HK_IN5 Green/Red # 5 Input
14 HK_IN6 Red/Green # 6 Input
15 HK_REF Blue/White Reference voltage
case GND Electrical ground - Case
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Punch down block connections

equipment (such as the Raman shelf or EDFA booster) to the housekeeping port. Use the
following procedures to connect and dress wires on the punch down block. For
instructions on the installation of the punch down block assembly, see Chapter 2,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Route wires to the punch down block and insert them into the wire management slots
provided on the top and bottom of punch down block. Allow at least 13mm of extra wire
to protrude beyond the white face of the punch down block. See Figure 6-12, “Punch
down block step 1” (p. 6-23)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: 25mm or more of excess wire makes it easier to hold on to the wire when
trimming and is highly recommended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Bend excess wire 90 degrees over the face of the punchdown block and insert the wire
into the desired slot. See Figure 6-13, “Punch down block step 2” (p. 6-23)
Note: Before continuing to the next step, ensure that the excess wire pieces produced
by the punch down tool will be captured and will not fall into any equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Place punch down tool over wire on front of punch down block and gently press tool
against punch down block until tool clicks. See Figure 6-14, “Punch down block step 3”
(p. 6-24). The punch down tool will seat the wire into the block and trim excess wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
automatically. On some punch down tools, automatic trimming is an option. If wire is not
trimmed automatically, manually trim the wire. See punchdown tool instructions if use is
unclear.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that wire is in correct position, and is fully seated and trimmed in punchdown
block. Verify that excess wire is accounted for. See Figure 6-15, “Punch down block Step
4” (p. 6-25).
Figure 6-15 Punch down block Step 4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Dress wire in any of the included clips and in a manner approved by the customer. One
option can be seen in Figure 6-16, “Punch down block Step 5” (p. 6-25).
Figure 6-16 Punch down block Step 5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining wires. Connected pairs of terminals in the
punchdown block are arranged vertically.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
VOIP, OAMP, E1, and E2, cables

If connecting a PC directly to the OAMP, VOIP, E1 or E2 port, and the port speed and
duplex are set to AUTO, a straight-through or crossover cable may be used. If the port
speed or duplex is set to anything other than AUTO it is necessary to use a cross-over
cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the OAMP, VOIP, E1, and E2, cables to the corresponding jacks on the
Interconnection panel. See Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). OAMP,
VOIP, E1, and E2 cables should exit right to the right vertical of the bay frame and should
be routed along the bay frame in a customer specified manner.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the ends of the all the cables to the customer-provided equipment. Consult site
documents for specific connection information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the right side of the bay frame.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Craft cable installation

There is a USB type AB craft cable connector on the user panel, See: Figure 6-11, “User
panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). The USB port used a standard USB type AB cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the craft cable to the corresponding jacks on the Interconnection panel. See
Figure 6-11, “User panel connectors detail” (p. 6-15). Craft cable should exit right to the
right vertical of the bay frame and should be routed along the bay frame in a customer
specified manner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect the ends of the all the cables to the customer-provided equipment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Table 6-6 PC com port settings for craft use
Com Port Parameter USB connection

Bits Per Second 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity Odd
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Connecting power cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connecting power cables

Description
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 is powered by -48V to -60Vdirect current (DC). Power
filters and breakers are located in lower left and right slots on each subrack. DC-to-DC on
board power converters convert power on individual circuit packs.
Power distribution
The choice of the power cable cross section depends on the DC branch circuit upstream
protection provided and the voltage drop allowed on the cable. A site-specific evaluation
has to be made (distance between power source and equipment, routing of cables, voltage
drop, etc.) prior to installing the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 product.
Note: The input DC power installation provided by the customer for the connection of
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 product must be in accordance with local regulation
rules and requirements.
The overcurrent protection rating for the DC branch circuit used to supply power to the
equipment must be rated at least 125% of the products electrical rating. Depending on the
product's configuration the electrical rating varies. Refer to the table below for the
product electrical ratings and recommended branch circuit protection size.
Note: If multiple subracks are to be connected to the same branch circuit, add up the
maximum current draw of each subrack and multiply the sum of all the subrack
current draw by 1.25 to determine branch circuit size.
Table 6-7 Customer provided power cable selection guide

Electrical Rating
PFDC20K Two (2) lines, each rated 25 Amp
-48 to -60 VDC, 18Amp
PFDC35K Two (2) lines, each rated 35 Amp
-48 to -60 VDC, 28 Amp
Battery return connection mode

In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, the battery return conductor is an Isolated DC return
(DC-I), however ETSI applications may be equipped to use the battery return as a ground.
Connector prep and cabling

Note: Ensure Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack is properly grounded prior to
starting any power cable work. See “Subrack grounding” (p. 6-3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
Always isolate upstream power from customer provided power cables prior to connecting
cannot be turned on while working on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 power cables
Connection without the use of a PDU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use power cables that came with the subrack. ANSI and EIA cables have color coded heat
shrink tubing to distinguish A feed (red) and B feed (blue). ETSI cables have no color
code and are interchangeable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
customer requirements. Blue cables need to installed on the right side of the subrack and
red on the left. See Figure 6-17, “Power cable locations” (p. 6-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ground the power cables in one of two ways:

• Connect Yellow/Green ground wire in each power cable to the bay using crimped-on
lug as in “ANSI and EAI subrack grounding” (p. 6-3)
• Connect Yellow/Green ground wire in each power cable to building ground directly
using a gutter tap (H tap). See below for gutter tap instructions.
Note: It may be necessary to strip a substantial amount of the outer sheath from the
power cables to provide the correct ground cable length if the ground attachment
point is not near the power attachment point.
Note: The gutter tap instructions below use generic photos that do not necessarily
show the correct wire colors or wire count.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: All power cables and connectors provided by the customer for the connection
of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 power cables to the customer power cables must
be selected in accordance with local regulation rules and requirements.
Note: Both A power and B power cables use the same color code. See Table 6-8,
“Power cable color code” (p. 6-30) for individual wires.
Gutter tap (H tap) the power cables into the BDFB cables as designated by the customer
order.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use Table 6-8, “Power cable color code” (p. 6-30) to determine the proper connections.
Table 6-8 Power cable color code

RTN Batt + Red 1
GND Yellow/Green 2
Batt- Blue 3
Figure 6-17 Power cable locations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Place power cables next to H Tap and mark for insulation stripping. Expose enough
conductor to allow 100% filling of the H tap wire holes.
Figure 6-18 Mark cables for insulation stripping
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert cables into H tap until insulation is against H tap. Ensure exposed conductors are
long enough to fill holes in H tap. Do not allow any insulation into H tap.
Figure 6-19 Cables being inserted into H Tap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Crimp H tap. Ensure H tap is evenly crimped along its entire length. It may be necessary
to crimp the H tap more than once.
Figure 6-20 Crimp H tap
Figure 6-21 Properly crimped H tap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Install protective cover on H tap and secure with wax string, zip tie or customer specified
method.
Figure 6-22 Protective cover
Figure 6-23 Secure protective cover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-24 Example of H tap in an overhead rack
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power connection with PDU
Alcatel-Lucent offers optional Power Distribution Units (PDU) for use with ANSI, EIA or
ETSI racks. The following section provides instructions for cable termination for use with
a PDU and a brief overview of the PDU options. For complete PDU installation and use,
please consult the documentation provided with the PDU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 DANGER
Always isolate upstream power from customer-provided power cables prior to connecting
subrack power cables.
Use local lockout/tagout or equivalent procedures to ensure power cannot be turned on
while installing the Alcatel-Lucent PDU.
Use power cables that came with the subrack. Included with each subrack is a red cable
(A Power) and a blue cable (B Power).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
customer requirements. Blue cables need to installed on the right side of the subrack and
red on the left. See Figure 6-17, “Power cable locations” (p. 6-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Terminate the supplied power cables with 5/8" spaced Burndy lugs and heat shrink tubing
supplied with the installation kit as shown in Figure 6-29, “Power cable terminations”
(p. 6-39).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Strip the cable insulation to the proper length using the lug as a guide.
Figure 6-25 Strip cable insulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the crimper to the proper wire/lug size.
Figure 6-26 Setting crimper
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Insert the lug into the crimper and squeeze the crimper handles until they are bottomed
out.
Figure 6-27 Crimp lug onto wire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-28 Finished crimp
Figure 6-29 Power cable terminations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-30 Typical PDU wiring configuration
Note: The figures above are for reference only and do not necessarily depict cables
that are provided with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Connect power cables to PDU using documentation provided with PDU and Table 6-8,
“Power cable color code” (p. 6-30).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Examples of PDUs in different applications.

Note: The photos of PDUs are for reference only and do not necessarily depict PDU
options applicable to any specific installation or subrack type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-31 PDU installed in ETSI rack
Figure 6-32 PDU installed in an ANSI rack
Figure 6-33 PDU installed in an EIA rack
PDU slider kit

The PDU may be installed in an ETSI rack (the slider is not an option for ANSI or EIA
bays) using a slider kit The slider kit attaches to the PDU and allows it to be slid out of
the cabinet to allow easier access to the cabling. See Figure 6-34, “PDU optional slider kit
reference photos” (p. 6-42) Use the detailed instructions included in the slider kit for
installation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-34 PDU optional slider kit reference photos
Note: If using the slider kit, ensure there is adequate slack in all power and ground
cables so that the PDU can be pulled out to the fully extended slide position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Continuity testing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
“Continuity check” (p. 6-43) and Figure 6-35, “Power cable pin identification” (p. 6-43).
Figure 6-35 Power cable pin identification
Note: The connector housing and interlock may not match the photos above, but the
pin identification relative to the direction of the interlock will be the same.
Table 6-9 Continuity check
Test point 1 Test Point 2 Expected measurement

Pin 1 Pin 2 <1 Ohm
Subrack frame Bay ground <1 Ohm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Do turn on power until all continuity tests have passed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Voltage testing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure power cables are not connected to power filters and that the power cable
connector pins are not in contact with any person or any conductive material.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn on power A at BDFB or PDU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Test voltage of the A power cables at connector ends using Table 6-10, “Voltage check”
(p. 6-44) and Figure 6-35, “Power cable pin identification” (p. 6-43).
Table 6-10 Voltage check
Test point 1 (- lead on Test Point 2 (+ lead on

Expected measurement
DVM) DVM)
Pin 1 Pin 2 0 volts
Subrack frame Bay ground 0 volts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn off the A power at the BDFB or PDU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the B power cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Secure the cables in the customer specified manner (cable ties, string, etc.) to the tie bar
on the left or right side of the bay frame or to tie locations on the subrack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Filter installation and connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install PFDC power filters into lower left and lower right slots in subrack. See Figure
6-36, “Power filter locations” (p. 6-45).
Figure 6-36 Power filter locations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Gently form bends in each cable to ensure they exit toward the side of the subrack
without excessive binding. See Figure 6-37, “Pre-forming power cables — ANSI”
(p. 6-46) and Figure 6-38, “Pre-forming power cables — ETSI” (p. 6-47).
Figure 6-37 Pre-forming power cables — ANSI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-38 Pre-forming power cables — ETSI (1 of 2)
Figure 6-38 Pre-forming power cables — ETSI (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Plug the power cables into the power filters and secure them with captured screws. See:
Figure 6-39, “Cables plugged into power filters” (p. 6-48).
Figure 6-39 Cables plugged into power filters
Note: The torque for the cable connector jack screws should be no greater than 4.5
in-lb (50 N cm). This is lower than the torque values listed for this size fastener in
Appendix B, “Tightening torque”.
Note: Each power cable connector has an interlock that prevents power filter removal
without first removing the power connector. See Figure 6-35, “Power cable pin
identification” (p. 6-43). The interlock design also prevents a cable meant for a 20
amp power filter from being used in a 35 amp power filter. Do not defeat the
interlock.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn power on at BDFB.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for Verify battery A/B assignments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify battery A/B assignments

Verifying feed A
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
power feed at the BDFB.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the A side power filter should remain
illuminated.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the B side power filter should be
extinguished.
Note: It takes approximately 10 seconds for the appropriate power failure LED to turn
on after power is shut off.
Note: If the PWR A OUTPUT LED is not lit and the B LED is lit, the A and B power
feeders to the bay are swapped. Correct the error and re-test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verifying feed B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the B side power filter should remain
illuminated.
Requirement: The PWR OUTPUT LED on the A side power filter should be extinguished.
Note: If the LEDs on the B side are not lit and the A side LEDs are lit, the A and B
power feeds are swapped. Correct the error and re-test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set the switches on the B power filters to OFF.

Note: At this point both A and B power should be left OFF.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
7 7 ircuit pack and fiber
C
installation for
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides guidelines necessary to install all the ordered circuit packs and
fibers into the appropriate positions. There are no fixed transmission circuit pack shelf
and slot conventions with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16. It is absolutely necessary to
consult the customer work order, rack face drawings, and fiber tables (information listed
is typically found in the EPT installation report), created for each network element, to
complete this work.
Contents
General Circuit Pack Guidelines 7-2

Precautions 7-3
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation 7-4
Optical amplifier installation 7-11
DCM installation 7-19
Inventory cable Installation 7-20
Electrical SFP applications 7-23
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections 7-25
Intra-NE fiber connections 7-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent General Circuit Pack Guidelines
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General Circuit Pack Guidelines

Airflow considerations
Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Install and seat circuit
pack blanks into any unused slots, including slots for PFDCs and ECs. Blanks are
required in all empty slots to ensure proper airflow in the sub rack.
If circuit packs are being added to a powered shelf, do not remove circuit pack blanks
until circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be installed in
place of blanks (inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place) within five
minutes of blank removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the sub rack.
until new circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be installed
(inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place) within five minutes of old pack
removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the sub rack.
impede airflow or direct exhaust air from one subrack to the intake of another.
Circuit pack booting consideration

Always allow circuit packs to boot fully before unseating them (unless they fail to boot).
Some circuit packs may take 5 minutes or more to boot fully. A solid green LED on the
faceplate will indicate that the circuit pack has completed the boot cycle.
When a circuit pack is inserted into an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16, the system will
upgrade is required, the system will automatically initiate the upgrade on the circuit pack.
If the circuit pack is removed before the upgrade is completed, it will result in the
pack becoming inoperable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Precautions
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Precautions
ESD
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Many of these circuit packs are sensitive to ESD. Always use an ESD wrist strap when
handling circuit packs.
Handling
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Care should be used while handling Circuit Packs to prevent damage to the internal
fibers on the circuit packs or causing them to come loose.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-amplifier circuit pack installation

Common circuit pack placement
There are only four circuit packs that are installed in fixed locations, per subrack. Two
Element Controller (EC) circuit packs and two Power Filter (PFDC) circuit packs. All
other circuit packs, DCMs, ITLB and SFD44/SFD44B devices must be placed per the
customer order, work order, or rack face drawing. PFDCs were installed in the previous
chapter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
subracks in the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install, but do not seat, all EC circuit packs as shown below. See Figure 7-1, “Subrack
with EC and PFDC installed” (p. 7-4).
Note: The ECs and other circuit packs will be seated later during commissioning. The
order in which the circuit packs are seated is critical. Ensure no packs except the
PFDCs are seated now.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install equipment controller blank (8DG59420AA) in any unused EC or PFDC slot.
Figure 7-1 Subrack with EC and PFDC installed
Note: The power filters shown above are not Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 power
filters.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Half slot adapter installation
The customer network information report/shelf report [see Figure 7-2, “Example of shelf
report” (p. 7-5)]will show where circuit packs need to be installed. Some circuit packs are
half height and half slot adapters [see Figure 7-3, “Half slot adapter” (p. 7-5)] are
necessary to install these circuit packs. Install all the adapters first, before installing any
other flexible circuit packs. Use the half slot adapter tool, part number 8DG07796AA [see
Figure 7-4, “Half slot adapter tool” (p. 7-6)] to ensure proper alignment of half slot
adapters. Half Slot adapters may be installed on a live system, It is not necessary to turn
power off when installing a half slot adapter using the half slot adapter tool, part number
8DG07796AA [see Figure 7-4, “Half slot adapter tool” (p. 7-6)].
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-2 Example of shelf report
Figure 7-3 Half slot adapter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-4 Half slot adapter tool
Consult rack face drawing for the site to determine where half slot adapters need to be
placed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Swing upper latch open on half slot adapter tool and lock in place with hinge screw. See
Figure 7-5, “Open upper latch” (p. 7-7).
Figure 7-5 Open upper latch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert half slot tool into subrack as shown in Figure 7-6, “Insert half slot adapter tool into
subrack” (p. 7-8).
Figure 7-6 Insert half slot adapter tool into subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Slide half slot adapter into tool and secure with 13" (or longer) #2 Phillips screwdriver
(special tool number 1AD 00861 0003) as shown in Figure 7-7, “Secure half slot adapter
with Phillips screwdriver” (p. 7-8).
Figure 7-7 Secure half slot adapter with Phillips screwdriver
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove half slot adapter tool, leaving half slot adapter in place.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Fully seat rubber plug in screwdriver hole on front of half slot adapter to ensure proper
airflow management in sub rack. See
Figure 7-8 Half slot adapter with rubber plug installed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until all required adapters are installed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-optical amplifier transmission circuit pack installation
(p. 7-5)] will show where transmission circuit packs need to be installed. Transmission
packs include (but are not limited to) the following circuit pack acronyms: OPSA, CWR8,
CWR8-88, SFD5x, SVAC, 4DPA4, 43STX4, 11STMM10, 11STGE12, 11STAR1, and
WTOCM. For full descriptions of all available circuit packs, refer to Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch Release 5.1 Product Information and Planning Guide. Optical
Amplifiers require special considerations that are detailed here: “Optical amplifier
installation” (p. 7-11)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
subracks in the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
diagrams.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install and seat circuit pack blanks into any unused slots, including slots for PFDCs and
ECs. Blanks are required in all empty slots to ensure proper airflow in the sub rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical amplifier installation

Background
Optical amplifiers are available in three distinct variations: Line Drivers, Amplifiers and
Raman Pumps.
Optical Amplifier types include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following:
• ALPHG — Low Power High Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• AHPHG — High Power High Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• AHPLG — High Power Low Gain DWDM Line Driver, with mid-stage access
• A2325A—Amplifier, 23db power, variable gain, C-band, with mid-stage access
• ALPFGT— Low Power Fixed Gain Amplifier Total Power, with mid-stage access
• AM2125A— High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier, with mid-stage
access
• RA2P— Long Haul - 2 pump Raman module, no mid-stage access
• AM2017B — High power (+20dBm), low gain optical amplifier, no mid-stage access
• AM2325B —Amplifier, 23db power, variable gain C-band amplifier without
mid-stage access, no mid-stage access.
Raman Pumps
Raman Pumps connect only between the line ingress point and the outside plant fiber and
pump counter to the incoming DWDM channels. Raman Pump Circuit packs do not have
OSC ports.
Note: For optimum Raman Pump performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end
fiber point losses due to connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers
ensure the following general guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
Line Drivers
Line Drivers connect to both outside plant fibers (the "line", which may include a Raman
Pump on the ingress side) for a degree. Line Drivers are equipped with an internal OSC
SFP port and fusion-spliced OSC fiber pigtails. All OSC fibering on a Line Driver is done
within the circuit pack and is described in detail here: “Line Driver preparation” (p. 7-14).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifiers
Amplifiers connect to only one outside plant fiber per degree (possibly with a Raman
Pump in-line). Amplifiers are equipped with a faceplate OSC SFP port and OSC fiber
connectors that require external fiber connections and allow OSC fibers to connect from
one Amplifier to another. Examples of OSC connections to amplifiers can be found here:
“Examples of Optical Amplifier applications and connections” (p. 7-12).
Examples of Optical Amplifier applications and connections

Provided below are some examples of commonly used Amplifier and Raman Pump
configurations. For more examples, including Line Driver applications, please consult the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 5.1 Product Information and
Planning Guide.
Note: The examples below are provided solely for general reference. Fiber
connections must be made using the fiber table provided by EPT for each network
element.
Figure 7-9 Amplifiers and OSC connections in an ILA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-10 Amplifier and OSC connections in TOADM
Figure 7-11 Amplifier and Raman Pump Connections
Line Driver and Amplifier precautions.

Damage to internal fibers and circuit pack components may occur if optical amplifier
circuit packs are improperly handled during installation and maintenance activities,
including the equipage or replacement of an OSC SFP.
Optical fibers and fiber connectors are positioned and routed near the faceplate and may
not be fully visible. Caution must be used when handling the packs to prevent undue
pressure applied to fibers and components, which may cause damage.
Line Driver modules should always be handled on the edges of the circuit pack. It is
recommended to only handle these modules in one of the following manners:
• Handle the LD module by the faceplate.
• Handle the LD module by the edge of the printed circuit board.
• A combination of the above recommendations is acceptable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-12 Proper LD and Amplifier handling
Line Driver preparation

Line Driver (LD) circuit packs are equipped with an internal SFP receptacle for the
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) SFP module. Ingress LD packs require an OSC SFP
module. Consult site documentation to determine the correct SFP module to install, if
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Egress LDs do not require an OSC SFP. Do not install an SFP in an Egress LD.
Do not install or replace an OSC SPF with the LD circuit pack installed in a rack. The
SFP installation or replacement should be done with the circuit pack on an ESD safe
work table.
Note: Amplifier circuit packs can also be equipped with OSC SFPs, but they are
installed in the faceplate and can be installed and removed with the circuit pack
installed in subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove parking cap from LD leaving both fibers still inserted in parking cap. See Figure
7-13, “Parking cap removal” (p. 7-15).
Figure 7-13 Parking cap removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert SFP into LD as shown in Figure 7-14, “SFP insertion” (p. 7-16).
Figure 7-14 SFP insertion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove one fiber from parking cap, remove protective cap from fiber, clean and inspect
fiber, and insert fiber into SFP as shown in Figure 7-15, “Fiber installation” (p. 7-17).
Repeat for second fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Fibers must be installed exactly as shown. They cannot be interchanged. The
fiber labels and SFP slot labels (not shown) must match.
Figure 7-15 Fiber installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 LD is now prepared for use. Repeat Steps 1-3 for any other LDs that require OSC SFPs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission circuit pack installation
(p. 7-5)]will show where transmission circuit packs need to be installed. Transmission
packs and DCMs include (but are not limited to) the following circuit pack acronyms:
OPSA, CWR8, CWR8-88, SFD5x, AHPLG, AHPHG, ALPHG, SVAC, 4DPA4, 43STX4,
11STMM10, 11STGE12, 11STAR1, DMSMF0xx.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Not all circuit packs are supported in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf
Note: If circuit packs are being added to a powered shelf, do not remove circuit pack
blanks until circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be
installed in place of blanks (inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place)
within five minutes of blank removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling
for the sub rack.
until new circuit packs are fully prepared for installation. New packs should be
installed (inserted into the subrack with latches locked in place) within five minutes of
old pack removal in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the sub rack.
Verify the A and B subrack power is turned off at both the A and B power filters of all
subracks in the NE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
diagrams.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install and seat circuit pack blanks into any unused slots, including slots for User Panel,
PFDCs and ECs. Blanks in empty slots are a requirement to ensure proper airflow in the
subrack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM installation
Description
Please refer to “DCM installation” (p. 4-21), for detailed DCM installation instructions
for all bay types and DCM shelf options.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent Inventory cable Installation
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inventory cable Installation

Purpose
Each optical amplifier in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 network element may be
equipped with an external dispersion compensation module connected with a pair of
fibers in between gain stages of the optical amplifier pack. Each colorless wavelength
router-8 channel (CWR8 or CWR8-88) circuit pack may be connected to a SFD44 or
SDF44B Mux/Demux with a pair of fibers. SFD44 and SFD44B must be connected to an
ITLB. For inventory and management purposes, the DCMs, ITLBs and SFD44/SFD44Bs
need to be electrically connected to their respective LDs and CWR8/CWR8-88s via
inventory cables. This section describes how to install the inventory cables.
ANSI/EIA inventory connections

There are 4 cables of various lengths available for inventory connections. All are
ETSI inventory connections

For ETSI applications, the inventory connection is provided via a cable with an RJ11
connector on each end. For these cable connections, the ETSI installation kit
(8DG59719AA**) includes the RJ11 connectors. A spool of cable, 1AC043850003 (two
pair shielded Cat5 cable), must be provided by the installer to build the cable assembly at
the job site. See Table 7-1, “Inventory cable connector pin-out” (p. 7-20)
Table 7-1 Inventory cable connector pin-out

3 Blue/White Data
Pair #2 4 White/Orange Gnd
5 Orange/White
Shield Case Braid Shield
Y inventory cable adapter

TheY inventory cable adapter can be used to double the capacity of a circuit pack (such as
CWR8-88) inventory port. The Y adapter can be considered part of the inventory cable,
for cable management purposes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-16 Y inventory cable adapter
Figure 7-17 Internal connection diagram of Y adapter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of inventory cable to port on left side (or top, relative to the orientation
of writing on the faceplate) of OA (AHPHG or ALPHG) or CWR8/CWR8-88 circuit
pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Route inventory cable up or down to respective DCM, ITLB or SFD44/SFD44B, leaving

adequate slack to plug connector into DCM, ITLB, or SDF44/SFD44B, but do not plug
cable in.
Important! Do not insert inventory cable connector into DCM, ITLB or
SFD44/SFD44B at this time. Connection must be made after system software is
installed. Proper inventory cable connection is detailed in Part IV: “Stand-alone
installation testing”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for other inventory cables.

Note: Some SFD44s may have two inventory ports. If only one cable will be
connected, always use port INV1. Port INV2 is reserved for connection between an
SFD44 and an SFD44B.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
bay frame.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrical SFP applications

Desription
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 system allows the use of electrical SFPs. Electrical
SFPs protrude beyond the faceplate and thus require an extended cover be used for these
applications. A typical Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 electrical SFP is shown below. For
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 applications, see Chapter 4, “Circuit pack and fiber
installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32”.
Figure 7-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 electrical SFP
If an electrical SFP is required on the faceplate of a circuit pack, the cover extension kit
will be required in order to provide additional space required by the electrical SFP.
8DG61196AA** KIT-PSS-16 EXT. COVER BRACKETS
8DG60268AA** ETSI COVER KIT - PSS16 and 8DG61196AA** KIT-PSS-16
EXT. COVER BRACKETS
“Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation”.
Minimum LAN cable bend radius and maximum boot height

To avoid damaging the LAN cable shielding, the bend radius should be no smaller than 1
inch as shown in Figure 4-28, “LAN cable bend radius” (p. 4-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition, the overall maximum boot height should not exceed 50 mm to avoid
interference with the cover.
Figure 7-19 LAN cable bend radius
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections

Fiber precautions
Important! Fiber is constructed of glass and should be treated with care. It should not
be pulled or stretched. This could cause damage to the fiber or the fiber connector.
Note: Fiber should not be bent in a diameter of less than 3 inches (76 mm).
Important! For maximum protection against signal degradation resulting from fiber
bending, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all jumpers between Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 and the outside plant fiber be constructed using Depressed Clad Fiber.
Note: Not all Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subracks require outside plant and/or
customer equipment fiber connections.
Raman gain considerations

For some long-span applications, Raman pumping is required. Raman pumping of outside
plant fiber has some special recommendations described below.
For optimum performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end fiber point losses due to
connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers ensure the following general
guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
• ORL (optical return loss) from any single point reflection should be greater than 33
dB.
Exceptions to the above recommendations will result in reduced reach or capacity.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Arrange to, and obtain, access to the areas that contain both the subrack and the Optical
Distribution Frame (ODF) that connects to the outside plant fiber.
Note: Advance arrangements may have to be made to obtain access to other vendor
co-locate areas.
Contact ____________________________________
Phone/Pager ________________________________
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify path between subrack and ODF as specified on customer order.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify connector types on both ends of the fiber match what is expected at the subrack
and ODF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify through visual approximation that the length of fiber is sufficient.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Pre-label both ends of the fiber(s) with information as specified on the customer order.
Note: Do not remove protective caps on fiber.
Note: Labeling information should always be present on fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Remove applicable floor tiles or fiber duct covers to facilitate running fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Run fiber between the ODF and the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Do not connect fiber to ODF unless directed to do so by the customer. If directed to

connect fiber to ODF, observe fiber cleaning procedures as specified in Appendix D.
Note: Do not connect fiber to the NE circuit packs. This will be done in a later
chapter.
Note: Any excess fiber should be managed at the ODF, or in the customer specified
manner. See “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules” (p. 7-31) for details on
proper fiber management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace fiber duct covers and/or floor tiles as applicable.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

DCMS may be installed in-line with the outside plant fiber. DCMs may be equipped with
attenuators that are used to ensure uniform DCM loss regardless of DCM type. These
attenuators need to be removed for in-line applications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intra-NE fiber connections

This section provides general rules and guidelines for selecting fibers for use, routing
fibers and managing fibers.
Table 7-2 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements

Singlemode (PC)
LC strain relief 45 degree Straight short 45 degree Straight short
boot angled. Must boot. 35 mm angled. Must boot. 35 mm
rotate 360 maximum from rotate 360 maximum from
degrees without tip of fiber to degrees without tip of fiber to
damaging fiber. back edge of damaging fiber. back edge of
53.1mm max. boot. 53.1mm max. boot.
from fiber tip to from fiber tip to
back edge of back edge of
boot. boot.
Jacket color Blue Yellow Orange: 50/125 µm Orange or gray:
62.5/125 µm
LC connector Blue Beige
color
Jacket outside 1.6-2.0 mm 1.6-2.0 mm
diameter
Insertion loss: 0.25 dB 0.5 dB
Max. per mated
connection
Return loss: 55 dB 20 dB
Min. per mated
connection
Cable retention 10 lbs/44.5 N 10 lbs/44.5 N
axial pull, Min.
Temp. stability <0.3 dB <0.3 dB
(-40c to 75 C)
Insertion loss
change
Long term bend 60 mm or less 60 mm or less
diameter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-2 Minimum LC fiber jumper requirements (continued)

Singlemode (PC)
Bending induced 0.1 dB max. at 1625 nm and 100 1 dB max. at 1310 nm and 2 turns at
loss at specific turns at 60 mm diameter 30 mm diameter
bend diameter
Mating <0.2 dB <0.2 dB
durability for
500 reconnects -
max. insertion
loss change
Telecordia Compliant Compliant Not applicable
GR-326-CORE, except where except where
Issue 3 for Type parameters in parameters in
1 Media this table exceed this table exceed
GR-326 GR-326
requirements requirements.
May not pass
side load tests
Fiber connectors
In general, the type of fiber jumper used with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 will depend on
the type of rack (bay or cabinet) the equipment is installed in. Fiber jumpers used with
ETSI racks need to have a short, straight fiber boot [see Figure 7-21, “Straight LC fiber
boot” (p. 7-29)] to eliminate any interference between the fiber jumpers and the ETSI
cabinet door. Fiber jumpers used with ANSI or EIA racks need to have angled fiber boots
[see Figure 7-20, “Angled LC fiber boot” (p. 7-29)]. It is important that the right fiber
jumpers be ordered based on the type of rack being used. Y optical fiber jumpers are the
exception to this, as the same Y fiber jumpers are used in all rack applications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-20 Angled LC fiber boot
Figure 7-21 Straight LC fiber boot
Duplex fibers
Most of the duplex optical connections within a bay can be made with the same 3.5 meter
duplex singlemode fiber jumper. This 3.5 meter jumper is long enough to make all
connections within a subrack or between two subracks in the same rack. If a multi-bay
network element is being installed, the lengths of some fiber jumpers will need to be
customer engineered. Fiber slack in these jumpers should be managed in the fiber storage
tray. See “Fiber storage tray (FST) usage rules” (p. 7-31).
In some situations, a 3.5 meter duplex multimode fiber jumper (50µm) is used when
looping the signal from the client side of one 11Star1 OT circuit pack to the client side of
another 11Star1 OT circuit pack (for regeneration). Fiber slack in these jumpers should be
managed in the fiber storage tray. See “Fiber storage tray (FST) usage rules” (p. 7-31).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Longer fibers of 7 meters, 10 meters, and 15 meters are available for connections outside
of a single bay or rack.
DCM bypass fiber

In situations where an LD circuit pack will not be connected to a DCM, the DCM IN and
DCM OUT ports on the LD faceplate need to be connected with a simplex fiber jumper
and an attenuator. The length of this jumper is 15.5 centimeters.

DCMS may be installed in between stages on optical amplifiers (typical) or, in some
applications, in-line with the outside plant fiber. DCMs may be equipped with attenuators
that are used to ensure uniform DCM loss regardless of DCM type. These attenuators
need to be removed for in-line applications.
Y fiber jumpers
Y optical fiber jumpers are used where 1+1 optical protection switching is implemented
with two OT circuit packs and without an optical protection switch pack. The leg of the Y
connects to the client signal and the two arms of the Y connect to two different OT circuit
packs. Y jumpers with arms of equal length for applications where OT circuit packs are in
adjacent subrack slots (up and down in the same side). Y jumpers with unequal length
arms are also available and are used in applications where one half-height OT circuit pack
is beside another half-height OT circuit pack. In this application the longer arm attaches
to the left OT circuit pack and the shorter arm attaches to the right OT circuit pack.
Y fiber jumpers are available in singlemode, multimode 50µm, and multimode 62.5µm
versions.
The splitter portion of the Y fiber jumper and any slack from the jumper can be stored in
the fiber storage tray (if equipped) located immediately below the subrack containing the
2 OT circuit packs. See: “Fiber storage tray (FST) usage rules” (p. 7-31).
Attenuators for short-span applications

In some short span applications, optical attenuators need to be installed between the OT
circuit packs and the SFDs. The installation report will only show a connection from the
OT to SFD, but the BOM (bill of materials) will include the attenuators needed, and the
attenuator drawer.
If an attenuator is required, route the attenuator fibers from the OT to the appropriate SFD
through the attenuator drawer. Use the attenuator drawer to manage the attenuator and
associated fiber slack. Repeat for all required attenuators.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber capacity, routing and management rules
Table 7-3 Fiber capacities
Location Capacity
Right vertical plastic guide 32 fibers per slot
Left vertical plastic guide 32 fibers and 2 RJ45/LAN cables per slot (must place
RJ45 cables before fibers - by threading the connector
end of the cable through the opening).
Right vertical duct 50 fibers
Fiber capacity numbers assume the use of simplex mini-cord (2.0 mm max. diameter). One
duplex mini-cord fiber is size-equivalent to 2 simplex mini-cord fibers.
Fiber storage tray (FST) usage rules

This sections details the features and proper use of the fiber storage trays.
All slack fiber is typically managed in the fiber storage trays. However, some customers
may use other means of fiber management. Use the customer prescribed method if fiber
storage trays are not installed.
• Fibers should be loosely routed through the fiber storage tray slack management
mechanism. See Figure 7-27, “Fiber storage tray fiber routing” (p. 7-35). When
properly used, the fiber storage tray automatically manages the slack necessary to
open and close the tray.
• Fibers should be loosely wrapped around partitions within the fiber storage tray.
How to install fiber into fiber storage tray

Excess fiber must be carefully stored in the fiber storage tray. The easiest way to do this is
to use the "pretzel" method shown below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-22 Step one of "pretzel" method
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Repeat Steps 1-4 until all slack is gone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-27 Fiber storage tray fiber routing
• Fibers should be loosely secured to the Flex Shelf at the fiber tray entry/exit points
with hook and loop straps. See Figure 7-28, “Fibers secured in flex shelf” (p. 7-36).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-28 Fibers secured in flex shelf
Fiber inspection and cleaning

Refer to Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning” for the correct fiber cleaning procedures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber precautions
Important! Fiber is constructed of glass and should be treated with care. It should not
be pulled or stretched. This could cause damage to the fiber or the fiber connector.
Important! Fiber should not be bent in a diameter of less than 3 inches (76 mm).
Fiber routes should be as direct as possible, using the fiber management ducts, slots and
trays provided.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Fibers connected to half-height circuit packs in the left half of the subrack
should route to the left.
Fibers connected to half-height circuit packs in the right half of the subrack should
route to the right and down through the vertical fiber space provided (this avoids
having fibers cross the air filter). See Figure 7-29, “Examples of fiber routing on a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” (p. 7-39)
Fibers connected to full-height circuit packs with angled connectors should always
route to the right and down through the vertical fiber space provided (this avoids
having fibers cross the air filter). See Figure 7-29, “Examples of fiber routing on a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” (p. 7-39)
Installing and fibering full height circuit packs with a high density of faceplate
connections requires advanced planning. Most of these faceplate connections are not
angled but come straight out. In order for the shelf to handle the maximum number of
such packs the location of the packs, the order they are fibered/cabled, and the routing
paths of the fibers/cables becomes very important. Following are suggested guidelines
for use with such high density packs that have straight out faceplate connections.
An example of a high density circuit pack is the 11DPE12E - Each of these circuit
packs can have 32 fibers and 1 RJ45 cable connected to its faceplate. Because of the
large number of connections the following procedure is recommended. This routing
will permit the installation of (8) 11DPE12E circuit packs in a shelf without
exceeding the 50 fiber capacity of the right vertical fiber duct.
Install circuit packs and route fiber and copper cables starting at the top of the shelf and
work towards the bottom of the shelf.
Note: Fibers for high density circuit packs may need to be routed to both the right and
the left.
Copper cables should be routed to the left and should be installed in the left vertical
metal guide before any fibers are placed in this guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Route the RJ45 cable to the left and place this in the left vertical metal guide before any
fibers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Route fibers from the 26 left most connections to the left and thru the vertical metal
guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Route fibers from the 6 right most connections to the right and into the right vertical duct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Rotate angled fiber boots to smoothly route fibers from connectors to fiber. The splitter
combiner on each Y cable should be carefully placed in the front section of the fiber
storage tray of the subrack the cable is used within.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If using a Flex Shelf, see rules pertaining to it in “Fiber capacity, routing and management
rules” (p. 4-45)
Figure 7-29 Examples of fiber routing on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 (1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-29 Examples of fiber routing on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 7-30 SVAC client and line ports
Note: SVAC circuit packs have Client and Line ports reversed compared to other OT
type circuit packs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedures
The steps below provide instructions for installation of intra-NE fibers. Read the steps in
their entirety before fiber installation. Inspection and cleaning of all fiber jumpers is
mandatory. Detailed instruction on fiber inspection and cleaning is provided in Appendix
A, “Fiber cleaning”. Inspection and cleaning of circuit pack, including XFP and SFP
connectors is also required for all circuit pack prior to making the final fiber connection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: An installation report specific to the network element must be provided. The
installation report is produced by EPT when the network design is created. This work
cannot be done without NE-specific fiber connection information.
Note: There are only three types of fibers provided with an NE, duplex LC to LC
fibers, and LC to LC Y fibers.
Verify that no optical circuit packs are seated or powered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Starting with first fiber connection in the installation report [see Figure 7-31, “Example of
installation report” (p. 7-41)], locate proper fiber jumper from the fibers provided for the
NE.
Figure 7-31 Example of installation report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove dust caps from the connectors at one end of the fiber jumper. INSPECT fiber
ends and CLEAN if required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
1830 PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the installation report, locate circuit pack connection and install one end of fiber
jumper into appropriate fiber management slot provided for the circuit pack slot (directly
above or below the circuit pack). Remove protective caps from circuit pack ports. Using a
video fiber scope INSPECT the connectors and CLEAN if required, then complete fiber
connections to the circuit pack.
Note: Treat DCMs like circuit packs and use the fiber management slots and ducts
provided in the Flex Shelf, per “Fiber capacity, routing and management rules”
(p. 7-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Route the fiber to the correct destination per the installation report and “Fiber capacity,
routing and management rules” (p. 7-31)] and repeat Steps 3 and 4 for other end of fiber
jumper.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all remaining fiber connections.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Part IV: Stand-alone installation
testing
Overview
Purpose
This part of the Installation Guide includes chapters to turn up the stand-alone
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) node and connect it to adjacent 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 NEs. The NEs should have been previously installed following Part II:
“Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation” of this document. These
chapters are written assuming a working knowledge of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 and its
operation.
Required materials
The following materials are required:
• Personal computer (PC) running Windows 7, 2000, or XP
• The following software should be loaded on the PC:
– Internet Explorer version 7 or 8 or Firefox version 3.6.13
– SUN Java Runtime Environment version 6 or greater (recommend upgrading to
latest version)
– Telnet application
– FTP server software
• 10/100 BaseT LAN card and a shielded RJ45 straight through cable
It is extremely important that the RJ45 cable be shielded. Unshielded RJ45
cables do not provide adequate protection to the system hardware.
• ESD wrist strap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IV-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network planning considerations
Before beginning the commissioning process for a new network or network expansion,
ensure that the network has been planned using the Engineering Planning Tool (EPT).
Consider the following items:
• The EPT design file should include all expected current and future services. Adding
new service types later may require rebalancing the network optical power levels with
the new network plan.
• The EPT design file should include the planned protection type for the services
specified. Adding protection later may require rebalancing the network optical power
levels with the new network plan.
• The EPT design file should contain the expected growth plan for the network to the
extent possible. Adding equipment that was not considered as part of the initial design
may require rebalancing the network optical power levels with the new plan.
• Expected real demands and virtual demand analysis should be used to ensure that all
the expected paths between network elements are considered in the EPT design file.
Adding new demands that were not considered during planning may trigger new
network equipment or may require rebalancing the network optical power levels with
the new network plan.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 Engineering
and Planning Tool User Guide for more information about network planning.
Precautions
Be sure to read and understand the following:
• Read the entire procedures before beginning.
• The person performing the software installation must be trained and have an
understanding of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 system.
• Perform the procedures in the sequence provided; any deviation may lead to
unpredictable 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 behavior.
• Use care when handling circuit packs.
• Make use of ESD wrist straps and static-safe bags.
WARNING
Laser hazard
This equipment generates and uses laser radiation at extremely high power levels which
can cause serious bodily injury. Do not look into any of the fibers or ports on this
equipment during the integration procedures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IV-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
ESD hazard
All ESD precautions MUST be strictly observed. Failure to do so can result in equipment
damage.
For a complete listing, see Chapter 1, Safety.
Contents
Chapter 8, Stand-alone node set-up 8-1

Chapter 9, Stand-alone installation testing 9-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IV-3
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IV-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
8 Stand-alone node set-up
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) network element (NE).
Contents
Verify installation and seat packs 8-2

Connect to the NE and prepare the NE for software installation 8-5
Connect to the NE for CLI access 8-11
Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software 8-13
Set the NE to operate in SDH mode 8-24
Set the loopback IP address 8-26
Configure GNE for management system access 8-30
Complete connection of inventory cables 8-34
Insert duplicate equipment controller 8-40
Add peer subracks 8-41
Set the network element date and time 8-42
Configure MTU size on OSC interface 8-46
Disable ES port monitoring 8-49
Update firmware on all circuit packs 8-52
Configure additional system properties 8-55
Example configuration of FTP server 8-58
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Verify installation and seat packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify installation and seat packs

Objective
Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in Part II: “Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation” and is ready for initial set-up.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to the site documentation (i.e., network information report generated from the
planning tool) and verify that all circuit packs are present and slotted correctly. Verify
correct dispersion compensation modules and optical multiplexer/demultiplexer shelves
are installed as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify the fibers are dressed and run correctly between packs and to optical
multiplexer/demultiplexer and dispersion compensation modules. Verify any required
protection Y-cables are installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure they are run properly. If there are
multiple shelves, verify the cables are properly daisy-chained to the ES ports as described
in “Subrack to subrack cable installation” (p. 4-32) and identify the master shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify required inventory cables are connected at the line driver or wavelength router
packs and remain disconnected at the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, SFD40, SDF40B and
ITLB units.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Turn on the power at the DC power filters. Make sure fan modules are installed properly
and screwed down. Fully seat power filters if they are not engaged, and verify green led is
lit on both. Verify fans are running.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If equipped with power filters that have voltage monitoring ports, measure the voltage on
each power filter.
• The voltage should be between -48 and -60 volts DC.
Figure 8-1 Voltage monitor ports on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 power filter
Figure 8-2 Voltage monitor ports on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 power filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Fully seat all circuit packs in all shelves if they have not been seated, except for the
redundant Equipment Controller (EC) on the shelf 1 and any peer shelf ECs.
Important! If the shelf is configured in a redundant controller configuration (EC
circuit packs equipped in slots 1 and 18 on an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf or
slots 2 and 12 on an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf), verify that the Part Number
(APN) for both EC circuit packs is 8DG59241AB. Also, leave the EC circuit pack in
slot 18 on an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf or slot 12 on a Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 shelf unseated. This should only be done on the master shelf.
Important! Unseat EC circuit packs on all peer subracks (extension shelves).
Note: If this is a simplex controller configuration, the EC pack must be seated in slot
1 on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf or slot 2 on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
shelf during initial installation. The EC pack may be moved to slot 18 on a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf or slot 12 on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf
anytime after the Release 5.1.0 software is activated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When a circuit pack is inserted into an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16, the system will
upgrade is required, the system will automatically initiate the upgrade on the circuit
pack. If the circuit pack is removed before the upgrade is completed, it will result
in the pack becoming inoperable.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Connect to the NE and prepare the NE for software
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect to the NE and prepare the NE for software

installation
Purpose
You can connect directly to the network element to access the web interface (WebUI). No
client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer.
The Equipment Controller will ship with software and a factory image. This procedure
will provide the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using WebUI and
creating an initial database.
Procedure
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the WebUI using Internet Explorer via the CIT port on the faceplate of the active
Equipment Controller (EC) card on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 shelf. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT port is active on the master
shelf only.
Note: Popup blockers should be turned off in Internet Explorer.
Note: The NE is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port should be configured
to obtain an IP address automatically.
Connect and log in to the NE

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the active EC card (indicated by
a green Active LED) on the master shelf. Connect the other end of the cable to the
Ethernet port on your PC.
Note: If the circuit packs have recently been seated, you will not be able to access the
EC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Verify the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.x. See Figure 8-3, “PC command window”
(p. 8-6).
Figure 8-3 PC command window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Launch Internet Explorer and enter http://172.16.0.1 in the Address bar. This is the
default IP address of the CIT port.
Note: Make sure Internet Explorer is not using a proxy server to access this address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Go. The browser connects to the network element and the WebUI login window is
displayed. See Figure 8-4, “Login screen” (p. 8-7).
Figure 8-4 Login screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter admin in the User: field and admin in the Password: field. Then click the "Login"
button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 A warning message will appear similar to Figure 8-5, “WebUI uninitialized database
warning” (p. 8-8) indicating that the database is uninitialized. Continue to Step 7.
Figure 8-5 WebUI uninitialized database warning
Important! If the warning message does not appear, that indicates the EC already has
a database; and the database must be cleared. Close the browser window, and follow
the procedure “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11) to login to cli. Execute
the command "config database clear ipclear" and answer yes when prompted at the
warning message. The NE will then restart. Login using Webui and skip to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click "Cancel".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The system will prompt for a new NE name. Type the NE name provided in the site
documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click the "Submit" button and the system will restart once again. The restart will take
approximately 4 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 After the restart is complete, login to WebUI using Username/Password admin/admin.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The WebUI will open with the system properties view as shown in Figure 8-6, “WebUI
system properties” (p. 8-9).
Note: You may see a warning that the loopback address has not been configured. This
will be addressed in a later procedure.
Note: "card unknown" alarms may be raised on new circuit packs introduced with
Release 5.1.0 and may be reported on the wrong slot numbers. There will also be a
"DBINVALID" alarm. These alarms will clear later in the procedure when the Release
5.1.0 software is activated.
Figure 8-6 WebUI system properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 This procedure is complete. Continue to “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Connect to the NE for CLI access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect to the NE for CLI access

After completing the database initialization using WebUI, you can connect directly to the
network element to access the CLI. No client software is needed on your PC for either
application, only a telnet application.
Note: Most procedures in this chapter can be completed using either the WebUI or
CLI. A procedure for each available interface is provided in each section of the
chapter. Some procedures can only be completed using CLI.
Procedure
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the CLI using the CIT port on the faceplate of the active Equipment Controller (EC) card
on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf. On multi-shelf
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 network elements, the CIT port
is active on the master shelf only. Note this is the same connection used for the WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the
active EC card (indicated by a green Active LED) on the master shelf. Connect the other
end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use a telnet application on your PC and open a telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port.
• The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hit <Enter> and the login: prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type cli at the Password: prompt and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 This starts the CLI, and another Username: prompt will appear. Type admin and
<Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the Password: prompt, type admin and <Enter>. This will bring up the following
warning notice.
1830 PSS-32, WAVELENGTH TRACKER

Alcatel-Lucent
(c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Welcome to the CLI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Connect to the NE for CLI access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning Notice
This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized
users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or
attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this system
is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized users are
subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or criminal and
civil penalties under state, federal, or other applicable domestic
and foreign laws. Use of this system may be monitored and
recorded for administrative and security reasons. Anyone accessing
this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised
that if monitoring reveals possible evidence of criminal activity,
Alcatel-Lucent may provide the evidence of such activity to law
enforcement officials. All users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent
Corporate Instructions regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent
information assets.
Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type Y and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The current alarm summary will be displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI
commands can now be entered. Type: ? for a list of commands. See the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) CLI Command Guide
for more information about CLI commands.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Configure the software environment and load, and commit
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the software environment and load, and commit

the software
Purpose
The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is
pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that will be run in the
network. You must therefore perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct
software load on the NE.
The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first procedure is to
prepare the FTP server on the NE. Then follow either the WebUI or CLI procedure for the
software download and activation.
Note: If this is a multi-shelf system, the software will automatically load onto the
subtending shelves as well as the master shelf.
FTP server preparation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Refer to “Example configuration of FTP server” (p. 8-58) for more detailed
instructions on configuring an FTP server.
Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the userid
and password established for the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Establish a root directory for the server and make sure it has read and write privileges.
You may create a folder in the root directory that will contain the NE software.
Important! There can be no spaces in the folder names in the path to the software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Copy the folder and subfolders with the NE software into the FTP root directory
established above.
Note: The software folder name to be copied is "1830PSS32-5.0-0".
Important! In the "1830PSS32-5.0-0" folder, there should also be two subfolders
named "1830PSS32" and "1830PSS32M" as well as a CATALOG file.
The software will typically be provided on a CD.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PC preparation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 8-7, “Windows firewall
settings” (p. 8-14).
Figure 8-7 Windows firewall settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Off. Then click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Once again verify the IP
address assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.x. See Figure 8-8, “PC command
window” (p. 8-15). Record this address because this will be used later as the server IP
address.
Figure 8-8 PC command window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If using WebUI continue to “WebUI procedure” (p. 8-15).

If using CLI continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 8-19).
Important! If this is an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf, use the CLI procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Software menu item under Administration and then select FTP Server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The FTP server settings window appears as shown in Figure 8-9, “WebUI FTP server
settings” (p. 8-16).
Figure 8-9 WebUI FTP server settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter NE IP address obtained earlier in “PC preparation” (p. 8-14) for the Server IP
Address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory in the "Root
Directory" field.
Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / in this
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the UserID and Password to match the account created on the FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click the "Apply" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The "Password" fields will be blanked out after you click "Apply". There is no
need to reenter the data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Administration -> Software -> Upgrade from the top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The Software Upgrade window appears as shown in Figure 8-10, “WebUI software
upgrade” (p. 8-17).
Note: The software release will be the current factory load.
Figure 8-10 WebUI software upgrade
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select "Audit" from the "Action Type" drop-down list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter the folder name containing the NE software in the "Release Directory" field. The
folder name for Release 5.1.0 should be 1830PSS32-5.0-0.
Note: This field can only be edited after Audit has been selected for the "Action
Type".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click "Apply" and the "Status" field will change to "In Progress".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Periodically click the "Refresh" button until the "Status" field changes to "Completed".
Verify the "Result" is "Success" and the "Upgrade Path Available" field indicates "Yes".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select "Download" for the "Action Type" and click "Apply". The "Status" field will
change to "In Progress".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the "Result" is "Success".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Select "Activate" for the "Action Type" and click "Apply". The "Status" field will change
to "In Progress". The NE will then reboot, and the WebUI will automatically logout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Wait about 2 minutes after the fan speed drops back down to normal speed and log back
into the NE (typically 10 minutes after activate).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Login to CLI following the procedure “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Type config database clear and <Enter>.

This will close any sessions connected to the NE and cause the NE to reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Login to WebUI and verify the "DBINVALID" alarm has cleared and a "no committed
software" alarm is present. Return to the Software Upgrade window by selecting
Administration -> Software -> Upgrade from the top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Select "Commit" for the "Action Type" and click "Apply". The "Status" field will change
to "In Progress".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the "Result" is "Success".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Verify the Active and Committed releases have changed to the new release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Continue to “Set the NE to operate in SDH mode” (p. 8-24).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config software server ip <ip> and <Enter>.

Where <ip> is the ip address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the same ip address
obtained using the ipconfig command in the PC command window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config software server userid <userid> and <Enter>.

Where <userid> is the userid for the user account defined on the FTP server.
Sample output below.
Enter password:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password for the user account defined on the FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type config software server root <path> and <Enter>.

Where <path> is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory.
Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the
<path>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type config software server detail and <Enter>.

Software Server Protocol : FTP

Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Userid : sw1
Software Server Root Directory : /
Verify the server settings are correct.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.

Software Upgrade Information:

Committed Release :
Working Release Directory :
Working Release : 1830PSS32-0.00-7
Active Release : 1830PSS32-0.00-7/
Operation :
Operation Status :
Upgrade Path Available : True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Verify the current active software is an older release than software you are loading.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> nobackup and

<Enter>.
Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software. The folder
name for Release 5.1.0 should be 1830PSS32-5.0-0.
This will check the path and verify the system is ready for upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A listing of packs will be displayed along with the status showing which
packs need to be upgraded. Sample output below.
Software Server Root Directory : /SVT/
Committed Release :
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS32-0.00-7/
Active Release : 1830PSS32-0.00-7
Operation : Audit
Operation Status : Completed
Stage=0 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC
ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete
RESULT: Success
Stage=1 Step=0 SH/SL: 0/0 CARDTYPE: Empty
ACTION: Transfer to disk Planned 0% complete
RESULT: None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACTION: Activate Planned 0% complete
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=0 SH/SL: 1/2 CARDTYPE: AHPHG
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/3 CARDTYPE: CWR8
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=2 SH/SL: 1/7 CARDTYPE: 11STAR1
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=3 SH/SL: 1/13 CARDTYPE: 11STAR1
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=5 SH/SL: 1/15 CARDTYPE: CWR8
RESULT: None
Stage=3 Step=6 SH/SL: 1/17 CARDTYPE: ALPHG
RESULT: None
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path
Available changes to True.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Type config software upgrade manual load and <Enter>.

This will transfer the software to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation : Load
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Type config software upgrade manual activate and <Enter>.

This will activate the software on the EC/FLC card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The NE will reboot and the telnet connection will drop. Wait about 2 minutes after the fan
speed drops back to normal speed and log back into the NE (typically 10 minutes after
activate). Refer to “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Type config database clear and <Enter>.

This will close any sessions connected to the NE and cause the NE to reboot.
Important! Perform this step for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Login to CLI again and type config software upgrade commit and <Enter>.
This will commit the software to be the primary release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation : Commit
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 After the last status command is executed, verify the new software release is displayed as
the committed, working and active release. See the sample output below.

Committed Release : 1830PSS32-5.0-0
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS32-5.0-0/
Active Release : 1830PSS32-5.0-0/
Operation : Commit
Upgrade Path Available : False
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Continue to “Set the NE to operate in SDH mode” (p. 8-24).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

Background
The NE defaults to SONET mode. You need to perform this procedure only if you want
the NE to operate in SDH mode.
NOTICE
NOTICE
This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up.
Procedure
This procedure can only be completed through the CLI (see “Connect to the NE for CLI
access” (p. 8-11)). If you want the NE to operate in SONET mode, skip to “Set the
loopback IP address” (p. 8-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show version and <Enter>.

Sample output:
Software Version: 1830PSS32-5.0-0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Copy the string after "Software Version:". This will be used as the password for the SDH
mode command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config admin mode sdh <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password copied in the previous step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The following warning will appear.
WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database to be

cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to be
deleted.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type yes and <Enter>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 You will be logged out. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Set the loopback IP address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the loopback IP address

Purpose
Each NE requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default loopback IP address
for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32. A warning message will appear on the system properties
screen until the loopback address is changed.
Important! Each node requires a unique loopback address. Therefore the address
must be changed from the default.
Important! The loopback address subnet mask must be set to 255 255 255 255.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If using CLI continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 8-28).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select "System" from the tree and the "Details" tab. See Figure 8-11, “WebUI loopback
address” (p. 8-27).
Figure 8-11 WebUI loopback address
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 At the "Loopback IP Address" field, enter the IP address designated in the site
documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 At the "Loopback Subnet Mask" field, enter the subnet mask designated in the site
documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the "Submit" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 A warning message will appear as shown in Figure 8-12, “WebUI loopback change
warning” (p. 8-28).
Figure 8-12 WebUI loopback change warning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click "OK." The system will reboot, and WebUI will automatically logout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wait for the system to reboot (watch for the CIT link light to turn green) and log back into
the WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Continue to “Configure GNE for management system access” (p. 8-30).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface loop ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The following warning message will appear.
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result

in a warm reset of this network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The CLI session will be terminated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Continue to “Configure GNE for management system access” (p. 8-30).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Configure GNE for management system access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure GNE for management system access

Background
The NE can connect to an Element Management System (EMS) via the OAMP port if it is
to act as a Gateway Network Element (GNE). The IP address must be provisioned and the
OAMP port enabled to use this port. In addition, an IP route must be established to route
connections to the RNEs.
Purpose
This procedure will provision and enable the OAMP port so that the NE can act as a
Gateway Network Element. The procedure will also provision the IP route information to
allow connection to RNEs. Not all NEs (i.e. RNEs) require this provisioning. Refer to the
site documentation.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, expand "Shelf 1" in the equipment tree and then expand
"slot 40: USRPNL".
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, expand "Shelf 1" in the equipment tree and then expand
"slot 10: USRPNL".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select OAMP. The OAMP port provisioning window will appear as shown in Figure
8-13, “WebUI OAMP port provisioning” (p. 8-31).
Figure 8-13 WebUI OAMP port provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the IP address and subnet mask as indicated in the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the Port Enabled check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select Administration -> Networking -> IP Routes from the top menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The IP Routes screen is displayed. Click the "Create" button, and the Create IP Routes
screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-14, “WebUI create IP route window” (p. 8-32)
Figure 8-14 WebUI create IP route window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter the parameters based on the site documentation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click the "Apply" button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Verify the new IP route is now shown in the IP routes screen.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Continue to “Complete connection of inventory cables” (p. 8-34).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, type:

config interface usrpnl oamp ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.
Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

config interface usrpnl oamp state up and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config cn routes default add <address> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the gateway address from the site documentation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

config interface usrpnl oamp rou en and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Continue to “Complete connection of inventory cables” (p. 8-34).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Complete connection of inventory cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete connection of inventory cables

Background
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 assigns shelf numbers to the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB
units sequentially in the order they are discovered. Therefore, the order the inventory
cables are installed determines the shelf number of each unit. DCM, SFD44, SFD44B,
and ITLB shelf numbering starts at 25 and increments from there.
Purpose
The inventory cables will be connected and DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB units
discovered in this procedure following the site documentation.
Note: If the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB shelf numbering contains non
contiguous numbers (numbers are skipped), the shelves must be manually
pre-provisioned before the inventory cables are connected. This procedure takes care
of that case.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the equipment tree in the left window of the system view and verify there are no
shelves numbered 25 or greater. See Figure 8-15, “WebUI system view equipment tree”
(p. 8-35).
Figure 8-15 WebUI system view equipment tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Refer to the site documentation to determine the shelf numbering of the DCM, SFD44,
SFD44B, and ITLB units. List them in order starting with 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Does the shelf numbering contain non contiguous numbers (numbers are skipped)?
If yes, skip to Step 8.
If no, continue to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Determine the next sequential DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, or ITLB unit that has not been
discovered and connect the inventory cable to that unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait 2 minutes and click the refresh button (the double arrows located at the top of the
equipment tree).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The new shelf should appear in the tree with the appropriate shelf number. If not, repeat
Step 5. If the shelf still does not appear, check the cable connection or replace the
inventory cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Are there additional DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, or ITLB units to be discovered?

If yes, go back to Step 4.
If no, skip to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the System view, select the "Create Shelf" tab. The Create Shelf view will appear as
shown in Figure 8-16, “WebUI create shelf window” (p. 8-36).
Figure 8-16 WebUI create shelf window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter the appropriate provisioned type and shelf ID number of the next DCM, SFD44,
SFD44B, or ITLB shelf to be added and enter the serial number of the corresponding
shelf equipment. Then click the "Apply" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Repeat Step 9 until all the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB shelves have been created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Close the create shelf window and verify all the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB
shelves now appear correctly in the equipment tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect the inventory cables to all the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB units.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Check the alarms on the system and verify there are no equipment alarms related to the
DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, or ITLB shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 This procedure is complete. Continue to “Insert duplicate equipment controller” (p. 8-40).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show shelf * and <Enter>.

Sample output.
Shelf 1 Information
Name : Master Shelf
Description : Master Shelf
ExpectedAmps : 30
Programmed Type : Universal Shelf Present Type : Universal
Shelf
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify there are no shelves number 25 or greater.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD44B, and ITLB units. List them in order starting with 25.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Does the shelf numbering contain non contiguous numbers (numbers are skipped)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Wait 2 minutes and type show shelf * and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The new shelf should be listed in the output with the appropriate shelf number. If not,
repeat Step 6. If the shelf still does not appear, check the cable connection or replace the
inventory cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Type config shelf <shelf> type <type> and <Enter>.

Where <shelf> is the shelf number of the next shelf to be created and <type> is either
dcm, sfd44, sfd44b, or itlb.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Type config shelf <shelf> serialnum <serialnum> and <Enter>.

Where <shelf> is the shelf number of the next shelf to be created and <serialnum> is
either the serial number on the dcm, sfd44, sfd44b, or itlb.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Type show shelf * and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Verify all the shelves that were created are now listed correctly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Type alm and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Verify there are no equipment alarms related to the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, or ITLB
shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 This procedure is complete. Continue to “Insert duplicate equipment controller” (p. 8-40).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Insert duplicate equipment controller
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert duplicate equipment controller

Purpose
In this procedure, the duplicate Equipment Controller (EC), if equipped, in slot 18
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) or slot 12 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16) will be installed.
The EC from the factory will have the factory software and firmware already installed on
the pack. After seating the pack, the EC will synchronize with the existing EC in slot 1
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) or slot 2 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16).
Note: If the shelf is equipped with only one EC, skip this procedure and proceed to
“Set the network element date and time” (p. 8-42).
Note: Redundant FLC controllers on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf will be
supported in a future release.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Once again verify that both EC circuit packs in the shelf have Part Number (APN)
8DG59241AB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fully seat the EC circuit pack in slot 18 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) or slot 12
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16). If the NE is equipped with multiple shelves, insert the slot
18 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32) or slot 12 (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16) EC on each
shelf.
Note: "software mismatch" and "database unsynchronized" alarms will appear. These
alarms will clear after the EC's are synchronized.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Wait at least 15 minutes and verify the "software mismatch" and "database
unsynchronized" alarms have cleared.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Proceed to “Add peer subracks” (p. 8-41).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Add peer subracks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add peer subracks

Purpose
If the system is equipped with peer subracks (extension shelves), this procedure will add
those subracks to the network element. The system software will automatically download
to the Equipment Controllers in the peer subracks as they are installed.
Note: If the network element does not have any peer subracks, skip this procedure and
proceed to “Set the network element date and time” (p. 8-42).
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the procedure, “Adding a subrack to an existing network element” (p. 13-22), to
add the peer subracks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Proceed to “Set the network element date and time” (p. 8-42).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Set the network element date and time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the network element date and time

Purpose
The network element date and time should be initially set manually using the network
element's internal clock. The network element can later be synchronized with a network
time protocol (NTP) server. This procedure performs the initial setting manually.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Date/Time menu item under Administration. See Figure 8-17, “WebUI
date/time menu” (p. 8-43).
Figure 8-17 WebUI date/time menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The Date/Time provisioning window appears as shown in Figure 8-18, “WebUI date/time
provisioning” (p. 8-44).
Figure 8-18 WebUI date/time provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the current UTC date and time and select the correct time zone for the network
element then click the "Apply" button.
Note: The date and time are always set to UTC time, the selection of the time zone
will automatically adjust the displayed time for the network element.
Note: All current WebUI users will be logged off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Continue to “Update firmware on all circuit packs” (p. 8-52).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config general date <date> and <Enter>.

Where date is of the format yyyy mm dd.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config general time <time> and <Enter>.

Where time is of the format hh mm ss, and hh is between 0 and 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue to “Configure MTU size on OSC interface” (p. 8-46).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Configure MTU size on OSC interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure MTU size on OSC interface

Purpose
It is recommended to increase the MTU size on the OSC interface to 1500 to improve
throughput, and this is required for external management of external RAMAN and EDFA
modules.
Important! The MTU size of the interface on the far end of the span connection must
also be set to 1500.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Expand the "Shelf" in the equipment tree with Line Driver circuit packs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Expand a Line Driver circuit pack that has an OSC interface and select the OSC port. The
OSC port details screen will display as shown in Figure 8-19, “WebUI OSC port
provisioning” (p. 8-47).
Figure 8-19 WebUI OSC port provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type 1500 in the OSC MTU Size field and click the "Submit" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each OSC interface on the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Continue to “Disable ES port monitoring” (p. 8-49).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface <ld type> <sh/sl>/OSC-ots oscmtu 1500 and

<Enter>.
Where <ld type> is the type of LD circuit pack, <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf and slot of the LD
circuit pack with an OSC interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 for each LD circuit pack with an OSC interface.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue to “Disable ES port monitoring” (p. 8-49).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Disable ES port monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disable ES port monitoring

Purpose
By default, the ES (Extension Shelf) ports on the EC packs are monitored. This will
generate an alarm for each port that does not have a lan cable connected. Therefore, if the
NE does not have any extension shelves, the EC port monitoring should be disabled.
Note: If the NE has extension shelves installed, this procedure should not be
completed. There is no need to disable the port monitoring.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Expand "Shelf 1" in the equipment tree and then expand each of the EC packs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select an ES port (ES1 or ES2) that is currently in alarm. The ES port provisioning
window will appear as shown in Figure 8-20, “WebUI ES port provisioning” (p. 8-50).
Figure 8-20 WebUI ES port provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Uncheck the Port Enabled check box and click "Submit".

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 until all the ES port alarms have cleared.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface ec <sh/sl/pt> state down and <Enter>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf, slot, and port (ES1 or ES2) of the ES port that is in alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 until all the ES alarms have cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Update firmware on all circuit packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update firmware on all circuit packs

Purpose
This procedure will ensure that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit
packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the reboot tab from the system view as shown in Figure 8-21, “WebUI reboot
window” (p. 8-53).
Figure 8-21 WebUI reboot window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Cold Reboot radio button and click the "Submit" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 A warning message will appear. Click "OK".

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes depending on the number of
circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Proceed to “Configure additional system properties” (p. 8-55).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config admin resetNE cold and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart.

This is a service affecting command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes depending on the number of
circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Proceed to “Configure additional system properties” (p. 8-55).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Configure additional system properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure additional system properties

Purpose
This procedure allows changes to system properties including temperature units and
AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and will become the default for all
ports; the value can be overridden on each individual port. See the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) User Provisioning Guide, Equipment Provisioning
for more information on the AINS timer.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select "System" from the tree and the "Details" tab. See Figure 8-22, “WebUI system
properties” (p. 8-56).
Figure 8-22 WebUI system properties
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select or type in the AINS Timer value to use as the system-wide default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the desired value for the Temperature Units to be used in the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer <hours> and
<Enter>.
Where <hours> is of the format <hh> [<mm>]. You can also type
config general ainstimer help for the default value and range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit,
type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and <Enter>.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone node set-up Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example configuration of FTP server

Background
There are many different FTP server software applications available. This procedure
provides detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms,
FileZilla. However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other FTP server
applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for
detailed instructions.
Purpose
This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in “FTP server preparation”
(p. 8-13).
Prerequisites
The FTP server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla
server software can be downloaded from http://filezilla-
project.org/download.php?type=server.
Procedure
FTP server configuration using FileZilla
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the FileZilla server software. The Connect to Server window will open as shown in
Figure 8-23, “FileZilla connect to server window” (p. 8-58).
Figure 8-23 FileZilla connect to server window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Leave the default settings and click "OK". The server window will open as shown in
Figure 8-24, “FileZilla server window” (p. 8-59).
Figure 8-24 FileZilla server window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 8-25, “FileZilla groups
menu” (p. 8-60).
Figure 8-25 FileZilla groups menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The Groups window will open as shown in Figure 8-26, “FileZilla groups window”
(p. 8-61).
Figure 8-26 FileZilla groups window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 With the "General" page highlighted in the left bar, click on the "Add" button on the right.
The Add user group window will open as shown in Figure 8-27, “FileZilla add group
window” (p. 8-62).
Figure 8-27 FileZilla add group window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter a group name in the dialogue box and click the "OK" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select the "Shared folders" page in the left bar and the Groups window will change as
shown in Figure 8-28, “FileZilla groups shared folders window” (p. 8-63).
Figure 8-28 FileZilla groups shared folders window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the "Add" button and a browse window will open as shown in Figure 8-29,
“FileZilla browse folder window” (p. 8-64).
Figure 8-29 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Browse to the folder where the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 software is or will be copied to, and
select it. Then click "OK".
Note: You may wish to create a new folder for the software before performing this
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,
make sure the "Read" and "Write" checkboxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click the "Set as home dir" button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click the "OK" button to close the window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 8-30, “FileZilla users menu”
(p. 8-65).
Figure 8-30 FileZilla users menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 The Users window will open as shown in Figure 8-31, “FileZilla users window” (p. 8-66).
Figure 8-31 FileZilla users window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 With the "General" page highlighted, click on the "Add" button on the right. The Add user
account window will open as shown in Figure 8-32, “FileZilla add user window”
(p. 8-67).
Figure 8-32 FileZilla add user window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Type a user account name in the top dialogue box.

Note: The account name will be the userid used in “Configure the software
environment and load, and commit the software” (p. 8-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Select the group created in Step 6 from the drop down list and click "OK".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Check the "Password" checkbox and type a password in the dialogue box.
Note: This will be the password used in “Configure the software environment and
load, and commit the software” (p. 8-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Select the group created in Step 6 from the "Group Membership:" drop down list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Select the "Shared folders" page in the left bar and the Users window will change as
shown in Figure 8-33, “FileZilla users shared folders window” (p. 8-68).
Figure 8-33 FileZilla users shared folders window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Click the "Add" button and a browse window will open as shown in Figure 8-34,
“FileZilla browse folder window” (p. 8-69).
Figure 8-34 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Browse to the folder where the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 software is or will be copied to, and
select it. Then click "OK".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,
make sure the "Read" and "Write" checkboxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Click the "Set as home dir" button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Click the "OK" button to close the window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
9 S9tand-alone installation
testing
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to verify the proper installation of an individual network
element and retrieve data information in advance of network commissioning.
Some of the procedures in this chapter are executed using the CLI application. Refer to
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) CLI Command Guide for more
information on the CLI commands.
Contents
Verify shelf and circuit pack discovery 9-2

Verify system provisioning 9-5
Equipment controller protection switching 9-8
Local and span tests 9-12
Connect outside plant fiber 9-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Verify shelf and circuit pack discovery
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify shelf and circuit pack discovery

Overview
All shelves and packs on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) NE are
automatically discovered and provisioned by the software. This procedure will verify that
all the shelves and packs are properly discovered. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide should be used as a
reference.
Note: All the CLI logs should be captured and saved as a record of the state of the
equipment before commissioning. These records may be used as a reference while
commissioning the network or in future troubleshooting.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log in to the NE through the CLI. Refer to “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11).
Make sure the data is captured in the Telnet window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type: show shelf * and <Enter>.

Sample output.
Shelf Programmed Present Description Connectivity

Serial #
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Universal Universal Master
Shelf - -
25 SFD44 SFD44 Shelf-25 Required
NE085100101
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify all the installed universal shelves are listed correctly. Compare to the site
documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If a shelf is not listed or numbered correctly, check the following.

• The universal shelf numbering is determined by the setting on the subrack ID rotary
dial module. If there is a problem viewing the shelf, check that the setting is correct.
Refer to “Subrack ID setting” (p. 3-7).
• Also check that the lan cables are run correctly. Refer to “Subrack to subrack cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify all the installed OMD and DCM units are also listed. The shelf numbers for these
units range between 25 and 64. Compare the shelf numbering to the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If an OMD or DCM shelf is not listed, check to be sure the inventory cable is installed
properly. Refer to “Inventory cable installation” (p. 4-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type: show slot * and <Enter>.

Sample output.
Result:
Admin Oper
State
Slot Programmed Type Present Type State State
Qualifier
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 EC EC Up
Up
1/2 ALPHG ALPHG Up
Up
1/3 Empty Empty Down Down UAS
UEQ
1/4 CWR8-88 CWR8-88 Up
Up
1/5 see slot 4 see slot 4
1/6 ALPHG ALPHG Up
Up
UEQ
1/8 CWR8-88 CWR8-88 Up
Up
1/10 43STX4 43STX4 Up
Up
1/13 ALPHG ALPHG Up
Up
1/14 4DPA4 Empty Up Down
AINS UEQ
1/15 11STMM10 11STMM10 Up
Up
1/16 11STGE12 11STGE12 Up
Up
1/17 11STAR1 11STAR1 Up
Up
UEQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1/19 PF PF Up
Up
UEQ
UEQ
1/32 SVAC SVAC Up
Up
...more? y=[yes] q=[quit] >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Continue to type y until you have scrolled through all of the circuit packs in the system.
Verify each installed circuit pack is listed in the correct slot number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If a circuit pack is not visible, verify the pack is fully seated and latched properly. If the
pack still does not come up, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide for troubleshooting procedures.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Verify system provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify system provisioning

Purpose
This procedure checks various provisioning items on the system and verifies it is
operating correctly.
Note: All the CLI logs should be captured and saved as a record of the state of the
equipment before commissioning. These records may be used as a reference while
commissioning the network or in future troubleshooting.
Procedure
The steps in this procedure are performed through the CLI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show condition and <Enter>.

Sample output.
MJ NSA 08/09/16 19:03:01 EQPT DATAFLT

1/1
Card provisioning failure
Equipment Controller
CR SA 08/09/16 19:03:03 EQPT REPLUNITMISS
1/36
Card missing
Power Filter
CR SA 08/09/16 21:53:31 EQPT UNKNOWN
1/2
Card unknown
ALPHG
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify there are no unexpected alarms or conditions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type show software upgrade status and <Enter>.

Sample output.

Software Server Root Directory : /pssnfs/pat/dwdm_1830/swp/SVT/
Committed Release : 1830PSS32-5.0-0
Working Release Directory :
Active Release : 1830PSS32-5.0-0
Operation : Commit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download Script (Timezone: UTC):
ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete
RESULT: Success 2008/09/16
21:47:18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify the correct version of software has been successfully committed on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type show general detail and <Enter>.

Result:
Name : J01L
System Description : Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 v1.0.0 SONET
ADM
NE
Description :
Location :
Contact :
S/W Version : 1830PSS32-3.00-0
Current Date : 2008/09/17 00:19:48 (UTC)
System Up Time : 13 hours, 4 minutes, 9.63 seconds
Loopback IP Address: 52.52.52.52/32
Local Ethernet Port
IP Address : 172.16.0.1/24
MAC Address : 00:60:1D:7C:56:98
Admin State : Up L1/L2 Oper State :
Down
Redistribute : Disabled Proxy Arp : Disabled
DHCP : Enabled DHCP_range : 1
Conf. Speed : Auto Conf. Duplex Mode : Auto
Actual Speed : 10.000000 Mbps Actual Duplex Mode : Half
Duplex
UserPanel Management Port
IP Address : 192.168.5.52/20
MAC Address : 00:60:1D:7C:57:98
Admin State : Up
OSPF Adj State : Down L1/L2 Oper State :
Down
OSPF Routing : Disabled Hello Interval : 10
seconds
Router Priority : 1 Router Dead Int : 40
seconds
Metric : 10
Conf. Speed : Auto Conf. Duplex Mode :
Auto
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Actual Speed : 10.000000 Mbps Actual Duplex Mode : Half
Duplex
Proxy Arp : Disabled OSPF Area Id :
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify system details are correct including IP addresses, date and time, and SONET/SDH
mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type show logs all and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Continue to type Y to page through all screens. Be sure to capture and save the CLI
output.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Equipment controller protection switching
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment controller protection switching

Purpose
This procedure will test the proper functionality and synchronization of duplex
Equipment Controller (EC) circuit packs.
Note: If the NE is equipped with only a single EC pack, this procedure should be
skipped.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Expand the Shelf in the equipment tree and select one of the EC circuit packs. Note that
one pack should be marked "(active)" and the other "(inactive)".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Protection Switch tab, and the EC Protection Switch Settings window will
appear as shown in Figure 9-1, “WebUI EC protection switch settings” (p. 9-9).
Figure 9-1 WebUI EC protection switch settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the "Force Protection Switch" checkbox and click on the "Submit" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 A warning message will appear as shown in Figure 9-2, “WebUI EC protection switch
warning” (p. 9-10). Click "OK".
Figure 9-2 WebUI EC protection switch warning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The system will reboot and autonomously logout. Wait about 2 minutes after the fans
have switched to low speed and login to WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Expand the equipment tree and verify that the active states have the two EC packs have
switched. Also check for any unexpected alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to switch the EC packs back to their original states.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show redundancy and <Enter>.

The EC switch state is displayed at the top of the output, similar to below.
General Redundancy Information

---------------------------------------------------------------
Mate CC Ready To Protect : Yes
Slot 1 CC Slot 18 CC Mate CC Ready
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf Activity State Activity State To Protect
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 Active Inactive Yes
...
Note the switch states of each EC pack and verify "Ready To Protect" is Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config redundancy switch 1 and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING: You are about to perform an activity switch.

It is recommended that the databases be synchronized
before performing an activity switch
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 CLI will be disconnected. Wait about 2 minutes after the fans have switched to low speed
and login to CLI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type show redundancy and <Enter>.

The EC switch state should now be reversed, similar to below.
General Redundancy Information

---------------------------------------------------------------
Mate CC Ready To Protect : Yes
Slot 1 CC Slot 18 CC Mate CC Ready
Shelf Activity State Activity State To Protect
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 Inactive Active Yes
...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to switch the EC packs back to their original states.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Local and span tests
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local and span tests

Background
This procedure will connect an attenuated loop on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 to simulate
outside plant fiber and provide a return path for transmitted test signals. Test signals will
be provided by locally installed optical translator circuit packs that have been
cross-connected manually using WebUI.
This test procedure must start and end at network elements with optical translator circuit
packs (TOADM, FOADM or ROADM site) and progress through ILAs in a linear fashion
downstream on each degree from the starting network element to the next TOADM,
FOADM or ROADM site. It is not possible to execute these tests in a stand-alone manner
on an ILA. Tested ILAs must be connected to the adjacent upstream node (which will
have already been tested) and tested in the proper order.
After testing is complete, the test channel cross connects are typically removed from the
network.
The ILA portion of this procedure requires careful planning and a methodical, step by
step approach. If ILA Network Elements cannot be turned up and tested in a linear
fashion, skip the ILA portion of these tests.
Purpose
Local testing is done to ensure that fibers are connected correctly, circuit packs are
operating correctly and that the signal path through the equipment is working. Execution
of local tests also ensures that the network will be ready to support traffic when all the
network elements are finally connected together. This testing is not mandatory, but it is
recommended, if schedules and planning allow. This testing does not replace end to end
BER testing.
Procedure
You must start at a TOADM, FOADM or ROADM site with at least one OT circuit pack.
All work may be done with WebUI or CLI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that fiber topology is complete. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) User Provisioning Guide for detailed instructions on creating fiber topology.
• Click "Connections/physical topology" to view fiber topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure correct power commissioning data is entered. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide for details on how to
power commission a node.
• Click "Administration/Power commissioning" to view power commissioning data.
Note: Steps 1 and 2 are easily accomplished using CPB and a commissioning file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the LDs, amplifiers and/or raman pumps are commissioned and manually
power managed.
• Go to equipment tree on left of main WebUI screen
• Expand "System" to show shelves.
• Expand the shelf with the line drivers.
• Expand the LD, amplifier or raman pump circuit pack to see all ports.
• Click on the "Line" port of the line driver.
• On the "Provision/Info" screen, choose the "Power Management" tab.
• Ensure "Power Management Type:" is set to "Manual".
• Ensure "Commissioned Status:" is "Completed".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Unseat ingress LD (and egress LD, if equipped) or ingress and egress amplifier packs;
and raman pumps (if equipped) for the degree to be tested. Unseating these packs ensures
that there is no power on the line ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Insert a loop fiber between the two line ports (where the outside plant fiber will normally
connect) on the ingress LD, amplifier packs and /or raman pump pack for the degree
under test.
• If there is an egress LD use 15 dB of attenuation on the loop fiber.
• If there is no egress LD, use 5 dB of attenuation on the loop fiber.
• If using amplifiers and/or a raman pump, use 15 dB of attenuation on the loop fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Re-seat ingress LD (and egress LD, if equipped) or ingress and egress amplifier packs;
and raman pumps (if equipped) for the degree to be tested. Packs should take
approximately 5 minutes to boot and for APR to clear.
Figure 9-3 Example of loop fiber at starting site
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Create a test channel with WebUI.

• Click "Connections" then select "Cross Connects"
• From the Cross Connections window click "create"
• Choose a frequency, A-end port, and Z-End port that corresponds to the physical
fibering.
• Select "Bidirectional", "Unprotected" and "In-Service".
• Select "Manual" for Wave Key Configuration.
• Ensure the A-Z and the Z-A Wave Keys are the same.
• Record the channel frequency and Wave Keys, you will need to provision ILA cross
connect with them later.
• Click "Apply".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Increase the power output of the test channel OT circuit pack (with the cross connect
made in Step 7) to -5 dBm.
• Expand the shelf with the OT to be adjusted.
• Expand the line OT pack to see all ports.
• Click on the "L1" port of the OT.
• Click on the "Wave Keys" tab.
• Adjust power in the "Expected Network Output Power" parameter to -5 dBm
• Click "Submit".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check the A-Z power and Z-A power of the test channel
• From the Cross Connections window click on the test channel in the list.
• Click "A-Z Power" and verify the test channel is getting through the node to the line
out, then click "Close".
• Click "Z-A Power" and verify the test channel is present at the L1 input to the test
channel OT.
Ignore power out of range and channel collision alarms.
• If the power levels are very low or the channel is missing, troubleshoot and repair,
then check again until the power is correct. Look for:
– Dirty fiber
– Improperly connected fiber
– Faulty circuit packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If a circuit pack is suspect, try a warm reboot, cold reboot and a hard reset before
fully indicting the circuit pack.
Figure 9-4 Examples of A to Z power and Z to A power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Once Step 9 is complete, unseat the ingress LD (and egress LD, if equipped), ingress and
egress amplifier packs, and raman pump for the degree tested.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Disconnect fiber loop that was installed in Step 4 (or Step 23, if checking an ILA).
Re-seat circuit packs that were unseated in Figure 9-4, “Examples of A to Z power and Z
to A power” (p. 9-16). Complete local commissioning procedures (starting with “Connect
outside plant fiber” (p. 9-22) before traveling to next site. Ensure the test channel is still
active because it will be used to verify fiber connections in the network elements
downstream.
• If Raman pumps are used, ensure fiber connections to them are restored properly
when the loop fiber is removed, and that the raman pump pack is seated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Go to next network element downstream in the degree being tested. If network element is
an ILA continue with Step 17. If the next network element downstream is a TOADM,
FOADM or ROADM site, skip to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Ensure all installation and integration work has been completed up to “Local and span
tests” (p. 9-12) (this procedure).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Unseat LDs, amplifier packs and/or raman pumps (if equipped). Unseating these packs
ensures that there is no power on the line ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Connect outside plant fiber to the LD, raman pump or amplifier that faces the upstream
node (the node that has already been tested). See: “Connect outside plant fiber” (p. 9-22).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Insert a loop fiber with an attenuator (10 to 20 dB) between the two line ports (where the
outside plant fiber will normally connect) on the other LD, or between the line ports on
the amplifiers that are not connected to outside plant fiber.
• The purpose of the loop fiber is to pass the test signal though both LDs or amplifiers
(and DCMs) in the ILA and send it back to the network element where it originated.
Figure 9-5 Example of loop at ILA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Re-seat LDs, amplifier packs and/or raman pumps (if equipped). The packs will take
approximately 5 minutes to boot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Ensure there is functioning OSC connectivity between last site visited and current site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Ensure that node fiber topology is complete.

• Click "Connections/physical topology" to view fiber topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Ensure there are cross connections from "A to Z" and "Z to A" for the channel under test.
• From the Cross Connections window click "create"
• Choose the frequency recorded in Step 7, A-end port (line coming from the test
starting point), and Z-End port (line opposite the A-end) that corresponds to the
physical fibering.
• Select "Bidirectional", "Unprotected" and "In-Service".
• Select "Manual" for Wave Key Configuration.
• Ensure the A-Z and the Z-A Wave Keys are the as recorded in Step 7.
• Click "Apply".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Ensure power commissioning data is entered.

• Click "Administration/Power commissioning" to view power commissioning data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Ensure that the LDs, amplifiers and/or raman pumps are commissioned and manually
power managed.
• Expand the shelf with the line drivers.
• Expand the LD, amplifier or raman pump circuit pack to see all ports.
• Click on the "Line" port of the line driver.
• On the "Provision/Info" screen, choose the "Power Management" tab.
• Ensure "Power Management Type:" is set to "Manual".
• Ensure "Commissioned Status:" is "Completed".
• Repeat for the other LD, amplifier or raman pump circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Check the A-Z power and Z-A power of the test channel
• From the Cross Connections window click on the test channel in the list.
• Click "A-Z Power" and verify the power is within the expected range into and through
the node, then click "Close".
This test checks outside plant fiber loss from the last site visited to the site under test
as well the connections in the node. This test must pass for the next test to work
properly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Click "Z-A Power" and verify the power is within the expected range through the
node, then click "Close".
This test checks connections within the node that face back toward the last site
visited.
• If the power level is not correct, troubleshoot and repair, then check again until the
power is correct. Look for:
– Dirty fiber
– Improperly connected fiber
– Faulty circuit packs
If a circuit pack is suspect try a warm reboot and then a cold reboot before fully
indicting the circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Remotely log in to the upstream network element (last site tested). Use the OPT and OPR
parameters to verify the span losses. If span loss is 3 dB more than the design, enter the
actual end-to-end span losses measured by OPT and OPR into the EPT and create
network commissioning file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Run new commissioning file in CPB, if necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Remotely log in to the TOADM, FOADM or ROADM network element where the test
started. Repeat Step 9. If the test passes, continue with Step 10 (connect outside plant
fiber and move to next site).
Note: This test double checks outside plant fiber loss from the site under test to the
last site visited by verifying that the test channel is getting all the way back to the
source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Unseat LDs, amplifier packs and/or raman pumps (if equipped). Unseating these packs
ensures that there is no power on the line ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Disconnect fiber loop fiber that was installed in Step 16. Reseat circuit packs that were
unseated in Step 27. Complete local commissioning procedures (starting with “Connect
outside plant fiber” (p. 9-22) before traveling to next site. Ensure the test channel is still
active because it will be used to verify fiber connections in the network elements
downstream.
• If Raman pumps are used, ensure fiber connections to them are restored properly
when the loop fiber is removed, and that the raman pump pack is seated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 When you reach this step, all the ILAs have been tested between TOADM, FOADM or
ROADM network elements. If that is not true, go back to Figure 9-4, “Examples of A to Z
power and Z to A power” (p. 9-16) and continue test procedure at next ILA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 To test the last TOADM, FOADM or ROADM network element in the line, first ensure
there is functioning OSC connectivity between last site visited and current site, then
execute “Procedure” (p. 9-2) through Step 10 on the degree that faces upstream toward
the starting point. Testing will now be complete for the degree between TOADM,
FOADM or ROADM network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Delete cross-connect (test channel) provisioning that was created in Step 7 and Step 20.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Repeat Step 1 through Step 31 for any untested degrees.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Stand-alone installation testing Connect outside plant fiber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect outside plant fiber

Background
The Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) uses outside plant fiber data to generate files used
later for commissioning the systems. It is important that this data is correct to accurately
set target power levels.
EPT data accuracy needs to be checked when the outside plant fiber is connected. Optical
Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) equipment as well as a launch reel may be needed
if Fiber Optic Characterization (FOC) is required.
The lines to be tested after connection need to be connected on both ends with the nodes
provisioned as described in Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up”. Typically this will
require personnel at neighbor sites and the testers will "leap frog" each other to cover
each of the lines.
Purpose
This procedure will connect the outside plant fiber to the Optical Amplifier circuit packs
on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16. The fiber loss will be checked and proper connectivity
verified.
Raman pump considerations

For optimum Raman Pump performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end fiber point
losses due to connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers ensure the
following general guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
The loss of Raman amplified spans (using RA2P or RA3P) should be verified using an
OTDR trace. If the span loss as measured by the OTDR trace differs significantly from
the EPT plan, the discrepancies may need to be corrected by checking and cleaning all
fiber connections, including any fiber patch panels. If the discrepancy cannot be resolved
through cleaning or replacing connectors, the loss data should be given to the EPT owner
to judge whether a change in the planned loss for the span is needed. This may generate
changes in the commissioning values for the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
Note: For Raman amplified spans, this procedure calculates the net loss including the
gain from Raman amplification between the upstream node and downstream node's
LD port. Only an EPT expert can correctly interpret this data, and the calculated loss
should not be compared directly to the span loss value in the EPT segment table.
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check with the owner of the EPT master file to determine if the span fiber data needs to
be updated for any of the spans connected to the NE. This will need to be done if the
original data did not come from actual fiber measurements or the fiber characteristics
have changed.
If the data needs to be updated, perform FOC as required and provide the feedback to the
EPT owner so the data can be entered. The person performing the FOC must be fully
trained in the proper use of an OTDR.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Inspect and clean all the outside plant fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the outside plant fibers to the appropriate LINE ports on the ingress (or egress if
installed) LD circuit packs. Refer to the site documentation for the appropriate
connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Login to the webUI of the NE. Refer to “Connect to the NE and prepare the NE for
software installation” (p. 8-5) for more information on connecting via webUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the equipment tree, select the OSC port of an LD pack facing a line that has been
connected at the neighbor node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the "Performance" button at the top of the window and the PM Report screen will
appear as shown in Figure 9-6, “OSC PM report” (p. 9-24).
Figure 9-6 OSC PM report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click the "Clear Bins."

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select "OPT" from the "PM Group" drop-down list and click the "Retrieve" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 The PM results for the OSC optical power transmit will appear in a table. Record the first
OPT Average value in the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select "OPR" from the "PM Group" drop-down list and click the "Retrieve" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The PM results for the OSC optical power receive will appear in a table. Record the first
OPR Average value in the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 These values should be used along with the same data from the neighbor node to calculate
the span loss. These values should be provided to the EPT owner to compare with the
EPT span loss.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Large discrepancies in span loss may be corrected by checking and cleaning all fiber
connections including any fiber patch panels. If discrepancies persist, FOC may need to
be performed as described in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Repeat Step 5 to Step 13 for each of the lines as they are connected to the neighbor nodes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 If executing local tests (See: “Local and span tests” (p. 9-12)), go to Step 12 of “Local
and span tests” (p. 9-12).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Part V: System turn-up and
testing
Overview
Purpose
This part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 16/32 (PSS-16/PSS-32)
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide includes the necessary chapters to connect the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) NEs together between adjacent sites
to build a complete system. These chapters are written assuming working knowledge of
the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 and its operations.
Required materials
The following materials are required:
• Personal computer (PC) running Windows 7, 2000, or XP
• The following software should be loaded on the PC:
– Internet Explorer version 7 or 8 or Firefox version 3.6.13
– SUN Java Runtime Environment version 5 or greater
– Telnet application
– FTP server software
– 1354 RM-PhM client and server software version 10.0
• 10/100 BaseT LAN card and a shielded RJ45 straight through cable
It is extremely important that the RJ45 cable be shielded. Unshielded RJ45
cables do not provide adequate protection to the system hardware.
• ESD wrist strap
• Attenuator pads for FOADM systems
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary V-1
Issue 1 August 2012
System turn-up and testing Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Precautions and recommendations
Be sure to read and understand the following:
• Read the entire commissioning procedure before beginning.
• The person performing the software installation must be trained and have an
understanding of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 system.
• Perform the commissioning installation procedure in the sequence provided; any
deviation may lead to unpredictable 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 behavior.
• Use care when handling circuit packs.
• Make use of ESD wrist straps and static-safe bags.
Contents
Chapter 10, Connecting adjacent network elements 10-1

Chapter 11, Circuit connections 11-1
Chapter 12, Performance verification testing and data retrieval 12-1
Chapter 13, Network topology changes 13-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
10 10
Connecting adjacent
network elements
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the detailed procedures required to commission the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network using the 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager
(1354 RM-PhM) along with the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool.
Contents
Network commissioning background 10-2

Preconditioning procedure 10-6
Establish connection to the network 10-8
Provision the system 10-17
Execute the commission greenfield system wizard 10-27
Commissioning steps required for system with external Raman amplifier 10-39
modules
Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system 10-49
Commission a FOADM system 10-57
Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system 10-77
Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines 10-98
Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services 10-110
Disconnect PC from the Network 10-115
Understanding the loss report 10-117
Generate and review system loss report 10-125
Troubleshooting failed adjustments 10-133
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Network commissioning background
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network commissioning background

Network planning overview
The first stage before deploying the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 is network planning using the
Engineering Planning Tool (EPT). Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide for the procedures used to plan
the network. During the planning stage the equipment required to meet the demands of
the network is defined. The network can be planned to support demands in the future that
are not required in the first phase of deployment. A network is comprised of one or more
systems planned in the EPT. Generally the nodes and fiber spans between nodes will
comprise a linear or ring topology for each system. In a static OADM system an obvious
ring or linear topology may not be apparent; in this case the topology is referred to as a
mesh topology. Tunable OADM (TOADM) or Reconfigurable OADM (ROADM)
networks can be comprised of many systems optically interconnected to one another. In
such a case the network is referred to as a mesh network. A mesh TOADM/ROADM
network must always be broken down into linear or ring systems for commissioning and
maintenance.
When the network is planned and validated the EPT will produce separate commissioning
files for each of the systems that comprise the network (see below). These files are used
by the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool when commissioning the
systems. For more details on the commissioning file format and contents refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Engineering and Planning Tool User
Guide.
Decomposing networks into constituent systems

The EPT segments networks into systems. The CPB tool is designed to operate on one
system at a time. Terminal points in the network, and interconnections between degrees
using the CLS ports of CWR8/CWR8-88 (TOADM node) or interconnections between
degrees not using the Thru In/Out ports of WR8-88A(F) (TOADM node) demarcate one
system from another. Figure 10-1, “Decomposition of mesh network into constituent
systems” (p. 10-4) illustrates a mesh network. System (1) is a TOADM ring system,
system (2) is a TOADM linear system, system (3) is a TOADM linear system and systems
(4), (5) and (6) are linear FOADM systems. Notice that systems (4), (5) and (6) are
separate FOADM systems due to the fact there is no express path between them, and they
are joined at a multi-degree FOADM NE using loop connections (channel routing). Also
notice that some lines can be auto power managed and other lines must be manually
power managed. All lines connected intranode to create a FOADM node with line count
higher than two must be manually power managed. The topology and the power
management settings of the lines that make up the topology of a system determine the
level of support provided by the and CPB for maintaining optical power levels, upgrading
equipment and commissioning each system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EPT will produce a commissioning file in .xml format that can be used by the CPB
tool to commission the systems. The content of the file will depend on the type of
equipment found on each line of a system.
The EPT supports dividing the network into partial systems. In this case the longest
system defined by following Thru In/Out connections of TOADM/ROADM degrees can
be broken up into smaller systems for network commissioning. The EPT user choses the
links to include in the system, however the principle of following Thru In/Out
connections must still be followed within the defined system. Dividing large systems into
smaller ones may be advantageous to overcome logistical situations such as NEs in
difficult to access locations, time constraints, or geographical constraints due to the
distance between NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-1 Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems
Use of the CPB tool

The CPB tool can be used in conjunction with 1354 RM-PhM or can also be installed and
used as a stand-alone tool. The Provisioning, Commissioning and Power Balancing
menus and respective functionality of the CPB tool integrated in 1354 RM-PhM and the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
stand-alone CPB are the same. However, the stand-alone CPB tool requires the user to
have access to another Network Management System (e.g. OMS, INC, etc.) or utilize the
NE built in user interfaces (CLI or WebUI) in order to make the relevant adjustments
required in support of Provisioning, Commissioning, and Power Balancing the Network
Element that would have otherwise been performed by utilizing the 1354 RM-PhM.
Keyed versus Unkeyed OCh

There are two distinct types of optical cross connections, or OCh, that are supported by
the system. These are:
• Keyed OCh: The optical channel is Wavelength Tracker (WT) encoded with Wave
Keys, and can be decoded at WT decode points throughout the network. WT decoders
can raise WT related alarms for keyed OCh, and will show per channel power levels.
Keyed OCh can be supported on TOADM or FOADM network elements. Keyed OCh
can be transported on lines whose power management settings are Auto or Manual.
• Unkeyed OCh: The optical channel is not Wavelength Tracker encoded with Wave
Keys. At WT decoder locations no per channel power levels are reported for unkeyed
OCh, and WT related alarms are not raised. Unkeyed OCh are only supported on
FOADM network elements. Unkeyed OCh can only be transported on lines whose
power management settings are Manual.
Unkeyed Alien OCh with WTOCM: This specific case is a sub-case of Unkeyed OCh.
The optical channel is not Wavelength Tracker encoded with Wave Keys, the alien signal
must enter the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment through an SFD filter, and the OADM
nodes of the network must be equipped with WTOCM packs for monitoring. The unkeyed
OCh are supported on FOADM and TOADM network elements. They can be transported
on lines whose power management settings are Manual or Auto. There are several
restrictions on network use cases. Deployment of this case is handled as a special
situation, and Alcatel-Lucent experts should be involved in planning and deployment. The
rest of the "System turn-up and testing" does not consider this case.
Keyed and unkeyed OCh are not permitted to be mixed on the same network element.
Network designs must be completely keyed or completely unkeyed.
Note: Due to the restriction that unkeyed OCh cannot be transported on Auto SCOT
lines, all NE optical lines in the network must be set to SCOT type Manual.
There are some packs which can only be used in unkeyed network designs. These packs
are listed below.
Pack name Keyed vs. Unkeyed Restriction

ALPFGT Unkeyed only.
OSCT Unkeyed only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Preconditioning procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preconditioning procedure
Background
The procedures in the following sections relate to commissioning of a greenfield system.
A greenfield system is one that has never been commissioned previously and does not
carry services. These procedures can also be used if all services are removed from a
system to re-commission a system. Refer to the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS
Reference Guide for information on maintaining existing systems.
The procedures in this chapter assume that the customer data communications network
has not been established yet. Therefore, the procedures have been written assuming that
the integration will be completed using a PC directly connected to one of the network
elements in the system to be commissioned.
Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure that the network and PC is ready for greenfield
commissioning. This procedure should be completed on all constituent systems as
described in “Decomposing networks into constituent systems” (p. 10-2) and all network
elements that will be commissioned.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that all the procedures in Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up” have been
completed on all network elements in the network to be commissioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that all the outside plant fibers have been properly connected to the correct line
driver cards on each network element and any necessary Fiber Optic Characterization is
completed as described in Chapter 6, “Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 At least one pair of OT cards must be installed and fibered on the end terminals of a linear
TOADM/ROADM system. Refer to “Decomposing networks into constituent systems”
(p. 10-2) for help in identifying a linear TOADM/ROADM system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The paths of the commissioning services must be predetermined as described in

“Commission a FOADM system” (p. 10-57) for each FOADM system. Make sure there
are OT cards installed and fibered in the locations determined by those commissioning
services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Preconditioning procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The paths of the commissioning services must be predetermined as described in

“Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system”
(p. 10-77) for each mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system. Make sure there are OT
cards installed and fibered in the locations determined by those commissioning services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If there are spans with external Raman amplification, a commissioning service must be
established to pass through the Raman amplifiers. If the commissioning services
determined in the previous steps do not pass through all Raman amplifiers, install and
fiber additional OTs to provide commissioning services to pass through the missed
Raman amplifiers. The channel should be as close to the middle of the channel plan as
possible (near 194.00 THz).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 For each FOADM or mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system to be commissioned,

field personnel must be physically present with attenuation pads at add/drop nodes. If the
system is supporting unkeyed OCh, the field personnel should also have a power meter
and a wavelength meter or OSA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Obtain the loopback IP addresses of all the NE's in the network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Obtain all the xml commissioning files produced by EPT for each system to be
commissioned and copy them onto the PC that will be used for commissioning.
Important! Ensure that the latest commissioning files are used with the most accurate
fiber data. Refer to “Local and span tests” (p. 9-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Ensure that both the client and server 1354 RM-PhM software (or relevant software if
another management system is to be used with stand-alone CPB) as well as the
Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool has been installed on the PC. Refer to
the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide for detailed procedures on
installing and configuring the software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Continue to “Establish connection to the network” (p. 10-8) to start PhM and discover all
the nodes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Establish connection to the network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Establish connection to the network

Purpose
This procedure will establish connection to the network and discover all the network
elements. Refer to the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide for
additional information on configuring the server and client as well as discovering network
elements.
Note: If another management system will be used, refer to the documentation for that
system for discovering the NEs. The procedures in this chapter reference 1354
RM-PhM, but the procedures can be performed with another management system
along with stand-alone CPB.
Procedure
As noted earlier, these procedures are performed with a PC connected to one of the
network elements in the network.
Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of all the NEs

This procedure will change the CIT address of the NE to a unique value and enable route
redistribution so that all the NEs in the network can learn the route to the PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: When commissioning is complete, and before disconnecting the PC from the
NE, perform the procedure described in “Disconnect PC from the Network”
(p. 10-115)to restore the CIT port settings.
Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the active EC card on the NE that
will act as the local connection point and the other end to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open a PC command shell and type ipconfig and <Enter>. The NE CIT address is the
"Default Gateway". Record this CIT address because it will be changed, and this address
will be needed later.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Telnet to the CIT address and login to CLI. Refer to “Connect to the NE for CLI access”
(p. 8-11) for more information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type show interface ec 1/1/cit and <Enter>.

IP Address : 172.16.0.1/24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAC Address : 00:60:1D:7C:56:D0
Up
Redistribute : Disabled Proxy Arp :
Disabled
DHCP : Enabled DHCP_range :
1
Conf. Speed : Auto Conf. Duplex Mode :
Auto
Actual Speed : 100.000000 Mbps Actual Duplex Mode : Full
Duplex
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type: config interface ec 1/1/cit ip 172.16.2.1/24 and <Enter>.

The purpose of this step is to change the CIT IP address to a unique subnet within the
entire DCN.
WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result in a loss of IP
connectivity to this network element from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity
will not be affected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type: yes and <Enter>.

Communication to the NE will be lost. Close the telnet session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Return to the Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type: ipconfig /renew and <Enter>.

This will force the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE via DHCP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Telnet to the new CIT address and once again log in to the NE via CLI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From the CLI, type: config int ec 1/1/cit red enable and <Enter>.
This will turn on route distribution for the CIT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Type: show interface ec 1/1/cit and <Enter>.

Verify the new IP address and Redistribute is enabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Address : 172.16.2.1/24
MAC Address : 00:60:1D:7C:56:D0
Up
Redistribute : Enabled Proxy Arp :Disabled
DHCP : Enabled DHCP_range :
1
Conf. Speed : Auto Conf. Duplex Mode : Auto
Actual Speed : 100.000000 Mbps Actual Duplex Mode : Full
Duplex
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Start PhM and Discover NEs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the 1354 RM-PhM application on your PC. The login screen will appear as shown in
Figure 10-2, “1354 RM-PhM login screen” (p. 10-10).
Figure 10-2 1354 RM-PhM login screen
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the "Change Server/Port" button and the new server/port window will appear as
shown in Figure 10-3, “1354 RM-PhM new server/port window” (p. 10-11).
Figure 10-3 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the IP address of your PC in the Server: field and do not touch the Port: field. Then
click "OK". This will take you back to the login screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter your User name and Password. Then click "OK".

Note: If this is your first time logging in, the User name is admin and Password is
tropxnms. You will then be required to change the password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If this is the first login, you will be required to change the password. Enter the new
password twice and click "OK". Refer to the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS
Reference Guide for information on the password requirements.
Figure 10-4 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The Topology View window will appear as shown in Figure 10-5, “1354 RM-PhM
topology view screen” (p. 10-12).
Figure 10-5 1354 RM-PhM topology view screen
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From the top menu, select Maintenance -> Auto Discovery and the auto discovery settings
window will open as shown in Figure 10-6, “1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings”
(p. 10-13).
Figure 10-6 1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select the "Auto Discovery by IP" radio button and click "OK".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select File -> New NE... and the create network element window will appear as shown in
Figure 10-7, “1354 RM-PhM create network element” (p. 10-14).
Figure 10-7 1354 RM-PhM create network element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter the CIT IP address of the NE directly connected to the PC in the NE IP address
field. Then click "Create". The messages at the bottom of the window will indicate if the
NE was successfully created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: This is the address provisioned in “Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of
all the NEs” (p. 10-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The NE will appear in the group view as a white box until it is discovered. When it is
discovered, the NE name will be displayed, and the color will change to represent the
highest level alarm on the NE. See Figure 10-8, “1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NE's”
(p. 10-15).
Refer to the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide for additional help.
Figure 10-8 1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NE's
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Additional network elements will begin appearing in the map view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 After the auto discovery is complete, check the NE's that were discovered against the list
of NE's in the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are any NEs missing, repeat Step 9 through Step 11 for any network elements that
were not auto discovered. However, this time the NE loopback address should be used
rather than the CIT IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Continue to “Provision the system” (p. 10-17) to begin provisioning all of the network
elements.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Provision the system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision the system

Purpose
This procedure will provision the cards and topological links for all the NE's in each
system of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 network using the EPT commissioning file(s) as input
to the CPB tool provisioning wizard. The CPB tool is accessed from 1354 RM-PhM.
Important! This procedure needs to be repeated for each EPT commissioning file
generated for the network.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify all the network elements in the system have been correctly discovered by the 1354
RM-PhM. Refer to “Establish connection to the network” (p. 10-8) and the 1354RM-PhM
Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the top menu select Provision -> Launch CPB. An Internet Explorer window will
open with the CPB tool login screen as shown in Figure 10-9, “CPB login window”
(p. 10-18). CPB can also be launched from PhM or by typing in the host IP in Internet
Explorer browser.
Figure 10-9 CPB login window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type the 1354 RM-PhM user name and password and click the "Login" button. The CPB
main window will open as shown in Figure 10-10, “CPB main window” (p. 10-19).
Figure 10-10 CPB main window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select Commissioning -> Provision System (using plan)... from the top menu. The
provision system overview window will be displayed as shown in Figure 10-11, “CPB
provision system wizard overview” (p. 10-20).
Figure 10-11 CPB provision system wizard overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click "Next>" and the provision system options window will be displayed as shown in
Figure 10-12, “1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options” (p. 10-21).
Figure 10-12 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check all the check boxes and click the "Next>" button. The provision system select
planning tool output file window will be displayed as shown in Figure 10-13, “1354
RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file” (p. 10-22).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If this is not a GMPLS system, the ASON option should not be selected.
Figure 10-13 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click the "Browse" button and browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning
file for the system to be commissioned, select the file, and click "Open". Then click
"Next>" and the provision system node list window will be displayed as shown in Figure
10-14, “1354 RM-PhM provision system node list” (p. 10-23).
Figure 10-14 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 All the nodes can be selected for provisioning by clicking the ">>" button. A node may be
excluded from provisioning by selecting it in the right half of the window and clicking the
"<" button. Click "Next>" and the provision system stages window will be displayed as
shown in Figure 10-15, “1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages” (p. 10-24)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A continuous path of NEs must be selected if not all the NEs in the system will
be provisioned. For best results if not all NEs is desired, provision each NE separately
by selecting only one NE at a time, and repeating the steps in this Provision the
system procedure.
Figure 10-15 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Review the error report and troubleshoot any problems encountered. Refer to the site
documentation and check for discrepancies between what is expected and what is
installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 When all steps show "Completed", click on the "Finish" button. This will take you back
to the CPB tool main window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Are there additional systems (i.e. commissioning files) that have not been provisioned?
If yes, go to Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If node is equipped with WTOCM circuit packs, Verify physical topology is built to the
WTOCM packs. If it is not built, manually provision WTOCM physical topology using
fiber table for site. For details on creating physical topology, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide. See: Figure
10-16, “Examples of WTOCM use” (p. 10-25)
Figure 10-16 Examples of WTOCM use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The systems are now ready for commissioning. Continue to “Execute the commission
greenfield system wizard” (p. 10-27).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Execute the commission greenfield system wizard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute the commission greenfield system wizard

Overview
This procedure will perform power commissioning on each 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 system
using parameters provided by the EPT commissioning file(s). This is done using the CPB
tool commission greenfield system wizard.
The wizard will only complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM ring system with
automatic managed lines. Linear TOADM/ROADM systems and systems containing
FOADM lines require additional steps to complete commissioning. Those steps are
provided in later sections of this chapter. Refer to “Network commissioning background”
(p. 10-2) for a detailed description of constituent systems.
Attention: If the system uses RA2P packs for Raman amplification of spans, the
commission greenfield system wizard should NOT be used. The method used to
determine losses and set LD gains is not appropriate for RA2P amplified spans.
Instead, use the procedure described under “Complete commissioning on a
TOADM/ROADM linear system” (p. 10-49).
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Choose the system that will be commissioned next. Determine the type of system from
the following list. Refer to “Network commissioning background” (p. 10-2).
• TOADM/ROADM ring system
• TOADM/ROADM linear system
• FOADM system
• Mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the system to be commissioned is designed to support unkeyed OCh, jump to

“Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines” (p. 10-98).
Note: The EPT design file will explicitly state that the network design is unkeyed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Does the system to be commissioned contain Raman external (RA3P) modules?

If no, jump to Step 9.
If yes, the power management settings of the nodes at each end of the Raman amplified
spans must be changed to Manual. Continue to Step 4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double click on a node with a span that is
Raman amplified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The NE inventory window will open similar to that shown in Figure 10-17, “1354
RM-PhM Node inventory window” (p. 10-28).
Figure 10-17 1354 RM-PhM Node inventory window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the Line (L1) port connected to the span with the Raman amplification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Change the Power mgmt type in attribute to manual click the "Apply" button. See Figure
10-18, “1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting” (p. 10-29).
Figure 10-18 1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Are there additional nodes with lines connected to external (RA3P) Raman amplified
spans?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If this is a FOADM system, do not run the commission greenfield system wizard. Go
directly to “Commission a FOADM system” (p. 10-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 If the CPB tool is not already running, start it by selecting Provision -> Launch CPB...
from the top menu and login using the 1354 RM-PhM login and password. CPB can also
be launched fromm PhM or by typing in the host IP in Internet Explorer browser.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Select Commissioning -> Commission Greenfield System (using plan)... from the top
menu in the CPB tool. The commissioning overview window will open as shown in
Figure 10-19, “CPB commission greenfield system overview” (p. 10-30).
Figure 10-19 CPB commission greenfield system overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click "Next>". The commissioning mode window will display as shown in Figure 10-20,
“CPB commission greenfield system commissioning mode” (p. 10-31).
Figure 10-20 CPB commission greenfield system commissioning mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Make sure the "Clean slate" radio button is selected and click "Next>". The TL1
autonomous messaging option window will display as shown in Figure 10-21, “CPB
commission greenfield system TL1 autonomous messaging option” (p. 10-32).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: One exception is if the commissioning wizard was run previously but did not
complete. In that case the "Continue commissioning" radio button can be selected so
that the previously completed lines are not redone.
Figure 10-21 CPB commission greenfield system TL1 autonomous messaging option
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Since this is a greenfield commissioning, there is normally no need to inhibit alarms.

Click "Next>" and the power provisioning options window will display as shown in
Figure 10-22, “CPB commission greenfield system power provisioning options”
(p. 10-33).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If the network is already monitored by a network management center, you may
want to inhibit alarms to prevent the monitoring center from getting overwhelmed
with alarms. If the Inhibit alarm check box is checked, the Release inhibition check
box should also be checked.
Figure 10-22 CPB commission greenfield system power provisioning options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Select all of the check boxes. Click "Next>" and the EPT output file selection window
will display as shown in Figure 10-23, “CPB commission greenfield system planning tool
output file selection” (p. 10-34).
Figure 10-23 CPB commission greenfield system planning tool output file selection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the system selected in
Step 1 and select the file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Click the "Next>" button and the commissioning stages window will display as shown in
Figure 10-24, “CPB system commissioning stages progress” (p. 10-35). The progress of
the commissioning will be displayed and logged.
Figure 10-24 CPB system commissioning stages progress
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Wait until all the stages show "Completed".

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Scroll through the progress log, check for any error messages and troubleshoot as
appropriate. After troubleshooting, select retry or rerun the wizard by going back to Step
11.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The wizard may fail to commission the system for the following reasons.
• The actual network topology does not match the planned topology.
• The actual network losses do not match the planned losses.
• The amplifier gain values required are outside of the planned amplifier range
specified in the planning tool commissioning file.
If commissioning is failed in the Adjust/Accept Power, sctroll down and select “view
report.” The loss report will display.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Click the "Next>" button and the finish page will appear as shown in Figure 10-25, “CPB
system commissioning finish page” (p. 10-36).
Figure 10-25 CPB system commissioning finish page
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Click the "View Report" button, and a loss report will be displayed similar to the one
shown in Figure 10-26, “CPB sample loss report” (p. 10-37). Alternatively, click on
"Download Report" to save the report to a selected location.
Note: Refer to “Understanding the loss report” (p. 10-117) for detailed information on
the loss report.
Figure 10-26 CPB sample loss report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Click "Finish" to close the commissioning wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 If power commissioning did not complete, the commissioning report will show where
further commissioning is required. The next step will jump to the appropriate section for
completing commissioning, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 If the system being commissioned contains spans with external Raman amplifiers, go to
“Commissioning steps required for system with external Raman amplifier modules”
(p. 10-39).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Continue to the appropriate section based on the system type as determined in Step 1.
• If this is a TOADM/ROADM ring system, continue to Step 26.
• If this is a TOADM/ROADM linear system, go to “Complete commissioning on a
TOADM/ROADM linear system” (p. 10-49).
• If this is a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system, go to “Complete
commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system” (p. 10-77).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Verify that the commissioning report shows that commissioning completed successfully
on all lines in the TOADM ring system. This indicates that commissioning has
successfully completed. No further commissioning is required on this system.
If there were errors in the loss report, refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments”
(p. 10-133) for additional steps. Then rerun the Commission Greenfield Wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Are there additional systems that require commissioning?

If no, all commissioning is complete. Go to “Disconnect PC from the Network”
(p. 10-115) to restore the provisioning settings on the NE and disconnect from the
network.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Commissioning steps required for system with external
Raman amplifier modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commissioning steps required for system with external Raman

amplifier modules
Purpose
After completing the 1354 RM-PhM Commission Greenfield System wizard, the power
management type settings that were changed from Auto to Manual for lines using Raman
amplifiers must be changed back to Auto. Then the power adjustments can be made to
complete commissioning on those lines using a service provisioned across those lines.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify a node connected to a span using Raman amplification and from the 1354
RM-PhM topological view, double click on the node to open the NE inventory window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Line (L1) port on the ingress LD connected to the span with the Raman
amplification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Change the "Power mgmt type in" attribute to auto and click the "Apply" button. See
Figure 10-27, “1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting” (p. 10-40).
Figure 10-27 1354 RM-PhM Line port power management setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Are there additional nodes with lines connected to Raman amplified spans?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Identify the commissioning service determined in “Preconditioning procedure”

(p. 10-6) to pass through the Raman amplified span(s) including the transponders that
were installed and fibered to provide the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Follow the procedure, “Provision new wavelength service” (p. 11-7), to provision the
commissioning service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wait 2 minutes after the service creation for the power to ramp up before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the wavelength service provisioning completion window is still open as shown in

Figure 10-28, “1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion” (p. 10-41),
skip to Step 11. Otherwise continue to the next step.
Figure 10-28 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select one of the nodes at an end point of the commissioning service and select View ->
Show Wavelength Services... from the top menu. The wavelength services window will
open similar to the one shown in Figure 10-29, “1354 RM-PhM wavelength services”
(p. 10-42).
Figure 10-29 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select and highlight the commissioning service in the list. The "Power (A-Z)" button
appears at the top of the window as shown in Figure 10-30, “1354 RM-PhM power A-Z
button” (p. 10-42). Use this button for the next step.
Figure 10-30 1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on the "Power (A-Z)" button. The power management service window will open as
shown in Figure 10-31, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust” (p. 10-43).
Figure 10-31 1354 RM-PhM power adjust
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 The power management window displays the power levels along the A to Z path of the
provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at the points as indicated in Figure
10-32, “Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans” (p. 10-44). In the figure, the A to
Z path starts at point (1) and continues to point (6).
Figure 10-32 Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Check the "Auto Refresh" check box so that the affect of the power adjustments can be
viewed immediately.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select the aid of the ingress point at location (2) in
Figure 10-32, “Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans” (p. 10-44) from the
drop-down list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Wait until the "Status" field shows "Completed" and verify the "Result" field shows
"Success". The ingress power levels at point (2) should be green and within the zed bar.
Note: It is possible that on a new system the adjustment could fail the first time. If this
happens, attempt the adjustment again after waiting 30 seconds. If the adjustment fails
again follow the troubleshooting steps provided in “Troubleshooting failed
adjustments” (p. 10-133). This is also true for the remaining power adjustments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point at location (3) in Figure
10-32, “Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans” (p. 10-44) from the drop-down
list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
"Success". The egress power levels at point (3) should be green and within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point at location (5) in Figure
10-32, “Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans” (p. 10-44) from the drop-down
list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
"Success". The egress power levels at point (5) should be green and within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 The power management window should show all power levels as green similar to what is
shown in Figure 10-33, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete” (p. 10-46).
Figure 10-33 1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Close the power management window and go back to the wavelength service completion
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Click on the "Power (Z-A)" button in the wavelength service completion window. Repeat
Step 13 through Step 25 in the Z to A direction following the path from location (6) to (1)
in Figure 10-32, “Power adjustments for Raman amplified spans” (p. 10-44).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Close the wavelength service window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the power commissioning flags
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double click on one of the nodes whose line
was adjusted in the previous steps to open the NE inventory window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the line port on the line driver card facing the line that was adjusted. The line port
details will be displayed in the right window as shown in Figure 10-34, “1354 RM-PhM
power management provisioning” (p. 10-47).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open the drop-down list for "Power mgmt commissioned" and select "true".
Figure 10-34 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Close the NE inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 for each of the lines that were adjusted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Go to “Delete wavelength service” (p. 11-35) to delete the commissioning service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If this is a TOADM/ROADM linear system, go to “Complete commissioning on a

TOADM/ROADM linear system” (p. 10-49) to complete commissioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If this is a TOADM/ROADM ring system, commissioning is complete. Are there

additional systems (EPT commissioning files) that need to be commissioned?
If yes, go back to “Execute the commission greenfield system wizard” (p. 10-27) to begin
commissioning on the next system.
If no, go to “Disconnect PC from the Network” (p. 10-115).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system

Background
The auto managed lines on a linear system adjacent to the terminal sites as well as the
terminal sites themselves will not complete using the commissioning wizard. Those lines
must have further power adjustments to complete commissioning. Additionally, RA2P
Raman amplified systems require power commissioning to be done with test channel(s).
Purpose
This procedure will complete commissioning at the terminal ends of a linear system. This
is performed by provisioning a service between the transponders installed in each
terminal node; then executing power adjustments on the terminal ends and adjacent lines.
Attention: For an RA2P Raman amplified system, you must ensure channels
(preferably two or more) cross all lines and through paths of nodes in the system in
order to complete the power commissioning step for those nodes. Power balancing as
described below accomplishes the required adjustments.
Procedure
This procedure can be used to individually adjust each line of an RA2P Raman amplified
system. To use this procedure for this case, first manually adjust each line of the system
without channels present using either a manual adjustment triggered using the CLI or
WebUI, or via the CPB Power Balance (without plan) wizard. Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the linear system in the network that has not completed commissioning. Refer to
the loss report produced by the commissioning wizard for a list of lines that did not
complete commissioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the two terminal nodes and their immediate neighbors in the linear system. These
four nodes have lines that will need power adjustments.
See Figure 10-35, “Adjustments required on linear system” (p. 10-50). In this example,
NE's A, B, E, and F are identified for adjustment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The end terminal NE's could be multi-degree nodes as shown in the examples
in Figure 10-1, “Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems” (p. 10-4).
Figure 10-35 Adjustments required on linear system
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the line cards facing the four lines requiring adjustment.
Those lines are identified as 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the example.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Identify the transponders that have been installed and fibered in the terminal nodes of the
linear system as directed in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 10-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Manually run the ingress and egress adjustment for the lines identified as 1, 2, 3, and 4 in
the example. This will initialize the SCOT settings for the line that were set via the
“Provision the system” (p. 10-17) section.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
commissioning service using the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wait 2 minutes after the service creation for the OT to ramp the optical output power to
the target set by the power management system before proceeding to trigger the required
adjustments.
Attention: If the 1354-RM-PhM is not being used, adjustments must be triggered
using WebUI or CLI commands. For the case of power commissioning an RA2P
Raman amplified system, using the CPB Power Balance wizard may be more
efficient. If the CPB Power Balance wizard is used, note that it will adjust all lines
connected by Thru In/Out port topological connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-52).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at the terminal ends and their
neighbors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
viewed immediately.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point of the terminal A-end of the
signal path from the drop-down list and click the "Execute" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click "OK".
Figure 10-40 1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message
The egress power levels at the A-end should be green and within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select aid of the ingress point of the neighbor NE from
the drop-down list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
"Success". The ingress power levels at the neighbor should be green and within the zed
bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select the aid of the ingress point of the terminal Z-end
of the signal path from the drop-down list and click "Execute".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click "OK". Verify
the "Result" field shows "Success". The ingress power levels at the neighbor should be
green and within the zed bar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 The power management window should show all power levels as green similar to what is
shown in Figure 10-41, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete” (p. 10-55).
Figure 10-41 1354 RM-PhM power adjust complete
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Step 12 through Step 21 in the Z to A direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Commissioning on the linear system is now complete. Are there additional systems (EPT
commissioning files) that need to be commissioned?
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Commission a FOADM system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commission a FOADM system

Background
A FOADM system may be a ring, linear or mesh system. The lines on FOADM nodes
with degree 2 or greater are always manually power managed. Because of this, OT's must
be installed and wavelength services provisioned in order to complete commissioning on
a FOADM system.
The following requirements must be met regarding the wavelength/commissioning
services.
1. A commissioning service must cross an express path that will be used in the system at
least once during commissioning to allow the calculation and placement of
attenuating pads (if necessary) in FOADM nodes.
2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once
during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD.
3. A commissioning service must cross every line in the system that is Automatically
optical power managed at least once during commissioning to allow the user to trigger
the ingress and egress adjustment functions.
The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been pre-determined during
network planning. If there are no pre-determined routes, the user should determine which
paths have not been commissioned and create services over one those paths following the
guidelines above. (Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to
minimize the number of transponder deployments or re-deployments necessary during the
commissioning phase). When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it
is always best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F
of the SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose
the channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest the
center of the frequency band.
Figure 10-42, “Commissioning service for a FOADM system” (p. 10-58) shows a
FOADM linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the
terminal NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B,
C or G of the 5 channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz
or 194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed
above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned
channel add/drop at each network element. In that case two services will be required that
overlap at at least one of the FOADM node express paths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-42 Commissioning service for a FOADM system
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically

present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Make
sure they are present as stated in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 10-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard has been run and that the nodes that
make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated in “Provision
the system” (p. 10-17).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure the transponder cards are installed as described above and stated in the
“Preconditioning procedure” (p. 10-6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Identify the wavelength service to be created. Refer to the detailed description above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created. Determine the
service type that will be provisioned between the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-61).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at all the egress and ingress lines.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
viewed immediately.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Is the first NE in the signal path (A End) automatically managed?

If yes, continue to Step 14.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point of the A-end of the signal
path from the drop-down list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the "Result" field shows "Success". The egress power levels at the A-end should be
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete. Go to Step 23.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Adjust the transponder output power level by selecting and dragging the zed bar to the
middle of the transponder's power range (light blue bar) as shown in Figure 10-48, “1354
RM-PhM zed bar adjustment” (p. 10-64).
Figure 10-48 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 A warning will appear similar to Figure 10-49, “1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment”
(p. 10-65). Click the "yes" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Wait 30 seconds and watch the affect on the wavelength egress power level on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Continue to adjust the transponder power level until the wavelength leaves the NE near
the middle of the zed bar at the egress point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Is the ingress line of the next NE in the signal path automatically managed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select aid of the ingress point of the NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the "Result" field shows "Success". The ingress power levels at the NE should be green
and within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Power adjustment on the ingress line of the NE is complete. Go to Step 35.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Move the mouse over the power bar for the ingress point of the NE. Actual and expected
power levels will display similar to Figure 10-50, “1354 RM-PhM power level reading”
(p. 10-67).
Figure 10-50 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Right click on the power bar at the ingress point and select "Edit Amp" from the power
adjust menu as shown in Figure 10-51, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu” (p. 10-68).
Figure 10-51 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 The Facility/Connection window will appear as shown in Figure 10-52, “1354 RM-PhM
facility/connection window” (p. 10-69).
Figure 10-52 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Select the "Power Gain (dB)" field and add the value calculated in Step 28 to the current
value in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Type the new power gain value in the field and click the "Apply" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Wait 30 seconds and go back to the Power Management window. Observe the power level
at the ingress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 If the ingress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 27 through Step
32.
If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is
complete. Continue to Step 35.
Note: Refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 10-133) if the there are
problems achieving the proper power level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Move to the egress line of the same NE; is that automatically managed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point of the NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the "Result" field shows "Success". The egress power level should be green and within
the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 These next steps require someone to be on-site to provide padding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Move the mouse over the power bar for the egress point of the NE. Actual and expected
(p. 10-71).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Provide the calculated value to the person on-site and pad the path between the ingress
and egress lines by the same amount.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 Wait 30 seconds and observe the power level at the egress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 If the egress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 40 through Step 43
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Is the next NE in the signal path the Z End containing the transponder?
If no, go back to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46 Is the ingress line of the Z End NE in the signal path automatically managed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select aid of the ingress point of the Z End NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-73).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
value in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
60 Close the wavelength service window. Power adjustments have been completed for the
lines covered by that wavelength service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
62 Are there additional wavelength services that are needed to complete commissioning on
the system?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
63 Commissioning on the FOADM system is now complete. Are there additional systems
(EPT commissioning files) that need to be commissioned?
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM

system
Background
A mixed TOADM/FOADM ring system is shown in Figure 10-57, “Mixed
TOADM/FOADM ring system” (p. 10-77). In this example, FOADM NE lines are
Manually managed, and the ILA and TOADM NE lines are Auto managed. The
Commission Greenfield System Wizard is able to complete some of the commissioning
adjustments for the Auto lines, namely the Egress Adjustment and the Ingress Adjustment
if the upstream line is also an Auto line and is not a terminal. In the figure, only the lines
connecting NE 1 to NE 6 can be automatically commissioned. The Egress Adjustment
will be run for both lines of the TOADMs, NE1 and NE 6, and for both lines of the ILA,
NE3.
Figure 10-57 Mixed TOADM/FOADM ring system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After the commission greenfield system wizard is executed, the commissioning must be
completed by creating wavelength services with transponder cards and then adjusting
power levels. The following requirements must be met regarding the
wavelength/commissioning services.
2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD card in the system at least once
during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD card. The lines
that were not commissioned by the Commission Greenfield System wizard are listed
in the messages/progress window of the Commission Greenfield System wizard.
3. A commissioning service must cross every line in the system that is Auto power
managed that was skipped during the Commission Greenfield System to allow the
user to trigger the ingress and egress adjustment functions. These lines are listed in the
messages/progress window of the Commission Greenfield System wizard.
An example of such a service is shown in Figure 10-58, “Commissioning service for a
mixed TOADM/FOADM system” (p. 10-79). Only one commissioning service is
required for the depicted system, however more than one service may be required if (due
to the selection of static filters) one commissioning service cannot traverse all the degrees
that must be commissioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-58 Commissioning service for a mixed TOADM/FOADM system
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that the greenfield commissioning has been completed. Refer to “Execute the
commission greenfield system wizard” (p. 10-27).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard has been run and that the nodes that
make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated in “Provision
the system” (p. 10-17).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Commissioning a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system requires the availability of

field personnel physically present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad
changes if required. Make sure they are present as stated in the “Preconditioning
procedure” (p. 10-6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created. Determine the
service type that will be provisioned between the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-82).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at all the egress and ingress lines.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
viewed immediately.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Is the first NE in the signal path (A End) automatically managed?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point of the A-end of the signal
path from the drop-down list and click the "Execute" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the "Result" field shows "Success". The egress power levels at the A-end should be
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Is the ingress line of the next NE in the signal path automatically managed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select aid of the ingress point of the NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
value in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Move to the egress line of the same NE; is that automatically managed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Under "Power Control (Egress)" select aid of the egress point of the NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the "Result" field shows "Success". The egress power level should be green and within
the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-92).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 Under "Power Control (Ingress)" select aid of the ingress point of the Z End NE from the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 10-94).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
value in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
57.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
61 Close the wavelength service window. Power adjustments have been completed for the
lines covered by that wavelength service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the system?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

Background
Refer to “Keyed versus Unkeyed OCh” (p. 10-5) for more information about unkeyed
networks. Note that the EPT design will explicitly state that the network design is
unkeyed.
An unkeyed system must be commissioned using wavelength (or commissioning)
services using the following guidelines.
2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once
during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD.
3. A commissioning service must be added at every FOADM-1 (terminal) egress line in
the system at least once during commissioning to verify that the equipment is installed
correctly.
The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been pre-determined during
network planning. If there are no pre-determined routes then the user should determine
which paths have not been commissioned yet and create a service over one of those paths.
(Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to minimize the
number of transponder deployments or re-deployments necessary during the
commissioning phase). When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it
is always best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F
of the SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose
the channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest the
centre of the frequency band.
Figure 10-73, “Commissioning service for a FOADM system” (p. 10-99) shows a
FOADM linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the
terminal NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B,
C or G of the 5 channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz
or 194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed
above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned
channel add/drop at each network element. In this case two services will be required that
overlap at least one of the FOADM node express paths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-73 Commissioning service for a FOADM system
Procedure
Important! When following this procedure, note that the ALPFGT has a very small
gain setting range in which the gain profile across the C-band is flat. Therefore
Alcatel-Lucent strongly recommends operating the ALPFGT LD within the Gmin to
Gmax parameters from the EPT. If the gain setting required to eliminate the power
error calculated in the procedure would be outside the gain range it is better to accept
the power error and set the gain setting to the nearest boundary of the gain range
(Gmin or Gmax).
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically

present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Make
sure they are present as stated in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 10-6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard available in CPB has been run and that
the nodes that make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated
in “Provision the system” (p. 10-17).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created (refer to
“Background” (p. 10-98) for commissioning service guidelines). Determine the service
type that will be provisioned between the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Determine the first node in the lightpath and double-click on the node in the Topology
View to open the NE Inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click on the Line port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service and note the
"Per channel target output power". See example in Figure 10-74, “1354 RM-PhM per
channel target output power” (p. 10-101).
Figure 10-74 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change
the "Programmed Network Output Power" to the value noted in Step 9. See Figure 10-75,
“1354 RM-PhM adjust output power” (p. 10-102).
Figure 10-75 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If a wavelength meter or OSA is available on-site, continue to Step 12.

If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect a power meter to the Tx Mon port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Click on the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the "Total
Network Power Egress" and the power measured by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Remove the power meter and connect the wavelength meter or OSA to the monitor port.
Observe the channel power on the wavelength meter or OSA for the commissioning
service. Add the delta previously calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Make adjustments to the transponder "Programmed Network Output Power" (see Step 10)
until the observed channel power plus the delta equals the "Per channel target output
power" as noted in Step 9. Wait 30 seconds between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Jump to Step 23.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Click on the Line port of the egress amplifier. Select Wavelength Tracker -> View
Services from the NE Inventory top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 The wavelength services list will appear similar to Figure 10-76, “1354 RM-PhM
wavelength services list” (p. 10-103). Count the number services present on the Line port.
Figure 10-76 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 18 and the
"Per channel target output power" as noted in Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Click the "Close" button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
until the "Total Network Power Egress" of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in
Step 19. Wait 30 seconds between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Note the final "Total Network Power Egress" (Poutupstream) and "Per channel target output
power" (Ptargetupstream).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Determine the next node in the lightpath and double click on it to open the NE inventory
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 If there is an ingress amplifier at the next node, continue to Step 25.

If there is no ingress amplifier, jump to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Note the "Per
channel target output power" (Ptargetdownstream) and the "Signal Power Egress"
(Poutdownstream).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Calculate the amount to adjust the ingress amplifier gain setting using the following
formula.
Delta = (Ptargetdownstream - Ptargetupstream) - (Poutdownstream - Poutupstream)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Change the "Power Gain" attribute by the delta value calculated in Step 26. See example
in Figure 10-77, “1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment” (p. 10-105).
Figure 10-77 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Obtain new values for Poutdownstream and Poutupstream and recalculate the delta value using
the formula in Step 26. If the absolute delta value is greater than 0.5 dB wait 5 seconds,
and then change the power gain value again. Continue the iterations until the delta is less
than 0.5 dB waiting 5 seconds between changes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of "Maximum Gain" and "Minimum
Gain" there is likely an upstream loss problem that must be identified and corrected.
Possible reasons for the problem could be one of the following.
• The Poutupstream reading changed due to a disruption at the upstream NE.
• Failure to place an input fixed attenuating pad after a short span. Check the EPT
design.
• The upstream span loss is too high or too low.
• The patch panel connection loss between the fiber span and Line In port of the
receiving network element is too high.
• For topologies where the receive direction amplification is provided by an
ALPFGT pack, the loss between the receiving network element Line In port and
the ALPFGT Sig In port may be too high.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Determine the egress line of the lightpath and select the Line port of the egress amplifier.
Note the "Total Network Power Egress" and the "Per channel target output power".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Determine the delta between the "Total Network Power Egress" and the power measured
by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service. Add the delta calculated Step 32.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress
line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the channel power
determined in Step 33 and the "Per channel target output power".
Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between
the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected via the
loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the channel
ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Make attenuation changes until the measured channel power is within 1 dB of the "Per
channel target output power".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46.

If the target power can not be achieved jump to Step 44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
wavelength services list” (p. 10-107). Count the number of services present on the Line
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Calculate the expected total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 38
and the "Per channel target output power".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress
line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the expected total power
calculated in Step 39 and the "Total Network Power Egress".
Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between
the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected via the
loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the channel
ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Make attenuation changes until the "Total Network Power Egress" is within 1 dB of the
expected total power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46.

If the target power can not be achieved continue to Step 44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 If changing fixed attenuators in the ingress to egress line path cannot achieve the Line
Out target power, consider increasing the egress amplifier gain setting if one is present.
Note: The following step should only be taken if all other possibilities are exhausted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Change the "Power
Gain" attribute by the required amount.
Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of "Maximum Gain" and "Minimum
Gain" there is likely a loss problem within the node that must be identified and
corrected. (Verify the Poutupstream reading has not changed as well).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46 Repeat Step 22 through Step 43 for each node before the terminating node of the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Repeat Step 22 through Step 28 for the terminating node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 Repeat Step 8 through Step 43 for the opposite direction of the lightpath.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the system?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 There is an optional procedure to prepare the system for additional services. For more
information and detailed procedure, go to “Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for
additional services” (p. 10-110).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

Background
After completing “Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines” (p. 10-98), the
through path of the system has been commissioned. This is sufficient to set the gain
settings of the amplifiers in the system and determine the value of any fixed attenuators
required on the through transmission path. Every service addition at a FOADM node in
an unkeyed network would require a re-measurement of the output power using an OSA
or wavelength meter to determine the correct add path power to reach the egress Line Out
target power. An optional additional step in commissioning is to determine the required
add path power from each SFD filter to achieve the Line Out target power. The values
determined cannot be stored in the network element, however the operator may wish to
record the values for reference so that when additional services are added using the SFDs
already installed, the required target power for the add path can be set directly.
Transponders need to be fibered to the SFDs that require the target power. Wavelength
services will be created across the SFDs to determine the values.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the transponder fibered to the SFD for the degree of interest. Create a
wavelength service terminated at that transponder using the procedure “Provision new
wavelength service” (p. 11-7).
Note: Use a channel from the middle of the channel set supported by the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Double-click on the add node for the wavelength service to open the NE inventory
window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Line port of the egress amplifier for the wavelength service and note the "Per
channel target output power". See Figure 10-79, “1354 RM-PhM per channel target
output power” (p. 10-111).
Figure 10-79 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change
the "Programmed Network Output Power" to the value noted in Step 3. See Figure 10-80,
“1354 RM-PhM adjust output power” (p. 10-112).
Figure 10-80 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the "Total
Network Power Egress" and the power measured by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service. Add the delta previously calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
until the observed channel power plus the delta equals the "Per channel target output
power" as noted in Step 3. Wait 30 seconds between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Jump to Step 16.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
wavelength services list” (p. 10-113). Count the number services present on the Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 12 and the
"Per channel target output power" as noted in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
until the "Total Network Power Egress" of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in
Step 13. Wait 30 seconds between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Once the power setting required at the transponder Line port has been determined, record
this value for future use as the nominal reference power for this SFD to external Line Out
combination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Delete the wavelength service created following the procedure “Delete wavelength
service” (p. 11-35).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Repeat Step 1 through Step 17 for each SFD to Line Out combination on the FOADM
degree being tested.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 1 through Step 18 for other degrees in the system being commissioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Disconnect PC from the Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect PC from the Network

Overview
The CIT provisioning was changed to allow discovery of all the network elements. See
“Establish connection to the network” (p. 10-8). Once the commissioning is completed,
the NE CIT provisioning must be returned to the original settings.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Telnet to the temporary CIT port address and log in to CLI following the procedure
described in “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 8-11).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config interface ec 1/1/cit red disable and <Enter>.

This will turn off route redistribution.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config interface ec 1/1/cit ip <ip> and <Enter>.

Where <ip> is the original IP address of the CIT port before it was changed.
Note: Typically this will be the default IP address, 172.16.0.1.
WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result

in a loss of IP connectivity to this network element
from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity will
not be affected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Communication to the NE will be lost. Close the telnet session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Open a Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type ipconfig /renew and <Enter>.

This will force the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE via DHCP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Disconnect PC from the Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type ipconfig and <Enter>.

Verify the PC has successfully obtained an IP address from the NE, and the Default
Gateway is once again the original CIT IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The PC can now be disconnected from the NE.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Understanding the loss report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Understanding the loss report

Background
The loss report is generated in the following circumstances.
• when the network commissioning wizard completes, regardless of whether it
completes successfully or not.
• after performing a network power balance.
• on demand by the user.
The loss report is only fully supported for systems comprised of Auto managed lines. The
PhM only includes the ingress LD of a FOADM through node and excludes the through
path of a FOADM through node.
Overview
The report is generated as an HTML file. Errors are highlighted in red. Warnings are
highlighted in yellow.
This section contains the following topics.
• “Report organization” (p. 10-117)
• “Report content” (p. 10-118)
• “Loss value field of loss report” (p. 10-120)
• “Notes field of loss report” (p. 10-121)
• “Highlighting in the loss report” (p. 10-122)
Report organization
The loss report details the card and span losses and gains along the A-Z and Z-A paths for
each NE in the ring. The report is organized as follows.
• Report header information
• Summary of errors
• NE loss trace 'A to Z'
• Span loss n to Node 1
• Ingress section Node 1 adjustment status and losses
• Egress section Node 1 adjustment status and losses
• Span loss Node 1 to Node 2
• Ingress section Node 2 adjustment status and losses
• Egress section Node 2 adjustment status and losses
• etc...
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• NE loss trace 'Z to A'
• Same format as A to Z direction
Figure 10-82, “1354 RM-PhM sample loss report” (p. 10-118) shows a section of the loss
report for a span and a node.
Figure 10-82 1354 RM-PhM sample loss report
Report content
A summary is provided for each NE in the ring or linear system, indicating the status of
the last ingress and egress adjust. The summary is colored red if the NE has an error
condition, or yellow if the NE has a warning condition. The Last ingress result and Last
egress result fields indicate the cause of the error or warning, if applicable. The possible
errors and warnings are detailed in “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 10-133). If a
power adjustment is successful, loss report highlighting is suppressed for the
corresponding network section and the out of range losses are noted as “Loss
accommodated.”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following information is reported for each wavelength tracker decode point to the
next in the path.
• the actual loss (or gain) for the section, in dB
• the minimum allowable loss (or gain) for the section, in dB, from the EPT
• the maximum allowable loss (or gain) for the section, in dB, from the EPT
• the loss value (commission or real-time)
• notes that provide additional information in diagnosing errors and warnings. See
“Notes field of loss report” (p. 10-121) for details.
Note: The loss for a section amplified by external amplifier modules or the RA2P
pack is the net loss. Therefore, the loss of the outside plant fiber span is not separable
from the net loss for these sections. The planned EPT range reflects the expected gain
and component losses.
Table 10-1, “Loss report terms and definitions” (p. 10-119) provides detailed descriptions
of each of the terms used in the loss report.
Table 10-1 Loss report terms and definitions
Term Explanation
NE loss trace 'A to Z' The direction of the commissioning signal
NE loss trace 'Z to A' The direction of the commissioning signal
Actual Loss (Gain) (dB) The Actual loss is the measured loss between two consecutive
Wavelength Tracker detect points. In the case of an amplifier, the
Actual Gain is the current gain setting of the amplifier.
The actual loss should fall between the values specified for the
EPT Min and Max losses. If the adjusts for the node are successful
then no highlighting is applied to the components in the node and
losses outside the range are simply noted as "Loss
accommodated". If the adjustment for topology section failed
recently, then highlighting is applied to the section of topology for
losses out of range, and action by the user is required. See below
for highlighting rules.
In the case of a loss report generated after the Greenfield
commissioning wizard has run, some lines may not have been
completed, either due to upstream failures or because lines were
excluded by the wizard. In this case the Actual loss field indicates
n/a for the loss measurements because losses have not been
calculated yet for those lines of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-1 Loss report terms and definitions (continued)
Term Explanation
PT Max Loss (Gain) (dB) The maximum expected card or span loss that is used to plan the
network.
The maximum span loss is obtained by the sum of the nominal
span loss and user defined patch-panel and fiber loss margin.
Maximum card loss is defined by considering the loss of the
specific component and appropriate connector losses within and
between cards. The component loss is obtained from a statistical
analysis of the component loss data. Total losses within an NE are
derived by a statistical RMS addition of all the individual cards
along the through path of the NE.
For sections where external modules provide gain, or a Raman
amplifier provides gain, the expected gain is included in calculated
the planned loss.
PT Nominal Loss (Gain) The nominal card or span loss used to plan the network. Total
(dB) nominal loss within an NE is derived by the linear addition of the
nominal card losses.
PT Min Loss (Gain) (dB) The minimum expected card or span loss used to plan the network.
Loss value Loss value indicates how the loss value reported was obtained.
• Real time: Wavelength Tracker measurement of the loss
• Commission: bulk power measurement of the loss
Notes Provides additional information, as described in “Notes field of
loss report” (p. 10-121).
Loss value field of loss report

The loss value field indicates how the displayed loss was calculated. Amplifier gains
shown in the loss report are read directly from the LD pack, therefore no text is shown in
the "Loss value" field.
Table 10-2 Loss value field terms and definitions
Text Explanation
Real time Real time Wavelength Tracker readings were used to calculate the loss when
the report was generated. Note that the loss between NEs is always
calculated using the total power readings at the upstream NE and
downstream NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-2 Loss value field terms and definitions (continued)
Text Explanation
Commission Commission is displayed when there are no wavelength services with WT
readings available when the report is generated. The displayed loss is the
loss that was calculated during the last commissioning adjustment.
Commissioning adjustments are defined as:
1. Kitless commissioning adjustments used to commission a system
2. Or, WT based power adjustments when the line has not been
commissioned.
Most recent In some cases, WT readings cannot be used to calculate the loss; the NE
calculates the loss by other methods, and the loss value is retrieved from the
NE. Most Recent indicates the most recent value calculated by the NE has
been retrieved.
Notes field of loss report

The notes field of a row in the loss report displays additional information to the user.
Table 10-3 Notes field terms and definitions
Note Explanation
Warning: Loss x.x dB too The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss.
high. The level "Warning" or "Error" is based on whether the loss is just
outside the PT range within 1 dB, or whether the loss is outside of
the PT range + 1 dB. However, if the adjust succeeds the "Error" is
changed to a "Warning".
Warning: Loss x.x dB too The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss.
low.
Error: Loss x.x dB too The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss and is
high. associated with a failed power management adjustment.
If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be a
Warning instead of an error.
Error: Loss x.x dB too The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss and is
low. associated with a failed power management adjustment.
If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be a
Warning instead of an error.
Loss Accommodated. The loss is outside the planned range, but the loss was
accommodated by the auto power management adjustment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-3 Notes field terms and definitions (continued)
Note Explanation
Average attenuation of x.x For a CWR8 Thru, WSS Thru or ROADM thru path x.x dB was
dB applied to range applied to the planned loss range. This equals the applied
attenuation of the optical device in the path.
Power not found No optical power was found that could be used to calculate a loss.
Error: unable to read loss A measured loss couldn't be calculated and a commissioning loss
value was not available on the network element.
(Target gain = xx.x dB) The adjustment function calculated a gain of xx.x dB which did
not fall within the planned gain range.
Loss within 10% of max The measured loss is within 10% of the maximum planned value.
Several components within 10% of the max may cause an auto
power management adjustment to fail.
Upstream loss too high The ingress adjustment has failed and the loss preceding the
ingress LD is too high.
x dB of y dB repair margin Indicates that the ingress adjustment has set the gain of the ingress
consumed LD within the repair margin allocated for this LD. The gain is
approaching the maximum gain planned for this amplifier.
DCM present <value> dB, Indicates that a dispersion compensation device is between the two
expected 8 to 12 dB detect points used to calculate the loss. The measured loss and
expected range is shown.
Measured loss includes The measured loss value shown in the row includes the gain of the
RA2P gain RA2P (net of its own insertion loss) in the calculated loss and
expected loss range.
Integrated EVOA = Indicates the setting of the LD output port integrated variable
<value> dB optical attenuator . This value is reported separately because the
gain setting versus the planning range does not include the EVOA
setting.
Highlighting in the loss report

If errors or warnings are generated during commissioning or during an in-service power
adjustment, the relevant cells within the loss report are highlighted to help identify the
source of the problems. Warnings are highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red.
Highlighting is conditional on whether the report was generated during commissioning or
during an in-service operation, and based on the last adjust results for each NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the following table, the highlighting rules are explained:
Table 10-4 Loss report highlighting
Adjust-
Affected ment
Adjustment Topology Result Highlighting
Ingress Span loss Success No highlighting applied to the rows.
adjustment between Losses that are outside PT Min to PT Max
upstream and are noted as "Loss accommodated" in the
downstream NE. Notes field.
For a TOADM Power The ingress amp is highlighted yellow with a
or ROADM line, adjust Warning message. The preceding span and
port to port warning - other ingress components may also be
losses up to the span repair highlighted yellow with a Warning message.
demultiplexing margin
pack (CWR8, Although the ingress adjust has passed,
violated some of the span repair margin has been
CWR8-88,
WR8-88A(F), used. In this case, the network remains in a
WR2-88) SIG In normal operating state.
of the ingress Although no action is required, the operator
line. may choose to address the warning.
For a FOADM No services No highlighting applied to the rows.
line, the last provi- Losses that are outside PT Min to PT max
point will be the sioned. are noted.
ingress LD port
connected to the Any result Warnings: Components or spans highlighted
SFD. message in yellow with a Warning message may
different indicate a potential problem.
than The measured component or span loss is less
preceding than the PT Min or greater than the PT Max
ones. values, but is within the measurement
accuracy window. Before attempting to fix
the flagged warnings, check for any
components in the Error state.
Errors: Components or spans highlighted in
red with an Error message require attention.
The measured component or span loss is less
than the PT Min or greater than the PT Max
values, including measurement accuracy.
Amplifiers highlighted in red with an Error
message indicate a problem area since the
gain setting required is outside of the
allowed range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-4 Loss report highlighting (continued)
Adjust-
Affected ment
Adjustment Topology Result Highlighting
Egress For a TOADM Success No highlighting applied to the rows.
adjustment or ROADM line, Losses that are outside PT Min to PT Max
port to port are noted as "Loss accommodated" in the
losses from the Notes field.
demultiplexing
pack SIG port of No services No highlighting applied to the rows.
the ingress line provisioned Losses that are outside PT Min to PT Max
to the external are noted.
egress line Any result Warnings: Components highlighted in
connecting port. message yellow with a Warning message may
For a FOADM different indicate a potential problem.
line, the first than The measured component loss is less than
point will be the preceding the PT Min or greater than the PT Max
first LD port ones. values, but is within the measurement
encountered accuracy window. Before attempting to fix
following the the flagged warnings, check for any
SFDs in the components in the Error state.
direction
Errors: Components highlighted in red with
towards the line,
an Error message require attention. The
and the last point
measured component loss is less than the PT
will be the
Min or greater than the PT Max values,
external egress
including measurement accuracy. Amplifiers
line connecting
highlighted in red with an Error message
port.
indicate a problem area since the gain setting
required is outside of the allowed range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Generate and review system loss report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generate and review system loss report

Overview
The System Loss Report of the CPB tool displays the loss per channel through a network
element from ingress degree to egress degree. There are two target applications for this
NE loss report. One use is to check the pad values selected during commissioning of the
FOADM network elements. The second use is to quickly audit a FOADM node in-service
to discover if any excess loss exists within the node if optical power out of range alarms
are observed on one or more channels.
Prerequisites
Prior to creating a System Loss Report, the user should complete provisioning of the EPT
parameters for the target system. If the system has been commissioned, this prerequisite is
met.
If these parameters are not provisioned, the System Loss Report will not display a target
loss range for the loop or express channels and the expected gain range for the LDs will
also be missing. The user should run the Provision System using plan wizard to provision
the required planning tool parameters prior to creating a System Loss Report. The
parameters in Table 10-5, “Minimum EPT parameters for network element”
(p. 10-125) are the minimum set of parameters that must be provisioned
Table 10-5 Minimum EPT parameters for network element
Tag in planning tool

EPT Commissioning Parameter commissioning .xml file Applicable Port
LD Gmin AmpMinGain LD Sig Out
LD Gmax AmpMaxGain LD Sig Out
Ingress LD target output power TargetOutputPower LD Sig Out
Ingress LD power deviation out DeviationOut LD Sig Out
Egress target output power TargetOutputPower LD Line Out
Egress power deviation out DeviationOut LD Line Out
Generating a loss report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the CPB tool is not already running, start it by selecting Provision -> Launch CPB...
from the top menu and login using the 1354 RM-PhM login and password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Commissioning -> Create System Loss Report (using plan)... from the top menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 An overview window will appear as shown in Figure 10-83, “CPB Create system loss
report overview” (p. 10-126). Click the "Next>" button.
Figure 10-83 CPB Create system loss report overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The planning tool file selection window will display as shown in Figure 10-84, “CPB
Create system loss report select planning tool file” (p. 10-127).
Figure 10-84 CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the target system and
select the file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click the "Next>" button and the system loss report stages window will display as shown
in Figure 10-85, “CPB Create system loss report stages progress window” (p. 10-128).
Figure 10-85 CPB Create system loss report stages progress window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wait until the stages shows completed and click the "Next>" button. The last page will
appear as shown in Figure 10-86, “CPB Create system loss report last page” (p. 10-129).
Figure 10-86 CPB Create system loss report last page
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the "View Report" button, and a loss report will be displayed similar to the one
shown in Figure 10-87, “CPB sample loss report” (p. 10-130). Alternatively, click on
"Download Report" to save the report to a selected location.
Figure 10-87 CPB sample loss report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click "Finish" to close the create system loss report wizard.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Loss report content

The egress line selected by the user, and the result of the last power management
adjustment (applicable only to Auto managed lines) is displayed above the tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One table per ingress line selected by the user is displayed next. The fields of the table are
explained in Table 10-6, “Loss report fields” (p. 10-131).
Table 10-6 Loss report fields
Field Explanation
Path - Port from The starting point for the measured loss
Path - Port to The end point for the measured loss. The measured loss
is between 'Port from' to 'Port to'
Expected Loss Range - PT Min Loss The minimum planned loss or gain between 'Port from'
(Gain) dB and 'Port to'
Expected Loss Range - PT Max The maximum planned loss or gain between 'Port from'
Loss (Gain) dB and 'Port to'
Notes Displays additional information. See 'Notes for the
Network Element Loss Report' below.
Measured Loss (dB) ITU<channel The measured loss for each ITU channel provisioned
number> between the ingress line and egress line.
There are three sections of the table. The first section is the 'Target Loss Comparison'
section. In this section the loss between the target power per channel at the ingress LD Sig
Out for the ingress line and the egress line LD Line Out is measured. The valid loss range
includes the expected power deviation from the target values.
The second section is the 'WTD detect point to detect point losses' section. In this section
each row contains the measured loss between two Wavelength Tracker detect points.
The third section is the 'Per channel status'. In this section, below each ITU channel
column, the status for each channel is reported.
• If the loss is measured and in range the status is 'OK'.
• If the loss is measured and is too high the status is 'Too high'
• If the loss is measured and is too low the status is 'Too low'
• If the loss wasn't measured the status is 'n/a'
The 'PT Min Loss' and 'PT Max Loss' fields show 'n/a' if the planned loss is not set on the
network element, or cannot be calculated, for WTD to WTD losses and the target loss
range, respectively. 'n/a' indicates 'not available'.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The notes field of the loss report
The notes field contains additional information.
• Power not found - power readings were not available for one or more of the channels.
'n/a' is shown where the loss for the channel would normally be displayed.
• Error: Unable to calculate target loss range - displayed when the planning tool data
required to calculate the target los range is not available. See table above for the
required planning tool data.
System report highlighting

If the measured loss reported is outside the planned range by less than or equal to 1 dB
the loss is highlighted yellow. If the measured loss is outside the planned range by more
than 1 dB the loss is highlighted red. If the measured loss is within the planned range the
loss is not highlighted. The WTD to WTD losses are not highlighted if the measured loss
in the "Target Loss Comparison" is not highlighted.
If a measured loss cannot be calculated no highlighting is applied to the measured loss. If
the planned or target loss range is not available no highlighting is applied.
Troubleshooting using the loss report

Losses that are highlighted yellow indicate a potential problem. Losses that are
highlighted red indicate a problem that should be corrected. For a path from an ingress
line that is Manually power managed to an egress line that is Manually power managed
on a FOADM node the most likely problem is an incorrect pad selection for the optical
connection between the drop side and add side of the path. As removal of an attenuating
pad will break the optical path of the signal, attenuating pad changes should be done
during a maintenance time window.
During service turn-up the loss report can be used as an aide to ensure that the selected
pad for the new service is correct. After adding the attenuating pad for the new service
run the loss report to compare the measured loss for the channel to the target loss range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Connecting adjacent network elements Troubleshooting failed adjustments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting failed adjustments

Overview
After the Commission Greenfield System wizard completes a loss report is generated.
Refer to “Understanding the loss report” (p. 10-117) for more details about the loss
report.
Above each node loss summary in the loss report there is a box with Last ingress result =
<string> and Last egress result = <string> (see Figure 10-87, “CPB sample loss report”
(p. 10-130)). If there is a failure on the NE, then the box is highlighted. Warnings are
highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red. This section provides a list of the possible
messages, along with a detailed description of the message and any corrective action
required.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Table 10-7, “Loss report error messages” (p. 10-133) provides a list of possible error
messages. Follow the applicable corrective action to troubleshoot the error.
Table 10-7 Loss report error messages
Message Description Corrective action

Aborted The power adjustment was aborted by the user. NA
This message applies to in-service adjustments
only.
Action not The point selected is not a power adjustment See the Alcatel-Lucent
supported for target point. 1830 Photonic Service
that location Switch (PSS) Release 5.1
User Provisioning Guide
for a list of valid
adjustment points.
Amplifier is gain The amplifier output power is at its maximum Go to “Troubleshoot
limited (ingress allowable level and the gain has been clamped. amplifier is gain limited
adjustment) (ingress adjustment)”
(p. 10-138).
Amplifier is gain The amplifier output power is at its maximum Go to “Troubleshoot
limited (egress allowable level and the gain has been clamped. amplifier is gain limited
adjustment) (egress adjustment)”
(p. 10-138).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-7 Loss report error messages (continued)

Amplifier signal The adjustment failed because the NE was Go to “Troubleshoot
power unable to retrieve the signal power from the amplifier signal power
unavailable corresponding ingress/egress amplifier. This unavailable” (p. 10-138).
message applies to Commission Greenfield
System wizard triggered adjustments only.
No through An adjustment cannot be completed for the Go to “Troubleshoot no
services through path of the network element because through services
provisioned no services are provisioned or present. This provisioned” (p. 10-139).
message is not considered a failure. This
message pertains to in-service egress power
adjustments only.
Pack required A pack required to perform a power Go to “Troubleshoot pack
for adjust not adjustment is not present. required for adjust not
present present” (p. 10-139).
Communication Communication with the upstream node failed. Go to “Troubleshoot
time-out with communication time-out
upstream node with upstream node”
(p. 10-139).
Configuration The software encountered an internal error. Go to “Troubleshoot
request configuration request
unsuccessful unsuccessful” (p. 10-140).
Error A general error has occurred. Check for alarms and
troubleshoot.
Fiber is not yet The commissioning flag for the line where the Go to “Troubleshoot fiber
commissioned adjustment was triggered has not been set to is not yet commissioned”
completed yet. This message applies to (p. 10-140).
in-service adjustments only, triggered directly
by the user.
Local A power adjustment is currently in progress. Wait for the adjustment to
adjustment is This message applies to in-service adjustments complete.
still in progress only.
Power adjust The power adjustment failed because the Go to “Troubleshoot loss
failed - span required gain falls within the area designated too high (ingress
repair margin for the span splice margin. adjustment)” (p. 10-141).
violated
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power adjust Indicates that the ingress amplifier gain Go to “Troubleshoot
warning - splice encroaches on the span repair margin. power adjust warning -
margin violated splice margin violated”
(p. 10-141).
Loss too high The loss from the output of the previous node Go to “Troubleshoot loss
(ingress to the ingress amp on the current node is too high (ingress
adjustment) greater than the maximum allowable span loss adjustment)” (p. 10-141).
specified in the EPT commissioning file. The
loss cannot be accommodated by the gain
limits for the ingress amplifier planned by the
EPT.
In-service: The required gain calculated by the
adjustment exceeds the planned maximum
gain plus a margin over the maximum gain.
Triggered by Commission Greenfield System
wizard: The required gain calculated by the
adjustment exceeds the planned maximum
gain.
Loss too high The loss within the node is too high. Go to “Troubleshoot loss
(egress too high (egress
adjustment) adjustment)” (p. 10-142).
Loss too low The loss from the output of the previous node Go to “Troubleshoot loss
(ingress to the ingress amp on the current node is less too low (ingress
adjustment) than the minimum allowable span loss adjustment)” (p. 10-143).
specified in the EPT commissioning file. The
loss cannot be accommodated by the gain
limits of the ingress amplifier.
Loss too low The loss within the node is too low. Go to “Troubleshoot loss
(egress too low (egress
adjustment) adjustment)” (p. 10-144).
Maximum Maximum number of adjustment iterations is Go to “Troubleshoot
number of reached. The probable cause is erratic power Maximum number of
iterations transient. This message may appear for an iterations reached”
reached egress adjustment triggered at a terminal line if (p. 10-144).
the OT or SVAC power setpoint cannot be
achieved. This message applies to in-service
power adjustments only. This can also occur if
the OT line port admin state is down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

No services in The services required to perform an in-service Go to “Troubleshoot no
appropriate state power adjustment are in a power unstable state services in appropriate
for adjustment or the Wavelength Tracker detect point state for adjustment”
reporting powers has been declared unreliable (p. 10-145).
and the power adjustment cannot proceed. This
message applies to in-service power
adjustments only.
No through The services required to perform an in-service Go to “Troubleshoot no
services in power adjustment are in a power unstable state through services in
appropriate state or the Wavelength Tracker detect point appropriate state for
for adjustment reporting powers has been declared unreliable adjustment” (p. 10-145).
and the power adjustment cannot proceed. This
message applies to in-service egress power
adjustments only.
No services Impossible to complete adjustment without Go to “Troubleshoot no
present services provisioned. This message applies to services present”
inservice power adjustments only. (p. 10-145).
Power changing; The total or signal power readings are not Contact your next level of
cannot adjust stable and the power adjustment cannot support.
execute. This message applies to adjustments
triggered by the Commission Greenfield
System wizard only.
Power The power management application failed to Go to “Troubleshoot
measurement is retrieve a value from one of the line packs. power measurement is
unavailable unavailable” (p. 10-146).
Success Adjustment completed successfully. Loss NA
compensated within tolerance.
Timeout caused The power adjustment timed out. Go to “Troubleshoot
adjust to halt timeout caused adjust to
halt” (p. 10-146).
Topology The NE fiber topology is not fully defined. Go to “Troubleshoot
provisioning is topology provisioning is
incomplete incomplete” (p. 10-147).
Upstream data Data from the upstream NEs is unavailable. Go to “Troubleshoot
unavailable communication time-out
with upstream node”
(p. 10-139).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Upstream The NE upstream of the node where the Go to “Troubleshoot
software ingress adjustment was attempted is running upstream software
incompatible an incompatible software release. incompatible” (p. 10-147).
Ingress amplifier The adjustment set the gain of the ingress LD Go to “Troubleshoot loss
gain exceeds above the maximum planned gain, but less too high (ingress
maximum than the maximum planned gain plus margin. adjustment)” (p. 10-141).
planned gain This is not a failure, however too many
amplifiers in this state will cause the OSNR of
services to be too low to maintain error free
transmission. The network operator should try
to clear this state as soon as possible. This
message applies to in-service ingress
adjustments only.
Egress amplifier The adjustment set the gain of the egress LD Go to “Troubleshoot loss
gain exceeds above the maximum planned gain, but less too high (egress
maximum than the maximum planned gain plus margin. adjustment)” (p. 10-142).
planned gain This is not a failure, however too many
amplifiers in this state will cause the OSNR of
services to be too low to maintain error free
transmission. The network operator should try
to clear this state as soon as possible. This
message applies to in-service egress
adjustments only.
Amplifier The adjustment cannot be completed because Go to “Troubleshoot
mid-stage loss the loss of the amplifier mid-stage is out of amplifier mid-stage loss
problem range. problem” (p. 10-147).
ASE Ingress An ASE ingress adjustment is blocked when Go to “Troubleshoot
adjust not an external Raman amplifier is configured as ingress adjust not allowed
allowed on expected on the span upstream of the line. on Raman amplified span”
Raman (p. 10-148).
amplified span
Some add path The in-service egress adjustment was unable to Go to “Troubleshoot add
control points completely adjust some of the locally added path control points
incomplete channels for the line at which the adjustment incomplete” (p. 10-148).
was run.
Adjustment There is a cross connect provisioned on the Go to “Troubleshoot
using ASE not line on which the adjustment was attempted. adjustment not possible -
possible - cross The power adjustment cannot be completed cross connect provisioned”
connect with this cross connect present. (p. 10-149).
provisioned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (ingress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the input power to the amplifier.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If it is abnormally high, this indicates a problem upstream. Correct the upstream problem.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (egress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the problem is not traffic affecting, no action is required. This procedure is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check loss between the output of the amplifier and node output. Clean or replace
components as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for incorrect fibering that may have caused the input power to the amplifier to be
too high. Clean or replace components as necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier signal power unavailable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset of the amplifier pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-run the commissioning wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fault persists, perform a cold reset of the amplifier pack by reseating the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the fault persists, replace the amplifier pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no through services provisioned

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Provision at least one present wavelength on the through path.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-try adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot pack required for adjust not present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are Admin up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for any alarms related to the packs. Replace packs if necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot communication time-out with upstream node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, re-run the
commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power

adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the
CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fault persists, check that the OSC CN link between the nodes of the segment is up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot the CN link if necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, re-run the
commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the
CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot configuration request unsuccessful

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for alarms and troubleshoot following the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for packs that reset during the adjustment. Try re-running the adjustment if a pack
had reset during the adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot fiber is not yet commissioned

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If commissioning of the system has not been done yet, follow the commissioning
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If commissioning of the system has been completed, set the commissioning flags of the
ingress LD Line ports to completed/true. This can be done by the user through the PhM
inventory view, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot power adjust warning - splice margin violated

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, no action is

required. This is not considered a failure, but it is a warning to the user that the amplifier
gain is approaching the maximum gain planned for the amplifier by the EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the message is generated during commissioning, troubleshoot the problem as described

in “Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)” (p. 10-141).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the source of the excess loss using the loss report (see “Understanding the loss
report” (p. 10-117)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the span loss is too high, perform the following substeps and re-try the adjustment after
each step.
If not, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and the LD Line In port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform an in-service adjustment from the PhM lightpath trace power management
interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the Loss too high error remains, check the loss on the affected segment and if the span
loss is too high field personnel will need to try to correct the span loss.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the Loss too high error remains, clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and
the LD Line Out port of the upstream network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the span loss cannot be reduced to meet the planned limit, then a re-plan of the system
will be required using the EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, re-run the commissioning

wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too high (egress adjustment)

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the location on the NE of the excess loss using the loss report (see
“Understanding the loss report” (p. 10-117)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If loss is still too high, replace the pack (or packs) where the measured loss reported by
the loss report is closest to the maximum loss. Re-try the adjustment, and repeat if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

wizard.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too low (ingress adjustment)

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the span loss using the loss report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The error may be caused by a fibering error on the ingress path of the NE. Check the
actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the fibering is incorrect on the NE, clean and re-fiber the NE as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If span loss remains too low, check the loss on the affected segment. If it cannot be
corrected, a re-plan of the network using the EPT will be required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, re-run the commissioning wizard
with the new EPT commissioning file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, generate a new

EPT commissioning file and use it to rebalance the power using the PhM Power Balance
(Using Plan) function. Refer to the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager EMS Reference
Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot loss too low (egress adjustment)
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the location on the NE where the loss is too low using the loss report (see
“Understanding the loss report” (p. 10-117)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering. If the fibering is
incorrect on the NE, clean and re-fiber the NE as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot Maximum number of iterations reached

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the admin status of the transponder ports used for commissioning and verify they
are up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Observe wavelength tracker powers at the input of the ingress amplifier. Retry adjustment
if power is stable over a minute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For a terminal node configuration, (a line that is not connected to other lines within the
same NE) check the power setpoint versus the maximum attainable for any add path
power control points. To check the OT or SVAC maximum attainable power and current
target power, use the PhM inventory view, CLI or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot no services in appropriate state for adjustment
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for 30 seconds to allow any unstable services to stabilize and re-attempt the power
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For an ingress adjustment, verify that the WT power readings for all channels received at
the local line are also present and power in range at the upstream egress line. If any
channel powers are missing or power out of range at the upstream egress line,
troubleshoot the upstream line.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no through services in appropriate state for adjustment

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for 30 seconds to allow any unstable services to stabilize and re-attempt the power
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that Wavelength Tracker powers are visible at the detect points through the node
from ingress line(s) to the egress line the egress adjustment was triggered for. Use the
PhM lightpath trace, CLI or WebUI to confirm the provisioned services are present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no services present

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Provision a service (must be completed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-try the power adjustment.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot power measurement is unavailable

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check for any pack missing alarms, as this failure will occur if a pack is not present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-insert packs that are missing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Re-run the commissioning wizard if the adjustment was triggered by the Commission
Greenfield System wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-try the power adjustment at the failed adjustment point using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI
interface.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot timeout caused adjust to halt

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the NE is online and stable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that all packs are up and running (packs are not undergoing reset).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Re-try the power adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot topology provisioning is incomplete
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Complete the fiber topology provisioning on the NE. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot upstream software incompatible

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the software version on the upstream node. Verify it is the same version as the
other nodes in the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, perform a software upgrade on the upstream node.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier mid-stage loss problem

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the ingress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the ingress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the egress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the egress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 After correcting the mid-stage loss problem re-try the adjustment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the Commission Greenfield System wizard,
re-run the commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the user manually, perform a power
adjustment using the PhM lightpath trace power management interface, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot ingress adjust not allowed on Raman amplified span
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the line where the failure has occurred using the loss report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the fiber span received by this line is expected to have a Raman amplifier by
checking the network planning. If using the 1354 RM-PhM, in the topographical view of
the network, the presence of an external Raman amplifier under management associated
to a line may be visible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the line is expected to have a Raman amplifier, there is nothing further to do. ASE
commissioning of this span is not possible, and manual commissioning is required. Refer
to the detailed procedure for the network type. End troubleshooting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the line is not expected to have a Raman amplifier, remove the amplifier (if physically
installed) and de-provision the association to the NE line. If using the 1354 RM-PhM,
select the Line port of the pack connected to the span from the inventory view, and ensure
the attribute tnAccessPortExtAmpIpAddressIn is cleared.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If using the 1354 RM-PhM Commission Greenfield System wizard, re-run the wizard
again. If using the WebUI re-attempt the adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot add path control points incomplete

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the line where the failure occurred using the loss report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check to see if there are any alarms on the network element that impact channels that are
added at this line. If there are any such alarms, troubleshoot them and then re-attempt the
egress adjustment. End procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If there are no alarms, check that the administrative state of all line side ports of active
add cross connects are set to Admin Up. If necessary, correct the setting of any Down
ports to Up. Re-attempt the egress adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot adjustment not possible - cross connect provisioned
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the line supporting the cross connect using the loss report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the cross connect.

Important! Deleting a cross connect is service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If using the PhM Commission Greenfield System wizard, re-attempt the adjustment
through another complete execution of the wizard. If using the WebUI, re-attempt the
adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
11 Circuit connections
11
Overview
Purpose
The procedures in this chapter should be used when adding new wavelength services to a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) network. In addition to provisioning
the new service, several steps must be followed to ensure the service reaches the correct
operational power levels.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User
Provisioning Guide and the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 10.1 Photonic
Manager EMS Reference Guide for additional information.
Contents
System behavior during service turn-up 11-2

Provision new wavelength service 11-7
Perform power adjustments 11-20
Delete wavelength service 11-35
Provision 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 for transport over the 1696 ROADM 11-40
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element 11-49
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections System behavior during service turn-up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System behavior during service turn-up

Description
A network service created by OS (e.g., PhM), is comprised of a number of photonic
cross-connects on each of the nodes between the service end-points. The following figure
shows a service (red line) created from Node A to Node Z via Node C. In regard to this
service, the Node A is the “add node,” Node C is the “thru node,” and Node Z is the “drop
node.”
Figure 11-1 Network example
When a service is created, the related optical channel can be provisioned to be modulated
by keys based on proprietary Wavelength Tracker technology, and we call such service
“keyed service.” Similarly, for service without channel modulation, we call it “un-keyed
service.”
The keys are actually the identification for each channel in the optical network. During
photonic cross-connection creation, the keys are assigned by system/network
automatically (i.e., auto-keyed) or by user manually (i.e., manual-keyed). With assistance
of keys, the network can easily support wavelength routes tracking, power management,
performance monitoring and fault location, etc. The network uses a Software Controlled
Optical Transmission algorithm to automatically adjust the optical channel power in the
network based on retrieved optical channel power information for keyed service. This is
called auto-power management.
During the service creation or deletion, some transmission defects could exist for a while.
However, it is not necessary to raise transient conditions during service turn-up. For
instance, from optical power management perspective, the channel power ramps towards
the goal, there is no need to raise Optical Channel Optical Power Out of Range (OCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR) since this is an expected behavior at service turn-up. In fact, when the wavelength
is being turned up there is no need to report any OCH layer defects for the service, since
we know the wavelength is a transitory state. The transitory state of new service turn-up
generally takes less than 5 minutes. So, the 5-minute timer length has been chosen to be
consistent with the worst-case time for power levels to completely settle when all the
lines along the light path are auto-power managed.
The following is an example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and
auto-keyed service:
Figure 11-2 Service turn-up example
1. When a service is created by OS, then the photonic cross-connections are also created
along the path including add node, drop node and thru node (if present). Upon the
creation of photonic cross-connection, the Optical Channel Payload Defect Indication
(OCH PDI) condition is immediately raised on add node (at the point of Wavelength
key encoder, e.g., SVAC or OT line port). Upon the creation of the photonic
cross-connection, the Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication (OCH FDI)
condition is immediately raised on the through and drop nodes at the node ingress
point (ingress OA port). While OCH PDI or OCH FDI is raised, other OCH
conditions are masked (e.g., OCH OPR, OCH LOS, etc) on the node along the path of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the channel. Note that OCH PDI and OCH FDI are not reported conditions, meaning
that they are not issued from a node to an NMS or alarm monitoring system; they are
used only to suppress the reporting of other conditions by degrading their severity to
not reported. For example, at the drop node the OT line port may see LOS-P during
turn-up (normally critical service affecting), and this is degraded to not reported.
2. The add node will send information indicating whether or not the channel for the
photonic cross-connection at the add node is leaving the node with appropriate power.
Initially when the add photonic cross-connection is created the node advertises that
the channel is not at appropriate power.
3. The Software Controlled Optical Transmission (SCOT) algorithm on add node will
ramp the optical channel power towards the target power at the node egress. When the
egress target power is reached within a defined tolerance, the node emits a Link State
Advertisement (LSA, distribute key information) informing downstream nodes that it
is launching power and starts a 5-minute timer to clear its OCH PDI. When
downstream nodes (thru node and drop node) receive the LSA, they also begin
5-minute timers to clear their own OCH FDI condition. When the timers expire, the
PDI/FDI conditions are lowered, and any other OCH-related conditions will be visible
if present. For example, the LOS-P condition at the OT line port at drop node will be
reported with original severity of “Critical” (if the service did not create completely).
Note:
• The timer period is 10 minutes in the case that the node is designed and deployed
in a long haul optical transmission context.
• The Alcatel-Lucent PSS-32/16 DWDM application always requires OA at NE
boundary. If the ingress OA is deliberately not provisioned, then there will be no
place to report OCH FDI, however, user would still be able to see “OCH FDI”
information in Photonic cross-connection secondary state.
• Above example is only for A-to-Z direction. A bi-directional service will have
similar conditions/processes raised/ongoing in the other direction
For auto-power managed and manual-keyed service, the service turn-up process is similar
as above in the auto-power managed and auto-keyed case. The difference is that for the
auto-power managed and auto-keyed case, the 5-minute timer is started once the thru
node and drop node receives the LSA message carrying key info emitted from add node.
For auto-power managed and manual-keyed service, the 5-minute timer is started once
the local Photonic cross-connection is provisioned (during this process the keys for
ingress direction and egress direction are manually assigned by user). This is actually the
difference between auto-keyed and manual-keyed cases, irrelevant of auto-power
managed or manual-power managed.
For manual-power managed and keyed service, whether auto-keyed or manual-keyed, the
system/network will not automatically adjust the optical power. The user needs to set the
power/attenuation/gain manually along the service path including OT line port,
MVAC/SVAC, fast eVOA, CWR, OA etc. The 5-minute timer is supported for this case.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
However, since this procedure may take longer time than 5-minute blackout period, it is
possible that alarms (LOS-P severity transitions from Not Reported to Critical) will be
seen during the manual power adjustment.
One exceptional behavior of manual-keyed case compared with auto-keyed case, whether
auto-power managed or manual-power managed, the OCH FDI or OCH PDI condition
will not be raised; therefore, it is invisible to user, although the 5-minute timer to suppress
OT alarm (e.g., LOS-P reported as Not Reported) is still supported.
For manual-power managed and un-keyed service, there is no OCH FDI or OCH PDI
suppression mechanism or 5-minutes timer, therefore the OT alarms will be normally
reported (e.g., LOS-P reported with severity as Critical).
Above behaviors are only possible if the Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) is working.
Although Generic Communication Channel (GCC) is also able to distribute the LSA
message carrying key info, the SCOT auto-power management is only supported when
the OSC channel is working.
In case the both OSC and GCC are not working, there is no channel to communicate LSA
in the network. For this case the photonic cross-connects must be created as manually
keyed. When a manually keyed connection is created (whether auto-power managed or
manual-power managed), the OCH FDI and OCH PDI countdown timers begin
immediately after photonic cross-connect creation. As described above, OCH layer
conditions will be degraded to not reported until the timer expires, after which they’ll be
reported with their normal severity.
If you provision the cross-connects as auto-keyed when there is no OSC or GCC ready to
communicate LSAs in the network, nodes would raise OCH FDI or OCH PDI as normal.
The add node could clear its OCH PDI since the information of power achieved is local,
and it can begin its countdown timer. However, through or drop node cross-connects
would not receive the LSA for power achieved from the add node; therefore, the
cross-connects would remain in OCH FDI and would cause other OCH layer defects to be
not reported. This is not normal system operation or provisioning.
In conclusion, during cross-connection creation, key modes can be selected as follows:
• Unkeyed. In this case, no wave keys are allocated, wavelength tracker functionality
not available.
• Manual-keyed. In this case, wave keys are allocated manually by the operator that
needs to ensure compatibility.
• Auto-keyed. In this case, wave keys are allocated by Nodes and Node-to-Node
connectivity is needed.
In Manual-keyed, the 5-minute timer is started once the local Photonic cross-connection
is provisioned. When the timer expires, the PDI/FDI conditions are lowered then any
other OCH related condition becomes visible and are reported with normal severities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Auto-keyed, the 5-minute timer is started once the thru node and drop node receives
the LSA message carrying key info emitted from add node. When timer expires, the
PDI/FDI conditions are lowered then any other OCH related condition becomes visible
and are reported with normal severities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections Provision new wavelength service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision new wavelength service

Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to provision a new wavelength service
between transponders installed at two end-point nodes. The procedure assumes the
transponders have already been installed and fibered in the nodes, and the 1354 RM-PhM
server is up and connected to the network.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the transponders that have been installed and fibered to carry the wavelength
service.
Important! When a CFP must be installed, remove the OT circuit pack from the shelf
and then replace or insert the CFP. Make sure the CFP is seated securely and seat the
OT circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on one of the nodes at the wavelength end-point and select Provision ->
Physical Topology... from the menu. See Figure 11-3, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology
menu” (p. 11-7)l
Figure 11-3 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The Physical Topology window will display as shown in Figure 11-4, “1354 RM-PhM
physical topology window” (p. 11-8).
Figure 11-4 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on the Line (L1) port of the transponder card.

• If a B End Point connection is displayed at the bottom of the screen and matches how
the transponder is physically fibered, skip to Step 7.
• If a B End Point is not displayed, the topological link needs to be provisioned.
Continue to Step 5.
Note: Typically the topological link for the transponder will only be present if it was
part of the EPT plan.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 With the transponder Line (L1) port still highlighted, select the port where the other end
of the fiber is connected (CWR8, CWR8-88, or filter).
Note: If the other port is on a different shelf, first select the appropriate shelf on the
equipment tree on the left.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 With both ports highlighted, click the "Connect the fiber endpoints" button as shown in
Figure 11-5, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button” (p. 11-9).
Figure 11-5 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Close the Physical Topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Repeat Step 2 through Step 7 for the second transponder at the other end-point.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Enable transponder ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double click on one of the nodes at an
end-point of the service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RM-PhM NE inventory window” (p. 11-10).
Figure 11-6 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on the client port of the transponder card that will carry the service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Right-click on the unassigned client port in the equipment tree and select "Assign Port"
from the menu. See Figure 11-7, “1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu” (p. 11-11).
Figure 11-7 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 An assign port window will appear as shown in Figure 11-8, “1354 RM-PhM assign
client port” (p. 11-12).
Figure 11-8 1354 RM-PhM assign client port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the drop-down list, select the service type that will be transported and click the
"OK" button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Right click on the now assigned client port and select Administration -> Interface Admin
Status up as shown in Figure 11-9, “1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu”
(p. 11-13).
Figure 11-9 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Close the NE inventory window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Has the second transponder card been provisioned yet?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Close the physical topology window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 In the topological view of the 1354 RM-PhM, identify the two NE's at the end-points of
the wavelength service on the map. Select both NE's by left clicking on the NE's while
holding the <ctrl> key.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Select Provision -> Provision Wavelength Service... from the top menu. See Figure 11-10,
“1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu” (p. 11-14).
Figure 11-10 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The Provision New Wavelength Service window will open as shown in Figure 11-11,
“1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1” (p. 11-15).
Figure 11-11 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Type a service name (any name).

Select a layer rate supported by the OT's installed in the two terminal nodes.
The "Force XC creation" option should be checked if this is a wavelength service used for
initial commissioning of the system.
Provision the remaining parameters as required by the wavelength service including any
protection options.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click the "Next>" button and the port details window will display as shown in Figure
11-12, “1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2” (p. 11-16).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Select the aid of each transponder for the A End and Z End. Then click on the "Next>"
button. The wavelength service details will be displayed as shown in Figure 11-13, “1354
RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 3” (p. 11-17).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Verify the provisioning is correct and click the "Finish" button. The service attributes
window will display as shown in Figure 11-14, “1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength
service step 4” (p. 11-18).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Select one of the service options and click "OK". The wavelength service completion
window will display as shown in Figure 11-15, “1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength
service step 5” (p. 11-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 If this is a commissioning service, return to the commissioning procedure.

If the service is being added after commissioning, continue to “Perform power
adjustments” (p. 11-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections Perform power adjustments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform power adjustments

Overview
If the path through the network the new service takes crosses lines whose optical power
management type is set to Manual, the system will create expected powers and default
power deviations at only two key points per line, the ingress line's ingress LD Sig Out
port and the egress line's LD Line Out port. The goal of the service turn-up procedure is
to modify the lightpath's power using a combination of add target power setpoint
adjustment, LD gain adjustment and manual pad placement to try to reach the expected
powers set up by the system.
Note: Lines of FOADM nodes and lines following FOADM lines, services in
existence before the new service is added may deviate from their initial target powers.
This is normal and the deviation thresholds around the expected power have been
calculated to take into account this shift in per channel powers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait 2 minutes for the power to ramp up after creating the service before continuing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on the "Power (A-Z)" button on the wavelength service completion window (see
Figure 11-15, “1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5” (p. 11-19). The
power management service window will open as shown in Figure 11-16, “1354 RM-PhM
power management service” (p. 11-21).
Figure 11-16 1354 RM-PhM power management service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The power management type is displayed on the top of each power bar in the lightpath
trace.
If all the lines are auto power managed, no further adjustment is required. Jump to Step
38.
Otherwise continue to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Is the egress line of the origination point of the service auto managed?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Is the next ingress line in the path auto power managed?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Move the mouse over the power bar for the sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual
and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 11-19, “1354 RM-PhM power
level reading” (p. 11-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Right-click on the power bar of the sig out port and select "All Channel Powers" as
shown in Figure 11-20, “1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection” (p. 11-25).
Figure 11-20 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The power levels for each of the channels with be displayed on a chart as shown in Figure
11-21, “1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 11-26).
Figure 11-21 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Locate the "Power Gain" attribute on the right side of the window as shown in Figure
11-22, “1354 RM-PhM set power gain” (p. 11-27). Add the value calculated in Step 11 to
the current value in the field.
Figure 11-22 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Wait 30 seconds and observe the average channel power levels.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 10 through Step
16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Is the next egress line in the path auto power managed?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: Pad changes should not be required if the channel is directed through the NE
using the express ports. Those pads should already be set, and this procedure will only
verify the power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 11-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Move the mouse over the power bar for the sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual
and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 11-24, “1354 RM-PhM power
level reading” (p. 11-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Right-click on the power bar of the sig out port and select "All Channel Powers" as
shown in Figure 11-25, “1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection” (p. 11-31).
Figure 11-25 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 The power levels for each of the channels with be displayed on a chart as shown in Figure
11-26, “1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 11-32).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Locate the "Power Gain" attribute on the right side of the window as shown in Figure
11-27, “1354 RM-PhM set power gain” (p. 11-33). Add the value calculated in Step 29 to
the current value in the field.
Figure 11-27 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Wait 30 seconds and observe the average channel power levels.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 28 through Step
34.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Synchronize the wave key expected powers to the measured powers by clicking on the
icon as indicated in Figure 11-28, “1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 11-34).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 If prompted for confirmation, click the "OK" button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 If a protection service exists, repeat the power adjustment steps for the protection service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections Delete wavelength service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete wavelength service

Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to delete a wavelength service previously
provisioned using 1354 RM-PhM. This procedure will also remove the topological links
for the transponders associated with the wavelength service.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the wavelength serve to be deleted and the transponders at the end-points of the
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Topology View select one of the NE's at an end-point of the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Provision -> Show Wavelength Services... from the top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The Wavelength service list for that NE will be displayed similar to Figure 11-29, “1354
RM-PhM power management provisioning” (p. 11-35).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select and highlight the wavelength service to be deleted and click the delete button. The
delete button is shaped like an X as in Figure 11-30, “1354 RM-PhM delete button”
(p. 11-36).
Figure 11-30 1354 RM-PhM delete button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 A warning message will appear as shown in Figure 11-31, “1354 RM-PhM power
management provisioning” (p. 11-36).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click the "Yes" button. The service has now been deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Delete topological links created for the transponders

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The following steps are only required if the topological links need to be deleted. If this
was a commissioning service, and the links were created for the service, those links
should be deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on one of the nodes containing a transponder card at an end-point of the
deleted service and select Provision -> Physical Topology... from the menu. See Figure
11-32, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 11-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The Provision Topology window will display as shown in Figure 11-33, “1354 RM-PhM
provision topology window” (p. 11-38).
Figure 11-33 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on the Line (L1) port of the transponder card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on the delete topological link button which is located to the right of the connect
button. See Figure 11-34, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button”
(p. 11-38).
Figure 11-34 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 A warning message will appear as shown in Figure 11-35, “1354 RM-PhM physical
topology disconnect warning” (p. 11-39). Click the "Yes" button.
Figure 11-35 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Close the Physical Topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Repeat Step 2 through Step 7 for the second transponder.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If this was part of a commissioning procedure, return to the relevant procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections Provision 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 for transport over the 1696
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 for transport over the 1696

ROADM
Background
The line interface of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 transponders can be fibered directly to a
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM node for transport in a 1696 ROADM based network. For
this application, the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 transponder provides a signal (with
WaveTracker encoding and power management) to the 1696 ROADM node. The
transponder itself is installed in an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf and is managed by the
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 node. This interworking application is sometimes called the
"Dangling OT Feature".
A dangling OT, or a group of dangling OTs, are 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 optical
transponders which are plugged into an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf and managed by the
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 node. However, the dangling OT line side optical ports (transmit
and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD pack in the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16
NE.
Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to provision a 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16
transponder to connect with a 1696 ROADM. The procedure assumes that the 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 and 1696 ROADM networks have been installed and commissioned, and
the 1354 RM-PhM server is up and connected to the network. The procedure covers
detailed provisioning of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16. Refer to the 1696 ROADM
documentation for more information on that product.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If not already installed, install the transponder in the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf that will
be connected to the 1696 ROADM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The network ports of the transponder should be fibered to a CMD-42 card or a WSS
colorless port on the 1696 ROADM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double click on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 node
with the transponder installed in Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Right-click on the client port of the transponder connected to the 1696. Select "Assign
Port" from the menu. See Figure 11-37, “1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu”
(p. 11-42).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
"OK" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform this step only if the intended service will be terminated on an 11STGE12 or
11STAR1 and 1696 ROADM 10xGE. Otherwise, skip to the next step.
With the client port still selected, on the right side of the window provision the
Encapsulation Mode as "CBRLAN11.049".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select the Line (L1) port of the same transponder.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on the drop-down list next to the ITU (Programmed) attribute as shown in Figure
11-39, “1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel” (p. 11-44). Select the ITU channel to be used
in the 1696 ROADM network. If the transponder is connected to a CMD-42 port, select
the ITU channel to match the port.
Figure 11-39 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If the service will be terminated on a 1696 ROADM, provision the following attributes
based on the terminating transponder types.
11STGE12 <--> 10xGE
• OTU2 FEC Mode = RSFEC
• ODU2 Payload Type = 128
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1 <--> 10xGE
• OTU2 FEC Mode = EFEC
11STAR1 <--> OC192sws
• OTU2 FEC Mode = EFEC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Determine the output power expected by the 1696 ROADM and type this value into the
Programmed Network Output Power field as shown in Figure 11-40, “1354 RM-PhM NE
programmed network output power” (p. 11-45). Click the "Apply" button.
Figure 11-40 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Wait several seconds and click the "Refresh" button. Observe the Present network output
power. Continue to click "Refresh" until the powers are roughly equal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Close the NE Inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 From the 1354 RM-PhM right click on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf with the
transponder connected to the 1696 ROADM and select Provision -> Physical Topology...
from the menu. See Figure 11-41, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 11-46)l
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 The Provision Topology window will display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Select the Line (L1) port of the transponder connected to the 1696 ROADM and verify it
is highlighted as shown in Figure 11-42, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology window”
(p. 11-47).
Figure 11-42 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 In the same window, select the 1696 ROADM shelf and then the CMD-42 port or WSS
colorless port where the transponder is connected. Verify the A End and B End connection
points are populated correctly at the bottom of the window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
ROADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Right-click on one of the highlighted ports and select Bi-Connect from the menu as
shown in Figure 11-43, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology connection” (p. 11-48).
Figure 11-43 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Close the Provision Topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 If the service is terminated on another 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 transponder, repeat these

steps for the far end transponder.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and

Provisioning Guide for information on provisioning the 1696 ROADM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Circuit connections Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged

network element
Background
The line interface of the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 transponders can be fibered directly to
another network element, unmanaged by the 1354 RM-PhM for transport. For this
application, the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 transponder provides a signal (without
WaveTracker encoding) to the unmanaged network. The transponder itself is installed in
an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf and is managed by the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 node. This
interworking application is sometimes called the "Dangling OT Feature".
A dangling OT, or a group of dangling OTs, are 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16optical transponders
which are plugged into an 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf and managed by the 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 node. However, the dangling OT line side optical ports (transmit and
receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD pack in the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 NE.
Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to provision a 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16
transponder to transmit to an unmanaged NE. The procedure assumes that the 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 network has been installed and commissioned, and the 1354 RM-PhM
server is up and connected to the network.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If not already installed, install the transponder in the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf that will
be connected to the unmanaged NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fiber the network ports of the transponder to the unmanaged NE. Refer to the user
documentation for the unmanaged NE for connection and provisioning information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double click on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 node
with the transponder installed in Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Right-click on the client port of the transponder connected to the 1696. Select "Assign
Port" from the menu. See Figure 11-45, “1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu”
(p. 11-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
"OK" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select the Line (L1) port of the same transponder.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click on the drop-down list next to the ITU (Programmed) attribute as shown in Figure
11-47, “1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel” (p. 11-53). Select the ITU channel that will
be transported across the unmanaged network.
Figure 11-47 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Provision any additional attributes that are required by the unmanaged network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Determine the output power expected by the unmanaged network element and type this
value into the Programmed Network Output Power field as shown in Figure 11-48, “1354
RM-PhM NE programmed network output power” (p. 11-54). Click the "Apply" button.
Figure 11-48 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Wait several seconds and click the "Refresh" button. Observe the Present network output
power. Continue to click "Refresh" until the powers are roughly equal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Close the NE Inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 From the 1354 RM-PhM right click on the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf with the
transponder connected to the 1696 ROADM and select Provision -> Physical Topology...
from the menu. See Figure 11-49, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 11-55).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The Provision Topology window will display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Right-click on the Line (L1) port of the transponder card connected to the unmanaged NE
and select Create Unmanaged External Connection as shown in Figure 11-50, “1354
RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection” (p. 11-56).
Figure 11-50 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 A warning will appear as shown in Figure 11-51, “1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection
warning” (p. 11-57). Click the "Yes" button.
Figure 11-51 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 The enter external topology window will appear as shown in Figure 11-52, “1354
RM-PhM enter external topology window” (p. 11-57). Enter the IP address of the
unmanaged network element followed by the shelf/slot/port of the fiber connection point
in the format shown in the window.
Figure 11-52 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Click the "OK" button. "External" should be displayed next to the L1 port in the topology
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Close the provision topology window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
12 12
Performance verification
testing and data retrieval
Overview
Purpose
The procedures in this chapter will perform final verification on the network after
commissioning is complete.
Contents
Perform database backups 12-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Performance verification testing and data retrieval Perform database backups
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform database backups

Purpose
Database backups are performed using TFTP server, which is provided with the 1354
RM-PhM Photonic Manager. This procedure will perform database backups on all the
NEs in the network. The steps will be completed using the 1354 RM-PhM Photonic
Manager. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 10.1 Photonic Manager
EMS Reference Guide for more information.
The procedure assumes the 1354 RM-PhM server is already connected to the network,
and all the NEs have been discovered. Commissioning should be complete.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Admin -> Settings... from the top menu in the Topology View window. See Figure
12-1, “1354 RM-PhM settings menu” (p. 12-2).
Figure 12-1 1354 RM-PhM settings menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Settings window select the "System Settings" top tab and then the "File Transfer"
sub-tab as shown in Figure 12-2, “1354 RM-PhM file transfer window” (p. 12-3).
Figure 12-2 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify the root directory is /tftpfiles in the "TFTP Root Directory:" dialogue box and
select the "FTP" radio button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the "Remove Prefix" radio button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click "OK."
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the NE you want to backup in the Topology View window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Maintenance -> NE Database Backup & Restore from the top menu bar as shown
in Figure 12-3, “1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu” (p. 12-4).
Figure 12-3 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the "OK" button and the NE backup & Restore window will open as shown in
Figure 12-4, “1354 RM-PhM NE backup” (p. 12-5).
Figure 12-4 1354 RM-PhM NE backup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Right click on the NE and select "Details..." from the menu as shown in Figure 12-5,
“1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu” (p. 12-6).
Figure 12-5 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 In the Backup Properties window check both "Use the EMS Server as Backup host
recommended" and "Use default backup directory recommended".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click "OK".
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Make sure the NE is selected in the list and click on the Backup selected NE(s) icon as
shown in Figure 12-6, “1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon” (p. 12-6).
Figure 12-6 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The backup progress will be displayed in the bottom half of the Backup & Restore
window. Wait for the "Backup Success" message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Verify the database backup file is present in the PhM server PC. The path is
C:/tftpfiles/nebackup/<filename>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where <filename> has the format <NE name>_<release descriptor>_<backup
date>_<backup time>.bak.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Are there additional NE's that have not been backed up?
If no, this procedure is complete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
13 Network topology changes
13
Overview
Purpose
The procedures in this chapter will allow for the addition or deletion of network elements
in an existing network as well as making changes to an individual network element.
Contents
Addition of a network element to an existing network 13-2

Removing a network element from an existing network 13-6
Extending a linear network segment 13-10
Adding degree(s) to an existing network element 13-15
Adding a subrack to an existing network element 13-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Network topology changes Addition of a network element to an existing network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Addition of a network element to an existing network

Purpose
This procedure will allow for the insertion of a network element between two previously
installed network elements.
Background
Before beginning this procedure the network must be redesigned in the engineering
planning tool to generate the necessary bill of materials and commissioning file(s). The
equipment should be on site at the locations where it will be installed and the
commissioning file(s) available to the personnel carrying out the installation.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends adding one segment at a time to the network. This ensures
there is a protection path for protected traffic, and minimizes risk to the overall network if
problems are encountered during the installation procedure. For the purpose of a network
element addition, a segment is considered to be between two OADM nodes (not including
ILAs). Refer to “Network commissioning background” (p. 10-2) for more information on
the network and EPT commissioning files.
Note that in rare cases the affected network segment may extend beyond the OADM NEs
due to additional equipment changes that are required.
Note: A higher degree node is always added in steps. As at most two lines will
participate in the same commissioning system, more iterations of the procedure will
be required to add a higher degree node to a network. The advantage of this approach
is that only a small portion of a large network is altered in one operation.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Complete the physical installation of the new network element following the procedures
found in Part II: “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation” for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf, and Part III: “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 physical
and power installation” for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Complete the initial node setup following Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up”.
However, the optical lines will not be connected at this time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify any services that cross the affected network segment. If any of these services are
protected, switch them and lock protection to the arm that is not directed towards the
affected network segment. If unprotected services are present, follow appropriate
procedures to prepare for a traffic outage during the upgrade period.
Important! The following steps are service impacting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Delete the cross-connects at the existing OADM lines facing the affected segment. This
step is necessary to ensure that the optical power levels directed outwards from the
affected network section to other parts of the network are not too high during the upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If any of the lines of the network elements contained in the affected segment are Auto
managed, set their commissioning status at the Line In/Out port to In Progress. This
prevents cross connect additions while the upgrade is performed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Disconnect the Outside Plant (OSP) fiber from the Line In/Out ports of the network
elements directly adjacent to the span that will be broken to insert the new network
element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Connect the new network element to the OSP fibers and connect the new OSP fibers to
the adjacent network elements to insert the new network element. Be sure to scope and
clean the fibers as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure that the OSC links between the new and adjacent network elements come up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Make any required hardware changes at the adjacent network elements in the affected
network segment. Before removing hardware the topological links of pack ports on the
packs to be replaced or removed must be deleted. A pack that will be removed must be
de-provisioned. If a pack must be added to an network elements topology, delete the
topological links crossing the path where the new pack will be added. It is not necessary
to add back any topological links at this point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Wait for any newly installed hardware to fully boot before proceeding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Follow the procedure “Provision the system” (p. 10-17) to set the parameter values of the
altered network elements using the new commissioning file generated for this system
from EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Restore any cross connects that were deleted in Step 4. Provision the through cross
connections at the new network element if this has not been done previously.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Ensure that there is at least one channel (preferably near 194.0 THz) crossing through the
affected network segment.
Power balance the affected network segment
Refer to “Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system” (p. 10-49) and
“Commission a FOADM system” (p. 10-57) for detailed information on making power
adjustments.
If any of the power adjustments fail, refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments”
(p. 10-133) for further guidance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Start at one of the OADM network elements that terminate the affected network segment.
Perform an egress direction power adjustment in the direction facing the affected network
segment. If this is a Auto managed line, the adjustment can be done by triggering an
adjustment function which automatically adjusts power levels. If this is a Manual
managed line, this step must be done manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 At the next network element, perform an ingress direction power adjustment. If this is a
Auto line, the adjustment can be done by triggering an adjustment function which
automatically adjusts power levels. If this is a Manual line, this step must be done
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Perform an egress direction power adjustment on the same network element. If this is a
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Repeat Step 15 and Step 16 on each network element in the affected network segment
until the OADM terminating that network segment is reached.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 At the terminating OADM network element, perform an ingress direction power

adjustment. If this is a Auto line, the adjustment can be done by triggering an adjustment
function which automatically adjusts power levels. If this is a Manual line, this step must
be done manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 14 through Step 18 in the opposite direction.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Switch back any protected services that were switched in Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 After completing the procedure on the affected network segment, re-balancing of optical
power levels for the impacted systems is recommended. The impacted systems are the
commissioning systems that are optically joined to the network elements that were
altered. Using the new EPT commissioning file as input, refer to “Execute the
commission greenfield system wizard” (p. 10-27) for the commissioning procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Network topology changes Removing a network element from an existing network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Removing a network element from an existing network

Purpose
This procedure will allow for the deletion of a network element from an existing network.
Background
planning tool to generate the necessary commissioning file(s). The commissioning file(s)
should be available to the personnel carrying out the network element removal.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends making changes to one segment at a time in the network.
This ensures there is a protection path for protected traffic, and minimizes risk to the
overall network if problems are encountered during the procedure. For the purpose of a
network element removal, a segment is considered to be between two OADM nodes (not
including ILAs). Refer to “Network commissioning background” (p. 10-2) for more
information on the network and EPT commissioning files.
Note that in rare cases the affected network segment may extend beyond the OADM NEs
due to additional equipment changes that are required.
Note: A higher degree node is always removed in steps. As at most two lines will
participate in the same commissioning system, more iterations of the procedure will
be required to delete a higher degree node from a network. The advantage of this
approach is that only a small portion of a large network is altered in one operation.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify any services that cross the affected network segment. If any of these services are
protected, switch them and lock protection to the arm that is not directed towards the
affected network segment. If unprotected services are present, follow appropriate
procedures to prepare for a traffic outage while the fibers are removed.
Important! The following steps are service impacting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the cross-connects at the existing OADM lines facing the affected segment as well
as the through connections on the network element that will be deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
prevents cross connect additions while the procedure is performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Disconnect the Outside Plant (OSP) fiber from the Line In/Out ports of the network
elements directly adjacent to the network element(s) that will be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the new OSP fibers to the adjacent network elements so that they are now
connected directly together. Be sure to scope and clean the fibers as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Ensure that the OSC links between the now adjacent network elements come up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
from EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Restore any cross connects that were deleted in Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
affected network segment.
Refer to “Complete commissioning on a TOADM/ROADM linear system” (p. 10-49) for
detailed information on making power adjustments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Start at one OADM network elements that terminate the affected network segment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

be done manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Switch back any protected services that were switched in Step 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 The network element is no longer in the system and can now be physically removed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Network topology changes Extending a linear network segment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extending a linear network segment

Purpose
This procedure will allow for the addition of network elements to extend an existing
linear network.
Background
Extension of a linear network segment is depicted in Figure 13-1, “Extending a linear
network segment” (p. 13-10). NE B begins as a TOADM-1 network element and the
network is extended by converting NE B to a through TOADM-2 network element,
connecting to two other new network elements.
Figure 13-1 Extending a linear network segment
planning tool (EPT) to generate the necessary bill of materials and commissioning file(s).
The equipment should be on site at the locations where it will be installed and the
commissioning file(s) available to the personnel carrying out the installation.
There is no limitation on the number of new nodes that can be added onto an existing
linear segment. Several new network elements can be added by following this procedure.
An example of an affected network segment is shown by the path of the commissioning
service in Figure 13-2, “Affected segment and commissioning service for linear
extension” (p. 13-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-2 Affected segment and commissioning service for linear extension
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Complete the physical installation of the new network element(s) following the
procedures found in Part II: “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power
installation” for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf, orPart III: “Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 physical and power installation” for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Complete the initial node setup following Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up”.
However, the optical lines will not be connected at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the services that are supported by the cross connections across the affected
network segment. Ensure that the traffic outage that will occur during the upgrade time
period is acceptable before proceeding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Delete the cross connections using the optical lines (degrees) of the network elements that
are part of the affected network segment. This step is necessary to ensure that the optical
power levels directed outwards from the affected network section to other parts of the
network are not too high during the upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
prevents cross connect additions while the upgrade is performed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Make any hardware changes necessary in the degree one node that will become degree
two to extend the linear segment. Before removing hardware the topological links of pack
ports on the packs to be replaced or removed must be deleted. A pack that will be
removed must be de-provisioned. If a pack must be added to an network elements
topology, delete the topological links crossing the path where the new pack will be added.
It is not necessary to add back any topological links at this point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Connect the Outside Plant (OSP) fiber to the new network element(s) as well as the new
degree added to the previous degree one network element that was the end point of the
linear segment. Be sure to scope and clean the fibers as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure that the OSC links between the new network element(s) and adjacent network
element come up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
from EPT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Restore any cross connects that were deleted in Step 4. Provision the through cross
connections at the new network element if this has not been done previously.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
affected network segment. At least one channel will need to be provisioned from the new
end node of the linear segment to the former last though node of the pre-upgrade system
(refer to Figure 13-2, “Affected segment and commissioning service for linear extension”
(p. 13-11)).
Refer to “Complete commissioning on a mixed TOADM/ROADM/FOADM system”
(p. 10-77) for detailed information on making power adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Start at one OADM network elements that terminate the affected network segment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

be done manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Network topology changes Adding degree(s) to an existing network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding degree(s) to an existing network element

Purpose
The following procedure provides a method to add degree(s) (lines) to existing network
elements. This allows systems to be merged.
Background
If a new degree is required for a network element, the new degree will either be paired
with another new degree creating a new two degree path, or will be alone creating a one
degree path. The new degree(s) and systems will need to be designed using the
Engineering Planning Tool (EPT) and new commissioning files generated. Refer to
“Network commissioning background” (p. 10-2) for more information on the network and
EPT commissioning files. The following figures provide examples of adding degrees to
merge systems. The examples are provided with TOADM nodes, but in general the
procedures are the same for FOADM nodes.
Figure 13-3 Merging system by adding 2 degrees to a 1 degree TOADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-4 Merging systems by adding 1 degree to a 2 degree TOADM
Figure 13-5 Merging systems by adding 2 degrees to a 2 degree TOADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-6 Merging systems by extending a linear system to form a chord
Figure 13-7 Extending a linear segment to merge with another linear segment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-8 Extending a linear system to form a ring
Procedure
Proceed as follows.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install the required circuit packs and fibers in the network element based on the
commissioning data generated by EPT. If a new shelf needs to be added follow the
installation”.
Note: Install one circuit pack at a time and allow each circuit pack to boot before
installing the next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Jump to the appropriate procedure based on the upgrade scenario.

If two new degrees are being added to a network element because an entire new system
(from a commissioning standpoint) is being added, jump to “Adding 2 degrees to a
network element with a new system” (p. 13-19).
If two new degrees are being added to a network element to join the network element to
an already in service system, jump to “Adding 2 degrees to a network element with an
existing system” (p. 13-20).
If a single degree is being added to a network element because an entire new system
(from a commissioning standpoint) is being added, jump to “Adding 1 degree to a
network element with a new system” (p. 13-20).
If a single degree is being added to a network element to join the network element to an
already in service system, jump to “Adding 1 degree to a network element with an
existing system” (p. 13-20).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If a single degree is being added to a network element that is optically connected on the
full WDM through path with an already installed degree on the same network element,
the previously installed degree and the new degree become part of the same
commissioning system. Examples include closing a linear segment on itself to form a
ring, or branching from one section of network to another to form a longer linear segment
(from a commissioning point of view).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Adding 2 degrees to a network element with a new system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 All the network elements in the new system should have been installed following the
installation” for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf, or Part III: “Alcatel-Lucent
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 All the network elements in the new system must be provisioned and tested following the
initial node setup found in Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the new system following “Provision the system” (p. 10-17).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Commission the new system following the procedures starting with “Execute the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check that the mesh connections using CWR CLS ports (if present) have been fibered
correctly by provisioning some test channels through the mesh paths. Refer to “Provision
new wavelength service” (p. 11-7).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the EPT plan to determine if any of the power management attributes of the
previously installed systems adjacent to the newly added system requires updates. If
updates are required, follow the procedure “Perform power adjustments” (p. 11-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding 2 degrees to a network element with an existing system
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the steps provided in “Addition of a network element to an existing network”

(p. 13-2).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Adding 1 degree to a network element with a new system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 All the network elements in the new system should have been installed following the
installation” for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf, or Part III: “Alcatel-Lucent
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 All the network elements in the new system must be provisioned and tested following the
initial node setup found in Chapter 8, “Stand-alone node set-up”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the new system following “Provision the system” (p. 10-17).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Commission the new system following the procedures starting with “Execute the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check that the mesh connections using CWR CLS ports (if present) have been fibered
correctly by provisioning some test channels through the mesh paths. Refer to “Provision
new wavelength service” (p. 11-7).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the EPT plan to determine if any of the power management attributes of the
previously installed systems adjacent to the newly added system requires updates. If
updates are required, follow the procedure “Perform power adjustments” (p. 11-20).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Adding 1 degree to a network element with an existing system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the steps provided in “Extending a linear network segment” (p. 13-10).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The new end of the previously installed linear network segment will be the
degree added to the network element.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Network topology changes Adding a subrack to an existing network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding a subrack to an existing network element

Purpose
The following procedure provides a method to add a peer subrack (also called an
extension shelf) to an existing network element.
Physical installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to Chapter 2, “Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)” for installing

the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack, or Chapter 5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
subrack physical installation” for installing the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Refer to Chapter 3, “Cable, fan tray, air filter and user panel installation (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32)” for detailed instructions for cabling and powering an Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subrack, or Chapter 6, “Cable, fan, filter, and user panel installation for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” for an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack.
Note: Peer Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 (future) and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
subracks will not have a user panel and will come equipped with a blank instead.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Refer to Chapter 4, “Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32”
for detailed instructions for installing circuit packs, cables and fibers on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack or Chapter 7, “Circuit pack and fiber installation for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16” for an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verify installation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to the site documentation (i.e., network information report generated from the
planning tool) and verify that all circuit packs are present and slotted correctly. Verify
correct dispersion compensation modules and optical multiplexer/demultiplexer shelves
are installed as required.
Important! Circuit packs should not be seated at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the subrack ID module switch settings are correct (refer to “Subrack ID
setting” (p. 3-7)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! The subrack ID setting must be unique, not conflicting with the setting on
another subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify the fibers are dressed and run correctly between packs and to optical
multiplexer/demultiplexer and dispersion compensation modules. Verify any required
protection Y-cables are installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure they are run properly. Verify the cables
are properly daisy-chained to the ES ports as described in “Subrack to subrack cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify required inventory cables are connected at the line driver or wavelength router
packs and remain disconnected at the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, SFD40, SDF40B and
ITLB units.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Turn on the power at the DC power filters. Make sure fan modules are installed properly
and screwed down. Fully seat power filters if they are not engaged, and verify green led is
lit on both. Verify fans are running.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verify software is committed on master shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Login to WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Administration -> Software -> Upgrade from the top menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The Software Upgrade window appears as shown in Figure 13-9, “WebUI software
upgrade” (p. 13-24).
Figure 13-9 WebUI software upgrade
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify the current software release is committed. If the software is not committed, select
"commit" from the "Action Type" drop down and click the "Apply" button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Seat circuit packs and download software

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the EC circuit packs are equipped with flash cards with the factory load software
(all new EC circuit packs will have this installed).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fully seat the EC/SLC circuit pack(s) in the peer subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! If the subrack is configured in a redundant controller configuration
(Equipment Controller (EC) circuit packs equipped in slots 1 and 18 on an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack or slots 2 and 12 on an Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 subrack) verify the Part Number (APN) for both EC circuit packs is
8DB59241AB.
Important! If this is a simplex controller configuration, the EC pack must be seated
in slot 1 on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack or slot 2 on a Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 subrack during initial installation. The EC pack may be moved to slot 18
on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack or slot 12 on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
subrack anytime after the Release 5.1.0 software is activated.
Note: In Subtending Shelf "FLC or first level controller " is not supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The software that is currently on the master subrack will automatically download to the to
the peer subrack. When the download is complete, the ECs or SLCs in the peer subrack
will reset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After the software download and activation is complete, verify the peer subrack
ECs/SLCs are visible in WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify there are no outstanding Link Down alarms. If there are any Link Down alarms
perform the following.
1. Verify that only the required ES ports are enabled.
2. Perform a cold reboot of the new Peer subrack EC/SLC.
3. Perform a cold reboot of the Master subrack EC/SLC.
If the above steps does not clear the Link Down alarms the contact Alcatel-Lucent
Technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Seat the remaining circuit packs in the shelf one at a time. Allow each circuit pack to boot
before inserting the next. Check WebUI for any unexpected alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete connection of inventory cables
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 assigns shelf numbers to the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB
units sequentially in the order they are discovered. Therefore, the order the inventory
cables are installed determines the shelf number of each unit. DCM, SFD44, SFD44B,
and ITLB shelf numbering starts at 25 and increments from there.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: If the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB shelf numbering contains non
contiguous numbers (numbers are skipped), the shelves must be manually
pre-provisioned before the inventory cables are connected. This procedure takes care
of that case.
In WebUI, observe the equipment tree in the left window of the system view and note the
shelves numbered 25 or greater. See Figure 13-10, “WebUI system view equipment tree”
(p. 13-26).
Figure 13-10 WebUI system view equipment tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD44B, and ITLB units. List them in order making sure they do not conflict with
existing shelf numbers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Does the shelf numbering (starting at 25) contain non contiguous numbers (numbers are
skipped)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Wait 2 minutes and click the refresh button (the double arrows located at the top of the
equipment tree).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The new shelf should appear in the tree with the appropriate shelf number. If not, repeat
Step 5. If the shelf still does not appear, check the cable connection or replace the
inventory cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the System view, select the "Create Shelf" tab. The Create Shelf view will appear as
shown in Figure 13-11, “WebUI create shelf window” (p. 13-28).
Figure 13-11 WebUI create shelf window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter the appropriate provisioned type and shelf ID number of the next DCM, SFD44,
SFD44B, or ITLB shelf to be added. Enter additional parameters as required, then click
the "Apply" button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Close the create shelf window and verify all the DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, and ITLB
shelves now appear correctly in the equipment tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Check the alarms on the system and verify there are no equipment alarms related to the
DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, or ITLB shelves.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Appendix A: Fiber cleaning
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for the cleaning and
inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven
to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment. It is critical
that the connector endfaces, optical ports, and bulkheads are clean and free from
particular contamination to assure proper performance and reliability of lightwave
systems. With the modern high speed, high power, and wider bandwidth optical
transmission systems, clean connectors along the optical path are absolutely essential for
successful operation.
Before making any optical connections, perform the “Inspect, Clean, Inspect, Connect”
(ICIC) process on every jumper connector endface, optical port, and optical bulkhead.
Note: The information in this appendix is applicable to all Alcatel-Lucent optical
products, not just Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). There may be
tools and connector types listed that are not applicable to Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary A-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety instructions
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never view an energized optical cable with the naked eye or with an optical magnifying
instrument. Disconnected or separated optical connectors may emit invisible laser
radiation and direct exposure can severely injure the eye. If inspecting the endface of a
connector with a fiberscope, be absolutely certain that the system is deactivated.
DANGER
Noxious-substance hazard
Alcohol is flammable and is harmful if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin.
Keep alcohol away from heat, sparks, or flame. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothing.
Contents
Materials and tools A-3

Cleaning optical connectors A-5
Inspecting optical connectors A-9
Cleaning other optical components A-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Materials and tools
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Materials and tools

Description
For proper cleaning, the following equipment and materials are recommended:
Installa-
tion
Product Model Comcode ITE # Order #
JDSU Video Fiber Scope JDSU P5000 N/A ITE-7511 N/A
Probe, 400x
Optical Fiber Scope Noyes OFS 408463636 ITE-7129 33712900
300-200X
2.5-mm Universal Adapter For use with the 408197044 ITE- 33712901
Cap Noyes OFS 7129D1
300-200X
1.25-mm Universal For use with the 408197069 ITE- 33712902
Adapter Cap Noyes OFS 7129D2
300-200X
Video Fiber Scope Noyes VFS-1 408356830 ITE-7146 4171600
1.25-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356848 ITE- 33714601
7146D1
2.5-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356855 ITE- 33714602
7146D2
FC Adapter For VFS-1 408356863 ITE- 33714603
7146D3
LC Adapter For VFS-1 408356889 ITE- 33714604
7146D4
SC Adapter For VFS-1 408356954 ITE- 33714605
7146D5
ST Adapter For VFS-1 408356962 ITE- 33714606
7146D6
Individual pre-Saturated 99% Pure Isopropyl 901375147 ITE-7136 33713600
Alcohol Wipes Alcohol
CLETOP Cleaning Type A Reel 901375154 ITE-7137 33713700
Cassette
CLETOP Cleaning Type A Reel 901375014 ITE-7137 33713701
Cassette Replacement D1
Reel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Materials and tools
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installa-
tion
Product Model Comcode ITE # Order #
Luminex Stick Port 1.25 mm 901375030 ITE-7134 33713400
Cleaners
Luminex Stick Port 2.5 mm 901375022 ITE-7135 33713500
Cleaners
Luminex Cloth 5.5" x 5.5" 408201226 R6033 23603300
Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven
effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or
materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cleaning optical connectors

Description
Important! It is recommended to try several (at least three) dry cleaning processes
first before trying the wet cleaning process. Refer to Figure A-2, “CLEPTOP cleaner”
(p. A-7). In the case that the dry cleaning process is not effective, then proceed as
follows.
The procedure that follows utilizes the "Wet/Dry" method for connector cleaning. This
method first applies a "wet" solvent such as high purity alcohol to the connector endface
to dissolve/remove any organic particulate or oily films. It is then followed by a "dry"
double clean wipe using the CLETOP cleaning cassette.
This procedure is recommended for connector ferrules 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm in diameter
associated with ST, SC, FC, and LC connectors. The ferrule of a fiber optic connector
consists of a ceramic or stainless steel cylinder with a hole located longitudinally down
the center of its axis, allowing enough tolerance for a fiber to pass through.
All optical connectors should be cleaned prior to connectorization. Keep the protective
ferrule dust cap in place on the connector until initiating the cleaning process.
The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector endface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.
Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule endface perpendicular to the
alcohol wipe.
Drag it against the wipe three (3) times in a figure eight pattern. This action applies the
alcohol solvent to the endface and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid
contaminates. Refer to Figure A-1, “Cleaning the ferrule endface” (p. A-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 8. Otherwise, hold the
CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing
up. Refer to Figure A-2, “CLEPTOP cleaner” (p. A-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The
lever advances the "dry" disposable cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously
opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning
the connector.
Figure A-1 Cleaning the ferrule endface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure A-2 CLEPTOP cleaner
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Insert and press the connector ferrule endface perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in
the first of two slots of the cleaner. Refer to Figure A-2, “CLEPTOP cleaner” (p. A-7).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the
lever of the cassette.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping
procedure using the second slot. Be sure the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning
cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position.
Continue with Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Wrap a disposable cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing,
cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule endface
and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the
ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the disposable cleaning
cloth is not available, a lint-free cleanroom optic wipe can be used. The optic wipes are
single use and disposable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process. See
“Inspecting optical connectors” (p. A-9).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Inspecting optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inspecting optical connectors

Description
After cleaning the connector, inspect the ferrule endface to ensure that it is free from any
particulate contamination using an optical fiber inspection scope of at least 200X
magnification. When using an optical fiber scope (for example, the Noyes OFS
300-200X), exercise extreme caution to ensure that the fiber being examined is
de-energized.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Use an optical power meter to verify the connector and fiber to be cleaned has been
de-energized/deactivated before viewing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the
ferrule endface of the fiber under inspection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The visual area of the ferrule endface (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection
system/scope, should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the
fiber endface does not meet the following requirements: Refer to Figure A-3,
“Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning” (p. A-10).
Requirement: No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same
location after three wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the
restricted area of the glass fiber endface.
Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron (µm) diameter for both singlemode
and multimode fibers.
Requirement: No chips, cracks or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber
endface.
Requirement: No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and
ceramic ferrule endface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it should be immediately inserted into
the adapter buildout of the optical component. This will assure maximum cleanliness and
effectiveness of the connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the cleaned connector cannot be "connectorized" with a corresponding adapter, the

connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on
the ferrule, make sure the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP
stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 or 1.25 mm) and
rotate the stick 360 degrees three (3) times. Following this procedure, carefully place the
cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be
re-inspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The SM fiber inspection criteria are the same for the IEC-61300-3-35 and IPC-8497-1
standards. The MM fiber criteria are slightly different. The tables below contain the zones
and acceptance criteria presented in the IEC-61300-3-35 standard.
Figure A-3 Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning
Table A-1 Measurement regions for single fiber connectors
Zone Diameter for single mode Diameter for multimode

A: core 0 µm to 25 µm 0 µm to 65 µm
B: cladding 25 µm to 120 µm 65 µm to 120 µm
C: adhesive 120 µm to 130 µm 120 µm to 130 µm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 Measurement regions for single fiber connectors (continued)
Zone Diameter for single mode Diameter for multimode

D: contact 130 µm to 250 µm 130 µm to 250 µm
Note 1: All data above assumes a 125 µm cladding diameter.
Note 2: Multimode core zone diameter is set at 65 µm to accommodate all common core sizes in
a practical manner.
Note 3: A defect is defined as existing entirely within the inner-most zone which it touches.
Table A-2 Visual requirements for PC polished connectors, single mode fiber, RL
≥ 45 dB
Zone name Scratches Defects

A: core None None
B: cladding No limit ≤ 3 µm No limit < 2 µm
None > 3 µm 5 from 2 µm to 5 µm
None > 5 µm
C: adhesive No limit No limit
D: contact No limit None = > 10 µm
Note 1: For scratches, the requirement refers to width.
Note 2: No visible subsurface cracks are allowed in the core or cladding zones.
Note 3: All loose particles should be removed. If defect(s) are non-removable, it should be
within the criteria above to be acceptable for use.
Note 4: There are no requirements for the area outside the contact zone since defects in this area
have no influence on the performance. Cleaning loose debris beyond this region is
recommended good practice.
Note 5: Structural features that are part of the functional design of the optical fiber, such as
microstructures, are not considered defects.
Table A-3 Visual requirements for PC polished connectors, multimode fibers

A: core No limit ≤ 3 µm 4 ≤ 5 µm
0 > 5 µm None > 5
B: cladding No limit ≤ 5 µm No limit ≤ 2 µm
0 > 3 µm 5 from 2 µm to 5 µm
C: adhesive No limit No limit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-3 Visual requirements for PC polished connectors, multimode fibers
(continued)

D: contact No limit None ≥ 10 µm
Note 1: For scratches, the requirement refers to width.
Note 2: No visible subsurface cracks are allowed in the core or cladding zones.
Note 3: All loose particles should be removed. If defect(s) are non-removable, it should be
within the criteria above to be acceptable for use.
Note 4: There are no requirements for the area outside the contact zone since defects in this area
have no influence on the performance. Cleaning loose debris beyond this region is
recommended good practice.
Note 5: The zone size for multimode fibers has been set at 65 µm core size fibers. This is done
to simplify the grading process.
Note 6: Structural features that are part of the functional design of the optical fiber, such as
microstructures, are not considered defects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Cleaning other optical components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cleaning other optical components

Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors
During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it may be necessary to clean the optical
buildout adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended.
NOTICE
Notice
Do not attempt to clean ports equipped with yellow Lightguide BuildOut (LBO)
attenuators. Attenuators contain a thin glass lens that is extremely fragile. The LBO will
be damaged if cleaned using this method.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors,
1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the
alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while
inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner makes contact with the connector.
Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three (3)
times.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat the above cleaning
procedure. This procedure will clean the side walls of the adapter and the endface of the
circuit pack connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into
view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process from Step 1 to Step 3 if the fiber
does not meet the requirements specified in “Inspecting optical connectors” (p. A-9).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Fiber cleaning Cleaning other optical components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Appendix B: Tightening torque
Overview
Purpose
The listed tightening torque values are to be used for all fasteners on the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is
±10%.
Contents
Nominal tightening torques B-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary B-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Tightening torque Nominal tightening torques
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal tightening torques

Description
The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is ±10%.
Table B-1 Nominal tightening torques
Screw Captive screw General screw Self-forming screw

Size N-m in-lb N-m in-lb N-m in-lb
M2 0.13 1.15 0.26 2.30 0.30 2.66
M2.5 0.28 2.48 0.53 4.63 0.60 5.26
M3 0.48 4.25 0.92 8.15 1.10 9.74
M4 1.10 9.74 2.10 18.60 2.50 22.14
M5 2.15 19.04 4.00 35.43 4.90 43.40
M6 3.80 33.65 6.90 61.11 10.80 95.65
M8 9.30 82.36 17.60 155.87 25.50 225.84
M10 18.50 163.85 30.50 270.13 48.00 425.12
M12 31.40 278.10 59.80 529.63 84.00 743.96
12-24 NA NA NA NA 3.75 34
Table B-2 Nominal tightening torques when using washers
Screw Captive screw General screw Self-forming screw

Size N-m in-lb N-m in-lb N-m in-lb
M2 0.14 1.24 0.28 2.48 0.32 2.83
M2.5 0.29 2.57 0.58 5.14 0.68 6.02
M3 0.55 4.87 1.00 8.85 1.20 10.63
M4 1.20 10.63 2.30 20.37 2.80 24.80
M5 2.40 21.25 4.50 39.85 5.40 47.82
M6 4.20 37.20 7.60 67.31 11.90 105.40
M8 10.20 90.34 19.40 171.82 28.00 247.99
M10 20.30 179.80 33.55 297.14 52.80 467.63
M12 34.50 305.55 65.80 582.77 92.70 821.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Appendix C: Wavelength tracker
only to WTOCM-equipped
network upgrade procedure
Overview
Purpose
This appendix provides the procedure for upgrading a network operating without
Wavelength Tracker Optical Channel Monitor (WTOCM) packs for optical channel
monitoring to one operating with WTOCM packs for optical channel monitoring. One of
three reasons could motivate an operator to deploy the WTOCM packs in a network:
1. The EPT analysis of the network indicates that WTOCM packs are required to
provide sufficiently accurate power measurements to minimize transmission penalty
from inaccurate power settings. As the distance reach of the network and channel
count on the network increases, the Stimulated Raman Scattering limit of detection by
embedded Wavelength Tracker detectors may be reached.
2. To take advantage of an opportunity to add WTOCM packs to the network in advance
of reaching the limit mentioned in point 1.
3. To take advantage of new features offered only with WTOCM equipped networks.
In all cases, the switchover from WTD-only monitored network to WTOCM monitored
network must be done carefully. When the switch is made to WTOCM monitoring, the
per channel power levels used by the system will shift. Optical power level control loops
must react to the new power levels. Therefore, a phased approach to WTOCM rollout is
required, and within phases, time must be allocated to allow for power level settling.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in impact to services.
Contents
Identification of need for upgrade C-3

Phase I: Generate new commissioning files from EPT C-6
Phase II: Physical installation of WTOCM packs C-9
Phase III: Setting of ILA WT decoder usage type C-16
Phase IV: Disable automatic tilt adjustments in network C-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary C-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Overview
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase V: Setting of OADM lines WT decoder usage type C-22

Phase VI: Provisioning of SCOT attributes C-27
Phase VII: Enabling of automatic tilt adjustment by SCOT C-30
Phase VIII: Review C-35
Upgrade of ILA nodes to WTOCM C-36
Switch of ILA to WTOCM monitoring C-43
Advanced topics C-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Identification of need for upgrade
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identification of need for upgrade

Description
The EPT reports an excessive Raman tilt error when the network reach and channel
capacity will cause more tilt from Simulated Raman Scattering (SRS) than the network
can handle with WTD monitoring. Both channel power accuracy and channel ID
functions of Wavlength Tracker can be compromised if high SRS-induced optical
transmission spectrum tilt will be present in a network and the network is not equipped
with WTOCM packs.
Figure C-1 Network operating within the WT limits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure C-2 Network failing WT limits check
Figure C-3, “Error message indicating WTOCM is required” (p. C-5) shows the error
message "Raman tilt of x.x dB exceeds maximum allowed value of 3.00 dB." This
indicates the demand is failing due to excessive Raman tilt from a combination of span
fiber type, fiber distance, average launch power into the fiber spans, channel count on
links along demand path, and demand path length.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure C-3 Error message indicating WTOCM is required
After changing the optical domain to WTOCM equipped, the design will validate
successfully. Refer to the next section for the steps to take to switch the optical domain to
WTOCM usage in the EPT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase I: Generate new commissioning files from EPT
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase I: Generate new commissioning files from EPT

Audience
The audience for this section is network planning experts.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If WTOCM upgrade is required for an optical domain, the links of the optical domain
must be changed from WTD usage to WTOCM usage in the EPT plan. This is done by
selecting all the links in the network design and switching the WTOCM selection from
WT to WTOCM.
Note: In the current release, all network links in the same optical domain must be
switched to WTOCM. An optical domain is considered disjoint from another if there
are no optical connections between them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 WTOCM is designed for the OADM lines of the system. One WTOCM port monitors one
direction of a line. One WTOCM pack can monitor up to two lines. More information
about the WTOCM itself is found in the product documentation within the Product
Information and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 WTOCM is not required in ILA sites. EPT rules handle the allocation of WTOCM to
OADM lines versus none for ILA lines.
• Optionally a user may chose to deploy a WTOCM at an ILA line. A WTOCM should
only be deployed at an ILA site if the OMS section in which it resides has been
upgraded to WTOCM. Therefore, the sequence for upgrade is to complete the OADM
node upgrade to WTOCM first, followed by upgrade of ILAs the user wants to add
WTOCM monitoring to.
• The EPT does not support exporting the settings to switch an ILA to WTOCM
monitoring; therefore the user must do these steps manually.
Figure C-4 Changing an optical domain to WTOCM equipped
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After validating the design, generate new commissioning files for the affected systems. In
the example in Figure C-4, “Changing an optical domain to WTOCM equipped” (p. C-7),
there are two commissioning systems that need to be re-generated.
Figure C-5 Re-generating commissioning files after adding WTOCM to optical

domain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 At this point it may also be useful to generate the Excel format commissioning reports for
subsequent steps, since there are some manual steps, and the Excel reports are easier for a
user to read than the networkcommissioning.xml files.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase II: Physical installation of WTOCM packs
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase II: Physical installation of WTOCM packs

Audience
The audience for this section is operational and maintenance personnel.
Note: This phase requires field personnel to be physically present at network element
locations with WTOCM packs and fiber cabling.
Procedure
The WTOCM packs are installed in the network elements of the commissioning system(s)
being upgraded to WTOCM per the EPT design output. WTOCM packs are inserted into
the slots specified by the EPT. Wait for the packs to cold start and go active. The slot
should auto provision to the correct type. If the slot was previously assigned a type, the
user may need to clear the assigned type to empty, before provisioning the slot type as
WTOCM. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1
Command Line Interface Guide (CLI commands) and the and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide (WebUI commands)
for procedures on how to accomplish these tasks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 With the WTOCM packs slotted and running in the network elements, now refer to the
connections required between the WTOCM In{1-4} ports and the LD LINE or SIG (for
bidirectional LD types) or LD LINEOUT ports (for unidirectional LD types) monitor
ports. Make the fiber cabling connections between the MON ports corresponding to the
line side port to be monitored.
Important! Since fiber cabling between packs in tightly packed shelves can disrupt
existing fiber cabling between packs, it is recommended the fiber cabling to the
WTOCM packs be installed during a maintenance window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure C-6, “Fiber cabling connections between MON ports of bidirectional LDs and
WTOCM pack” (p. C-10) shows an example of fiber cabling required to monitor two lines
of a TOADM node.
Figure C-6 Fiber cabling connections between MON ports of bidirectional LDs and
WTOCM pack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check whether additional attenuation is required between the MON port and the
WTOCM In port in the EPT reports. Usually additional attenuation is not required, but in
some optical configurations it is. If additional attenuation is required place a fixed
attenuator of the specified amount in the path between the MON port of the LD and the
WTOCM IN port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If using the 1354 PhM or CPB tool, re-synchronize the network elements where the
WTOCM packs were installed. This ensures the inventory of the NEs is correct in the
PhM/CPB view.
Note: Refer to the EMS Reference Guide for how to re-synchronize the NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The next step is to provision on the network element the logical association between each
WTOCM In port and the port it monitors. This step can be done by using the CPB
Provision System wizard, or using CLI or WebUI commands. Refer to the EPT output
(reports or networkcommissioning.xml) for the logical connections required.
Additionally, the WTOCM Conn loss attribute should be provisioned; it specifies
additional loss between the LD MON port and the WTOCM IN that could be necessary.
The figure below shows the screen in the CPB wizard that presents options to the user
regarding attributes to provision.
Figure C-7 Selection of options in CPB to provision during WTOCM provisioning step
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select only the indicated options, and clear the other check boxes. Optionally selecting
Verbose Logging is okay.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Proceed to click through the next wizard steps to provision the packs. With the options
selected, and assuming the slotting of existing through path required packs and equipment
matches plan, only the WTOCM packs and their provisioning of association to the ports
monitored will be done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 CLI commands or WebUI commands can be used to accomplish the same provisioning
steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The CLI commands are:

Setting port states up:
# config interface wtocm sh/sl/In[1-4] state up
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Provisioning the association between WTOCM In and LD monitored port:

# config interface wtocm sh/sl/In[1-4] connaddress sh/sl/[LINE | LINEOUT | SIG]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Provisioning the connector loss to the WTOCM In port:

# config interface wtocm sh/sl/In[1-4] connloss <value>
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Backing out
To back out of installation of WTOCM packs at this point in the procedure, proceed as
follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the association between the WTOCM In[1-4] port and the LD port monitored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 CLI commands or WebUI commands can be used.

The CLI command is:
# config interface wtocm sh/sl/In[1-4] connaddress delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the WTOCM pack will not be used at all in the network element, the slot can be
de-provisioned and the pack removed. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide for these steps.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verifying installation
Proceed as follows;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for 15 minutes to be sure that the WTOCM pack has finished processing all channels
in transmission.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify the fiber cabling is correct. For a degree of a node with channels in transmission,
note the wavekeys being detected at the LD port that is monitored by WTOCM. In the
CLI the command below can be used to view the WTOCM port channel summary for
comparison to the LD port monitored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For each channel detected at the monitored LD at the port monitored, verify that the
WTOCM has detected the same channel. A successful match will look like:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Essentially the set of channels the WTOCM detects should match the set detected at the
LD port it monitors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot any mismatches by verifying that the optical fiber cabling between the
MON port and the WTOCM In port is correct. Additionally the following CLI command
can be used to verify total optical power is present at the monitored port and the WTOCM
In port. Additionally the association provisioning can be viewed.
(config-interface-wtocm-1/12/in1)# detail
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After completing these steps, the WTOCM packs have been correctly physically installed;
however, they are not yet in use for providing Wavelength Tracker channel ID and
channel power measurements to the system. The switch to using the WTOCM packs for
channel ID and power readings will be made in the next phase.
Note: The upgrade procedure can be interrupted at this stage and begun again in the
next phase at a later date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase III: Setting of ILA WT decoder usage type
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase III: Setting of ILA WT decoder usage type

Audience
Procedure
In this phase, a setting on each optical line of each ILA node must be configured. Before
changing any settings, record the current settings in case you decide to back out.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If all the lines in an OMS segment are NOT Auto power managed, set WT Decoder Usage
Type to WtdPpcOffAlmOff (2) at all ILA lines of the OMS.
• When the setting is changed to this value, per channel power levels and WT related
alarms at the ILA nodes will no longer be reported. This is normal.
• CLI or WebUI commands can be used to change the setting.
• The WT Decoder Usage Type is configured at the external facing LD LINE port (for
bidirectional LD) or LD LINEOUT (for unidirectional LD).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If all lines in an OMS segment are Auto power managed, set WT Decoder Usage Type to
WtdInferred (5) at all ILA lines of the OMS.
• When the setting is changed to this value, there may be changes in the reported per
channel power levels at the ILA sites and this is normal. Additionally WT related
alarms at the ILA nodes will no longer be reported.
• This setting is only supported for R3.6.0 and later of the NE. If applying the
procedure to an earlier release set the ILA lines to WtdPpcOffAlmOff (2), as above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The CLI command is:

#config interface powermgmt sh/sl/port (where port is external LINE or LINEOUT)
wtdusage wtdoffoff
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The screen in the WebUI for changing the WT Decoder Usage Type is shown in Figure
C-8, “Configuration of wavelength tracker” (p. C-17). The setting is changed in the
Power Management tab of the external LINE or LINEOUT port for the line.
Figure C-8 Configuration of wavelength tracker
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing out
To back out at this point in the procedure, proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the WT Decoder Usage Type back to the previous value. In most cases, this value is
"Internal" (through the WebUI). The equivalent CLI command is:
wtdusage wtdonon
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase IV: Disable automatic tilt adjustments in network
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase IV: Disable automatic tilt adjustments in network

Audience
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 At all lines in the network to be upgraded, disable automatic LD tilt adjustments by

SCOT by using the CLI or WebUI.
Note: Before changing any settings, record the current settings in case you decide to
back out.
#config interface powermgmt sh/sl/pt (where pt is LINE or LINEOUT) autotiltadjenabled
off
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the WebUI, the automatic tilt adjustment can be disabled from the Power Management
tab of the LINE or LINEOUT port of the external facing LD pack.
Figure C-9 Disabling SCOT automatic tilt adjustments
Note: While disabling lines, there may be some PWRTILTSUSP conditions raised
until all the lines have been disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Setting changes must be made at all OADM and ILA lines that are SCOT Auto.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set automatic LD tilt adjustment back to its previous setting at all modified lines.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase V: Setting of OADM lines WT decoder usage type
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase V: Setting of OADM lines WT decoder usage type

Audience
Procedure
In this phase, OADM lines are switched over to WTOCM usage. Care must be taken in
this phase to ensure sufficient waiting time between actions is followed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Consider the network depicted below:
Figure C-10 Example network for WTOCM upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 At this point, the WTOCM packs have been installed in the OADM nodes and fibered
correctly to the MON ports of the LDs to be monitored. The connections have been
verified and association between the line side SIG or LINE or LINEOUT port has been
provisioned. There are two commissioning systems for this network defined as the rings
labeled System1 and System2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Proceeding one system at a time, the OADM lines will be switched to WTOCM operation
mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The figure below shows the first line is switched over to WT decoder usage type setting
of WTOCM. This can be done using the CLI command or WebUI command. Before
changing any settings record the current settings in case you decide to back out.
wtdusage wtocm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For WebUI, refer back to Figure C-8, “Configuration of wavelength tracker” (p. C-17),
and set WTOCM from the pick list for Wavelength Tracker Decoder Usage.
Figure C-11 Switch of first optical lines to WTOCM usage
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 After switching the first line to WTOCM, wait for 5 minutes to allow optical power level
control loops to fully converge.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Next, proceed to the next OMS section and perform the same procedure for the OADM
lines of that OMS. Continue until all the OADM lines have been switched to
usingWTOCM, as depicted in Figure C-12, “All lines of network switched to WTOCM”
(p. C-25).
Figure C-12 All lines of network switched to WTOCM
Note: While the process of switching from embedded WT usage to WTOCM usage is
being made, some OCH OPR or OCH UNKNOWN alarms may be observed. This is
normal during the process and these are expected to be cleared by the completion of
the entire upgrade procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the network was not Greenfield deployed with Release 3.6 or later, the WTOCM OCH
technology-dependent correction factors may not be set on the NE. Use the CPB or
equivalent CLI or WebUI commands to set the correction factors for the technology types
in use on each network element. The commissioning files from the Release 3.6 EPT will
include this table information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the network was deployed Greenfield with Release 3.6 or later, this information will
already be present on the network elements and does not need to be re-provisioned. The
CLI command for provisioning the WTOCM OCH technology dependent correction
factors is:
#config powermgmt general techtypes modify <BitRateEnum> <EncodingEnum>
<value>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 At the completion of this phase, the system is using the WTOCM sourced measurements
for Wavelength Tracker OCH layer alarms related to channel identification, and is using
WTOCM sourced channel power measurements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Recall that the ILAs were set to correct WT decoder usage type settings in Phase III.
Continue to the next phase to provision the SCOT power management attributes that have
changed.
Note: At this phase, the procedure could be interrupted and resumed in the next phase
at a later date. Though it is not recommended to delay the next phases of the upgrade
procedure, the conclusion of the current phase represents the last possible pause point
before completing the rest of the upgrade phases.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Backing out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set automatic WT Decoder Usage type of the OADM lines back to their previous settings.
In most cases, this value is 'Internal' (through the WebUI). The equivalent CLI command
is:
wtdusage wtdonon
Important! Wait 5 minutes after modifying a line before modifying another. This
allows the control loops to fully equalize after each change.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase VI: Provisioning of SCOT attributes
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase VI: Provisioning of SCOT attributes

Audience:
Procedure
In this phase, the SCOT optical power management parameters are updated. Using the
CPB or equivalent CLI and WebUI commands, provision the SCOT optical line
parameters that need to be updated to fully take advantage of WTOCM monitoring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Before changing any settings, record the current settings in case you decide to back out.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Figure C-13, “Required selections from provisioning options for optical parameters
update” (p. C-28) shows the provisioning options screen for the CPB. Select only the
options to provision:
• Ingress SRS Tilt Post Fraction
• Egress SRS Tilt Calc Output Loss
• LH Launch Attenuation
• Egress SRS Tilt Pre Fraction
• Set Optical Power Level Management (OPLM) attributes
Leave all other options unchecked. Verbose logging can be selected if desired.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 Command
Line Interface Guide (CLI commands) and the and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide (WebUI commands) for how
to provision these attributes to the network element directly without the use of the CPB
tool. The CLI commands are as follows:
#config powermgmt ingress sh/sl (where sl for the pack of the externally connected LINE
or LINEIN port) tiltpostcomp <value>
#config powermgmt ingress sh/sl (where sl for the pack of the externally connected LINE
or LINEIN port) tiltcaldcm <value>
#config powermgmt egress sh/sl (where sl for the pack of the externally connected LINE
or LINEIN port) losstospan <value>
or LINEIN port) launchatt <value>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
or LINEIN port) tiltprecomp <value>
or LINEIN port) tiltcaldcm <value>
or LINEIN port) tiltcal <value>
Figure C-13 Required selections from provisioning options for optical parameters
update
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After provisioning the new parameter values, PWRADJREQ conditions may be noted on
the network. Trigger the indicated adjustments to clear the PWRADJREQ conditions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Refer to documentation of CLI and WebUI commands to learn how adjustments (ingress
and egress adjustments) are triggered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Backing out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set attributes back to their previous value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 After reverting parameter values, PWRADJREQ conditions may be noted on the network.
Trigger the indicated adjustments to clear the PWRADJREQ conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Refer to documentation of CLI and WebUI commands to learn how adjustments (ingress
and egress adjustments) are triggered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase VII: Enabling of automatic tilt adjustment by SCOT
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase VII: Enabling of automatic tilt adjustment by SCOT

Audience
Procedure
In this phase, the automatic tilt adjustment settings are set per the EPT plan for the
network. Instead of using the CPB to set the settings at all optical lines in a system in
rapid succession, the procedure described in this phase is recommended because it
minimizes power level divergence while enabling automatic tilt adjustments. As tilt
adjustments are re-enabled, they will compensate for SRS predicted by the channel count
in transmission, and this is why care must be taken not to enable too many lines in one
transmission direction simultaneously. The procedure described enables no more than one
line's tilt adjustment at a time, per transmission direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Consulting the Excel power commissioning reports from the EPT is the simplest way to
understand which lines are to be enabled for automatic tilt adjustment. As a general rule,
if all optical lines with the OMS segment are SCOT Auto managed, the EPT will enable
automatic tilt adjustments at all the lines. Before changing any settings, record the current
settings in case you decide to back out.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use CLI commands or WebUI to enable the lines that need to be enabled, following the
sequence described further below.
on
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 As shown below, in the WebUI, tick the check box for Auto Tilt Adjustment Enabled and
submit the change using the Power Management tab of the externally facing LD LINE or
LD LINEOUT port.
Figure C-14 Enablement of automatic tilt adjustment for a line
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For each OMS segment, and in each direction, make settings in the following order:
1. Modify the setting for the OADM line originating the OMS, wait for 3 minutes.
2. If there is an ILA, modify the setting for the node egress line in the direction of
transmission. Wait for 3 minutes.
3. Repeat until all ILAs in the direction of transmission for the OMS have been set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 It is not necessary to set the receiving OADM line of the OMS since it will be set by the
settings for the return transmission direction. Each direction of transmission can be done
simultaneously.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 During this process it is normal for PWRADJSUSP conditions to occur. These will clear
as provisioning of the OMS section is completed. Other alarms that may be temporarily
observed are: OCH OPR, OCH UNKNOWN and OCH COLLISION.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If there are channels in transmission through the OMS segment, tilt adjustments will
naturally occur as a consequence of enabling automatic tilt adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 An example of the sequence to follow within an OMS segment is shown in Figure C-15,
“Sequence to follow when enabling auto tilt adjustment within an OMS” (p. C-32).
Figure C-15 Sequence to follow when enabling auto tilt adjustment within an OMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Figure C-16, “Example of enabling auto tilt adjustment for a network” (p. C-33) shows
the sequence in each direction for one of the OMS segments in the example network, and
that OMS segments are completed eventually.
Figure C-16 Example of enabling auto tilt adjustment for a network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 After completing this phase, the network is now running with the full optical power
management set of features enabled that are designed for the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 An advanced user may want to fine tune the automatic tilt adjustment to more closely
match the characteristics of the fiber plants in the field; however that process is beyond
the scope of this procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set attributes back to their previous value. Repeat the process described for provisioning
the new attribute values in the REVERSE order starting from the last ILA node, back to
the OMS transmit line (OADM transmit line). WebUI or CLI commands can be used.
off
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Phase VIII: Review
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phase VIII: Review

Audience
The audience for this section is operational personnel, maintenance personnel, and
network planning experts.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 After completing the steps of the upgrade, check for any power out of range alarms (OCH
OPR) present on the network that were not raised before the upgrade process began.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If OCH OPR conditions remain at SCOT auto managed lines:

1. Investigate first if there are loss problems that may be causing the issue.
2. Check for any PWRADJREQ conditions which have not been cleared, and trigger
SCOT adjustments to clear them.
3. Investigate if the power management settings match the EPT plan for the system the
line is part of.
4. An advanced user can evaluate whether fine tuning of the tilt adjustment is required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If OCH OPR conditions remain at SCOT manual managed lines:

1. Investigate first if there are loss problems that may be causing the issue.
2. It may be necessary to re-synchronize the expected power levels of the cross connects
at manually managed lines. First confirm that the power launched to the line with the
OPR condition is correct. If it is not correct upstream, follow the path upstream to
locate the cause of the power error. If the upstream power level is near a level
expected, the local expected power level can be resynchronized to its current
measured level using CLI commands.
"Config xc xcid acceptpwrs {az | za}
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Upgrade of ILA nodes to WTOCM
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade of ILA nodes to WTOCM

Audience
Description
After the network is upgraded to WTOCM usage at the OADM nodes, selectively the
network operator can elect to install WTOCM packs at ILA sites to provide channel
power measurements at these locations. No settings from the EPT are output for these
nodes, therefore the user must decide which WTOCM In{1-4} ports will monitor which
ports, and make fiber patch cable connections and provision settings on the NE
accordingly.
This procedure can be repeated for each ILA to be upgraded to WTOCM monitored.
Preliminary tasks
Audience
For the ILA case, the user must decide which line side WDM ports to associate to the
WTOCM In{1-4} input ports. The following template can be followed to make this
decision easier:
Bidirectionally fibered LD type (A2325A, AHPHG, ALPHG, AHPLG)
In each direction there is a SIG Out port of the ingress LD and LINE Out port of the
reverse direction ingress LD that can be monitored, for a total of 4 ports. Consider the
example below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure C-17 ILA WTOCM upgrade for bidirectional LD types
In this example there is a Line 1 ingress LD in shelf 1 / slot 2, and a Line 2 ingress LD in
shelf 1 / slot 4 (the slot numbers are not specific; any can be used). A suggested way to
make the fiber connections between the packs and the WTOCM pack In ports is as
follows:
Monitored Output Input Port of Direction

LD Monitored Port Monitor Port WTOCM Monitored
on LD
Line 1 Ingress 1/2/LINE MON Tx Out In1 Out
LD
Line 1 Ingress 1/2/SIG MON Rx Out In2 Out
LD
Line 2 Ingress 1/4/LINE MON Tx Out In3 Out
LD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

on LD
Line 2 Ingress 1/4/SIG MON Rx Out In4 Out
LD
Unidirectionally fibered LD type (AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A)

In each directionn there is a Line Out port of the ingress LD that can be monitored, for a
total of two ports. Consider the example below:
Figure C-18 ILA WTOCM upgrade for unidirectional LD types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this example, there is a Line 1 ingress LD in shelf 1 / slot 2, and a Line 2 ingress LD in
shelf 1 / slot 4 (the slot numbers are not specific; any can be used). A suggested way to
make the fiber connections between the packs and the WTOCM pack In ports is as
follows:

on LD
Line 1 Ingress 1/2/LINEOUT MON Out In1 Out
LD
Line 2 Ingress 1/4/LINEOUT MON Tx Out In2 Out
LD
Using the actual pack slotting of the LDs in the ILA node to be upgraded and the template
above, create a list of the fiber connections between ports that will be required, and the
shelf/slot/port to WTOCM In{1-4} association that will be made.
Physical installation in ILA node

Audience
Note: This phase requires field personnel to be physically present at network element
locations with WTOCM packs and fiber cabling.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For each ILA, a WTOCM pack is inserted into a free slot in the shelf. Wait for the pack to
cold start and go active. The slot should auto provision to the correct type. If the slot was
previously assigned a type, the user may need to clear the assigned type to empty, before
provisioning the slot type as wtocm. Refer to the CLI and WebUI commands for how to
accomplish these tasks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 With the WTOCM packs slotted and running in the network element, now refer to the
connections required between the WTOCM In{1-4} ports and the LD LINE or SIG (for
bidirectional LD types) or LD LINEOUT ports (for unidirectional LD types) monitor
ports. Make the fiber cabling connections between the MON ports corresponding to the
line side port to be monitored.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Since fiber cabling between packs in a tightly packed shelves can disrupt
existing fiber cabling between packs, it is recommended the fiber cabling to the
WTOCM packs be installed during a maintenance window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The next step is to provision on the network element the logical association between each
WTOCM In port and the port it monitors. This step can be done by using CLI or WebUI
commands. Example CLI command:
#config interface wtocm shelf/slot/IN[1-4] connloss shelf/slot/port
where,
shelf/slot/IN[1-4] is the WTOCM pack shelf/slot and input port
shelf/slot/port is the WDM port that is logically monitored by the WTOCM port (for
example, if the LD is in slot 4 of shelf 1: 1/4/LINE).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Backing out
To back out of installation of WTOCM packs at this point in the procedure, proceed as
follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Delete the association between the WTOCM In[1-4] port and the LD port monitored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 CLI commands or WebUI commands can be used. The CLI command is:
# config interface wtocm sh/sl/In[1-4] connaddress delete
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the WTOCM pack will not be used at all in the network element the slot can be
de-provisioned and the pack removed. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 5.1 User Provisioning Guide for these steps.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Verifying installation
Proceed as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for 15 minutes to be sure that the WTOCM pack has finished processing all channels
in transmission.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify the fiber cabling is correct. For a degree of a node with channels in transmission,
note if the expected channels are detected by the WTOCM. In the CLI, the command
below can be used to view the WTOCM port channel summary for comparison to the LD
port monitored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the WTOCM has detected the channels in transmission for the direction. A
success case will look like the following:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Essentially the set of channels the WTOCM detects should match the set for the direction
of transmission through the ILA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Troubleshoot any mismatches by verifying that the optical fiber cabling between the
MON port and the WTOCM In port is correct. Additionally the following CLI command
can be used to verify total optical power is present at the monitored port and the WTOCM
In port. Also, the association provisioning can be viewed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(config-interface-wtocm-1/12/in1)# detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Since the same Wave Keys are detected at two points in a bidirectional fibered LD ILA, it
can be useful for troubleshooting to note that the monitor ratio for the MON Rx is lower
than for the MON Tx. This means that the total optical power at the WTOCM In{1-4}
port should be lower relative to the SIG port out power level, compared to the total
optical power at the WTOCM In{1-4} port relative to the LINE port out power level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 After completing these steps, the WTOCM packs have been correctly physically installed;
however, they are not yet in use for providing Wavelength Tracker channel ID and
channel power measurements to the system. The switch to using the WTOCM packs for
channel ID and power readings will be made in the next phase. Note that the upgrade
procedure can be interrupted at this stage and begun again in the next phase at a later date.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Switch of ILA to WTOCM monitoring
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Switch of ILA to WTOCM monitoring

Audience
Procedure
At this point, the WTOCM pack has been installed in the ILA node and fibered correctly
to the MON ports of the LDs to be monitored. The connections have been verified and
association between the line side SIG or LINE or LINEOUT port has been provisioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Each ILA line is switched to WTOCM monitoring by setting the WT decoder usage type
setting to WTOCM. This can be done using the CLI command or WebUI command.
Before changing any settings record the current settings in case you decide to back out.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Example of CLI command:

wtdusage wtocm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For WebUI refer back to Figure C-8, “Configuration of wavelength tracker” (p. C-17),
and set WTOCM from the pick list for Wavelength Tracker Decoder Usage. After
completing this step, WTOCM monitoring for the associated ports is enabled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Backing out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the WT Decoder Usage Type back to the previous value. The value to use will either
be "Inferred" or "Off" (through the WebUI). The equivalent CLI command is as follows:
wtdusage [wtdoffoff | wtdinferred]
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Wavelength tracker only to WTOCM-equipped network Advanced topics
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advanced topics
Audience
The audience for this section is network planning experts.
Procedure
In certain network designs and OCH channel allocation (placement within the
transmission band), it is possible to encounter a situation where the lowest frequency
channels may be put at risk during the upgrade procedure. This is most likely to occur for
very long transmission paths, or networks which have a high channel count along the
transmission path of the channel prior to upgrade to WTOCM. The best practices in such
a case are as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Review the network design with an advanced planner to determine if there are any long
path low frequency channels planned for the network. (Channels towards the 191.7 THz
end of the channel plan.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Obtain FEC correction PMs for the low frequency channels that are questionable to
evaluate the margin of the channels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the margin for a channel is extremely low, it may be advisable to re-route or re-color
the demand to use a less risky path or color assignment. Alternatively the FEC correction
PMs can be monitored during the upgrade procedure to notice if actions during the
upgrade are further degrading the margin of the lightpath.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If during the upgrade the monitored FEC correction PMs indicate that a transponder is
near failure, the network operator or field support team may want to engage the R&D
organization for guidance on how best to proceed. The low frequency channels are
decreased in real channel power at each OADM line when the upgrade is done. Normally
if channels have been deployed following the EPT plan, the channels will have sufficient
margin to tolerate this power decrease because the power level is actually returning to the
designed power level. In cases where a network operator has deployed demands in an
unexpected way, the problems mentioned above are more likely to be encountered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Appendix D: Alcatel-Lucent
1621 link extender applications
Overview
Purpose
The appendix describes the procedures necessary to configure the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS when used with the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender. The Alcatel-Lucent
1621 link extender is an option used for fiber spans that exceed the limits of 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 engineering rules.
Contents
Integration of Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS D-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary D-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender applications Integration of Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender with
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integration of Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender with

Description
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical amplifiers that connect to the Alcatel-Lucent 1621
link extender require site-specific power commissioning values. These commissioning
values are found in the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 Link description table.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender is installed and commissioned correctly
using the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Log in to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element that is directly connected to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender, and open the power commissioning page by clicking
on Administration > power commissioning. See Figure D-1, “Power commissioning”
(p. D-2).
Figure D-1 Power commissioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter values from the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 Link description table into all ingress and
egress amplifier parameters in the power commissioning window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Open the port power management page by expanding the appropriate egress amplifier
(see the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 Link description table) in the menu tree. Click on LINE and
select the Power Managment tab on the right-hand side of the screen. See Figure D-2,
“Port power management” (p. D-3)
Figure D-2 Port power management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter values from the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 Link description table into amplifier
parameters in the power commissioning window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the ingress amplifier (if applicable).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element that is
directly connected to the other end of the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 link extender line.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary D-3
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Appendix E: Optical modules
replacement
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides basic replacement information for optical modules at the 1830 PSS
system.
Contents
Special tools E-2

XFP adapter insertion/extraction E-3
XFP module insertion E-5
XFP module extraction E-6
Replacing LC-type LBOs E-7
SFP module insertion E-8
SFP module extraction E-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary E-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement Special tools
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Special tools
Overview
Special tools are mainly required to carry out the installation or the removing of optical
modules. The following table provides an overview of the special tools.
Table E-1 Special tools
Quantity Description Part number
1 SFP module removal tool. 3AL81728AA or

Included with each subrack 3AL81424AA
1 Support for the SFP module removal tool 8DG08510AA
1 Extracting clamp for LC and XFP. For removing XFP modules and 8DG59614AA
disconnecting LC fibers included with each subrack.
1 Extractors holder bracket (for extracting clamp) 3AN49302AA
Special tools visual reference
Figure E-1 Extracting clamp for LC and XFP
Figure E-2 SFP module removal tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement XFP adapter insertion/extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP adapter insertion/extraction

When to use
Use this procedure for XFP adapter insertion/extraction.
Before you begin

Observe the following:
• This equipment is intended for installation by qualified personnel only.
The XFP adapter can be provided with the units as listed on parts list (see table entry I/O
cards and see table entry Package type XFP).
XFP adapter insertion

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 After having placed the card into the subrack, insert the XFP adapter in the special cavity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Push on the front panel until the XFP adapter connector starts to mate with the card
connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Fasten the adapter mounting screws with phillips screwdriver.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
XFP adapter extraction

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Unfasten the mounting screws.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert the XFP-adapter hook of the “extraction tool”, in the polarized hole on the XFP
adapter front cover, see (1) on Figure E-3, “XFP adapter extraction reference” (p. E-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Rotate the tool 180 degree clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the tool for
the extraction (2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement XFP adapter insertion/extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Pull out the XFP adapter from the card front panel (3).
Figure E-3 XFP adapter extraction reference
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement XFP module insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP module insertion

When to use
Use this procedure for XFP module insertion on the XFP adapter.
Before you begin

XFP module into XFP adapter insertion

For XFP modules inserted on the XFP adapter:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Before inserting the module, move the bail (latch) up, see following fig.
Figure E-4 XFP bail reference
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert the XFP module in the special cavity and push on it until the XFP module
connector starts to mate with the adapter connector.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement XFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP module extraction

When to use
Use this procedure for XFP module extraction on the XFP adapter.
Before you begin

XFP module on XFP adapter extraction

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Insert in the available space the XFP hook of the “extraction tool”, see (1) on Figure E-5,
“XFP module extraction reference” (p. E-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Pull up the bail (latch) in order to unlock the XFP module (2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Extract the XFP module as depicted from the XFP adapter using the bail (3).
Figure E-5 XFP module extraction reference
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement Replacing LC-type LBOs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing LC-type LBOs

Overview
This chapter provides a procedure for replacing LC-type LBOs.
Tools
See “Special tools” (p. E-2).
Procedure
Proceed as follows to replace LC-type LBOs:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Depress both beams (upper and lower) simultaneously and remove the LBO.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert the new LBO until a small “click” is heard. Pay attention to the correct direction as
shown in the figure below.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Figure E-6 LBO replacement
g-itg-100406a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement SFP module insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP module insertion

When to use
Use this procedure for SFP module insertion.
Before you begin

SFP module insertion

For SFP modules inserted I/O card:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Insert the SFP module in the special cavity on the card as depicted on the following fig.
Figure E-7 SFP module insert reference
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Push on it until the SFP module connector starts to mate with the card connector.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Optical modules replacement SFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP module extraction

Overview
The procedures described below provide removal instructions for the following SFP
types:
• MSA latch (type 1)
• MSA latch (type 2)
• Bail latch “bottom up” (= type 1)
• Bail latch “top down” (= type 2).
Tools
See “Special tools” (p. E-2).
Safety
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Hold SFPs only at the edges. Always observe the ESD instructions (cf. “Electrostatic
discharge” (p. 1-24)).
MSA latch (type 1)

Proceed as follows to remove this type of SFP:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Put the fibers away from the transceiver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Slide the bar back by using a screwdriver (see figure below).

Result: There should be a small click, or it should be visible that the transceiver was
moved a bit out of its latch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Grep the SFP transceiver with your fingers and pull it out.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure E-8 Unlocking a MSA latch (type 1) SFP
MSA latch (type 2)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press on top of the locking device (see figure below) and pull the SFP out with your
fingers.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Figure E-9 Unlocking a MSA latch (type 2) SFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bail latch (type 1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Move the bail downwards (see figure below).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Grep the SFP transceiver with your own fingers and pull it out.
Important! Don't pull the bail to get the transceiver out, as the bail might be teared
away from the SFP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Figure E-10 Unlocking a bail latch (type 1) SFP
Bail latch (type 2)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Move the bail upwards (see figure below).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
away from the SFP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Bail latch (type 1)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Move the bail downwards (see figure below).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
away from the SFP.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Removing SFP modules using the SFP module removal tool

Proceed as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Collect the SFP removal tool from the delivered kit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert the removal tool on the front of the SFP module with the slide latch on the left side
as depicted on the following fig.
Result:
Figure E-13 SFP module removal tool insertion (1 of 2)
Figure E-13 SFP module removal tool insertion (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Press the slide latch to the SFP module in order to unlock the module as depicted on the
following fig.
Result:
Figure E-14 SFP module extraction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Pull out the SFP module from the unit as depicted on the following fig.
Result:
Figure E-15 SFP module extracted
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
100 BASE-TX
A 100 megabit-per-second local area network known by the generic name of Fast Ethernet
operating over twisted-pair copper cable. This technology is becoming very popular and
cost-effective. It is designed to integrate with existing networks with minimal disruption.
10/100 BASE-T
A twisted-pair cable version of an IEEE 802.3 network.
3R (Reshaping, Reamplification, Retiming) Functionality

When a signal is converted from optical to electrical, optical translators reshape, reamplify, and
retime the electrical signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A ACO (Acknowledge Button)

A push-button switch on the indicator strip that can be used to retire an audible office alarm.
ADC (Analog Digital Converter)

A device that converts analog signals into digital signals.
AID (Access Identifier)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
AIM (Alarm Indication Message)

A return message sent from one NE to another NE that indicates it has received a signal so
degraded that it is raising an alarm.
AINS
Automatic In-Service (secondary port state).
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

A signal sent downstream by a NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
Alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of a failure towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm List
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
Alarm Log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
Alarm Severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The way alarms are processed depends
on their severity.
Alarm Suppression
Selective removal of alarm messages from being forwarded to the GUI or to the network
management layer OS.
Angular Misalignment
Loss at a connector caused by misaligned fiber end-face angles.
Anomaly
Any deviation from normal behavior. Anomalies do not result in any consequent actions, but are
contributors to defects and performance monitoring counts.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programmming languages,
communications, and networking; it is the U.S. representative in the International Organization
for Standardization (ISO).
APC (Angle Polished Connector)

A 5°-15° angle on the connector tip for the minimum possible back reflection.
Apparatus Code
ASCII name assigned by the manufacturer to identify a particular circuit pack by pack type and
number.
APR (Automatic Power Reduction)

The lowering of the laser power to a limit that fits into the class 1 category for handling fiber
cables. APR replaces the full power-off feature known as ALS (automatic laser shutdown) or
APSD (automatic power shutdown).
AR (Antireflection Coating)
A thin dielectric or metallic film applied to an optical surface to reduce its reflection and thereby
increase its transmission.
ASE (Amplified Spontaneous Emission)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

A non-profit industry-wide organization that publishes standards, methods of test, recommended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
practices, definitions, and related material.
Asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
ATAG (Autonomously Generated Correlation Tag)

An autonomous TL1 message (event) counter used to detect lost events.
ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)

A high speed digital transmission switching format, containing 5 bytes of header information
followed by 48 data bytes.
Attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed in dB/km.
Attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
Auto-Provisioning
Configuration of system parts without pre-provisioning. When a part is plugged into the system, it
is accepted with its default configuration.
Automatic Protection Switch

A protection switch that occurs automatically in response to an automatically detected fault
condition.
Autonomous Message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B Back Reflection
See Fresnel Reflection.
Backscattering
The return of a portion of scattered light to the input end of a fiber; the scattering of light in the
direction opposite to its original propagation.
Bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also known as rack.
BCM (Board Controller Module)

A small module (printed wiring board plus components) that plugs into almost every circuit pack
(other than the NCTL, SCTL, and SUPVY) to supply the processor, memory, and intra-NE
communications capabilities needed to operate the pack in the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Beamsplitter
An optical device, such as a partially reflecting mirror, that splits a beam of light into two or more
beams. Used in fiber optics for directional couplers.
Bend Radius
The smallest radius an optical fiber or fiber cable can bend before increased attenuation or
breakage occurs.
Bending Loss
Attenuation caused by high-order modes radiating from the outside of a fiber optic waveguide that
occurs when the fiber is bent around a small radius. See also macrobending, microbending.
BER (Bit Error Rate)

BER measures how accurately a bit stream is transmitted through a system. It measures how
many bits are received in error compared to how many are sent.
Birefringent
When light moving in one direction acts differently from light going in another direction.
BLKR (64 CH)

The BLKR circuit pack is used in the WXC for blocking channels that should not mesh to the
other line. These packs are used for 40G transmission.
Blockers
Blockers allow reuse of channels that have been dropped by blocking wavelengths on an
individual basis within an ROADM/WXC NE.
Brillouin Scattering
In a transmission path, scattering of lightwaves, caused by thermally driven density fluctuations.
Brillouin scattering may cause frequency shifts of several gigahertz at room temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C Cable Assembly
A cable that is connector-terminated and ready for installation.
Cable Plant
Consists of all the optical elements including fiber connectors and splices between a transmitter
and a receiver.
CCITT (Consultative Committee for the International Telephone and Telegraph)

See International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standards Sector (ITU-TSS).
CDR (Clock and Data Recovery)

A technique used in Local Area Networks (LANs) whereby a data octet is subdivided, scrambled,
and encoded into an expanded form. The expanded expression of the data value includes bits that
are used for clock recovery.
CDS (Complementary Double Shelf)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See DS ( Double Shelf).
Center Wavelength
In a laser, the nominal value central operating wavelength. It is the wavelength defined by a peak
mode measurement where the effective optical power resides. In a LED, the average of the two
wavelengths measured at the half-amplitude points of the power spectrum.
CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute)

A measure of how much air moves through the fan of air-coded equipment.
Channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
Chirp
In laser diodes, the shift of the laser's central wavelength during single pulse duration caused by
laser instability.
Chromatic Dispersion
The speed that an optical pulse travels depends on the fiber wavelength. This is caused by several
factors including material dispersion, waveguide dispersion, and profile dispersion. The net effect
of chromatic dispersion is that if an optical pulse contains multiple wave-lengths (colors), then the
different colors travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, spreading the received
optical signal.
CIO (Controller Input/Output ) Circuit Pack

A circuit pack that indicates Ethernet port status.
CIT (Craft Interface Terminal)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
CL (Coupling Ratio/Loss)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
Cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
CLEI (Common Language Equipment Identifier)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
CO (Central Office)
A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
distance subscribers.
Compact Flash Memory Module (CFMM)

A removeable memory module used with LambdaXtreme™ Transport Repeaters for storage of
executable code and provisioned data. CFMM is smaller than the FMM, and requires the use of an
adaptor when inserted into the CIT PC. See also FMM.
Connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
Connector Plug
A device that terminates an optical conductor cable.
Connector Receptacle
The fixed or stationary half of a connection that is mounted on a panel/bulkhead. Receptacles
mate with plugs.
Connector Variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with remating and temperature cycling). Also called Optical Connector Variation.
Core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
Coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
CPB
Commissioning and power balancing tool.
CPEDS (Circuit Pack Extraction Detection Switches)

Switches that are built into the circuit packs that detect when a circuit pack is being removed from
the shelf.
CR (Coupling Ratio/Loss)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

A method to detect erroneous bits in a byte stream.
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection)

A control technique for getting onto and off a LAN. All devices attached to the network listen for
transmissions in progress (that is, carrier sense) before starting to transmit (multiple access). If
two or more begin transmitting at the same time and their transmissions crash into each other,
each backs off (collision detection ) for a different amount of time (determined by an algorithm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
before again attempting to transmit.
CTAG (Correlation Tag)

A user supplied label attached to an input command that is repeated in the associated response to
facilitate the correlation of input to response.
Current SW Generic (Current Software Generic)

The software and data that the NE is currently using. It is loaded on to the active partition of the
FlashDisk Memory Module.
CW (Continuous Wave)
The constant optical output from an optical source when it is turned on, but not modulated with a
signal.
CWDM
Coarse WDM.
CWR8
An 8 port colorless wavelength router; 44 channel capacity.
CWR8-88
An 8 port colorless wavelength router; 88 channel capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D DAC (Digital to Analog Converter)

A device that converts digital signals into analog signals.
Dark Current
The flow of electricity through the diode in a photodiode when no light is present.
DCC (Data Communication Channel)

A portion of the SDH/SONET signal that contains alarm, surveillance, and performance
information.
DCF (Dispersion Compensating Fiber)

A special fiber with a negative chromatic dispersion coefficient used to compensate the positive
chromatic disperion of the transmission fiber in the third optical window.
DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
DCN (Data Communication Network)

DCN supports communications between NEs and the NMS.
DCS (Digital Cross-Connect System)

A system that has multiple input and output streams, and can interconnect a signal from any input
to any output.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEMUX or DMX (Demultiplexer)
A module that separates two or more signals previously combined by compatible multiplexing
equipment.
Detector
An opto-electric transducer used in fiber optics to convert optical power to electrical current.
Usually referred to as a photodiode.
DGD (Differential Group Delay)

In an optical fiber, the variation in propagation delay that occurs because of the different group
velocities of different modes.
DGEF (Dynamic Gain Equalization Filter)

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Control Protocol)

DHCP enables PCs and workstations to get temporary or permanent IP addresses from the server.
Directional Coupler
A coupling device for separately sampling (through a known coupling loss) either the forward
(incident) or the backward (reflected) wave in a transmission line.
Dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
Distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DL (Data Link)
The communication link used for data transmission from a source to a destination.
DM (Dispersion Mangement)
The DM circuit pack provides dispersion management on 40G OTs. This is a passive transmission
circuit pack, and is managed by the SCTL.
DMS (Dispersion Managed Soliton)

A technique that allows solitons to become more resistant to errors when they are propagating
inside optical fibers. See also Solitons.
DS (Double Shelf)
Two shelves with a fan assembly between them and a heat baffle below the lower shelf. A DS is
NEBS level 3 compatible, and each shelf contains sixteen 30 mm slots. LambdaXtreme™
Transport has the following double shelves: Network Controller Double Shelf (NCDS), Repeater
Double Shelf (RDS), High Density Double Shelf (HDDS), and Complementary Double Shelf
(CDS).
DSA (Directory System Agents)

An operating system application process that provides the Directory functionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DSF (Dispersion-Shifted Fiber)
Used to improve on Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber by shifting the interface between the fiber
core and cladding. This fiber exhibits optimum attenuation performance at 1550 nm and optimum
bandwidth at 1300 nm.
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)

A specialized semiconductor device that converts analog signals into digital signals.
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)

DTE is part of a broader grouping of equipment known as customer premises equipment that
includes voice, data, and end terminals.
Duplex Cable
A two-fiber cable suitable for duplex transmission.
Duplex Transmission
Transmission in both directions, either one direction at a time (half-duplex) or both directions
simultaneously (full-duplex).
DWDM (Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing)

Transmitting eight or more signals of different wavelengths simultaneously over a single fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E E-LEAF (Enhanced-Large Effective Area Fiber)

A fiber type manufactured by Corning.
EDC (Error Detection Code)

Code construction that provides a way to protect, correct data from errors, and maintain the data
integrity.
EDCV (Error Detection Code Violation)

Occurs when the calculated checksum over a signal does not match the received checksum.
EDFA (Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier)

Optical fibers doped with the rare earth element erbium that can amplify light in the 1550 nm
region when pumped by an external light source.
EEPROM (Electrical Erasable and Programmable Read-Only Memory)

A kind of non-volatile memory often used to store inventory data.
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference)

High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing
through the fields.
EML (Externally Modulated Laser)

When laser is modulated using a Mach-Zehnder modulator.
EMR (Electromagnetic Radiation)

Radiation made up of oscillating electric and magnetic fields and propagated with the speed of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
light. Includes gamma radiation, X-rays, ultraviolet, visible and infrared radiation, and radar and
radio waves.
EMS (Element Management System)

System that manages NEs either directly attached to it or are remotely connected by using the
DCN. Examples of these systems are the CIT and Lucent OMS.
Engineering Rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
EOL (End-Of-Life)
EOL defines the status or values at the end of the guaranteed lifetime of a component. EOL is
reached when the wear-out failure rate dominates the component failure rate.
EPT
Engineering and planning tool.
Error Recovery
The intent to recover from a detected error, such as inconsistent state or configuration
information. See also Operational Recovery.
ES-IS (End System to Intermediate System Protocol)

An ISO OSI network-layer protocol (ISO 9542) for End Systems (alias hosts) communicating to
Intermediate Systems (alias routers) that dynamically builds the relevant network routing
databases (administrative protocol).
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
ET (End Terminal)
Optical equipment that terminates optical line signals.
ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
Electronic variable optical attenuator.
External Modulation
Modulation of a light source by an external device that acts as an eIectronic shutter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extinction Ratio
The ratio of two optical powers of a digital signal generated by an optical source.
Eye Pattern
The proper function of a digital system can be quantitatively described by its BER, or
qualitatively by its eye pattern. The "openness" of the eye relates to the BER that can be achieved.
Also called eye diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F F-eVOA
Fast electronic variable optical attenuator. Used for encoding WT keys.
Fabric
The part of an optical system that is responsible for switching voice, data, or video from one place
to another.
Failure
When a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
Failure Rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
Fall Time
The time required for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from 90% to 10% of its amplitude; the
time required for a component to produce such a result. Typically measured between the 80% and
20% points or the 90% and 10% points. Also called turn-off time.
Far-End Crosstalk
Crosstalk occurs when you hear someone you did not call talking to someone else on your
telephone line. Far-End Crosstalk occurs when Crosstalk travels along a circuit in the same
direction as the signals in the circuit.
FAS (Frame Alignment Signal)

A sequence at the beginning of an SDH/SONET frame that detects the frame start.
FC (Fiber Optic Connector)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
back reflection
FC/PC
A special curved polish on the connector for very low back reflection .
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface)

A 100-Mbps fiber optic LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FE (Far End)
Any network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one that the user is at or
working on. Also called remote.
FEBE (Far End Block Error)

A maintenance signal transmitted in the physical overhead indicating that a bit error has been
detected at the physical layer at the far end of the link.
FEC (Forward Error Correction)

A method to correct bit errors in a transmission signal whereby additional information is put into
the data signal to allow bit errors to be corrected at the receiving end.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
FET (Field Effect Transistor)

Very thin and small transistors used to control pixels in a thin film transistor display.
FGOAM
Fixed gain optical amplifier module (+16 dBm power, 18-dB gain).
Fiber Optic Attenuator

A component installed in a fiber optic transmission system that reduces the power in the optical
signal. It is often used to limit the optical power received by the photodetector to within the limits
of the optical receiver.
Fiber Optic Cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
Fiber Optic Link

A transmitter, receiver, and cable assembly that can transmit information between two points.
Fiber Optic Span

An optical fiber/cable terminated at both ends that may include devices that add, subtract, or
attenuate optical signals.
FIT (Failure In Time)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
FIT Rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
FMM (FlashDisk Memory Module)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
FOADM
A fixed filter based optical add/drop WDM site, through the use of SFD cards without TOADM
cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)
A user-configurable logic device that holds user-defined logic constructs and interconnects in the
form of a microprocessor. Examples include EEPROM and FLASH.
Fresnel Reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber.
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)

A modulation technique for transmitting data in digital format over an analog carrier. It involves
shifting the frequency level of the carrier.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
Fused Fiber
A bundle of fibers fused together so they maintain a fixed alignment with respect to each other in
a rigid rod.
Fusion Splicer
An instrument that permanently bonds two fibers together by heating and fusing them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G Gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
GbE (Gigabet Ethernet)

Ethernet that runs at 1,000 bits per second. It comes in two formats: shared and switched. The
frame size is much larger than traditional Ethernet. The size increased by 64 byte to 512 bytes.
GFEC
Industry standard G.709 FEC.
GFF (Gain Flattening Filter)

When erbium-doped fibers are used to amplify the light traveling through the fiber, some
wavelengths are amplified more than others. A gain-flattening filter restores all wavelengths to
approximately the same intensity.
GNE (Gateway Network Element)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the managment system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output)

GPIO provides a flexible way of interfacing a wide range of peripheral devices with a computer.
Among the interface methods GPIO uses are the configurable data sense and handshaking.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
Ground Loop Noise

Noise that results when equipment is grounded at points having different potentials, thereby
creating an unintended current path. The dielectric properties of optical fiber provide electrical
isolation, which eliminates ground loops.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H HDDS (High Density Double Shelf)

See DS (Double Shelf).
HEVMUX (High Extinction VMUX[Virtual Multiplexing Protocol)

A HEVMUX sits above several lower protocols, making them appear as a single protocol.
HEVMUX decides which protocol to use for each connection. Note that it is only active during
connection establishment.
HXDS (High Density Reconfigurable Double Shelf)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ICEA (Insulated Cable Engineers Association)

A professional organization dedicated to developing cable standards for the electric power,
control, and telecommunications industries.
IDI (Initial Domain Identifier)

Part of the NSAP, the IDI defines the country code of the registration authority responsible for the
allocation and assignment of the NSAP address.
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)

The international standards and conformity assessment body for all fields of electrotechnology,
including electricty and electronics.
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers)

The IEEE helps advance global prosperity by promoting the engineering process of creating,
developing, integrating, sharing, and applying knowledge about electrical and information
technologies and sciences for the benefit of humanity and the profession.
ILA (In-Line Amplifier)

See Repeater.
IMF (Infant Mortality Factor)

The ratio of the first-year failure rate to the steady-state failure rate.
Index of Refraction
Also refractive index. The ratio of the velocity of light in free space to the velocity of light in a
fiber material. Symbolized by n. Always greater than or equal to one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index-Matching Gel
A gel whose index of refraction nearly equals that of the fiber's core. Used to reduce Fresnel
reflection at fiber ends.
Insertion Loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
Interchannel Isolation
The ability to prevent undesired optical energy from appearing in one signal path as a result of
coupling from another signal path.
Intrinsic Loss
Splice loss arising from differences in the fibers being spliced.
IPD
Integrated photodector (also called photodiode).
IR (Intermediate Reach)
Optical sections from a few kilometers (km) to approximately 15 km.
Irradiance
The amount of power per unit area.
ISO (International Standards Organization)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
ISUG (In-Service Upgradeable)

It is unnecessary to shut down the system to upgrade it.
ITU (International Telecommunication Union)

A United Nations telecommunications agency established to provide standardized
communications procedures and practices including frequency allocation and radio regulations on
a worldwide basis.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J Jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
Jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
Jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L L-Band (Long Band)

An optical spectrum range of frequences from 1570 to 1610 nm, where a wide range of
wavelengths are possible with low loss. L-Band doubles the number of wavelengths best suited in
DWDM applications, and uses newer, more expensive optical amplifiers. In LambdaXtreme™
Transport, the L-Band is widened and referred to as an Extended L-Band.
L-Span
See Span Loss.
LA (Limiting Amplifier)
A device that provides a constant output voltage until the input voltage drops under a certain
level.
LAN (Local Area Network)

1. A communication link between two or more points within a small geographic area, such as
between buildings. 2. A data network that has a size of normally up to 10 km. Important LANs are
Ethernet, Token Ring, Token Bus, and FDDI.
LAPD (Link Access Protocol on D-channel)

A special protocol of the OSI Data Link Layer that provides the functional and procedural means
to establish, maintain, and release data link connections for NEs. For NE-NE communications
over the DCC, Layer 2 services are provided by LAPD.
Launch Fiber
An optical fiber used to couple and condition light from an optical source into an optical fiber.
Often the launch fiber is used to create an equilibrium mode distribution in multimode fiber. Also
called launching fiber.
LBC (Laser Bias Current)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBO (Line Build Out)

Attenuation used to simulate a load.
LC (Lucent Connector)
A small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule. This connector
uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power requirements due to
lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55 dB single mode).
LD (Laser Diode)
A semiconductor that emits coherent light when forward biased.
LD-A2325A
Line driver circuit pack with high power (+23 dBm).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD-AHPLG
Line driver circuit pack with high power (+20 dBm) low gain (> 18 dB flat gain) optical amplifier.
LD-AM2125A
Line driver circuit pack with high power (+21.5 dBm), medium gain (nominally >= 25 dB flat
gain).
LD-AM2318A
Line driver circuit pack +23 dBm output power, low gain (nominally >= 18 dB flat gain).
LD-HPHG
Line driver circuit pack with a high power (+20 dBm) high gain (> 20 dB flat gain) optical
amplifier.
LD-LPHG
Line driver circuit pack with a low power (+17 dBm) high gain (> 20 dB flat gain) optical
amplifier.
LEAF (Large Effective Area Fiber)

A type of fiber manufactured by Corning.
LED (Light-emitting diode)

A diode that translates electrical current into light. Made out of semiconductor material like
Gallium-Arsenide. A semiconductor that emits incoherent light when forward biased.
LFA (Loss of Frame Alignment)

The time during which frame alignment is effectively lost.
LGX (Lightguide Cross-Connect))

Fiber termination shelves and hardware used for interconnecting fiber cables, jumpers, and
closures that connect the switching systems to the transmission equipment.
LH (Long Haul)
A 10-Gbps application for transmission of 128 channels, giving a capacity of 1.28 Tbps and a
reach of up to 2000 km. Payload (per channel) can be one OC-192/STM-64 or four
OC-48/STM-16 signals.
LID (Link ID Protocol)

A Lucent proprietary protocol for exchange of neighbor information over a DCC link. LID makes
use of LAPD (OSI) or PPP (IP).
LOC (Loss of Clock)

Loss of clock is detected when the clock of the OT is damaged.
LOF (Loss of Frame)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF anomaly persists for a certain time.
LOM (Loss of Mulitframe)

A failure declared when two consecutive multiframe alignment signals are received with an error.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loose-Tube
A type of fiber optic cable construction where the fiber is contained within a loose tube in the
cable jacket.
LOS (Loss of Signal)

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
Loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
Lossy Span
Long distance loss in the fiber.
LR (Long Reach)
An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
Lucent Optical Management System (OMS)

An element management system that provides networks with operational functions such as
configuration management, fault management, performance management, and security
management.
LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling)

LVDS delivers high data rates while consuming significantly less power than competing
technologies. In addition, it brings many other benefits including low-voltage power supply
compatibility, low noise generation, high noise rejection, robust transmission signals, and ability
to be integrated into system level ICs
LVDS technology allows products to address high data rates ranging from 100's of Mbps to
greater than 2 Gbps. For all of the above reasons, it has been deployed across many market
segments wherever the need for speed and low power exists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M M1
The M1 circuit pack provides connectivity for the mesh paths in a WXC. It supports bi-directional
mesh connections. On the receive side, it has a VOA for the purpose of building out the loss of the
combination of the OD and M1 path to a specific minimum value. On the transmit side, it
combines the even and odd channels of the system.
Macrobending
In a fiber, all macroscopic deviations of the fiber's axis from a straight line.
MAN (Metropolitan Area Network)

A network covering an area larger than a local area network. A wide area network (two or more
local area networks) that covers a metropolitan area.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
MAS (Multiplex Alignment Signal)

A byte in the 40G overhead that allows the system to check if the four bitmultplexed 10G data
streams are demultiplexed in the right way. It has the value 10100101 in the first 10G data stream
and the value 01011010 in the other 10G data streams.
MD (Miscellaneous Discrete)
Interfaces that control external equipment and system environment. LambdaXtreme™ Transport
contains two Miscellaneous Discrete Interface–Environmental points (inputs) control the
environment around the bays (for example, smoke alarms, flood, fire, intruders, and so forth);
and, Control points (outputs) control equipment external to the NE, through the NE control relays.
Mechanical Splice
An optical fiber splice accomplished by fixtures or materials, rather than by thermal fusion.
MEMS (MicroElectro Mechanical System)

Semiconductor chips that have a top layer of mechanical devices, such as mirror or fluid sensors.
MESH
A type of configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity between
the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as many as four
degrees (bi-directional DWDM interfaces) that comprise 2 lines for the east and 2 for the west.
Microbending
Minute but severe bends in fiber that result in light displacement and increased loss.
Mini NE ROADM (Mini-ROADM)

A system NE that provides a minimum configuration, in-service, upgradable optical add-drop
multiplexer.
Mini NE WXC (Mini-WXC)

A mini wavelength cross connect that provides a minimum configuration, in-service, upgradable
network element which supports four bidirectional optical lines (lines 1E/1W/2E/2W), and
comprises two co-joined fully equipped MINILA nodes with additional hardware to support
optical channel mesh connections from one optical line to the other.
Mini_DUET (Limited Wavelength Dual End Terminal)

A system NE that supports the termination of two bi-directional DWDM lines and can be used as
a single node extension from a MINI_WXC in a main system. Each DWDM line supports
add/drop of any 16 of the 10G channels supported by the system.
Minila (Mini In-Line Amplifiers)

A system NE that provides a minimum configuration, in-service, upgradable repeater/in-line
amplifier.
MOADM (Mesh Ready Optical Add Drop Multiplexer)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See OD(MOADM) and OM(MOADM).
Modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MPI (Multipath Interference)

Signal reflections and delayed signal images that interfere with the proper signal path. MPI is
caused by reflections from dirty/damaged connectors, and return loss of the jumpers/patch cords.
MPI may cause severe system degradation.
MS (Multiplex Section)
A maintenance entity between two MS TT functions.
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
MTC (Millisecond Transient Control)

It stops any high-speed, short duration increase or decrease impairment that is superimposed on a
circuit every thousand of a second.
MTTR (Mean Time To Repair)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
Multimode Fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
Multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX (Multiplexer)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
MVAC
Multiple variable attenuator card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NCDS (Network Controller Double Shelf)

NCTL (Network Element Controller) Circuit Pack

The NCTL provides control and user interfaces at the NE level.
NDF (New Data Flag)

NDF is used to set an arbitrary change of the pointer value if the change is due to a change of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
payload.
NE (Network Element)
Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
Near Infrared
The part of the infrared near the visible spectrum, typically 700 nm to 1500 nm or 2000 nm.
Near-End Crosstalk
The optical power reflected from one or more input ports, back to another input port. Also known
as isolation directivity.
NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System Requirements)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
NEC (National Electric Code)

A standard governing the use of electrical wire, cable, and fixtures installed in buildings;
developed by the NEC Committee of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
sponsored by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

NEMA, created in the fall of 1926 by the merger of the Electric Power Club and the Associated
Manufacturers of Electrical Supplies, provides a forum for the standardization of electrical
equipment, enabling consumers to select from a range of safe, effective, and compatible electrical
products.
NF (Noise Figure)
The ratio (in dB) between the signal-to-noise ratio applied to the input of the microwave
component and the signal-to-noise ratio measured at its output. NF indicates the amount of noise
added to a signal by the component during normal operations. Lower noise figures indicate less
degradation and better performance.
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

A not-for-profit organization that works with the U.S. Congress and federal agencies to promote
the adoption and use of fire protection codes and standards, and to promote a uniform national
approach to fighting the problem of fires.
NIM (Non-intrusive Monitor)

A kind of sink termination point function that does not touch SDH/SONET signals but monitors
quality of service.
NPT
Network time protocol.
NRZ (Non-Return to Zero)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A binary encoding in which ones and zeroes are represented by opposite and alternating high and
low voltages and where there is no return to a zero voltage between encoded bits.
NSAP (Network Service Access Point)

The access point where the Network Layer Services are available to network service users.
NVM (Non Volatile Memory)

Memory that survives a shutdown or powerdown of the system such as a hard disk, floppy, or
tape. LambdaXtreme Transport uses a PCMCIA card for NVM.
NZDSF (Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber)

Fiber that was designed to introduce a small amount of dispersion without the zero- point crossing
being in the WDM passband. With this type of fiber you can eliminate, or at least greatly reduce
the degradation due to four-wave mixing, a distortion mechanism that requires the spectral
components to be phase-matched along the fiber. Examples are the TrueWave® fiber from Lucent
and the LS fiber from Corning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA (Optical Amplifier)
A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
OADM (Optical Add Drop Multiplexer)

A terminal capable of adding and dropping lower-rate signals from a higher-rate multiplexed
signal without completely demultiplexing the signal.
OBA (Optical Booster Amplifier)

An optical amplifier with high output power.
OC-n (Optical Carrier-level n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard.
OCH
Optical channel.
OCM
Optical channel monitor.
OCWR (Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometer)

An instrument used to characterize a fiber optic link wherein an unmodulated signal is transmitted
through the link, and the resulting light scattered and reflected back to the input is measured.
OD (MOADM - Mesh Ready Optical Add Drop Multiplexer)

OD (MOADM)s provide 64 channel 10G and 40G demultiplexing capability, with direct ports for
32 channels and a connection for 32 additional channels accessible by connecting the 100GHz
offset OD to it.
OD (Optical Demultiplexer)
ODs extract individual wavelengths from the DWDM optical that is generated using an Optical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multiplexer (OM).
OGC (Optic Gate Controller)

The controller of an OpticGate module. Its tasks are to control the components of the module and
connect it to a circuit pack.
OLS (Optical Line System)

A lightwave transmission system that can multiplex to 8, 16, 80, or more wavelengths, transmit
the resulting multiplexed signal, and then demultiplex the signal at the other end.
OM (MOADM - Mesh Ready Optical Add Drop Multiplexer)

OM (MOADM) multiplexes the added 10G and 40G Gb/s channels at a ROADM terminal. Up to
64 channels can be added in 32 channel modularity. The channels are on a 100GHz grid, with 0
GHz offset.
OM (Optical Multiplexer)
The process that combines two or more wavelengths onto a single fiber.
OMD
Optical mux/demux circuit pack.
OMON (Optical Monitor)

The OMON circuit pack scans the entire DWDM spectrum to provide Optical Spectrum Analysis
(OSA) for up to 4 or 8 selected locations in an NE.
OMS
Optical multiplex section. Used to describe the OADM line, spans, ILAs to the next OADM line.
OOF (Out of frame state)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
OOS (Out-of-Service)
A state in which the circuit pack is not providing its normal service function (removed from either
the working or protection state) either because of a system problem or because the pack has been
removed from service.
OP1P1
A circuit pack that implements a 1+1 optical channel protection switch feature.
Operational Recovery
A recovery with the intent to perform an operation, such as to activate a new software version.
See also Error Recovery.
OPS
Optical protection switch (pack).
Optical Channel
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Channel Spacing
The wavelength separation between adjacent WDM channels.
Optical Channel Width

The optical wavelength range of a channel.
Optical Isolator
A component used to block out reflected and unwanted light.
Optical Link Loss Budget

The range of optical loss allowed in order to meet all specifications when a fiber optical link
operates. The loss is relative to the transmitter output power.
Optical Multiplex Section

A layer in the LambdaXtreme Transport transmission hierarchy.
Optical Path Power Penalty

The additional loss budget required to account for degradations due to reflections, and the
combined effects of dispersion resulting from intersymbol interference, mode-partition noise, and
laser chirp.
Optical Power Meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
Orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
ORL (Optical Return Loss)

The ratio (expressed in units of dB) of optical power reflected by a component or an assembly to
the optical power incident on a component port when that component or assembly is introduced
into a link or system.
OSA (Optical Spectrum Analyser)

A device used to study light as electromagnetic waves. Conventional analyzers are primarily used
to test optical fiber components, such as, lasers, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and the fiber itself.
OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel)

See SUPVY/SUP Supervisory Channel).
OSI (Open Systems Interconnection)

The internationally accepted grouping of standards for communication between different systems
made by different vendors.
OSNR (Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio)

The ratio between the optical power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise signal.
OSP (Outside Plant)

Any part of the Local Exchange Carrier telephone network that is physically located outside of
the LEC company building.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT (Optical Transponders)
OTs do frequency adaptation between LambdaXtreme™ Transport equipment and external
equipment that is not optically compatible with LambdaXtreme™ Transport. OTs also provide 3R
functionality (retiming, reshaping, reamplification); and perform fault management and
performance monitoring (non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper
signal.
OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer)

An instrument that locates faults in optical fibers or infers attenuation by backscattered light
measurements.
OTM (Optical Transport Module)

Provides bi-directional electrical/optical signal conversions in point-to-point applications. Optical
signals propagate at two wavelengths over a single fiber.
OTUk (Optical Transport Unit)

G.709 OTUks perform frequency adaptation between LambdaXtreme™ Transport
equipment and optically incompatible external equipment. The OTU introduces a new dimension
to optical networking by adding forward error correction (FEC) to the network elements, allowing
operators to limit the number of required regenerators used in the network which, in turn, lowers
its cost.
OXC (Optical Cross-connect)

A device that can switch optical signals between different optical fibers, without the need for
conversion to electrical signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P Passive Branching Device

A device that divides an optical input into two or more optical outputs.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Miniature Communications International Association)

An international standards body and trade association that establishes standards for Integrated
Circuit cards and promotes interchangeability among mobile computers where ruggedness, low
power, and small size are critical. PCMCIA publishes the PC Card standard, which contains all of
the physical, electrical, and software specifications for the PC card technology.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Miniature Communications International Association) Adapter

A slot on the Network Controller or on the PC where the flash disk is inserted.
PD (Photodetector)
An optoelectronic transducer such as a PIN photodiode or avalanche photodiode.
PDL (Polarizaton Dependent Loss)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDU (Protocol Data Unit)
Used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
Peak Power Output

The output power averaged over that cycle of an electromagnetic wave having the maximum peak
value that can occur under any combination of signals transmitted.
Phonons
Molecular vibrations that occur in a rigid crystal lattice.
Photodiode
A device that converts optical energy to electrical energy.
PI controller
Proportional-integral controller.
PID (Password Identification)

A word or character string recognized by automatic means that permits a user access to protected
storage, files, or input or output devices.
Pigtail
A short optical fiber permanently attached to a source, detector, or other fiber optic device.
Plastic Clad Silica

A step-index fiber with a glass core and plastic or polymer cladding. This fiber is also called hard
clad silica (HCS).
Plenum
The air handling space between walls, under structural floors, and above drop ceilings that can be
used to route intrabuilding cabling.
Plenum Cable
A cable whose flammability and smoke characteristics allow it to be routed in a plenum area
without being enclosed in a conduit.
PLL (Phase Locked Loop)

An electronic circuit that controls an oscillator so that it maintains a constant phase angle relative
to a reference signal.
PM (Performance Monitoring)
Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
received optical signal.
pN_EBC (Near-end Errored Block Count)

Every second the number of near-end errored blocks (N_Bs) within that second are counted as the
Near-end Errored Block Count (pN_EBC). This counter is used to determine the degraded defect
and as an input for the performance monitoring process.
Point-to-Point Transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
Polarization
The direction of the electric field in the lightwave.
POM Passive Optical Multiplexer) Module

The POM module merges thru channels with added channels from mesh/ROADM channels and
taps off power to MON and OMON ports.
Pre-Provisioning
The capability to provision a slot before installing a circuit pack.
Previous SW Generic (Previous Software Generic)

The previous SW generic is the software and data on the alternate partition to the currently
executed SW/data of the PCMCIA card. It might be installed and activated per user command.
After installation, previous and current SW generic are exchanged.
Provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
Pulse Spreading
The dispersion of an optical signal as it propagates through an optical fiber.
Pump Laser
A laser used in an optical fiber amplifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QOS (Quality of Service)

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R Raman Amplification
A technique that transforms part of the outside plant fiber (OSP) into an amplifier by emitting
high-power laser light into the OSP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rayleigh Scattering
The scattering of light that results from small inhomogeneities of material density or composition.
RBOC (Regional Bell Operating Company)

One of the seven regional holding companies formed after the AT&T divestiture. These
companies included Ameritech, Bell Atlantic, BellSouth, NYNEX, Pacific Telesis, Southwestern
Bell, and U.S. West. Later on, Bell Atlantic and NYNEX merged to become Verizon; Ameritech,
Pacific Telesis and Southwestern Bell merged to become SBC; and U.S. West was renamed Quest.
RCIO (Repeater Controller Input/Output) Circuit Pack

A circuit pack that indicates Ethernet port status in Repeaters.
RCTL (Repeater Controller) Circuit Pack

RCTL performs the combined functions of the NCTL, SCTL, and SUPVY circuit packs for the
Repeater Node.
RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

RDI signals convey the defect status of the trail signal at the trail destination (that is, at trail
termination sink function) back to the trail origin (that is, trail termination source function). This
mechanism allows alignment of the near-end and far-end performance monitoring processes.
RDS (Repeater Double Shelf)

Receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
Receiver Overload
The maximum acceptable value of average received power for an acceptable BER or
performance.
Receiver Sensitivity
The minimum acceptable value of received power needed to achieve an acceptable BER or
performance. It takes into account power penalties caused by use of a transmitter with worst-case
values of extinction ratio, jitter, pulse rise and fall times, optical return loss, receiver connector
degradations, and measurement tolerances.
Refractive Index
This is a numerical expression comparing the speed of light in a transparent medium, like glass,
with the speed of light in air. The higher the index number, the thinner a given lens will be.
Refractive Index Gradient

Used in collimators (light aligners) and other sub-components to couple light into and out of
fibers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refractive Index Profile
The description of the value of the refractive index as a function of distance from the optical axis
along an optical fiber diameter.
Regenerator
A device that receives an optical signal, converts it to electrical, regenerates the signal, converts it
to optical, then transmits it.
REI (Remote Error Indication)

REI signals contain either the exact or truncated number of error detection code violations
detected in the trail signal at the trail termination sink. This information is conveyed to the trail
termination source. This mechanism allows alignment of the near-end and far-end performance
monitoring processes.
Repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range.
Responsivity
The ratio of a photodetector's electrical output to its optical input in Amperes/ Watt.
Ribbon Cable
Cable that contains many fibers embedded in a plastic material in parallel, forming a flat
ribbon-like structure.
Rise Time
The time taken to make a transition from one state to another, usually measured between the 10%
and 90% completion points of the transition. Alternatively, the rise time may be specified at the
20% and 80% amplitudes. Shorter or faster rise times require more bandwidth in a transmission
channel.
Riser Cable
High-strength cable used in vertical shafts between floors in multi-story buildings.
RJ (Random Jitter)
Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
RM (Registration Manager)
An application process that initiates the Registration Request Protocol, and communicates the
DSA address and Name-prefix information to the Registration Agent.
ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer)

See OADM.
RP (Raman Pump)
In LambdaXtreme™ Transport, RPs provide amplification/gain in the outside plant fiber by
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
supplying a counterpropagating signal. The amplification is provided by pumping high-intensity
wavelengths (that are lower than the signal wavelength) into the fiber that carries the incoming
DWDM signal. (Also see RPG).
RPG (Raman Pump Growth)

In LambdaXtreme Transport, RPGs provide amplification/gain in the outside plant fiber and
internally in the Dispersion Compensation Module. RPGs are optional; they are used for channels
above 188.45 THz. (Also see RP).
RXDS (Reconfigurable Repeater Double Shelf)

RXIO/RXIO2 (Repeater System Input/output) Circuit Pack

The main user interface to system Repeaters and Mini NEs. This circuit pack provides orderwire
interface, as well as interface for office alarms, miscellaneous discretes, and remote start.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SBS (Stimulated Brillion Scattering)

SBS occurs when the light launched into the fiber exceeds a threshold power level for each
process.
SC (Subscription Channel Connector)

A push-pull type of optical connector that originated in Japan. Some of its features include high
packing density, low loss, low back reflection, and low cost.
Scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCC (Serial Communications Channel)

Channel that transfers data one bit at a time. The speed of the serial data is most often expressed
as bps or baud rate.
SCOT (Software Control of Transmission)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
SCTL (Shelf Controller) Circuit Pack

SCTL provides control at the double-shelf backplane level (half of a bay).
SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SEC (SDH Equipment Clock)

A timing device (equipment) used to synchronize network equipment that operates according to
the principles governed by SDH.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SEEPROM (Serial Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)
A device which can be erased and reprogrammed.
SFD
Static filter demux.
SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) Module

Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) are optical modular transceivers designed for use with small
form factor (SFF) connectors, and offer high speed and physical compactness. They are
hot-swappable. SFP transceivers perform at data speeds of up to five gigabits per second, and
possibly higher. The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber
optic networks can be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with
traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several
soldered-in modules, a single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This
can result in a substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)

A network protocol that provides file transfer and manipulation functionality over any reliable
data stream. It is typically used with the SSH-2 protocol to provide secure file transfer. See also
SSH (Secure Shell).
Shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
Simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
Simplex Cable
An other name for a single-fiber cable.
Simplex Transmission
Transmission in one direction only.
SIO (System Input/Output) Circuit Pack

The SIO CP connects the NCTL to the SCTLs, provides the main interface to the system, provides
LAN interfaces, provides orderwire interfaces, and provides performance monitoring interfaces.
SLM (Single Longitudinal Module)

An injection laser diode which has a single dominant longitudinal mode.
SMF-28
The common type of SSMF, often used interchangeably.
Soliton
A localized wave that maintains its shape as it propagates and therefore can act as a single bit in a
digital signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET (Synchronous Optical Network)
A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
Span
Fiber link between NEs that may be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on network design.
Span Loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
Spectral Width
A measure of the extent of a spectrum. For a source, the width of wavelengths contained in the
output at one half of the wavelength of peak power. Typical spectral widths are 50 to 160 nm for
an LED and 0.1 to 5 nm for a laser diode.
Splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
Splitting Ratio
The ratio of power emerging from two output ports of a coupler.
SPOT (Synchronous Partial Overhead Transparency)

Overhead bytes of SDH/SONET transmission signals that are sent together with payload although
they are mapped into higher rate signals. The transparency feature is often used in combination
with fiber shortage solutions.
SR (Short Reach)
Optical sections of two km or less.
SRS (Simulated Raman Scattering)

A broadband effect where power is transferred from a low-wavelength channel to a
higher-wavelength channel. The short-wavelength source acts as a pump.
SSH (Secure Shell)

A UNIX based command interface and protocol for securely accessing remote NEs. It contains
three utilities: slogin, ssh, and scp. Their function is the secure equivalent of UNIX utilities rlogin,
rsh, and rcp. SSH commands are encrypted.
SSMF (Standard Single-Mode Fiber)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
ST (Straight Tip Connector)

Popular fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Step-Index Fiber
Fiber that has a uniform index of refraction throughout the core.
Strength Member
The part of a fiber optic cable composed of aramid yarn, steel strands, or fiberglass filaments that
increase the tensile strength of the cable.
STS, STS-n (Synchronous Transport Signal)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal.
SUPVY Pack (Supervisory Pack)

SUPVY circuit pack is a low-speed transmission pack that facilitates communication between
LambdaXtreme NEs.
SUPVY/SUP (Supervisory Channels)

SUPVY/SUP supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN,
and orderwire communication.
SVAC
single variable attenuator card.
SW Generic (Software Generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release. See also Current
Software Generic and Previous Software Generic.
Synchronous Signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T T-Carrier
Generic designator for any of several digitally multiplexed telecommunications carrier systems.
Tap
The entry point into a system module.
Tap Loss
In a fiber optic coupler, the ratio of power at the tap port to the power at the input port.
Tap Port
In a coupler where the splitting ratio between output ports is not equal, the output port containing
the lesser power.
TBOS (Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial) Protocol

A protocol used for transmitting alarms, status, and control points between a NE and the operating
system.
TC (Tandem Connection)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An arbitrary series of contiguous link connections and/or subnetwork connections.
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alert)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDC (Tunable Dispersion Compensator)

A device that has negative chromatic dispersion where the amount of dispersion can be adjusted.
It is used for compensation of the chromatic dispersion of the transmission fibers.
TE (Thermoelectric)
A phenomenon that occurs whenever electrical current flows through two dissimilar conductors;
depending on the direction of current flow, the junction of the two conductors will either absorb
or release heat.
TEC (Thermoelectric Cooler)

A solid-state heat pump used in applications where temperature stabilization, temperature cycling,
or cooling below ambient is required.
Thermal Noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
Throughput Loss
In a fiber optic coupler, the ratio of power at the throughput port to the power at the input port.
TIA (Transimpedance Amplifier)

A device that converts optical signals into a voltage output or acts as a general-purpose low-noise
wideband gain stage. The negative feedback provides a controlled gain and a high-speed
operation.
TID (Targer Identifier)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.
TL1 (Transaction Language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMUX (Transmultiplexer)
A device that takes a group of analog voice channels and converts them directly into a T-1 1.544
Mbs bit stream without the need for demultixplexing the group down into individual channels,
digitizing them, and bundling them up into a T-1 digital bit stream.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOADM
Tunable optical add/drop multiplexer. In the 1830 context, this is a ROADM with colorless
add/drop ports permitting direct connection of wavelength tunable WDM transponders to the
TOADM add/drop ports.
TOH (Transport Overhead)

The overhead added to the STS SPE (synchronous transport signal synchronous payload
envelope) for transport purposes. Transport overhead consists of line and section overhead.
TrueWave® Fiber
Non-zero dispersion-shifted fiber manufactured by Lucent Technologies.
TSD (Trail Signal Degrade)

The TSD signal (generated by a trail termination sink function) informs the next function(s) of the
"signal degrade" condition of the associated data signal.
TSF (Trail Signal Fail)

The TSF signal (generated by a trail termination sink function) informs the next downstream
function(s) of the "signal fail" condition of the associated data signal (which contains, due to that
"signal fail" condition, the all-ONEs (AIS) pattern).
TT (Trail Termination)
An atomic function within a layer that generates, adds, and monitors information concerning the
integrity and supervision of adapted information.
TWC, TW+, TW-RS

Variants of True Wave fiber, with low positive residual dispersion in the C band. True wave
classic, enhanced TW, and reduced slope true wave with reduced dispersion slope (and higher
dispersion at 1530 nm than TWC).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter)

A receiver/transmitter that converts incoming serial data from a port into parallel form.
UBOB (Universal Build Out Block)

Optional connector hardware used to interconnect single-mode connectors with or without
attenuation.
UFAIS (Unframed AIS)

A pattern that is composed of ones only, and causes line driver circuity to consume the maximum
amount of power. In a circuit with repeaters, this pattern will verify that the DC power is
regulated correctly. When transmitted unframed, an all-ones pattern is defined in some networks
as an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). An unframed all-ones signal may also be referred to as a
"Blue Alarm"and is sent forward by a device that has lost its input signal.
UFEC (Ultra Forward Error Correction)

An improved method to correct bit errors in a transmission signal. Additional information is put
into the data signal to allow the correction of bit errors. There is no acknowledge information in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the back direction.
UHC (Ultra High Capacity)

A 40G application for transmission of 64 channels for a capacity of 2.56 Tbps and a reach of up to
1000 km. Payload (per channel) can be one OC-768/STM-256 or four OC-192/STM-64 signals.
UID (User Identification)

A CIT user code that comprises one to ten alphanumeric, case-sensitive characters. UID identifies
a user when he/she logs into a system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V VCO (Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator)

VCOs are used for clock recovery circuits and other applications where frequency stability and
low phase noise is very important.
VGOAM
Variable gain optical amplifier module. The LD circuit packs contain VGOAMs with mid-stage
access, and are thus variable gain mid-stage amplifiers circuit packs.
VMUX (Virtual Multiplexing Protocol)

A device that sits above several lower protocols, making them appear as a single protocol. VMUX
makes very simple decisions about which protocol to use for each connection.
VOA (Variable Optical Attenuator)

A device that corrects the signal strength differences that occur in the transmission line.
VSR (Very Short Reach)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W WAN (Wide Area Network)

A network whose elements are separated by long distances.
Waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
Waveguide Coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
Waveguide Dispersion
The part of chromatic dispersion arising from the different speeds that light travels in the core and
cladding of a single-mode fiber (that is, from the fiber's waveguide structure).
Wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave. The
wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and the frequency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM (Wavelength-Division Multiplexing)

Sending several signals through one fiber with different wavelengths of light.
WGR (Waveguide Grating Router)

A device used to take a mix of wavelengths and separate them into the component wavelengths.
WPS (Wavelength Protection Switch)

A switch, used in optical networks, that reroutes wavelengths when there is a system problem.
WR8-88A
An 8 add port wavelength router pack; 88 channel capacity.
WSS
Wavelength selective switch.
WT
Wavelength tracker.
WTD
Wavelength tracker decoder.
WTE
Wavelength tracker encoder.
WTOCM
Wavelength tracker optical channel monitor pack.
WTR time (Wait To Restore time)

The WTR time ensures that a previous failed synchronization source is only again considered as
available by the selection process if it is fault-free for a certain time.
WXC (Wavelength Cross Connect)

A hydribd ROADM. See also ROADM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
XT Crosstalk X-talk
Undesired coupling from one circuit, part of a circuit, or channel to another.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y Coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z Zero-Dispersion Wavelength XT Crosstalk

DSF where the zero dispersion point is shifted from 1310 nm to 1550 nm. It is best suited for
applications involving single-channel transmission at 1550 nm, providing the benefits of zero
dispersion as well as taking advantage of the lower attentuation wavelength.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 August 2012
Index
A antistatic covers, 1-33 ............................................................. .............................................................
............................................................. H Hazard level, 1-20 P Power Supply, Filter, and Clock

Interface Card (PSF3T8), 1-44,
B barred-hand symbol, 1-24 High Power Connection, Fuse &
1-45, 1-47, 1-48, 1-51, 1-52,
Alarm Panel (HPCFAP), 1-44,
............................................................. 1-58
1-47, 1-51, 1-58
C climatic conditions power wiring, 1-43
hot surfaces, 1-49, 1-59
stationery operation, 1-53 PSF3T8
HPCFAP
See: Power Supply, Filter, and
............................................................. See: High Power Connection,
Clock Interface Card
Fuse & Alarm Panel
E electrostatic discharge (ESD), (PSF3T8)
.............................................................
1-24, 1-33, 1-38, 1-49, 1-60 .............................................................
electrostatic protection (ESP), I IEC laser classification, 1-15, 1-19
R Removing the SFP modules, E-9
1-25 IEC requirements, 1-18
.............................................................
environmental conditions, 1-34 Insertion, E-3, E-5, E-8
S Safety of laser products, 1-18,
storage, 1-34 insertion and removal facilities, 1-18
transportation, 1-31 1-25
SFP
ESD invisible laser radiation, 1-43,
See: electrostatic discharge 1-47, 1-58, 1-61 Module, E-8
(ESD) ............................................................. Module insertion, E-8
ESD bonding point, 1-25 SFP modules, E-9
L laser classes, 1-15
ESP Standards compliance, 1-18
laser safety instructions, 1-16
See: electrostatic protection
.............................................................
(ESP) laser warning labels, 1-38, 1-48
Extraction, E-6 LBO replacement, E-7 T Tools
............................................................. ............................................................. special, E-2

Troubleshooting
F Fan Unit (FAN3T8), 1-45, 1-48 N nominal voltage, 1-45
LBO replacement, E-7
FDA/CDRH laser classification,
1-15, 1-18
FDA/CDRH regulations, 1-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
Issue 1 August 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
X XFP
Adapter, E-3
Adapter insertion, E-3, E-3
Module, E-5
Module extraction, E-6, E-6
Module insertion, E-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16
Issue 1 August 2012

8DG61688EAAATQZZA - V1 - Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32 16 (PSS-32 PSS-16) Release 5.1.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8DG61688EAAATQZZA - V1 - Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32 16 (PSS-32 PSS-16) Release 5.1.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

About this document

Reason for reissue .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxv

Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

How to use this document ................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

Safety information .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxv

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A ........................................................................... xxxvi

Packaging collection and recovery requirements ...................................................................................................... xxxvi

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product and batteries ........................................................................................... xxxvi

Conventions used ................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvii

Related information ........................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

Document support ........................................................................................................................................................................ xl

Technical support .......................................................................................................................................................................... xl

How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................... xl

How to comment ........................................................................................................................................................................... xl

Part I: Safety information

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

General notes on safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Basic safety aspects .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

Potential sources of danger ................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

Laser safety ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

Laser product classification ................................................................................................................................................ 1-18

Equipment grounding ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24

Safety requirements in specific deployment phases

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29

Transportation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30

Storage ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-33

Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-37

Taking into operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-43

Operation and maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 1-47

Taking out of operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-58

Event of failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-61

Part II: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 physical and power installation

2 Equipment installation (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Installation options/requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2

Subrack and equipment installation in an ETSI rack ................................................................................................ 2-63

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Subrack grounding ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Subrack ID setting .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 user panel connections ............................................................................................... 3-15

Connecting power cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-30

Verify battery A/B power assignments ........................................................................................................................... 3-50

Cable installations for SFD40 and SFD40B ................................................................................................................. 3-52

Power connections for SFD40/SFD40B ........................................................................................................................ 3-57

4 Circuit pack and fiber installation for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

General Circuit Pack Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2

Precautions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3

Non-amplifier circuit pack installation ............................................................................................................................. 4-4

Optical amplifier installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-13

DCM installation .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-21

Inventory cable installation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-28

Subrack to subrack cable installation .............................................................................................................................. 4-32

Electrical SFP applications ................................................................................................................................................. 4-36

Outside plant and customer equipment fiber connections ....................................................................................... 4-38

Intra-NE fiber connections .................................................................................................................................................. 4-40

Part III: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 physical and power installation

5 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack physical installation